The text provides an analysis of the 2024 Indian elections, focusing on the BJP’s performance and Modi’s third term. It suggests that while the BJP secured a victory, it faced setbacks due to factors like diminished appeal of religious polarization after the construction of the Ram Temple and a united opposition. The analysis highlights losses in Uttar Pradesh and other states, attributing them to social issues taking precedence over religious tensions. It also considers the impact of slogans and propaganda from both BJP and the opposition, as well as the influence of regional parties. The author implies that Modi’s third term will require navigating coalition politics and addressing concerns raised by various groups. Finally, the text emphasizes the need for Modi to return to the ideals of “Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas” and avoid arrogance.
Indian Elections 2024: A Study Guide
Quiz
Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.
What is the significance of Uttar Pradesh (UP) in Indian politics, according to the text?
What setback did the BJP experience in the 2024 elections in Uttar Pradesh, and what are the potential reasons mentioned in the text?
How did the Ram Mandir issue influence the 2024 elections, and what does the author suggest about its future impact?
What are some of the states or regions where the BJP experienced losses or mixed results in the 2024 elections?
According to the text, what mistakes did the BJP make in its campaign strategy?
How many seats are needed to form a government in the Lok Sabha assembly, and how many seats did the BJP and the Congress win individually in the 2024 elections?
What was the significance of the slogan “crossing 400” used by the BJP, and how did the opposition parties counter it?
According to the text, what did the BJP fail to do with their slogan ‘Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas?’
What is the author’s perspective on Narendra Modi’s public persona and his connection to the ideals of Indian society?
How might coalition partners in Maharashtra, Bihar, and Andhra Pradesh potentially affect the Modi government?
Quiz Answer Key
Uttar Pradesh is a crucial cultural center, considered a “mini Hindustan.” It holds the highest number of Lok Sabha seats (80), making it a key state for political dominance.
The BJP experienced a significant setback in UP, with their seat count dropping from 62 in 2019 to 36 in 2024. This decline is attributed to the diminishing appeal of the Ram Mandir issue and the unity of the India Alliance, which focused on social issues.
The construction of the Ram Mandir initially benefited the BJP by addressing a long-standing religious issue. However, the author suggests its political impact has waned, as voters prioritized social concerns in the 2024 elections.
The BJP experienced losses or mixed results in states such as Uttar Pradesh, Rajasthan, Haryana, Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu, and Punjab, among others.
The BJP is seen as having grown arrogant with their success, neglecting alliances with parties like Akali Dal in Punjab. Additionally, the “crossing 400” slogan was seen as exaggerated and led to voter complacency.
272 seats are needed to form a government in the Lok Sabha assembly. In the 2024 elections, the BJP secured 240 seats, while the Congress party won 99.
The “crossing 400” slogan was meant to convey the BJP’s confidence in securing a landslide victory. However, the opposition used it to spread fear that the BJP would change the Constitution, undermining protections for minorities and weaker sections.
The author states that Modi will have to showcase the political strength and greatness of Atal Bihari Vajpayee, giving more importance to their slogan ‘Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas’ but it has failed.
The author critiques Modi’s public persona as a “fakir,” noting that his lifestyle often contradicts this image. He also questions whether Modi’s actions always align with the respect and dignity expected of a representative of 1.4 billion people.
Coalition partners like Shiv Sena in Maharashtra, Janata Dal in Bihar, and Talaq Deshmukh in Andhra Pradesh may present challenges for the Modi government due to differing political agendas, demands for cabinet positions, and power dynamics within their respective states.
Essay Questions
Analyze the factors that contributed to the BJP’s performance in the 2024 Indian elections. What strategies worked, and what missteps were made?
Discuss the role of religious issues, particularly the Ram Mandir, in the 2024 Indian elections. How did they influence voters’ decisions, and what is their long-term impact on Indian politics?
Evaluate the effectiveness of the opposition alliance in challenging the BJP’s dominance in the 2024 elections. What were their strengths and weaknesses, and how did they shape the election outcome?
Assess the significance of coalition politics in the formation of the government after the 2024 Indian elections. How will the dynamics between the BJP and its allies impact policy decisions and governance?
Explore the author’s critique of Narendra Modi’s leadership style and public persona. How does this critique relate to broader debates about secularism, Hindu nationalism, and the future of Indian democracy?
Glossary of Key Terms
BJP (Bharatiya Janata Party): A major political party in India, often associated with Hindu nationalism.
Congress Party: One of the oldest and largest political parties in India, historically associated with secularism and social democracy.
India Alliance: A coalition of opposition parties formed to challenge the BJP in the 2024 elections.
Lok Sabha: The lower house of the Indian Parliament.
Ram Mandir: A Hindu temple constructed in Ayodhya, India, on a site historically disputed between Hindus and Muslims.
Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas: A slogan meaning “Together with all, development for all,” popularized by Narendra Modi and the BJP, emphasizing inclusive growth.
Uttar Pradesh (UP): A state in northern India with significant political influence due to its large population and number of parliamentary seats.
Hindutva: An ideology seeking to define Indian culture in terms of Hindu values.
Dalits: Members of the lowest caste in India, formerly known as “untouchables.”
Secularism: The principle of separation of religion from state affairs.
Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided text regarding the 2024 Indian Elections.
Briefing Document: Indian Elections 2024 Analysis
Subject: Analysis of the 2024 Indian Elections and Modi’s Third Term
Source: Excerpts from “Indian Elections 2024: Modi’s Third Term and Political Analysis”
Executive Summary:
The source analyzes the 2024 Indian elections, focusing on the BJP’s reduced majority and the factors contributing to it. It highlights the surprising performance of the opposition alliance, the waning influence of the Ram Mandir issue, the impact of social and economic concerns, and the perception of BJP’s overconfidence. The document also touches on the role of negative propaganda and the challenges Modi will face in his third term due to reliance on coalition partners.
Key Themes and Ideas:
Diminished Mandate for BJP:
The BJP, while still the largest single party, experienced a significant setback in the 2024 elections compared to 2014 and 2019. Their seats in Uttar Pradesh (UP), a crucial state, dropped considerably.
“BJP had won 7171 seats from here in the 2014 elections and in the 2019 elections as before, this number was 62 under the leadership of Yogi Adityanath, while this time in the 2024 elections, despite all the services and efforts, BJP has suffered a big setback. Its seats have come down to just 36…”
This indicates a shift in voter sentiment and a rejection of the BJP’s perceived overreach.
Waning Influence of the Ram Mandir Issue:
The construction of the Ram Mandir, a long-standing issue for the BJP, seemingly lost its electoral charm.
“…the Ram temple, which raised the radical Hindu mindset, has lost its charm with the construction of the temple…”
The focus shifted from religious issues to social and economic concerns. The alliance between Akhilesh Yadav’s Samajwadi Party and Rahul Gandhi’s Congress successfully highlighted social issues over religious tensions.
Impact of Social and Economic Issues:
The opposition alliance, particularly in UP, successfully redirected the focus to pressing social and economic issues.
“…the unity of India Alliance, Akhilesh Yadav’s Samajwadi Party and Rahul’s Congress Party has given the people of UP the verdict that our real issue is the social issues and not the religious tension.”
This suggests that voters were more concerned with tangible improvements in their lives than with religious symbolism.
BJP’s Perceived Overconfidence and Missteps:
The BJP’s slogan of “crossing 400” may have backfired, leading to complacency among its supporters and galvanizing the opposition.
“This time the slogan of crossing 400 was also an exaggerated slogan of its own…when the echo of 400 crossed was in the mind, many of our people understood that our victory is so sure that even if we do not go to vote in such intense heat, it does not matter, Modi has to win…”
The article argues that the BJP’s growth reached a point of “arrogance,” leading to missed opportunities in forming alliances.
Negative Propaganda and Polarization:
The opposition successfully used “negative propaganda,” claiming that the BJP intended to change the constitution and undermine the rights of minorities and weaker sections.
“…Rahul Gandhi and the opposition leadership were found giving this statement in every speech that 400 crossed means that BJP will change the Constitution i.e. Indian law given by our elders or founding fathers, in which there is no provision for intellectuals and weaker sections.”
While Modi attempted to counter this narrative, the propaganda had a significant impact on voter behavior.
Challenges for Modi’s Third Term:
Modi will have to rely on coalition partners, such as Nitish Kumar and Chandrababu Naidu, to maintain his government. This will require him to address their concerns and demands.
“From division of offices in the cabinet to their power in the states, they will have to take care of it.”
He will also need to adopt a more inclusive approach and refrain from “blatant claims.”
“More than the need for Prime Minister Modi, Modi himself will have to be brought into the limelight and will have to refrain from making blatant claims.”
The Nehru-Gandhi Family’s Enduring Influence:
The article notes the historical significance of the Nehru-Gandhi family in Indian politics, particularly in constituencies like Rae Bareli and Amethi. Despite Smriti Irani’s previous win in Amethi, the seat returned to the Congress party.
Key Quotes:
“If we take a look at this scenario, then the political awareness of the Indian people has proved to be better than ours.” (Implying that Indian voters were wiser than voters in the author’s country, presumably Pakistan.)
“Your slogan of crossing 400 times also had some humanitarian or moral value in it, which would remind of his great deeds.” (This suggests the author believes that the 400+ slogan should have been tied to a vision of national greatness rather than simply a number.)
“Narendra Modi also presents himself as a fakir in the market, but his living style often does not match his claim.” (The author is criticizing Modi’s perceived disconnect between his simple image and his actual lifestyle.)
Conclusion:
The 2024 Indian elections reflect a complex interplay of factors, including religious identity, socio-economic concerns, political strategy, and public perception. While the BJP secured a third term for Modi, its diminished mandate highlights the need for a more nuanced and inclusive approach to governance. The rise of the opposition alliance indicates a renewed focus on social and economic issues, and Modi will face challenges in navigating the demands of his coalition partners.
Frequently Asked Questions: Indian Elections 2024
What were the key factors that led to the BJP’s reduced seat count in the 2024 elections compared to 2014 and 2019?
Several factors contributed to the BJP’s setback. While the Ram Mandir issue had initially boosted support, its impact waned after construction. The unity of the India Alliance, particularly the Samajwadi Party and Congress Party in Uttar Pradesh, refocused the electorate on social issues rather than religious tensions. Additionally, the BJP’s perceived arrogance and failure to effectively engage with allies like the Akali Dal in Punjab hurt their overall performance. Concerns about potential constitutional changes fueled by exaggerated slogans like “crossing 400” also mobilized opposition voters, especially among farmers, Jats, Dalits, and Muslims. The low voter turnout amongst BJP voters due to the assumption of easy victory also played a role.
How did the Ram Mandir issue influence the 2024 elections?
The construction of the Ram Mandir initially provided a significant boost to the BJP, seemingly resolving a long-standing religious issue. However, the article suggests that its appeal diminished over time. The opposition successfully shifted the focus back to social and economic issues, arguing that these were more pressing concerns for the electorate. The BJP’s reliance on this issue also appears to have alienated some voters who prioritized other factors.
What role did alliances play in the outcome of the 2024 elections?
Alliances were crucial. The India Alliance, particularly the collaboration between the Samajwadi Party and Congress in Uttar Pradesh, proved effective in challenging the BJP’s dominance. Conversely, the BJP’s failure to maintain strong alliances, such as with the Akali Dal in Punjab, weakened their position in certain regions. The BJP will now rely on the support of coalition partners like Nitish Kumar’s Janata Dal in Bihar and Chandra Babu Naido’s Talaq Deshmukh’s party in Andhra Pradesh, which could present challenges in terms of policy and power-sharing.
What impact did the BJP’s slogan of “crossing 400” have on the elections?
The “crossing 400” slogan appears to have backfired in several ways. It contributed to complacency among some BJP supporters, leading to lower voter turnout. More significantly, it fueled opposition narratives that the BJP intended to alter the constitution to the detriment of weaker sections of society. This fear-mongering campaign effectively mobilized opposition voters and damaged the BJP’s credibility.
How significant is Uttar Pradesh (UP) in Indian politics, and what were the key takeaways from the election results in this state?
Uttar Pradesh is a culturally significant region often described as a “mini Hindustan” due to its large population and influence on national politics. It holds the highest number of Lok Sabha seats (80), making it crucial for any party aiming to form a government in Delhi. The BJP’s significant seat reduction in UP, despite its previous dominance, highlights the shift in voter priorities towards social issues and the success of opposition alliances in the state. The loss of key seats like Faizabad (Ayodhya) and Amethi signals a waning of the BJP’s influence in its traditional strongholds.
What is the significance of the Congress party’s performance in the 2024 elections?
While the Congress party did not achieve a resounding victory, their increase in seats and the success of the India Alliance demonstrate a resurgence of the opposition. Rahul Gandhi’s leadership and the alliance’s focus on social justice issues resonated with voters, particularly in states like Uttar Pradesh. However, the article suggests that the Congress still lacks a clear and unified leadership, and their campaign promises were sometimes perceived as unrealistic.
How does the author perceive Narendra Modi’s leadership style and its impact on the BJP’s performance?
The author expresses a somewhat critical view of Narendra Modi’s leadership. While acknowledging his ability to connect with the masses, the author suggests that Modi’s actions and persona sometimes contradict his claims of simplicity and devotion. The author also implies that the BJP’s perceived arrogance and Modi’s overconfidence contributed to their setback in the 2024 elections. The author believes that Modi needs to showcase the political strength and greatness of Atal Bihari Vajpayee, giving more importance to their slogan ‘ Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas’.
What challenges and opportunities does the Modi government face in its third term?
In its third term, the Modi government faces the challenge of governing with a reduced majority and relying on coalition partners. This will require greater negotiation and compromise on policy decisions. They must address the concerns raised by the opposition regarding social justice, economic inequality, and potential constitutional changes. However, the Modi government also has the opportunity to prioritize inclusive growth, strengthen alliances, and regain the trust of voters who may have felt alienated during the previous term. They have to fulfill the slogan of ‘Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas’
Indian Elections Modi Government for the Third Time Darvesh had written while answering a question in the last installment that if he gets a chance to meet the BJP leadership, he will definitely tell them that see the way we have ruined our country and society by using religion for political purposes, you people should learn a lesson from us or else you people will also be affected the same way. If we take a look at this scenario, then the political awareness of the Indian people has proved to be better than ours. They have definitely given BJP a chance to solve the religious castes that are pitted against Hindus to a certain extent, due to which it succeeded in solving the 500-year-old issue of Ram Mandir. Thus, with the construction of Ram Mandir or Temple, the old card of the oppressed class expired. In this way, BJP was badly beaten not only by the whole of UP but also by Ram Ji Kalka of Faizabad, the pure Ayodhya Ram Mandir, by the Dalit representative of Akhilesh Singh Yadav’s Samajwadi Party. Its rival is the people of Rae Bareli, whom Mrs. Sonia Gandhi had told that Rahul Gandhi is now your son, and she has made him win with a huge mandate. Similarly, the Amethi seat in UP was traditionally with the Nehru-Gandhi family. Mrs. Indira Gandhi also used to win from here. Rajiv Gandhi also used to contest from here, but in the last two elections, BJP has snatched this seat from Congress. Former actress Smriti Irani, who is made the face of BJP, had also visited Medina some time ago and this seat was with her since the last election, but in the current 2024 election, she has lost with a big margin to Sonia Gandhi’s manager or steno Kishori Lal Sharma. Uttar Pradesh is such a cultural center of the whole of India that we can also call it a mini Hindustan. Just as in Pakistan it is said about Punjab that it is necessary to establish a foothold in Punjab for the rule of Islamabad, similarly in India it is generally said that Delhi has been the throne or the 100th seat or the vicinity and the Indian Lok Sabha The maximum number of 80 seats are here. BJP had won 7171 seats from here in the 2014 elections and in the 2019 elections as before, this number was 62 under the leadership of Yogi Adityanath, while this time in the 2024 elections, despite all the services and efforts, BJP has suffered a big setback. Its seats have come down to just 36 and the main reason for this is that the Ram temple, which raised the radical Hindu mindset, has lost its charm with the construction of the temple, while the unity of India Alliance, Akhilesh Yadav’s Samajwadi Party and Rahul’s Congress Party has given the people of UP the verdict that our real issue is the social issues and not the religious tension. A similar mixed situation is the situation in other states, provinces or princely states, Punjab, Haryana, Kashmir, Rajasthan, Maharashtra, West Bengal, Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Jharkhand. BJP has its political status in Punjab, Haryana, Kashmir, Rajasthan, Maharashtra, West Bengal, Kerala, Tamil Nadu, Karnataka, Jharkhand. In some places, it has lost more and more. In Tamil Nadu and Punjab, BJP or the ruling alliance could not win even a single seat. In Rajasthan and Haryana, where BJP had a clean sweep, it has lost 9 seats. In Maharashtra, 30 seats have been won by the opposition alliance. However, in Bihar, the ruling alliance has won 30 seats and the opposition has won 9 seats. In Gujarat, Orissa and Madhya Pradesh, BJP has emerged as a strong force. In Andhra Pradesh, the ball is in the hands of Chandra Babu Nado, who is known to be Modi’s strong alliance partner. In this way, the Modi government will benefit from Nitish Kumar’s strong position in Bihar and Sharad Pawar’s success will also go to Modi’s account. Here it may also be relevant to express this opinion that the BJP’s excessive growth had reached a kind of arrogance, so it did not show any enthusiasm in bringing its own allies or many other influential parties together, an example of which is the Akali Dal in Punjab, while Rahul’s party in India has won only 10 seats. The alliance grew from 26 to 37 and then the election promises they made were as if a person was not sure of his victory and he kept on exaggerating every thing, for example, sending Rs. lakh to every poor woman’s account or immediately eradicating poverty from the country and then their all this is a mere gimmick which itself has no specific agenda of envy or jealousy towards the BJP. They do not even agree on leadership till now, to the extent that there have been talks of distributing ministries every year. Hollow promises, false hopes cannot create and bring a strong leadership. In comparison to 2014 and 2019, without any good luck, BJP has got a set back in the 2024 election. This time the slogan of crossing 400 was also an exaggerated slogan of its own, but in our media, there is only a slogan of BJP and Modi. The way negative propaganda is being done to celebrate the victory, this approach also does not come under the purview of the democratic process. In the Lok Sabha assembly of 543, 272 seats are required to form the government and BJP has emerged as the single largest party by securing 240 seats alone against the 37-member alliance, while Rahul Gandhi’s Congress party could not go beyond 999. With reference to the alliance also, while the ruling alliance has won 294 seats, the total seats of the opposition alliance are 232. In such a situation, the talk of the opposition leaders or Modi’s defeat is meaningless, who will now have to showcase the political strength and greatness of Atal Bihari Vajpayee, giving more importance to their slogan ‘ Sabka Saath Sabka Vikas’ but it has failed. More than the need for Prime Minister Modi, Modi himself will have to be brought into the limelight and will have to refrain from making blatant claims. In today’s India, Mahatma You can rid yourself of Gandhi’s ideas as much as you want, but many of the ideals of this saint have originated from the ancient Hindu society and culture, in which the simplicity of Hindu religion, the intellectualism and greatness are displayed. Narendra Modi also presents himself as a fakir in the market, but his living style often does not match his claim. He says that when I meet outsiders in the capacity of PM, then I am not Modi at that time, but I show respect and dignity as a representative of 1.4 billion people, which in our eyes has reached a little beyond his status. And then he changes jackets of different colors and remains a fakir for good clothes. This approach is against the service and devotional ideals of Indian society. Your slogan of crossing 400 times also had some humanitarian or moral value in it, which would remind of his great deeds. In the history of Indian elections, crossing 400 has happened only once, when Mrs. Indira Gandhi sacrificed herself for the unity and rickshaw of her country, so in return Rajiv Gandhi got 404 or 400 crossed. BJP could have also kept the slogan that Modi government for the third time. Anyway, when the echo of 400 crossed was in the mind, many of our people understood that our victory is so sure that even if we do not go to vote in such intense heat, it does not matter, Modi has to win, if 400 is not crossed, then 350 will be crossed. This is the reason why the voting ratio remained very low in the 2024 election, perhaps it could not go above 60. BJP’s voter did not come out of the previous mark. On the other hand, the opposite effect of this slogan was that Rahul Gandhi and the opposition leadership were found giving this statement in every speech that 400 crossed means that BJP will change the Constitution i.e. Indian law given by our elders or founding fathers, in which there is no provision for intellectuals and weaker sections. The past will be over. To avoid Ram Rajya or Hindu Rashtra, all the weaker sections should stand up, otherwise the rule of BJP and Narendra Modi is going to be established. If we look at it from the point of view of reality, the groups of farmers, Jats, Dalits and Muslims gathered together for protection and regional parties also showed their influence. Prime Minister Narendra Modi had realized the threat spread in this regard and he explained it in detail in the last part of his election campaign. He said everywhere that we do not intend to change the constitution or the law and also that we give great importance to secular values. Modi Ji insisted that this is done by the Congress which shows the identity or division of sects in the name of religion. We talk of national unity by bringing everyone together. In this context, he repeatedly referred to Baba Saheb Ambedkar, but he could not stop the propaganda spread against him by Rahul and Indi Alliance. This negative propaganda, which had some or the other false truth, was being spread by the opposition. Due to these somehow or the other, the Indian people have sent their popular Prime Minister to the Delhi assembly for the third time. They will have to take along Bel Fail sahab. They will also have to bear the tantrums of their own people. From division of offices in the cabinet to their power in the states, they will have to take care of it. In Maharashtra, the Hindutva agenda of Shiv Sena matches with that of BJP, but its Hindutva is more than that of BJP. Who is not aware of the thoughts of Bal Thackeray ji? Now his children will move ahead with the same passion. Anyway, their nine seats will be like ‘Ham ki khayal’ for the BJP government. In Bihar, Nitish Kumar’s Janata Dal has 12 seats, while in Andhra Pradesh, Chandrababu Naidu’s Talaq Deshmukh’s 16 seats will be a problem for the Modi government.
इंडियन इंतखाब मोदी सरकार तीसरी बार दरवेश ने पिछली किस्त में एक सवाल का जवाब देते हुए यह तहरीर किया था कि अगर उसे बीजेपी कयादत से मिलने का इफाक हुआ तो व इनसे यह जरूर कहेगा कि देखो जिस तरह हम लोगों ने अपने खिता में मजहब का सियासी इस्तेमाल करते हुए अपने मुल्क और समाज को बर्बाद कर लिया है आप लोग हमसे इबरत हासिल करो वरना आप लोगों का भी वही असर होगा इस पस मंजर में जायजा लिया जाए तो भारतीय जनता का सियासी शऊर हम लोगों से ज्यादा मोर साबित हुआ है उन्होंने हिंदुओं के खिलाफ रवा रखी जाने वाली मजहबी जातियों पर एक हद तक जरूर बीजेपी को पजरा बख्शी है जिसके कारण वह राम मंदिर का 500 साला पुराना इशू हल करने या कराने में कामयाब हो गई यूं राम मंदिर या टेंपल की तामीर के साथ ही मजलूम अत का कदीमी कार्ड एक्सपायर हो गया इस तरह बीजेपी ना सिर्फ यह कि पूरे यूपी से बल्कि फैजाबाद के खालिस अयोध्या राम मंदिर वाले राम जीी कलके से भी अखिलेश सिंह यादव की समाजवादी पार्टी के दलित नुमाइंदे से बुरी तरह पिट गई है इसके बिल मुकाबल राय बरेली के ब यों ने जिन्हें श्रीमती सोनिया गांधी ने यह कहा था कि राहुल गांधी अब तुम्हारा बेटा है भारी मैंडेट के साथ जितवा दिया है इसी तरह यूपी के अमेठी वाली सीट रवायत तौर पर नेहरू गांधी परिवार के पास चली आ रही थी श्रीमती इंदिरा गांधी भी यहीं से जीता करती थी राजीव गांधी भी यहां से लड़ते रहे लेकिन पिछले दोनों इंतखाब में बीजेपी ने कांग्रेस से यह सीट भी छीन ली है साबका अदाकारा स्मृति ईरानी जिन्हें बीजेपी का चेहरा कर दिया जाता है जिन्होंने कुछ अरसा कबल मदीना यात्रा भी की थी और पिछले इंतखाब से ये सीट इन्हीं के पास थी मगर मौजूदा 2024 के इलेक्शन में वो सोनिया गांधी के मैनेजर या स्टेनो किशोरी लाल शर्मा से बड़े मार्जन के साथ हार गई है उत्तर प्रदेश खिता हिंद का ऐसा तहजीब गहवारा है जिसे हम मिनी हिंदुस्तान भी कह सकते हैं पाकिस्तान में जिस तरह पंजाब के मुतालिक कहा जाता है कि इस्लामाबाद की हुकूमत के लिए पंजाब में कदम जमाना जरूरी है इसी तरह भारत में बिल अमोम यह कहा जाता है कि दिल्ली सिंघासन या इक्दर्म या आसपास रही है और भारतीय लोकसभा की सबसे ज्यादा 80 सीटें यहां हैं बीजेपी को 2014 के चुनाव में यहां से 7171 सीटों पर कामयाबी मिली थी और 2019 के इंतखाब में भी हसबे साबिक यह तादाद योगी आदित्यनाथ की कयादत में 62 थी जबकि इस मर्तबा 2024 के चुनाव में बीजेपी को तमाम तर खिदमा और दामों के बावजूद बड़ा सेटबैक पहुंचा है इसकी सीटें घटकर महत 36 रह गई हैं और इसकी बड़ी वजह जहां यह है कि र वायती हिंदू माइंडसेट को उभारने वाला राम मंदिर कार टेंपल की तामीर के साथ ही अपनी कशिश खो बैठा है वहीं इंडिया अलायंस बिलख सूस अखली देश सिंह यादू की समाजवादी पार्टी और राहुल की कांग्रेस पार्टी की एकता से यूपी की जनता ने यह फैसला सुना दिया है कि हमारा असल इशू माशी मसाइल है ना के मजहबी तंग नाए कुछ इसी तरह की मिलीजुली सूरत हाल दीगर राज्यों सूबों या रियासतों की है पंजाब हरियाणा कश्मीर राजस्थान महाराष्ट्र वेस्ट बंगाल केराला तमिलनाडु कर्नाटका झारखंड में बीजेपी अपनी सियासी हैसियत कहीं कम कहीं ज्यादा खो बैठी है बिलख सूस तमिलनाडु और मशर की पंजाब से तो बीजेपी या हुक्मरान इतहाद कोई एक सीट भी हासिल नहीं कर सके राजस्थान और हरियाणा जहां बीजेपी ने क्लीन स्वीप किया था वहां भी निस सीटें खो बैठी है महाराष्ट्र की 30 सीटें अपोजिशन अलायंस ने जीत ली हैं अलबत्ता बिहार में हुक्मरान इतहाद ने 30 और अपोजिशन ने नौ सीटें जीती हैं गुजरात उड़ीसा मध्य प्रदेश में अलबत्ता बीजेपी मजबूत हैसियत में उभरी है आंध्र प्रदेश में गेंद चंद्र बाबू नाडो के हाथ में है जो मोदी के मजबूत इतहाद गल दने जाते हैं इस तरह बिहार में नितेश कुमार की मजबूत पोजीशन का फायदा मोदी सरकार को पहुंचेगा और शरद पवार की कामयाबी भी मोदी के खाते में जाएगी यहां इस अमर का इजहार भी शायद मौजू हो कि बीजेपी की जरूरत से ज्यादा बढ़ी हुई खुद इत मादी एक तरह के गुरूर तक पहुंच गई थी इसलिए उन्होंने अपने तहा दियों को भी या कई दीगर असर सूफ वाली पार्टियों को साथ जोड़ने में कोई सरगर्मी ना दिखाई जिसकी एक मिसाल पंजाब में अकाली दल है जबकि इंडिया नामी राहुल का अलायंस 26 जमां से बढ़ते हुए 37 तक चले गया और फिर उन्होंने जो इंतखाब वादे किए वो ऐसे थे कि जैसे एक शख्स को अपनी जीत का यकीन ना हो और वह हर बात को बढ़ा चढ़ाकर बयान करता चला जाए मसलन यह कि हर गरीब खातून को ₹ लाख अकाउंट में भेजने या फौरी तौर पर मुल्क से फटाफट गरीबी खत्म करने के लनात और फिर इनका इतहाद ऐसा चूचू का मुरब्बा है जिसका स्वाय बीजेपी से हसद या जलन के कोई मुस्त एजेंडा नहीं है इनका तो अभी तक कयादत पर भी इत्तफाक नहीं हत्ता कि विजारत उजमा भी एक-एक साल पर बांटने की बातें होती रही हैं खोखले वादे झूठी उम्मीदें पैदार और मजबूत कयादत नहीं ला सकती 2014 और 2019 के बिल मुकाबल बिला शुभ बीजेपी को इलेक्शन 2024 में सेट बैक पहुंचा है अबकी बार 400 पार का नारा भी जरूरत से बढ़ी हुई खुद इत मादी का मजहर था मगर हमारे मीडिया में बिल मूम बीजेपी और मोदी की वाज जीत को जिस तरह मनफी प्रोपेगेंडा जा रहा है यह तर्ज अमल भी सावती दियानत दारी के जिमरे में नहीं आता है 543 के लोकसभा आवान में हुकूमत साजी के लिए 272 सीटें दरकार हैं और की बीजेपी 37 जमाती अलायंस के बिल मुकाबल तन्हा 240 निशि हासिल करते हुए सिंगल लार्जेस्ट पार्टी की हैसियत से उभरी है जबकि इसके सामने राहुल गांधी की कांग्रेस पार्टी 999 से आगे नहीं बढ़ पाई अलायंस के हवाले से भी जहां हुक्मरान इतहाद ने 294 निशि जीती है वहां अपोजिशन इतहाद की कुल सीटें 232 हैं ऐसे में अपोजिशन के हुक्मरान या मोदी के जवाल की बातें बेमानी है जिन्हें अब अपने नारे सबका साथ सबका विकास पर बिल फेल ज्यादा तवज्जो देते हुए अटल बिहारी वाजपेई की सियासी दम और बड़े पन का मुजहरा करना होगा प्राइम मिनिस्टर मोदी की जरूरत से ज्यादा खुद त मादी को हका शनास में लाना होगा ब्लं बांग दावों से परहेज करना होगा आज के भारत में महात्मा गांधी के विचारों से आप जितनी चाहे जान छुड़ा ले लेकिन इस साधु के बहुत से आदर्श कदीमी हिंदू समाज और तहजीब से फूटे हैं जिनमें हिंदू मत की सादगी वस्ते कल्बी वुसी नजरी और बड़ा पन नुमाया तर है नरेंद्र मोदी भी बजार खुद को एक फकीर के रूप में पेश करते हैं मगर इनका लिविंग स्टाइल अक्सर इनके दावे से मेल नहीं खाता वो कहते हैं कि मैं पीएम की की हैसियत से जब गैरों को मिलता हूं तो मैं इस वक्त मोदी नहीं हो 1 अरब 40 करोड़ की जनता का नुमाइंदा बनकर वकार और डिग्निटी दिखाता हूं जो हमारी नजर में बाज औकात कुछ आगे तक पहुंची होती है और फिर वह रंग बंगी जितनी जैकेट्स बदलते और बढ़िया लिबास के लिए मुत फक्कर रहते हैं ये अप्रोच इंडियन समाज की सेवा और भक्ति भरे आदर्शों के खिलाफ हैं आपकी बार 400 पार के नारे ने भी अपना मुसब्बर नाजर में इसकी कोई मानवीय या मक दियत वाजिया होती जो इनके बहुत बड़े कारनामों की याद दिलाता इंडियन इंतखाब तारीख में 400 पार तो महज एक मर्तबा हुआ है जब श्रीमती इंदिरा गांधी अपने देश की एकता और रिक्शा पर कुर्बान हो गई तो बदले में राजीव गांधी को 404 या 400 पार हुए बीजेपी यह नारा भी रख सकती थी कि तीसरी बार मोदी सरकार बहरहाल जब 400 पार की गूंज दिमाग में छाई हुई थी तो बहुत से अपनों ने यह समझा कि हमारी जीत तो इस कदर यकीनी है कि अगर इतनी शदीद गर्मी में हम वोट डालने ना भी गए तो कोई बात नहीं जीत तो मोदी ने ही जाना है 400 पार ना हुए तो 350 पार हो जाएंगे यही वजह है कि 2024 के इलेक्शन में वोटिंग रेशो निसन कदर कम रही शायद 60 पर से ऊपर नहीं जा सकी बीजेपी का वोटर साबका इनमार्क से नहीं निकला दूसरी तरफ इस नारे का मुखालिफ असर यह हुआ कि राहुल गांधी और अपोजिशन कयादत अपनी हर तकरीर में यह तश्वी बयान करते पाए गए कि 400 पार का यह मतलब है कि बीजेपी हमारे बड़ों या फाउंडिंग फादर्स का दिया हुआ अजमु शन संविधान यानी भारतीय आईन बदल डालेगी जिसमें अकली तों और कमजोर तबकात को दिए गए तजत खत्म हो जाएंगे राम राजिया या हिंदू राष्ट्रिय से बचने के लिए तमाम कमजोर तबकात को उठ खड़े होना चाहिए वरना बीजेपी और नरेंद्र मोदी की आमनियन कायम होने जा रही है अगर हकीकत की नजर से देखा जाए तो किसान जाटों दलितों और मुसलमानों के खद शत इस हवाले से तहफ्फुज या बचाओ की खातिर इकट्ठे हो गए और इलाकाई पार्टियों ने भी अपना असर दिखाया प्राइम मिनिस्टर नरेंद्र मोदी को इस हवाले से फैलाए गए खद शत के मुजम का एहसासो द्राक हो चुका था और उन्होंने अपनी इलेक्शन कैंपेन के आखिरी मराल में इस हवाले से खूब वजाहत की हर जगह यह कहा कि हम संविधान या आईन बदलने का कोई इरादा नहीं रखते और यह भी कि हम सेकुलर वैल्यूज को बड़ी अहमियत देते हैं मोदी जी ने इस अमर पर इसरार किया कि यह हरकत तो कांग्रेस करती है जो धर्म के नाम पर फिरको की पहचान या तकसीम को नुमाया करती है हम तो सबको साथ मिलाकर कौमी एकता की बात करते हैं इस सिलसिले में उन्होंने बार-बार बाबा साहब अंबेडकर का रेफरेंस दिया मगर वह अपने खिलाफ फैलाए गए राहुल और इंडी अलायंस के इस मनफी प्रोपेगेंडा जिसकी कुछ ना कुछ झूठी सची बनदे बाल अपोजिशन के पास थी इन जैसे-तैसे खद शत के कारण भारतीय जनता ने अपने पॉपुलर प्रधानमंत्री को तीसरी बार दिल्ली के इक्दर्म बक में बेल फेल साहब को साथ लेकर चलना होगा अपने इतहाद हों के नखरे भी उठाने होंगे काबीना में उदों की तकसीम से लेकर राज्यों में इनकी तजत का बाल ख्याल रखना होगा महाराष्ट्र में शिव सना का हिंदुत्व का एजेंडा अगर च बीजेपी से से मेल खाता है लेकिन इसकी हिद्दी बीजेपी से ज्यादा है बाल ठाकरे जी के विचारों से कौन वाकफ नहीं है अब इनके बच्चे इसी लगन के साथ आगे बढ़ेंगे बहरहाल इनकी नौ सीटें बीजेपी की हुकूमत के लिए एक तरह से हम ख्याल अदि हों जैसी होंगी बिहार में नितेश कुमार की जनता दल के पास 12 सीटें हैं जबकि आंध्र प्रदेश में चंद्रबाबू नायडू के तलग देशम की 16 नशत मोदी सरकार के लिए मामन होंगी
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
1. What is Android Studio and why is it considered the best IDE for Android app development?
Android Studio is the official integrated development environment (IDE) for developing Android applications. It is based on IntelliJ IDEA and provides a comprehensive set of tools and features specifically designed for Android development. It’s highly regarded due to:
Free Availability: Android Studio is freely available for Windows, macOS, and Linux operating systems.
Robust Feature Set: It offers a rich set of features, including code editing, debugging, testing, performance analysis, and build automation tools.
Android-Specific Support: Android Studio comes with built-in support for Android SDKs, emulators, and devices, simplifying the development and testing process.
Gradle Integration: Integration with the Gradle build system allows for flexible and efficient build configurations.
2. What are runtime permissions in Android and how do they differ from install permissions?
Prior to Android 6.0 (Marshmallow), users granted permissions to apps during installation. Runtime permissions, introduced in Marshmallow, allow users to grant or deny specific permissions while the app is running. This enhances user privacy and control.
Key differences:
Install Permissions: Granted at app installation, covering all requested permissions.
Runtime Permissions: Requested and granted while the app is running, giving users granular control.
3. What are Android Wear and its limitations?
Android Wear is a version of the Android operating system designed for wearable devices, primarily smartwatches. It enables developers to extend app functionality to wearables and create standalone wearable apps.
Limitations:
Hardware Constraints: Wearables typically have limited processing power, memory, and storage compared to smartphones.
Screen Size: Small screen sizes require UI designs optimized for glanceability and limited interaction.
Sensor Availability: Not all wearables have the same sensors, limiting functionality that relies on specific sensors.
4. What are fragments in Android development and why should they be used carefully?
Fragments are modular components within an Android activity, representing a portion of the user interface or functionality. They promote code reusability and enhance UI flexibility.
Cautions:
Activity Dependency: Fragments often rely on their host activity, potentially leading to crashes if not managed properly.
Lifecycle Complexity: Fragments have their own lifecycle, which needs to be synchronized with the activity lifecycle to prevent issues.
Overuse: Using too many fragments can complicate the app architecture and negatively impact performance.
5. What are build variants in Android Studio, and what are their benefits in app development?
Build variants allow developers to create different versions of their app from a single codebase. These variants can target different device configurations, API levels, or feature sets.
Benefits:
Customization: Tailoring apps for specific device types or market segments.
Testing: Creating separate builds for testing and production environments.
White-Labeling: Generating customized app versions for different clients or brands.
Efficient Development: Reusing code and resources across variants, reducing development effort.
6. What is overdraw in Android, and how can it impact app performance?
Overdraw occurs when an app unnecessarily redraws parts of the screen multiple times, leading to performance issues, especially on resource-constrained devices.
Impact:
Reduced Rendering Speed: Overdraw increases the workload on the GPU, slowing down rendering.
Battery Drain: Excessive redrawing consumes more power, leading to faster battery depletion.
UI Lag: Overdraw can contribute to UI lag and a less responsive user experience.
7. How can I improve the quality of my Android app?
Follow these principles:
Understanding Lifecycles: Master the activity and fragment lifecycles to ensure proper behavior.
Efficient Memory Management: Minimize memory allocation and avoid leaks.
Modular Design: Utilize fragments effectively and maintain a manageable code structure.
MVC or MVP Architecture: Consider implementing Model-View-Controller (MVC) or Model-View-Presenter (MVP) patterns.
DRY and YAGNI: Adhere to the Don’t Repeat Yourself (DRY) and You Aren’t Gonna Need It (YAGNI) principles.
8. What are some testing methods and tools available for Android apps?
Unit Testing: Test individual components (e.g., classes, methods) using frameworks like JUnit and Robolectric.
UI Testing: Test user interactions and UI behavior with tools like Espresso and Robotium.
Code Analysis: Use static analysis tools like Lint to identify potential code issues.
Memory Profilers: Analyze memory usage and detect leaks using Android Studio’s built-in memory profiler.
Beta Testing: Distribute pre-release versions to testers through platforms like Google Play Beta.
Android Studio Cookbook Study Guide
Short-Answer Quiz
Instructions: Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.
What are runtime permissions and how do they differ from traditional install permissions?
Explain the purpose of a content provider in Android development.
Describe the role of the Model-View-Controller (MVC) pattern in improving code quality.
What are the key advantages of using Robolectric for unit testing Android applications?
How can overdraw negatively impact the performance of an Android app?
What are build variants and how are they useful for creating different versions of an app?
Explain the purpose of a watch face in Android Wear development.
What are fragments and why are they a powerful component in Android development?
Describe the steps involved in setting up Parse for use in an Android app.
How can code analysis tools help improve the quality of an Android app?
Short-Answer Quiz Answer Key
Runtime permissions, introduced in Android 6.0 (Marshmallow), prompt the user to grant individual permissions as the app needs them, rather than requesting all permissions upfront during installation. This enhances user privacy and control over app behavior.
A content provider acts as a centralized data store, enabling apps to share data securely and consistently. It provides a structured interface for accessing and manipulating data, regardless of the underlying storage mechanism.
MVC separates an app’s concerns into three distinct components: the Model (data), the View (UI), and the Controller (logic). This modularity promotes code reusability, maintainability, and testability.
Robolectric allows unit testing of Android code without the need for an emulator or physical device, significantly speeding up the testing process. It simulates the Android framework, making tests more reliable and less dependent on external factors.
Overdraw occurs when an app unnecessarily redraws the same pixel multiple times. This redundant drawing consumes processing power and battery life, leading to decreased performance and slower rendering times.
Build variants enable the creation of different versions of an app, tailored to specific needs like different product flavors, build types (debug/release), or target API levels. This streamlines the development process and reduces code duplication.
A watch face is the primary display element on an Android Wear device, showcasing time and other essential information. It can be customized with various styles and complications to provide a personalized and informative user experience.
Fragments are modular UI components that represent portions of an activity’s user interface. They promote code reusability, allow dynamic UI updates, and enable multi-pane layouts on larger screens.
Setting up Parse involves integrating the Parse SDK into your project, initializing the Parse client with your App ID and Client Key, and creating data models to represent your application’s data structure.
Code analysis tools automatically scan your codebase for potential errors, vulnerabilities, and stylistic inconsistencies. They provide insights into areas where your code can be improved, promoting code quality, maintainability, and security.
Essay Questions
Discuss the importance of testing in Android app development. Explain the different types of testing, their benefits, and how they contribute to creating high-quality apps.
Compare and contrast the use of fragments versus activities in Android app development. Provide examples of scenarios where each is more appropriate and discuss the trade-offs involved.
Explain the concept of Material Design and its significance in Android app development. Discuss the key principles and guidelines of Material Design and illustrate how it enhances the user experience.
Discuss the challenges and considerations involved in developing Android apps for wearable devices like smartwatches. How does the limited hardware and screen size impact app design and development?
Explain the role of the Gradle build system in Android app development. Discuss the key features and advantages of using Gradle and provide examples of how it simplifies the build process and automates common tasks.
Glossary of Key Terms
TermDefinitionAndroid StudioThe official integrated development environment (IDE) for Android app development, providing a comprehensive suite of tools for coding, debugging, testing, and deploying Android apps.Runtime PermissionsA security feature in Android that allows apps to request individual permissions from the user at runtime, only when they are needed, enhancing user privacy and control over app behavior.Content ProviderA component that encapsulates and provides access to a structured dataset, allowing apps to share data securely and consistently.Model-View-Controller (MVC)A software design pattern that separates concerns into three interconnected components: the Model (data), the View (UI), and the Controller (logic), promoting code modularity, reusability, and testability.RobolectricA unit testing framework for Android that allows running tests directly on the JVM without the need for an emulator or device, speeding up the testing process and making tests more reliable.OverdrawA performance issue that occurs when an app unnecessarily redraws the same pixel multiple times, leading to wasted processing power and decreased rendering performance.Build VariantsDifferent versions of an app generated from the same codebase, tailored for specific needs like different product flavors, build types (debug/release), or target API levels.Watch FaceThe primary display element on an Android Wear device, showcasing time and other essential information in a customizable manner.FragmentsModular UI components that represent portions of an activity’s user interface, promoting code reusability and enabling dynamic UI updates.ParseA mobile backend-as-a-service (MBaaS) platform that provides tools and services for building and scaling mobile apps, including data storage, user authentication, push notifications, and more.Code AnalysisThe process of automatically inspecting code for potential errors, vulnerabilities, and stylistic inconsistencies, helping to improve code quality, maintainability, and security.Gradle Build SystemA powerful and flexible build automation system used in Android Studio, enabling developers to define build configurations, manage dependencies, and automate tasks involved in building, testing, and deploying Android apps.Material DesignA comprehensive design language developed by Google, emphasizing visual hierarchy, motion, and meaningful transitions to create a consistent and intuitive user experience across Android devices.Lean Start-upA methodology for developing products and businesses that emphasizes rapid prototyping, iterative development, and continuous learning based on customer feedback.
Android Studio Cookbook: Table of Contents
Preface
This section introduces the book, “Android Studio Cookbook,” and describes its purpose: providing developers with practical recipes for designing, debugging, and testing Android apps using Android Studio. It also highlights the book’s structure, ranging from basic Android Studio setup to advanced topics like beta testing and performance improvement. Finally, it outlines the prerequisites and software needed to follow the book’s instructions.
Chapter 1: Welcome to Android Studio
Setting Up Your Development Environment: This section provides a step-by-step guide on installing Android Studio, configuring the SDK, and setting up emulators or physical devices for testing. It ensures readers have a functioning development environment before proceeding with app development.
Creating Your First Android App: This section walks through the process of creating a new project in Android Studio, understanding project structure, and running a basic app on an emulator or device. This gives readers a hands-on experience with the IDE’s workflow.
Integrating External Libraries: This section teaches how to incorporate third-party libraries (like Parse) into your project, using both local JAR files and online dependencies. It expands the reader’s knowledge on utilizing pre-built functionality for common tasks.
Chapter 2: Creating Flexible Layouts
Building Adaptable User Interfaces: This section focuses on designing layouts that adapt to different screen sizes and orientations, using techniques like layout folders and resource qualifiers. It emphasizes creating a responsive user experience across various devices.
Using ListView for Dynamic Content: This section demonstrates how to use the ListView widget to display dynamic content from data sources, implementing custom adapters for data presentation and user interaction.
Creating Custom Widgets for Enhanced Functionality: This section guides readers through building a custom signature widget, showcasing the ability to extend the Android UI toolkit with unique elements tailored to specific app needs.
Chapter 3: The RecyclerView, CardView, and Material Design
Introducing the RecyclerView Widget: This section introduces the RecyclerView, a more efficient and flexible alternative to ListView for displaying large datasets, and illustrates its basic implementation.
Implementing CardView for Visual Appeal: This section teaches how to use CardView to enhance the appearance of list items, adding depth and visual separation for improved aesthetics and user experience.
Applying Material Design Principles: This section explores incorporating Material Design principles, covering elements like floating action buttons, ripples, and elevation for a modern and visually engaging app.
Working with Images and the Camera: This section guides readers through capturing images using the device camera, retrieving images from storage, and integrating them into the app.
Adding Animations for a Polished User Experience: This section focuses on incorporating animations to enhance the user experience, covering techniques like animating list items and using the Android animation framework.
Chapter 4: Android Wear
Developing for Wearable Devices: This section introduces the concept of Android Wear and its significance in wearable technology, emphasizing the unique characteristics of wearable development.
Creating Custom Watch Faces: This section provides a step-by-step guide to building custom watch faces, covering design considerations, implementation details, and best practices for creating an appealing and informative watch face.
Implementing Notifications on Wearables: This section explores sending and handling notifications on wearable devices, ensuring seamless information delivery and user interaction across devices.
Chapter 5: Size Does Matter
Understanding Screen Sizes and Densities: This section discusses the challenges of developing for devices with varying screen sizes and pixel densities, highlighting the importance of creating adaptable layouts.
Using Fragments for Adaptable Layouts: This section explains the concept of fragments as modular UI components and demonstrates how to use them to create flexible layouts that adjust to different screen sizes.
Creating a YouTube Player App: This section walks through building a YouTube player app that adapts to different screen sizes, leveraging fragments and the YouTube API for a practical example of responsive design.
Chapter 7: Content Providers and Observers
Introducing Content Providers: This section introduces Content Providers as a mechanism for sharing data between Android applications, explaining their role and benefits in app development.
Creating and Using a Content Provider: This section provides a practical guide to building a custom content provider, demonstrating data storage, retrieval, and updates using a “Daily Thoughts” app example.
Implementing the Observer Pattern: This section explains the Observer pattern and its application in Android development, showcasing its use with Content Providers for reactive data updates in the “Daily Thoughts” app.
Displaying Key Performance Indicators: This section demonstrates how to use Content Providers and loaders to display Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) within an app, focusing on efficiently retrieving and presenting aggregate data.
Chapter 8: Improving Quality
Applying Design Patterns and Support Annotations: This section covers common design patterns relevant to Android development, promoting good coding practices and maintainability. It also introduces support annotations for improving code readability and bug detection.
Unit Testing with Robolectric: This section introduces unit testing and explains how to use Robolectric, a testing framework, to test Android code efficiently without relying on slow emulators or physical devices.
Utilizing Code Analysis Tools: This section explores the benefits of using code analysis tools to identify potential code issues, covering static code analysis techniques and tools like Lint for enhancing code quality and reducing bugs.
Chapter 9: Improving Performance
Profiling and Performance Tools: This section introduces various tools and techniques for profiling and analyzing app performance, covering memory profilers, CPU profilers, and other performance monitoring utilities.
Identifying and Resolving Performance Bottlenecks: This section uses a “Bad App” example to demonstrate common performance issues, including memory leaks, excessive layouts, and inefficient image handling, and provides solutions for improving performance.
Addressing Overdraw Issues: This section explains the concept of overdraw and its impact on performance, demonstrating how to identify and minimize overdraw through layout optimization and efficient rendering techniques.
Chapter 10: Beta Testing Your Apps
Utilizing Build Variants: This section explains the concept of build variants, allowing developers to create different versions of their app for specific purposes like testing or different target audiences.
Understanding Runtime Permissions: This section covers the changes introduced in Android Marshmallow regarding runtime permissions and provides a practical guide to requesting and handling runtime permissions effectively.
Distributing Your App through the Play Store: This section guides readers through the process of preparing and publishing their app on the Google Play Store, covering beta testing, APK signing, and release management.
Timeline of Events
This text does not describe a series of events occurring over time. It is a technical manual providing instructions and information about using Android Studio to develop apps. Therefore, it is not possible to create a timeline from it.
Cast of Characters
Mike van Drongelen:
Author of the book Android Studio Cookbook.
Focuses on creating better software with less code.
Interests include lean startup methodology, continuous delivery, Test-driven development, and Behaviour Driven Development.
Runs three companies: Miker Works, Finiware, and TeamSpot.
Enjoys motorbike trips and driving his 2CV.
Aliaksandr Zhukovich:
Reviewer of the book Android Studio Cookbook.
Wim Wepster:
Creator of the cover image for the book.
Briefing Doc: Android Studio Cookbook
Author: Mike van Drongelen
Published: October 2015
Focus: A practical guide to designing, debugging, testing, and optimizing Android apps using Android Studio.
Main Themes:
Android Studio Fundamentals: The book starts by introducing Android Studio as the premier IDE for Android development, covering its features and setup process (Chapter 1).
Core Development Techniques: Chapters 2 and 3 delve into fundamental Android development techniques using Android Studio. This includes working with Lists and Adapters, incorporating visual elements like Card Views, and implementing animations and Material Design principles.
Advanced Concepts: Chapters 4-7 explore advanced concepts like developing for Android Wear, creating custom views and widgets, implementing data persistence with Content Providers, and leveraging the Observer pattern for data updates.
Quality and Performance: Chapters 8 and 9 emphasize building high-quality and performant apps. This encompasses utilizing design patterns and annotations, unit testing with Robolectric, employing code analysis tools, and optimizing app performance using profilers and addressing overdraw issues.
Beta Testing and Deployment: Chapter 10 guides readers through the final stages of development, including utilizing Build Variants, understanding Runtime Permissions in Android Marshmallow, and leveraging the Google Play Store for beta distribution.
Important Ideas/Facts:
Android Studio is free and powerful: The book highlights Android Studio as the best IDE for Android development and its free availability for developers. (“Android Studio is the best IDE for developing Android apps, and it is available for free to anyone who wants to develop professional Android apps.” – Preface)
Focus on Efficiency: The author emphasizes creating better software with less code, promoting lean development methodologies. (“Creating better software using less code is what he is aiming for, which explains why he is interested in the lean start-up methodology.” – About the Author)
Device Compatibility: Considering target device features and market limitations is crucial for maximizing reach. (“I can imagine you want to reach an audience as large as possible so you should always ask yourself which of your app feature demands will or will not have to be mandatory.” – Chapter 1)
Runtime Permissions: Android 6.0 introduces Runtime Permissions requiring developers to provide fallbacks and explanations for app functionality. (“The introduction of runtime permissions in Android Marshmallow (6.0) makes it even more important for you to provide some kind of a fallback functionality in your app.” – Chapter 1)
Gradle Build System: The book introduces the Gradle build system, showcasing its flexibility in handling complex app scenarios like build flavors and multiple APKs. (“The system is also designed to support complex scenarios that may be faced while creating Android applications, such as handling customized versions of the same app for various customers (build flavors) or creating multiple APK files for different device types or different Android OS versions.” – Chapter 1)
Importance of Testing: The book stresses the importance of testing, introducing techniques like unit testing with Robolectric and code analysis for ensuring app quality. (“No wait, you are not done yet! Did you test your app properly? Will it work on any Android version? On any device? In all circumstances?” – Chapter 8)
Performance Optimization: Techniques for optimizing app performance, including memory profiling, addressing overdraw, and efficient bitmap handling, are discussed in detail. (“In this chapter, we will focus on… Memory profilers and performance tools… Overdraw issues.” – Chapter 9)
Build Variants and Flavors: Leveraging Build Variants and Flavors for creating customized app versions and supporting different device configurations is explained. (“In this chapter, we will focus on: … Build variants (types and flavors) and beta distribution on the Google Play Store.” – Preface)
Beta Testing and Google Play: The book covers beta testing through Google Play, allowing developers to gather user feedback before a full release. (“Chapter 10, Beta Testing Your Apps, guides you through some of the final steps such as using build variants (types and flavors) and beta distribution on the Google Play Store.” – Preface)
Quotes:
On user experience: “If a device does not have a camera, the user might not be able to take pictures, but should that really be a reason for not allowing the user to use the app at all?” – Chapter 1
On data sharing: “Scary, isn’t it? Using content providers, it is pretty easy to share data between different apps. This is how many apps such as contacts or the Gallery work.” – Chapter 7
Overall:
This cookbook serves as a valuable resource for Android developers of all skill levels, offering practical solutions and best practices for building professional and engaging Android applications using Android Studio.
Here are some of the key concepts and techniques this book covers for developing high-quality Android apps:
Android Studio is the recommended IDE for developing Android apps. It offers advantages over Eclipse, such as Gradle, better refactoring methods, and a better layout editor. [1, 2]
Android fragmentation is a challenge for developers. There are many devices running different Android versions and hardware configurations. It is important to design apps that run well on as many devices as possible. [3-5]
Gradle build scripts are used in Android Studio. They define the configuration of a project, such as compileSdkVersion, targetSdkVersion, minSdkVersion, versionCode, and versionName. [6-8]
Genymotion is a fast emulator that can be used to test apps. [9, 10]
Refactoring code is important for maintaining code quality. This includes using descriptive names for methods and members and limiting the length of methods. [11]
Cloud-based backends, such as Parse, can simplify app development. Parse provides services such as data storage, user management, and push notifications. [12, 13]
Material Design is a design language that can improve the look and feel of Android apps. It emphasizes flat design, bold colors, and meaningful transitions. [14-16]
Android Wear apps can be developed using Android Studio. These apps run on wearable devices, such as smartwatches. [17, 18]
Different layouts and fragments can be used to create apps that work well on different screen sizes. [19, 20]
The Camera2 API can be used to capture images. [21]
Content providers can be used to share data between apps. [22]
The observer pattern can be used to notify components of data changes. [23, 24]
Design patterns, such as MVC and MVP, can improve code quality. [25-27]
Support annotations can help to prevent errors. [24, 28]
Unit testing, using frameworks like Robolectric, is important for ensuring code quality. [29]
UI testing, using frameworks like Espresso, is important for ensuring the app functions correctly. [30]
Android Lint can be used to analyze code for potential bugs and optimizations. [31, 32]
Memory leaks and out of memory exceptions can cause performance issues. The Memory Monitor and Allocation Tracker can be used to identify and fix these issues. [33-35]
Overdraw can impact app performance. The Debug GPU Overdraw tool can be used to identify overdraw issues. [34, 36]
Build variants can be used to create different versions of an app. Build types define different configurations, such as debug and release. Flavors can be used to create customized versions of an app. [37-39]
Runtime permissions were introduced in Android Marshmallow. Apps must now request permissions at runtime. [40, 41]
Beta testing is important for gathering feedback and improving apps before release. The Google Play Store provides tools for distributing beta versions of apps. [37, 42]
The source advocates for a continuous deployment model for app development. While not explicitly detailed, the source suggests that continuous deployment involves continuous integration and continuous delivery. Continuous integration is the process of developers frequently merging code changes into a central repository where automated builds and tests are run. Continuous delivery is the process of automatically creating deployable versions of an app. [43, 44]
The source also suggests using Jenkins or TeamCity for continuous deployment of Android apps. TeamCity is reportedly more popular and integrates with Android Studio via a plugin. [44, 45]
This cookbook guides developers in using Android Studio to effectively develop apps by providing detailed steps and explanations for real-world scenarios, covering a wide range of Android development concepts.
Using Android Studio
The book begins with an introduction to Android Studio, explaining its advantages over Eclipse and highlighting features like Gradle build scripts and refactoring tools [1, 2]. It then walks developers through creating their first “Hello Android Studio” app, covering setup, configuration, and running the app on both physical devices and emulators [3, 4].
The book recommends Genymotion as a faster emulator for testing on various devices [5, 6].
Building Real-world Apps
To illustrate real-world app development, the book uses examples like a cloud-based order management app and a health-focused app that incorporates Material Design principles [7, 8].
The book explains how to set up Parse, a cloud-based backend service, for efficient app development without creating a separate backend [9].
It also guides developers in implementing Material Design elements like RecyclerView, CardView, ripples, elevations, and transitions to create visually appealing and user-friendly apps [10, 11].
Expanding to Different Device Types
The book addresses the challenges of fragmentation in the Android ecosystem and provides solutions for developing apps that run seamlessly on various devices like phones, tablets, wearables, and TVs [12, 13].
It offers instructions for developing watch faces and integrating notifications for Android Wear devices [14, 15].
The book also demonstrates how to use fragments and multiple layouts to create adaptable apps for different screen sizes and contexts [16, 17].
Improving Code Quality
The book emphasizes code quality and performance throughout, providing guidance on applying design patterns, unit testing, and code analysis [18]. It introduces concepts like MVC and MVP, and the Observer pattern, explaining their benefits and how to implement them in Android Studio [19, 20]. The book also covers unit testing with Robolectric and code analysis using Android Lint to identify potential bugs and improve code efficiency [21, 22].
Finalizing and Distributing Your App
Finally, the book guides developers through the steps of preparing their apps for beta testing and distribution. This includes using build variants to create different versions of the app for testing and release, understanding runtime permissions in Android Marshmallow, and utilizing Play Store beta distribution for gathering user feedback before a full launch [23, 24].
This response draws exclusively on the provided source: “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf”.
“Android Studio Cookbook” showcases the integration of diverse technologies and frameworks within Android development through practical “recipes” or coding solutions. Here’s a breakdown of how the book demonstrates this integration:
Chapter 1: Welcome to Android Studio:
Genymotion Emulator: The book emphasizes using Genymotion for efficient app testing across various virtual devices [1, 2].
Gradle Build System: The book introduces Gradle for managing project dependencies and building different app versions [3, 4]. It illustrates how Gradle simplifies incorporating libraries like Parse [5], UniversalImageLoader, and Gson [6].
Chapter 2: Applications with a Cloud-Based Backend:
Parse: The book guides the development of a CloudOrder app, leveraging Parse as a Backend-as-a-Service (BaaS) [7]. It covers data consumption [8], submission [9], and integration with features like signature capture [9]. The book also highlights additional Parse capabilities like Cloud Code and third-party integrations, such as Twilio for messaging and SendGrid for email [10].
Chapter 3: Material Design:
Material Design Components: The book explains how to enhance app aesthetics and usability using Material Design components like RecyclerViews, CardViews, ripples, elevations, and transitions [11-13].
Chapter 4: Android Wear:
Android Wear API: This chapter centers on building apps for Android Wear devices [14, 15]. It illustrates the development of a fullscreen wearable app [16] and a watch face [17], showcasing the adaptation of code and design for wearables.
Chapter 5: Size Does Matter:
Fragments and Layouts: The chapter emphasizes building adaptive apps that seamlessly function on phones, phablets, tablets, and TVs [18, 19]. It utilizes fragments to manage different layouts for various screen sizes, ensuring optimal user experience [20].
YouTube Android Player API: The chapter guides the integration of the YouTube Android Player API, demonstrating media playback within the app [21]. This example illustrates the use of external APIs to enhance app functionality.
Chapter 6: Capture and Share:
Camera2 API: The book dives into image capture using the Camera2 API, a significant improvement over its predecessor [22]. It explains handling camera preview, capturing images [23, 24], addressing orientation issues [25], and sharing captured images on Facebook [26].
Facebook SDK: The integration of the Facebook SDK demonstrates image sharing on social media platforms [26].
Chapter 7: Content Providers and Observers:
SQLite and Content Providers: This chapter demonstrates building an app with list and detail views using content providers to manage data persistence, specifically with SQLite [27]. It covers creating a content provider [28, 29], consuming and updating data [30, 31], observing changes [32], and using content providers for inter-app communication [33].
Chapter 8: Improving Quality:
Design Patterns: The chapter stresses using design patterns like MVC, MVP, Observer, Factory, and Singleton to enhance code quality, structure, and testability [34, 35].
Google Play Games Services: It demonstrates incorporating the Google Play Games SDK for features like achievements and leaderboards [36, 37].
Support Annotations: The book encourages the use of support annotations for improved code analysis and potential error detection [37].
Robolectric: It advocates for unit testing using Robolectric, allowing for efficient and comprehensive testing outside the emulator [38, 39].
Chapter 9: Improving Performance:
Performance Tools: This chapter explores the use of Android Studio tools like Memory Monitor and Allocation Tracker to identify and address memory leaks and performance bottlenecks [40-42].
Overdraw Analysis: It addresses overdraw issues, a common performance pitfall, and offers solutions for optimization [43, 44].
Chapter 10: Beta Testing Your Apps:
Build Variants: This chapter demonstrates building an app with multiple build types (debug and release) and flavors, leveraging Gradle’s capabilities for customized builds [45-47].
Runtime Permissions: The book explains handling runtime permissions introduced in Android Marshmallow [48], emphasizing user privacy and security [49].
Play Store Beta Distribution: It provides guidance on distributing beta versions of the app through the Google Play Store for valuable user feedback and testing [50].
Throughout the book, “Android Studio Cookbook” effectively showcases how to integrate various technologies and frameworks to build robust, functional, and visually appealing Android applications.
Key Aspects of Android Development as Presented in the Sources
The sources, excerpts from the book “Android Studio Cookbook,” offer insights into various aspects of Android development, emphasizing the use of Android Studio as the primary Integrated Development Environment (IDE). Here’s a discussion of key points:
1. Android Studio as the Preferred IDE: The source champions Android Studio as the go-to IDE for Android development, highlighting its advantages over Eclipse. These advantages include features such as:
Gradle build scripts: Gradle streamlines project automation and building different app versions, managing dependencies efficiently. [1-3]
Enhanced refactoring methods: Improved refactoring tools contribute to cleaner and more maintainable code. [4]
Superior layout editor: The layout editor in Android Studio provides a better visual design experience. [4]
2. Addressing Android Fragmentation: A significant challenge in Android development is fragmentation—the diversity of Android versions and hardware configurations across devices. [5] To ensure apps run smoothly on various devices, the book emphasizes the importance of:
Testing with emulators: Using emulators like Genymotion, known for its speed, helps test apps across various virtual devices. [2, 6, 7]
Adaptive layouts and fragments: The book advocates for designing layouts that adjust to different screen sizes. This involves using fragments to manage different layouts based on screen dimensions, ensuring a consistent user experience across devices. [8]
Considering minimal SDK version: Selecing an appropriate minimal SDK version ensures compatibility with a broader range of devices while balancing access to newer features. [9, 10]
3. Cloud Integration and Backend Services: “Android Studio Cookbook” demonstrates the use of cloud-based backend services like Parse, illustrating its benefits for app development. [11] This includes:
Simplifying backend development: Parse offers Backend-as-a-Service (BaaS) features, eliminating the need to build a separate backend. It provides data storage, user management, push notifications, and more. [12]
Third-party integrations: The book also mentions additional Parse capabilities, such as Cloud Code and third-party integrations, including:
Twilio: For SMS and voice messaging. [13]
SendGrid: For email delivery. [13]
4. Material Design Implementation: The book advocates for Material Design as a design language to enhance app aesthetics and usability. It guides developers through implementing Material Design principles and components, such as:
RecyclerViews and CardViews: These provide efficient and visually appealing ways to display lists of data. [14]
Ripples and elevations: These elements enhance the visual feedback of user interactions, creating a more intuitive experience. [15]
Transitions: Material Design emphasizes the use of transitions to create smooth and meaningful animations between different app states. [16]
5. Extending App Functionality: The book explores building apps for different device types and integrating external APIs to expand app functionality:
Android Wear: It covers developing apps specifically for wearable devices, demonstrating watch face creation and notification integration. [17, 18]
YouTube Android Player API: The book showcases the integration of the YouTube API to demonstrate media playback within apps. [19]
6. Enhancing Code Quality and Performance: “Android Studio Cookbook” emphasizes the importance of writing high-quality, performant code:
Design patterns: The book promotes the use of design patterns like MVC, MVP, Observer, Singleton, and Factory to improve code organization and testability. [20]
Unit testing: It advocates for unit testing using frameworks like Robolectric, allowing for efficient testing outside of the emulator. [21]
Code analysis: The book suggests using Android Lint to detect potential bugs, performance bottlenecks, and areas for code optimization. [22, 23]
Memory management: The book addresses common performance issues like memory leaks, out-of-memory exceptions, and overdraw, guiding developers on how to use Android Studio’s tools to identify and resolve these problems. [24]
7. Beta Testing and Distribution: The final chapter guides developers through the process of preparing apps for beta testing and distribution:
Build variants: The book explains the use of build types (e.g., debug, release) and product flavors to create different app versions. [25]
Runtime permissions: It addresses the changes introduced in Android Marshmallow requiring apps to request permissions at runtime, emphasizing user privacy. [26]
Play Store beta distribution: The book provides step-by-step instructions on using the Google Play Store to distribute beta versions of the app for user feedback and testing before a full release. [23]
The book advocates for a continuous deployment model, although it doesn’t offer specific implementation details. It suggests that this model involves continuous integration (frequently merging code and running tests) and continuous delivery (automating the creation of deployable versions). [27] The book mentions Jenkins and TeamCity as tools for continuous deployment, favoring TeamCity for its integration with Android Studio via a plugin. [28]
It is worth noting that the information about continuous deployment, Jenkins, and TeamCity is mentioned briefly in the sources. You may want to independently verify this information.
Content Providers in Android Development
The sources, specifically Chapter 7 of “Android Studio Cookbook,” provide a detailed explanation of content providers and their significance in Android application development. Here’s a comprehensive discussion based on the information provided:
1. What are Content Providers?
Content providers act as intermediaries between data sources and applications, facilitating secure and structured data sharing. They manage access to a structured dataset, such as a SQLite database, a file system, or even data residing on a network. Content providers can be accessed from within the same application or by other applications, enabling inter-app communication and data exchange.
2. Key Benefits of Content Providers:
Abstraction: Content providers abstract the underlying data storage mechanism. Applications interact with the content provider through a standardized interface, without needing to know the specifics of how the data is stored or retrieved.
Structured Data Access: Content providers use a URI-based addressing scheme to identify specific datasets. This enables applications to query and manipulate data using a familiar SQL-like syntax.
Data Integrity and Security: Content providers enforce access rules and permissions, ensuring data integrity and security. Applications can be granted read or write permissions, controlling their level of access to the data.
Observer Pattern for Data Change Notifications: Content providers support the observer pattern, allowing applications to register as listeners for changes in the underlying dataset. When data is modified, observers are automatically notified, enabling them to update their UI or take other necessary actions.
3. Implementing a Content Provider:
The sources provide a step-by-step guide to creating a content provider, using a “Daily Thoughts” app as an example. Key steps include:
Creating a Content Provider Class: Create a class that extends ContentProvider and implement the required methods, such as query(), insert(), update(), delete(), and getType().
Defining URIs: Define unique URIs to identify the content provider and its datasets.
Implementing Query Handling: In the query() method, use SQLiteQueryBuilder to construct queries based on the provided URI and selection parameters. Register an observer using setNotificationUri() to listen for data changes.
Handling Data Insertion: In the insert() method, handle data insertion into the underlying dataset and notify observers of the change.
Declaring the Provider in the Manifest: Declare the content provider in the AndroidManifest.xml file, specifying its authority, permissions, and exported status.
4. Consuming Data from a Content Provider:
To access data from a content provider, applications use the ContentResolver class. Key steps include:
Constructing a URI: Construct a URI that identifies the desired dataset.
Using ContentResolver Methods: Utilize ContentResolver methods like query(), insert(), update(), and delete() to interact with the content provider.
Handling the Cursor: Process the returned Cursor object, which represents the result set of the query, to extract the desired data.
5. Example of Using a Content Provider:
The sources present a scenario where a “Daily Analytics” app accesses the thoughts data stored by the “Daily Thoughts” app. This demonstrates inter-app communication using content providers, highlighting the security aspects of defining permissions and exporting the provider selectively.
6. Advanced Use Cases of Content Providers:
Changing Projections for KPIs: The sources illustrate how to use different projections in the query() method to calculate and display Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) based on the content provider’s data. This technique can be applied to extract summary information or aggregate data for analysis.
Additional Insights (not explicitly mentioned in the sources):
Content Provider as an Abstraction Layer: Content providers serve as an abstraction layer, simplifying data access and promoting modularity in app design. By decoupling data management from specific activities or fragments, the code becomes more maintainable and reusable.
Data Synchronization and Background Tasks: Content providers, in conjunction with services and SyncAdapters, can enable seamless data synchronization between devices and backend systems.
Conclusion:
Content providers are a powerful mechanism in Android development for managing data access, enabling inter-app communication, and promoting data integrity and security. The sources provide a practical understanding of implementing and utilizing content providers, showcasing their benefits for building robust and feature-rich Android applications.
Techniques for Enhancing App Quality in Android Development
The sources, primarily Chapter 8 of “Android Studio Cookbook,” offer valuable insights into improving the quality of Android applications. Here’s a detailed discussion encompassing various aspects of code quality enhancement:
1. Understanding the Software Release Cycle and Quality Focus:
The sources emphasize the importance of a structured software release cycle, typically progressing from alpha to closed beta, open beta, and finally, release. They stress that quality should be a primary focus throughout the development process, not just a final step before release. Key areas of quality include:
Functional Quality: Ensuring the app functions as intended, meeting all requirements. This is assessed through software testing, particularly beta testing, discussed in Chapter 10 of the sources.
Structural Quality: Focusing on the code’s architecture, maintainability, and robustness. This is evaluated using unit tests, code inspections (including peer review), and tools like Android Lint.
2. Applying Design Patterns for Improved Code Structure:
The sources highlight the use of design patterns as established solutions to recurring problems in software development. They advocate for applying patterns to enhance code organization, readability, and testability. Some key patterns discussed are:
MVC (Model-View-Controller): This pattern separates data (Model), user interface (View), and application logic (Controller). The sources suggest MVC as particularly suitable for larger projects, promoting modularity and maintainability.
MVP (Model-View-Presenter): A variation of MVC, MVP further decouples the UI from the logic by introducing a Presenter that handles interactions between the View and the Model. This can make testing more straightforward.
Observer Pattern: This pattern enables objects to subscribe to and receive notifications about changes in other objects, facilitating communication and data synchronization. The sources use the observer pattern in the context of content providers to notify UI components about data changes.
Singleton Pattern: This pattern ensures that only one instance of a particular class exists, often used to manage shared resources or global application state.
Factory Pattern: This pattern provides a standardized way to create objects without exposing the instantiation logic to the client code. This can improve flexibility and maintainability by abstracting object creation.
3. Utilizing Support Annotations for Enhanced Code Inspection:
The sources introduce support annotations as a valuable tool for improving code quality. Support annotations are metadata tags that provide hints to code inspection tools, such as Android Lint, helping to identify potential problems early on. Key types of annotations discussed are:
Nullness Annotations: Annotations like @NonNull and @Nullable indicate whether a variable or parameter can or cannot be null, helping to prevent null pointer exceptions.
Resource Type Annotations: These annotations specify the type of resources a method expects or returns (e.g., a Drawable, String, or Color), helping to catch resource type mismatches.
IntDef/StringDef Annotations: These annotations define a set of allowed integer or string constants, improving code clarity and preventing the use of incorrect values.
The sources strongly recommend using these annotations to enhance code readability and robustness.
4. Leveraging Unit Testing for Early Issue Detection:
The sources champion unit testing as a fundamental practice for ensuring code quality. Unit testing involves testing individual units of code in isolation, ensuring they function correctly. They demonstrate unit testing using the Robolectric framework, which allows for efficient testing of Android components without requiring a full emulator. Key benefits of unit testing include:
Early Bug Detection: Unit tests help identify bugs early in the development cycle when they are less costly to fix.
Improved Code Design: Writing testable code often encourages better code design and modularity.
Regression Prevention: As the codebase evolves, unit tests act as a safety net, preventing regressions and ensuring existing functionality remains intact.
5. Code Analysis with Android Lint for Comprehensive Code Review:
The sources promote the use of Android Lint, a static code analysis tool built into Android Studio, to detect potential bugs, performance bottlenecks, and areas for code improvement. Android Lint analyzes the code without executing it, identifying issues such as:
Unused Resources: Lint can detect unused resources like layouts, drawables, or strings, helping to reduce the app’s size.
Internationalization and Localization Issues: Lint checks for hardcoded strings that may cause problems with localization.
Accessibility Problems: Lint can flag potential accessibility issues, making apps more usable for people with disabilities.
Security Vulnerabilities: Lint can identify common security vulnerabilities, such as the use of insecure cryptographic algorithms.
The sources demonstrate how to run a code inspection using Android Lint and address the identified warnings, highlighting the importance of fixing errors and warnings to enhance app quality.
6. Additional Quality-Enhancing Techniques (not explicitly covered in the sources):
Code Reviews: Regular code reviews by other developers can uncover bugs, style issues, and design flaws that might be missed during individual development.
Continuous Integration and Continuous Delivery: These practices automate building, testing, and deployment, helping to maintain a high level of code quality and speed up the release process.
7. The Role of Testing and Feedback in Continuous Improvement:
While the sources primarily focus on structural quality, they also emphasize the importance of functional testing through beta releases (discussed in Chapter 10). Gathering user feedback during beta testing and incorporating it into subsequent iterations is essential for ensuring that the app meets users’ needs and expectations.
Conclusion:
Improving code quality is an ongoing process throughout the Android app development lifecycle. The sources provide a practical toolkit for enhancing code quality, emphasizing the use of design patterns, support annotations, unit testing, and code analysis tools. By adopting these techniques, developers can create more robust, maintainable, and user-friendly Android applications.
Enhancing Performance in Android Apps
The sources, particularly Chapter 9 of “Android Studio Cookbook,” provide a detailed exploration of techniques for improving the performance of Android applications. Here’s a comprehensive discussion based on the information provided:
1. Recognizing Performance Issues and Their Impact:
The sources stress that performance is a critical factor affecting user experience and app ratings. They point out that an app that runs smoothly on a high-end device may encounter performance problems on a lower-end device with less processing power or memory. Common performance issues include:
Memory Leaks: These occur when an application fails to release memory that is no longer needed, leading to gradual memory depletion and potentially app crashes.
Out of Memory Exceptions: These happen when an app tries to allocate more memory than the system can provide, typically resulting in an app crash. This is often caused by handling large data sets, such as high-resolution images.
Overdraw: This occurs when a pixel on the screen is drawn multiple times, wasting processing power and slowing down UI rendering. Excessive overdraw can make the app feel sluggish, particularly on less powerful devices.
2. Utilizing Performance Tools for Analysis and Diagnosis:
The sources highlight several tools that can be used to analyze and diagnose performance problems in Android apps:
Memory Monitor (in Android Studio): This tool provides a real-time graph of memory usage, helping to identify memory leaks and spikes in memory allocation. It can also show garbage collection (GC) events, which can indicate potential performance bottlenecks.
Allocation Tracker (in Android Device Monitor): This tool tracks memory allocations, providing a detailed stack trace of where memory is being allocated. This can be helpful in identifying areas of code that are allocating memory excessively.
Heap Viewer (in Android Device Monitor): This tool displays the distribution of objects in the heap, helping to identify object types that are consuming a large amount of memory.
The sources provide several practical tips for optimizing app performance and avoiding common pitfalls:
Efficient Memory Management:
Release resources promptly when no longer needed, especially in activity lifecycle methods like onPause() and onDestroy().
Use weak references to prevent memory leaks when referencing objects that may be garbage collected.
Avoid creating unnecessary objects and consider object pooling for frequently used objects.
Use primitive types instead of objects when possible, as they consume less memory.
Bitmap Optimization:
Load and display scaled-down versions of images appropriate for the screen size and resolution, using BitmapFactory.Options to set the inSampleSize.
Utilize image loading libraries like Picasso or Universal Image Loader, which handle caching, image resizing, and background loading efficiently.
Layout Optimization:
Minimize overdraw by using a flat view hierarchy, avoiding unnecessary background colors, and merging overlapping views when possible.
Use RelativeLayout judiciously, as it can be more efficient than nested LinearLayouts.
Use FrameLayout when appropriate, as it is the simplest and often most performant layout container.
Consider using ConstraintLayout, a more recent layout that can create complex layouts with a flat hierarchy.
Other Optimization Strategies:
Perform expensive operations, such as network requests or database queries, asynchronously in background threads to prevent UI thread blocking.
Use efficient data structures and algorithms, especially when dealing with large data sets.
Profile and benchmark your code to identify performance bottlenecks and focus optimization efforts where they will have the most impact.
Libraries for Performance Enhancement:
Picasso: An image loading library that simplifies image handling, caching, and resizing, significantly improving image loading performance.
Retrofit: A REST client library that simplifies network communication, making API interactions more efficient and robust.
4. The Importance of Testing on a Variety of Devices:
The sources emphasize the importance of testing apps on a range of devices with varying hardware capabilities to ensure optimal performance across a wide user base. They recommend using emulators or real devices to test on different screen sizes, resolutions, and Android versions.
5. Addressing Overdraw for Smoother UI Rendering:
The sources explain how to identify and mitigate overdraw using the “Debug GPU Overdraw” developer option on Android devices. This tool visually highlights areas of overdraw, allowing developers to pinpoint and address layout inefficiencies.
Additional Insights (not explicitly mentioned in the sources):
Android Profiler: A comprehensive profiling tool in Android Studio that provides detailed insights into CPU usage, memory allocation, network activity, and energy consumption. It can help identify performance bottlenecks and optimize various aspects of app performance.
StrictMode: A developer tool that helps detect accidental disk or network access on the main thread, which can cause UI thread blocking and performance issues.
Conclusion:
Optimizing app performance is essential for providing a positive user experience and achieving high app ratings. The sources offer valuable techniques for identifying and resolving performance bottlenecks related to memory management, image handling, layout efficiency, and other areas. By employing these strategies and utilizing performance analysis tools, developers can create high-performing Android applications that run smoothly across a variety of devices.
The Importance and Process of Beta Testing Android Apps
The sources, specifically Chapter 10 of “Android Studio Cookbook,” emphasize the significance of beta testing as a critical step in the Android app development lifecycle. It highlights the role of beta testing in gathering user feedback and refining the app before its full release on the Google Play Store.
1. The Purpose of Beta Testing:
Beta testing serves as a valuable opportunity to evaluate the app’s functionality, usability, and performance in a real-world setting. It allows developers to:
Identify and fix bugs: Real-world usage often exposes bugs that may not have been detected during internal testing.
Gather user feedback: Beta testers provide valuable insights into the app’s user experience, highlighting areas that may need improvement.
Validate app stability: Beta testing assesses the app’s stability and performance under various conditions, including different devices and network environments.
2. Stages in a Software Release Cycle:
The sources outline a typical software release cycle, which can include the following stages:
Alpha: An early stage of testing, often involving internal testers or a limited group of external users.
Closed Beta: Testing with a selected group of external users who have been invited to participate.
Open Beta: Testing open to a wider audience, allowing anyone interested to download and use the app.
Release: The final version of the app, made available to the general public through the Google Play Store.
3. Preparing for Beta Testing:
Before releasing the app for beta testing, developers should:
Ensure app stability: The app should be reasonably stable and free from major bugs that could hinder the testing process.
Prepare app metadata: This includes the app’s title, description, screenshots, and icons, which will be displayed on the Play Store listing.
Decide on a testing method: Choose between closed beta testing (with a selected group of users) and open beta testing (open to a wider audience).
4. Distributing the App for Beta Testing:
The Google Play Store provides a dedicated platform for beta testing:
Create a beta release: Upload the beta version of the app to the Play Store console under the “Beta” tab.
Manage testers: For closed beta testing, create a list of testers by email address or use Google Groups or Google+ communities to manage tester groups.
Gather feedback: Provide a mechanism for testers to submit feedback, such as an in-app feedback form or an email address.
5. Promoting to Production:
Once the beta testing phase is complete and necessary improvements have been made, developers can promote the app to production, making it available to the public on the Play Store.
Additional Considerations:
Crash Reporting: Integrating a crash reporting tool like Crashlytics (mentioned in the sources) can provide valuable insights into app crashes during beta testing and even after release.
Analytics: Implement analytics tracking to gather data on user behavior and app usage patterns, which can help guide further development and improvements.
A/B Testing: The Play Store console allows for A/B testing, enabling developers to experiment with different app variations to determine which performs better.
Not Covered in the Sources:
Beta Testing Platforms: The sources primarily focus on using the Google Play Store for beta distribution. However, several third-party beta testing platforms, such as TestFlight (for iOS) and HockeyApp, offer additional features and flexibility. You may wish to investigate these options to determine their suitability for your needs.
Conclusion:
Beta testing is an essential practice for ensuring the quality, stability, and user satisfaction of Android apps. By effectively utilizing the beta testing features provided by the Google Play Store, developers can gather invaluable feedback, refine their apps, and increase the likelihood of a successful public release.
Here are the chapter summaries of the book “Android Studio Cookbook”:
Chapter 1: Welcome to Android Studio
This chapter serves as an introduction to Android Studio, the official Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for Android app development.
It guides you through the process of creating your first basic Android app, highlighting key features of the IDE and introducing the concept of Gradle build scripts.
The chapter also introduces Genymotion, a popular and fast Android emulator for testing apps on various virtual devices.
It touches on code refactoring techniques, emphasizing the importance of writing clean, maintainable, and well-organized code.
Chapter 2: Applications with a Cloud-Based Backend
This chapter focuses on building Android apps that leverage cloud-based backend services. It introduces Parse (note: Parse has been shut down, you might want to consider alternatives such as Firebase), a platform that provides a convenient way to store data in the cloud and handle common backend functionalities.
The chapter guides you through setting up a Parse account, integrating the Parse SDK into your Android project, and performing basic operations like retrieving and submitting data to the cloud.
This approach simplifies backend development, allowing developers to concentrate on the app’s frontend and user experience.
Chapter 3: Material Design
This chapter introduces Material Design, Google’s design language that emphasizes a modern, intuitive, and visually appealing user interface for Android apps.
It explores key elements of Material Design, including:
Recycler Views and Card Views: More efficient and flexible ways to display lists of data compared to traditional ListView. They are designed to handle large data sets and dynamic content updates smoothly.
Ripples and Elevations: Visual effects that provide tactile feedback and create a sense of depth and hierarchy in the UI, making interactions more engaging.
Transitions: Animations that create smooth and visually pleasing transitions between different screens or states within the app, enhancing the overall user experience.
Chapter 4: Android Wear
This chapter explores the world of developing apps for Android Wear, Google’s platform for wearable devices, specifically smartwatches.
It explains the fundamentals of Android Wear app development, covering the creation of:
Wearable Apps: Standalone applications that run directly on the smartwatch.
Watch Faces: Customizable displays for the smartwatch’s home screen, providing time and other relevant information.
Notifications: Ways to extend phone app notifications to the smartwatch, allowing users to view and interact with notifications from their wrist.
Chapter 5: Size Does Matter
This chapter addresses the challenges of designing and developing Android apps that work seamlessly across a wide range of devices with different screen sizes and form factors, including phones, tablets, and TVs.
It highlights the importance of:
Adaptive Layouts: Using different layout resources for different screen sizes and orientations to optimize the UI for each device.
Fragments: Modular UI components that can be combined and reused in various layouts, facilitating the creation of responsive designs.
It demonstrates connecting to the YouTube Data API to retrieve and display video content, showcasing how to handle media playback and adapt the UI for different screen sizes.
Chapter 6: Capture and Share
This chapter focuses on working with the device’s camera to capture images and sharing them with other apps or social media platforms.
It explores the Camera2 API, a more advanced and flexible way to interact with the camera, providing greater control over camera settings and image capture.
It also covers handling image orientation issues that can arise from different camera sensors and device orientations.
The chapter guides you through capturing images, processing them, and sharing them on social media using the Facebook SDK as an example.
Chapter 7: Content Providers and Observers
This chapter introduces Content Providers, a powerful mechanism in Android for sharing data between different applications.
It emphasizes the benefits of using Content Providers, including:
Data Encapsulation: Content Providers provide a structured and controlled way to access and modify data, abstracting away the underlying data storage implementation.
Inter-Application Communication: Content Providers enable apps to share data seamlessly without needing to know the details of how the data is stored.
The chapter also covers the Observer pattern, which allows apps to be notified of data changes in a Content Provider, enabling dynamic UI updates.
It guides you through creating a Content Provider for a sample app that stores daily thoughts and retrieving data from the Content Provider in another app, showcasing inter-app communication.
Chapter 8: Improving Quality
This chapter focuses on techniques and tools for improving the quality, maintainability, and robustness of Android apps. It covers:
Design Patterns: Explores common design patterns that promote code organization, modularity, and reusability, including MVC (Model-View-Controller), MVP (Model-View-Presenter), Observable, Factory, and Singleton.
Support Annotations: Introduces annotations provided by the Android Support Library that help enforce code quality, detect potential errors, and improve code readability.
Unit Testing with Robolectric: Explains the concept of unit testing and demonstrates how to use Robolectric, a testing framework that allows you to run unit tests for Android code directly on the JVM without needing an emulator or device, speeding up the testing process.
Code Analysis with Android Lint: Guides you through using Android Lint, a static code analysis tool that identifies potential bugs, performance issues, security vulnerabilities, and style violations in your code.
Chapter 9: Improving Performance
This chapter addresses performance optimization techniques for Android apps, aiming to create smooth and responsive user experiences, especially on lower-end devices with limited resources.
It highlights common performance bottlenecks and provides strategies for mitigation:
Memory Leaks and OutOfMemory Exceptions: Explains the causes of memory leaks and how to use tools like the Memory Monitor and Allocation Tracker in Android Studio to identify and fix them. Emphasizes the importance of releasing resources promptly and avoiding unnecessary object creation.
Bitmap Optimization: Focuses on techniques for efficiently loading and displaying images, including resizing images appropriately for the screen size, using image loading libraries like Picasso, and caching images to reduce redundant network requests.
Layout Optimization: Discusses strategies for reducing overdraw, which can impact UI rendering performance. Recommends minimizing view hierarchy depth, avoiding unnecessary background colors, and merging overlapping views when possible.
Other Optimizations: Encourages performing expensive operations asynchronously in background threads to prevent UI thread blocking and using efficient data structures and algorithms for handling large data sets.
Chapter 10: Beta Testing Your Apps
This chapter focuses on the importance of beta testing in the final stages of app development before public release.
It explores the different stages of a typical software release cycle, including alpha, closed beta, open beta, and final release.
It guides you through using the Google Play Console to distribute your app to beta testers, manage tester groups, and collect valuable feedback.
It also covers:
Build Variants: Creating different versions of the app (e.g., free and paid versions) or tailoring the app for different device configurations.
Runtime Permissions: Handling permissions requests at runtime in Android Marshmallow (6.0) and later, providing a more user-friendly approach to app permissions.
Overall, “Android Studio Cookbook” aims to equip developers with practical knowledge, skills, and best practices for building high-quality, performant, and visually appealing Android applications. It covers a wide range of topics, from setting up the development environment and creating basic apps to integrating with cloud services, optimizing performance, and conducting thorough beta testing.
Here are three benefits of using a cloud-based backend solution for an Android app, based on the sources you provided and our previous conversation:
Simplified Backend Development: The sources explain that using a cloud-based backend can greatly simplify the development process, especially for apps that require backend functionalities such as data storage, user authentication, and push notifications [1-3]. Instead of building and maintaining your own server infrastructure, you can rely on the services provided by the cloud provider. For instance, Chapter 2 demonstrates how to set up Parse (now shut down) as a backend solution and leverage its capabilities to store and retrieve data for an Android app [2]. This allows developers to focus more on building the app’s frontend and user experience rather than spending time and resources on complex backend setup and maintenance.
Scalability and Flexibility: Cloud-based backend solutions are designed to scale dynamically to accommodate growing user bases and data demands [4]. As your app gains popularity, the cloud provider can automatically adjust resources to handle increased traffic and storage requirements. This eliminates the need for manual infrastructure management, making it easier to adapt to changing app usage patterns.
Cost-Effectiveness: Cloud-based solutions can be more cost-effective than building and maintaining your own backend infrastructure, especially for small to medium-sized projects [4]. With cloud services, you typically pay only for the resources you consume, which can be more economical than investing in servers, databases, and other hardware upfront. Chapter 2 mentions that Parse offers a free tier for developers with limited usage, providing a low-cost entry point for experimenting with cloud-based backends [4].
While the sources do not provide specific details on all aspects of cloud-based backends, these points highlight the key advantages they bring to Android app development. The use of a cloud-based solution can significantly streamline the development process, enhance scalability, and potentially reduce costs. It’s worth noting that while the sources discuss Parse, which is no longer operational, the concepts and benefits they present remain relevant to modern cloud backend services such as Firebase.
Here are the main advantages of using Android Studio over Eclipse, based on the information provided in the sources:
Android Studio is the Official IDE: The sources emphasize that Android Studio is the officially recommended IDE for Android app development [1, 2]. This means it’s the primary focus of Google’s development efforts for Android tools, ensuring it receives the latest updates, features, and support, unlike Eclipse which has been superseded. Switching to Android Studio aligns you with Google’s vision for Android development, giving you access to the most up-to-date and optimized tools for the platform.
Stability and Speed: The sources directly state that Android Studio is “stable and faster” compared to Eclipse with the Android Development Tools (ADT) plugin [2, 3]. This improved stability and performance can lead to a more efficient development workflow, reducing frustration and allowing developers to focus on building their apps.
Improved Features and Tooling: The sources highlight several specific areas where Android Studio offers significant advantages:
Gradle Integration: Android Studio uses Gradle as its build system [1, 4, 5], which provides more flexibility, automation, and control over the build process compared to the build tools used in Eclipse. Gradle’s features, such as dependency management, task automation, and build variants [6], streamline development and simplify handling complex project configurations.
Enhanced Refactoring: The sources state that Android Studio provides “better refactoring methods” [3, 4]. Refactoring is crucial for maintaining clean and understandable code as projects evolve. Android Studio’s more powerful refactoring tools, like the renaming example provided in Chapter 1 [7], help ensure code changes are made safely and consistently across the entire project, reducing the risk of errors.
Superior Layout Editor: Android Studio’s layout editor is described as “much better” than Eclipse’s [4]. The layout editor is a fundamental tool for designing the user interface of Android apps. A more intuitive and feature-rich layout editor can make UI design more efficient and help developers create more visually appealing and user-friendly apps.
Familiarity for IntelliJ IDEA Users: For developers already familiar with IntelliJ IDEA, the base IDE upon which Android Studio is built, the transition to Android Studio is smoother [3]. They can leverage their existing knowledge and skills to work effectively in the new environment.
The sources clearly position Android Studio as a significant improvement over Eclipse for Android app development. Its official status, stability, speed, and advanced features contribute to a more efficient and enjoyable development experience.
Applying Plugins
The apply plugin directive in a Gradle build file is used to add plugins to your project. Plugins extend the functionality of Gradle, providing specific capabilities and configurations for different types of projects or tasks. [1] For Android development, the com.android.application plugin is essential. This plugin enables Gradle to understand the structure of an Android project and provides the tasks needed to build and package an Android application. [1]
The sources don’t go into great detail about other plugins, but they do note that the Gradle system can handle complex scenarios like customizing apps for different customers (build flavors) or creating multiple APK files tailored to various device types and Android versions. [1] These functionalities are likely enabled by additional plugins that specialize in handling these tasks.
While the sources primarily focus on the com.android.application plugin, it’s important to remember that the apply plugin directive is a general mechanism for extending Gradle’s capabilities. Different plugins exist for various purposes, like handling dependencies, running tests, and more. The specific plugin you apply will depend on the needs and requirements of your project.
Advantages of the YouTube Android Player API
While the sources don’t directly compare the YouTube Android Player API to using a web view for playing YouTube videos, they do provide information that can be used to infer the benefits of using the API. Here’s a breakdown based on the available information:
Simplified Integration: The sources demonstrate how to integrate the YouTube Android Player API into an Android app in Chapter 5. The process involves adding the API as a dependency in the Gradle build file, obtaining an API key from the Google Developers Console, and initializing the player within the app’s code. This suggests that the API provides a streamlined approach to embedding YouTube playback functionality within an Android app.
Optimized for Android: The sources refer to the YouTube Android Player API as a solution provided by Google specifically for Android devices. This implies that the API is likely designed to take advantage of Android’s features and capabilities, potentially offering a more seamless and optimized user experience compared to a web view-based solution.
Direct Access to Player Controls: The sources show how to use the YouTubePlayer object obtained from the API to control video playback, such as cueing a video using its ID. This suggests that the API provides direct access to the player’s controls and functionalities, allowing developers to customize the playback experience within their apps.
Potential Performance Benefits: The sources emphasize the importance of optimizing memory usage and avoiding unnecessary object creation in Android apps to enhance performance. Using a native API like the YouTube Android Player API might offer performance advantages compared to loading a web view, especially on resource-constrained devices. Web views can consume significant memory and processing power, potentially leading to performance issues.
Reduced Development Effort: The sources highlight how certain libraries, like Picasso for image loading, can simplify development tasks and improve efficiency. Similarly, the YouTube Android Player API likely abstracts away complexities associated with handling video playback, allowing developers to focus on their app’s core functionality.
Potential for Enhanced Features: The sources mention additional playback options available through the YouTube Android Player API, such as fullscreen mode. This hints at the possibility of the API offering a wider range of features and customization options compared to a web view, which might be limited by the capabilities of the embedded browser.
It’s important to note that some of these benefits are based on inferences drawn from the source material and general knowledge of Android development practices. The sources don’t provide a direct comparison or explicitly state all these advantages. Further research or experimentation might be needed to confirm these assumptions fully. Additionally, the choice between the YouTube Android Player API and a web view might depend on specific project requirements, such as the level of customization needed, target audience, and performance considerations.
Comparing MVC and MVP for Android
The sources touch upon Model-View-Controller (MVC) and Model-View-Presenter (MVP) as design patterns for structuring code, particularly beneficial in larger projects. They primarily emphasize separating concerns—decoupling the UI from business logic—as the core advantage of these patterns. However, the sources provide a more in-depth explanation of how MVP aligns with the nature of Android development using Activities and Fragments.
Key Differences:
MVC:
Controller: Acts as an intermediary, fetching data from a repository and passing it to the view through a model.
View: Displays the data received from the controller.
Focus: On separation of concerns, making components independent and reusable.
MVP:
Presenter: Contains UI logic, receiving instructions from the view and interacting with the model.
View: A passive interface, simply displaying data and relaying user actions to the presenter.
Focus: More aligned with Android’s Activity/Fragment lifecycle, simplifying testing and improving UI responsiveness.
Suitability for Android:
The sources suggest that MVP is generally a more suitable pattern for Android development due to the following:
Activities and Fragments: Android relies heavily on Activities and Fragments for managing the UI. MVP’s clear separation of UI logic into the presenter complements this structure.
Testability: The presenter in MVP interacts with the view through an interface. This makes it easier to write unit tests by mocking the view and focusing on testing the presenter’s logic. [1]
UI Responsiveness: MVP can enhance UI responsiveness by offloading complex operations to the presenter, which operates independently of the UI thread. This prevents the UI from freezing while data is being fetched or processed.
The sources don’t explicitly state why MVC might be less suitable for Android, but based on our previous conversations, the following could be inferred:
Tight Coupling: MVC’s controller can become tightly coupled with the view, making it harder to test and modify independently. Android’s Activity lifecycle can exacerbate this issue.
Additional Insights:
Observer Pattern: The sources discuss the observer pattern in Chapter 7, noting its use in content providers to detect data changes. This pattern can also be integrated with MVC or MVP architectures to facilitate communication between different components, such as updating the view when the model changes. [1]
The Sources’ Example: The quiz app in Chapter 8 utilizes a variation of MVC. While not a strict implementation, it demonstrates the separation of data (Quiz and Question models), UI (Activities and Layouts), and control logic (Activity handling user interactions). [2-4]
Beyond the Sources (Independent Verification Advised): It’s important to note that these are not the only architectural patterns for Android development. Other patterns like Model-View-ViewModel (MVVM) are popular and offer different benefits. Exploring these patterns might be beneficial depending on project needs.
While the sources provide a concise overview of MVC and MVP, understanding their nuances and practical implications requires further exploration and experimentation within the context of Android app development.
Understanding and Reducing Overdraw in Android
Overdraw occurs when the system draws the same pixel multiple times in a single frame. This redundancy can significantly impact an app’s performance, leading to a less responsive and potentially laggy user interface. The sources focus on overdraw in Chapter 9, providing practical examples of how to identify and minimize it.
How Overdraw Happens
The sources illustrate overdraw using the example of a layout with nested views, each having its own background color. When these views overlap, the system ends up drawing the background of the underlying view, only to immediately draw the background of the view on top, leading to unnecessary drawing operations. This is particularly problematic on older or less powerful devices, where limited processing power can make even minor overdraw noticeable.
Identifying Overdraw
Chapter 9 outlines the steps to enable the “Debug GPU Overdraw” developer option on an Android device. This option visualizes overdraw using a color-coded overlay, making it easy to spot areas where pixels are being drawn excessively. The sources emphasize that an overdraw of up to two times is generally acceptable, but anything beyond that, particularly the red-colored areas indicating four or more draws, warrants investigation and optimization.
Mitigation Strategies
The sources provide a practical example of mitigating overdraw by optimizing the layout of a “bad” app. The steps involve:
Removing Unnecessary Backgrounds: The first step is to remove background properties from views that don’t contribute to the visual appearance of the app. The sources remove backgrounds from nested layouts and individual views within a list item, reducing the number of drawing operations.
Flattening the View Hierarchy: The sources recommend simplifying the layout structure by using more efficient layout techniques. They replace a TableLayout with a RelativeLayout, which is generally better at handling complex layouts with fewer nested views. The goal is to achieve the desired visual effect with the least possible number of overlapping views.
Utilizing Tools: The sources mention the importance of using performance tools like the Memory Monitor and CPU Monitor to analyze the impact of overdraw on an app’s performance. These tools help to identify bottlenecks and measure the effectiveness of optimization efforts.
Additional Considerations (Not Explicitly Mentioned in the Sources):
Custom Views: When creating custom views, it’s essential to optimize the onDraw() method to avoid unnecessary drawing operations. The Canvas object provides methods for clipping and defining drawing regions to prevent overdraw.
Transparency: Overdraw is particularly impactful when dealing with transparent views. The system needs to draw all the layers underneath a transparent view, even if they’re partially obscured. Minimizing the use of transparency and alpha blending can help reduce overdraw.
Merge Layers: In specific cases, merging multiple views into a single layer can help to optimize rendering performance. This approach can be beneficial when dealing with complex animations or transitions involving multiple views. However, excessive use of layer merging can lead to increased memory consumption, so it’s essential to use this technique judiciously.
While the sources primarily focus on layout optimization to address overdraw, it’s crucial to adopt a holistic approach considering all aspects of the app’s UI design and implementation. By understanding the causes of overdraw and utilizing the available tools and techniques, developers can create Android apps that deliver smooth and responsive user experiences.
The Lean Startup: A Methodology for App Development
The sources introduce the Lean Startup methodology as a valuable approach for developing applications, particularly when aiming to create apps that resonate with users and achieve market success. The methodology centers around the concept of iterative development, validated learning, and minimizing wasted effort by focusing on building a Minimum Viable Product (MVP) and continuously adapting based on user feedback.
Core Principles:
Build-Measure-Learn: This iterative cycle forms the foundation of the Lean Startup approach. The emphasis is on quickly building a basic version of the app (MVP), measuring its performance with real users, and learning from their interactions to inform future iterations. This cyclical process helps to identify what works and discard what doesn’t, leading to a more focused and efficient development process. [1]
Minimum Viable Product (MVP): An MVP is a stripped-down version of the app containing only the core features necessary to test key hypotheses about user needs and market demand. The goal is to launch the MVP quickly, gather user feedback, and validate assumptions before investing significant time and resources in developing a full-featured product. [1, 2]
Split Testing and Actionable Metrics: The sources highlight the importance of using data-driven decision-making in the Lean Startup methodology. Split testing (A/B testing), which involves comparing different versions of the app with slight variations, allows developers to measure the impact of specific changes on user behavior. This, combined with gathering actionable metrics through tools like Google Analytics, helps to understand how users interact with the app and identify areas for improvement. [2]
Continuous Deployment: This concept aligns well with the Lean Startup’s iterative nature. Continuous deployment involves automating the process of releasing updates and new features to users frequently. This allows for quicker feedback loops and enables developers to respond to user needs and market demands rapidly. The sources provide a brief overview of continuous integration and continuous delivery as key components of continuous deployment, suggesting that investing in setting up these processes can lead to a more streamlined and efficient development workflow. [3, 4]
Applying Lean Startup to App Development:
Idea Validation: Before writing a single line of code, the Lean Startup approach encourages app developers to test their assumptions about the app’s value proposition. This might involve conducting market research, surveying potential users, and creating prototypes to gather feedback and ensure there is a genuine need for the app.
Iterative Development: Instead of trying to build a perfect app from the outset, the focus shifts to developing an MVP with core features. This MVP is then released to a limited group of early adopters, and their feedback is used to prioritize future development efforts. This iterative approach reduces the risk of building features that users don’t need or want.
Data-Driven Decisions: The sources emphasize the importance of using data to guide decision-making throughout the development process. By tracking user behavior, analyzing metrics, and conducting split tests, developers can identify what resonates with users, what features are being used, and what needs improvement.
Continuous Improvement: The Lean Startup methodology promotes a culture of continuous learning and improvement. The feedback gathered from users and data analysis is used to refine the app, add new features, and address usability issues. This iterative process ensures that the app evolves based on real-world usage patterns and meets changing market demands.
Benefits for App Development:
Reduced Risk: By focusing on validating assumptions early and iterating based on user feedback, the Lean Startup approach minimizes the risk of building an app that fails to attract users or meet market needs.
Faster Time to Market: The MVP approach enables developers to launch a basic version of the app quickly, gather feedback, and start iterating sooner. This can lead to a faster time to market compared to traditional development methods that often involve lengthy planning and development cycles.
User-Centric Development: The Lean Startup methodology prioritizes user feedback throughout the development process. This ensures that the app is designed and built around real user needs and preferences, leading to a product that is more likely to resonate with the target audience.
Increased Efficiency: The iterative nature of the Lean Startup approach helps to minimize wasted effort by focusing development efforts on features and improvements that deliver tangible value to users.
Considerations:
Defining the MVP: Determining the essential features for the MVP can be challenging. It requires careful consideration of the app’s core value proposition and the hypotheses that need to be tested.
Gathering Feedback: Implementing effective mechanisms for gathering user feedback is crucial. This might involve in-app surveys, user interviews, or analyzing usage data.
Iteration Cycles: Managing the pace and scope of iteration cycles can be tricky. It’s important to find a balance between gathering sufficient feedback and iterating quickly enough to respond to changing market dynamics.
While the sources offer valuable insights into the Lean Startup methodology, it’s important to note that they only provide a brief overview of this extensive topic. Further research and exploration of resources dedicated to the Lean Startup approach would be beneficial for those seeking a comprehensive understanding and implementation guidance.
Runtime Permissions in Android Development
The sources primarily discuss runtime permissions in Chapter 10, focusing on the changes introduced in Android 6.0 (Marshmallow) and their implications for app development. Prior to Android 6.0, users granted permissions to apps at install time. However, the runtime permissions model shifts the responsibility of granting permissions to specific actions within the app, providing users with greater control over their privacy and data security.
Key Changes and Impacts:
Permission Granting at Runtime: Instead of granting permissions upfront during installation, the app now needs to request permissions from the user when the app needs to access a protected resource, such as the camera, contacts, or location. The sources provide an example of requesting the SEND_SMS permission in a messaging app, illustrating how the user is prompted with a dialog box at the time the app attempts to send an SMS.
User Experience: This change significantly impacts the user experience. Users are no longer overwhelmed with a list of permissions during installation but are instead presented with permission requests contextually, as and when the app requires them. This makes the permission model more transparent and user-friendly.
Development Approach: The runtime permissions model necessitates a shift in the development approach. Developers need to incorporate logic to handle permission requests, check the permission status, and gracefully handle situations where permissions are denied. The sources outline a step-by-step process for implementing runtime permissions, including using the checkSelfPermission() method to verify if a permission has been granted and the requestPermissions() method to request permissions from the user.
Handling Permission Denials: The sources emphasize the importance of handling situations where the user denies a permission request. The app should provide appropriate feedback to the user, explaining why the permission is required and potentially disabling features that rely on the denied permission. The example in the sources disables the “Send” button and the phone number input field when the SEND_SMS permission is denied.
Impact on Testing: The runtime permissions model adds another layer of complexity to app testing. Developers need to test different permission scenarios, ensuring the app functions correctly when permissions are granted, denied, and revoked. The sources don’t explicitly address testing strategies for runtime permissions but recommend testing on devices running Android 6.0 or higher, or using emulators that support the latest Android versions.
Additional Considerations:
Background Permissions: While the sources primarily focus on runtime permissions for actions triggered by user interaction, it’s worth noting that Android also handles background permissions differently. Apps targeting Android 10 (API level 29) or higher need to request the ACCESS_BACKGROUND_LOCATION permission separately if they need to access location data in the background.
Permission Groups: Android groups related permissions into categories, such as “Contacts,” “Location,” and “Storage.” When the user grants one permission within a group, the system automatically grants other permissions in the same group. However, if the user denies a permission, subsequent requests for other permissions within that group may be automatically denied as well.
Best Practices: Google provides guidelines on best practices for handling runtime permissions. These guidelines emphasize providing clear and concise explanations to users about why permissions are needed, requesting permissions only when necessary, and gracefully handling permission denials to avoid disrupting the user experience. You can find these guidelines on the Android Developers website.
Understanding and effectively implementing runtime permissions is crucial for developing Android apps that are both secure and user-friendly. By adapting to the changes introduced in Android 6.0 and subsequent versions, developers can create apps that respect user privacy while providing the functionality users expect.
The Android Manifest File: A Blueprint for Your App
The sources don’t provide a direct definition of the Android Manifest file, but its role and importance are evident throughout, particularly in Chapters 1, 2, 4, 7, 8, 9, and 10. The Android Manifest file, named AndroidManifest.xml, acts as a central configuration file for your Android application, providing essential information about the app to the Android operating system and other components. Think of it as a blueprint that outlines the structure, capabilities, and requirements of your app.
Key Purposes:
App Identification: The Manifest file declares the app’s unique package name, which serves as its identifier within the Android ecosystem. This is crucial for managing the app within app stores and for interactions between different apps on a device. For instance, when setting up a new project in Android Studio, you specify a Company Domain and an Application name that contribute to forming this unique package name, as described in Chapter 1.
Component Declaration: The Manifest file lists all the essential components that make up your app, such as Activities, Services, Broadcast Receivers, and Content Providers. Declaring these components in the Manifest makes them known to the Android system, allowing the system to launch and manage them appropriately. For example, adding a new activity like SignatureActivity requires a corresponding declaration in the manifest, as shown in Chapter 2.
Permissions Request: If your app needs to access sensitive data or system features, such as the camera, contacts, location, or the ability to send SMS messages, the Manifest file is where you declare these permissions. This informs the user about the app’s requirements and allows them to grant or deny these permissions. Chapter 10 highlights this aspect by demonstrating how to request the SEND_SMS permission, both in the traditional install-time model and the newer runtime permissions model introduced in Android 6.0.
Hardware and Software Feature Requirements: The Manifest file allows you to specify the hardware and software features that your app requires to function correctly. This information helps the Android system determine compatibility and ensures that the app is only installed on devices that meet its requirements. Chapter 5, while discussing app development for different screen sizes, mentions this aspect in the context of using fragments and multiple layouts to accommodate variations in device capabilities.
External Library Dependencies: While the Manifest file itself might not directly include external library dependencies, it often works in conjunction with build files (like build.gradle) to define the libraries and APIs that your app utilizes. For instance, when integrating Google Play services or Facebook SDK into your app, you might need to add specific entries in the Manifest file to configure these services, as demonstrated in Chapters 4 and 8.
Essential Tags:
<manifest>: This is the root element of the Manifest file, encompassing all other tags and declarations.
<application>: This tag provides information about the application as a whole, including its icon, label, theme, and the components it uses. You can specify the name of your application class within this tag, as shown in the example from Chapter 2.
<activity>: This tag declares an activity, a single screen in your app. You need to specify the name of the activity class and any intent filters that determine how the activity can be launched.
<service>: This tag declares a service, a component that runs in the background to perform long-running operations or to provide functionality to other apps.
<receiver>: This tag declares a broadcast receiver, a component that listens for system-wide events or broadcasts and responds accordingly.
<provider>: This tag declares a content provider, a component that manages access to a central repository of data that can be shared with other apps. Chapter 7 provides detailed examples of setting up and using content providers, including adding the <provider> tag to the Manifest file to declare the content provider and specify its authorities and permissions.
<uses-permission>: This tag requests permission to access a protected resource or feature. Chapter 10 discusses this tag in detail, highlighting the differences between traditional install-time permissions and runtime permissions.
<uses-feature>: This tag declares a hardware or software feature that your app requires. This information helps determine device compatibility and filter the app’s availability on app stores.
<meta-data>: This tag provides additional arbitrary data about your app, often used to configure external libraries or services that your app uses. For instance, when integrating with Google Play services, you might need to add a <meta-data> tag containing your app’s ID, as shown in Chapter 8.
Importance of the Manifest File:
Essential for App Functionality: The Manifest file is crucial for your app to function correctly. It provides the Android system with the information needed to launch, manage, and interact with the different components of your app.
Transparency and Security: By declaring permissions in the Manifest, the app becomes more transparent to users, allowing them to make informed decisions about granting access to their data or device features. This contributes to a more secure and trustworthy app ecosystem.
App Store Visibility and Compatibility: Information in the Manifest file, such as supported device features and API levels, influences how your app is presented on app stores and its compatibility with different devices.
Code Maintainability: Keeping the app’s configuration centralized in the Manifest file makes the code more organized and maintainable. It allows you to easily modify app settings and permissions without having to search through multiple code files.
While the sources provide a practical understanding of the Manifest file’s role in specific contexts, a more comprehensive understanding of the Manifest file and its various tags can be gained from the Android Developers documentation. The documentation provides detailed explanations of each tag, its attributes, and their usage, offering a valuable resource for developers seeking to leverage the full potential of the Android Manifest file in their applications.
Types of Fragmentation in Android Development
The sources primarily focus on software and hardware fragmentation in Android development. Chapter 1 of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf” emphasizes these two forms of fragmentation as significant challenges for Android developers. The chapter further mentions the impact of runtime permissions introduced in Android 6.0 (Marshmallow), which can be seen as an additional layer of fragmentation developers need to consider.
1. Software Fragmentation:
This refers to the wide range of Android versions in use across devices. As highlighted in Chapter 1, the existence of numerous Android versions means that developers cannot assume that all devices will be running on the latest version. The source presents a table (though the specific data is outdated) showing the distribution of Android platform versions and API levels. This distribution data is crucial for developers when deciding which minimum API level to target, balancing app features and functionality with the reach to a wider user base. Supporting older versions might mean sacrificing access to newer APIs and features, while targeting only the latest versions might limit the app’s potential user base.
2. Hardware Fragmentation:
Android devices come in a vast array of hardware configurations, including variations in screen sizes, resolutions, processors, memory, and available sensors. This diversity presents challenges for developers aiming to create apps that function consistently and optimally across different devices. The sources, especially Chapter 5, address this challenge by discussing strategies for building apps that adapt to various screen sizes and resolutions, primarily through the use of fragments and multiple layouts.
Chapter 1 specifically uses the example of an app that takes pictures. The chapter points out that not all Android devices have cameras, or might have multiple cameras with varying capabilities. This necessitates thoughtful design decisions on the developer’s part. Should the lack of a camera completely prevent a user from utilizing the app? Or can alternative functionalities be provided? This example illustrates the core challenge of hardware fragmentation—developers need to consider the potential hardware variations and either design their apps to gracefully handle these differences or clearly communicate limitations to the user.
3. Runtime Permissions as a Form of Fragmentation:
While not explicitly categorized as a type of fragmentation in the sources, the runtime permissions model introduced in Android 6.0 can be considered another form of fragmentation. This model, discussed extensively in Chapter 10, changes how apps request and obtain permissions to access sensitive resources like the camera or contacts. Prior to Android 6.0, users granted permissions at install time. With runtime permissions, however, apps need to request permissions when they are needed during runtime.
This shift introduces a new dimension of fragmentation because apps now need to handle different scenarios based on whether the user grants or denies the requested permissions. Additionally, the handling of runtime permissions can vary slightly across different Android versions and device manufacturers, adding another layer of complexity for developers to manage. This necessitates robust error handling, clear communication to the user, and thorough testing to ensure a seamless user experience regardless of the device’s Android version or the user’s permission choices.
Design Patterns for Android App Development
The sources highlight three specific design patterns beneficial for Android app development: MVC, MVP, and the Observer pattern. These patterns are discussed within Chapter 8, which focuses on improving code quality in Android apps.
1. MVC (Model-View-Controller):
The sources present MVC as a pattern particularly suitable for larger projects due to its emphasis on separation of concerns. In the MVC pattern:
The Model represents the data and business logic of the app.
The View is responsible for displaying the data to the user.
The Controller acts as an intermediary, handling user interactions, fetching data from the Model, and updating the View accordingly.
The sources point out that the Controller in an MVC architecture remains agnostic about the source of the data and the specific details of data presentation—these aspects are handled by the repository class (which fetches the data) and the UI, respectively. This separation promotes modularity and maintainability, allowing developers to modify different parts of the app without affecting other parts.
2. MVP (Model-View-Presenter):
The sources suggest that MVP is generally more suitable for Android app development compared to MVC. This suitability stems from the nature of Activities and Fragments in Android, which often handle both UI logic and user interactions. In the MVP pattern:
The Model remains the same as in MVC, representing the data and business logic.
The View, often an Activity or Fragment, is responsible for displaying data and capturing user interactions. It delegates all UI logic to the Presenter.
The Presenter acts as the intermediary between the View and the Model. It receives user input from the View, fetches data from the Model, processes the data, and updates the View accordingly.
The key advantage of MVP, as emphasized in the sources, is the clear separation between UI logic (handled by the Presenter) and UI elements (handled by the View). This separation is facilitated through an interface that the View implements and the Presenter interacts with. This interface-driven interaction makes it easier to write unit tests, as the Presenter can be tested independently of the actual View using mock data.
3. The Observer Pattern:
The sources introduce the Observer pattern in Chapter 7, which focuses on Content Providers and Observers. In the Observer pattern:
Subjects (or Observables) maintain a list of their dependents, called Observers.
Subjects notify their Observers of any state changes, usually by calling one of their methods.
This pattern is particularly useful for scenarios where changes in one part of the app need to be reflected in other parts without direct coupling between the components. The sources demonstrate this pattern through the use of Content Providers, which can notify registered Observers about data changes, even across different applications. This allows apps to react to data updates in a decoupled and efficient manner.
The sources provide a concise overview of these design patterns and their relevance to Android app development. For a more comprehensive understanding of design patterns and their implementations, it’s recommended to refer to dedicated resources on software design patterns and architecture.
Performance Issues in Android Apps
The sources emphasize three key performance issues that can significantly impact the user experience of Android applications: memory leaks, out of memory exceptions, and overdraw. These issues are discussed in Chapter 9, which is dedicated to improving performance in Android apps.
1. Memory Leaks:
Memory leaks occur when an application continues to hold references to objects that are no longer needed, preventing the Android garbage collector from reclaiming the associated memory. Over time, this can lead to excessive memory consumption, resulting in performance degradation, app sluggishness, and even app crashes.
The sources acknowledge that while Android’s garbage collector is designed to efficiently manage memory, it’s not infallible. Objects that remain reachable, even if they are no longer actively used by the app, will not be collected, leading to memory leaks. Chapter 9 explains that identifying memory leaks can be challenging. It introduces tools such as the Memory Monitor in Android Studio and the Allocation Tracker in the Android Device Monitor to help developers diagnose memory-related issues. These tools allow developers to monitor memory usage patterns, identify objects that are unexpectedly retaining memory, and trace the source of memory allocations to specific parts of the code.
2. Out of Memory Exceptions:
Out of Memory (OOM) exceptions occur when an application attempts to allocate more memory than the device has available. This typically results in a sudden app crash, frustrating users and potentially leading to data loss.
Chapter 9 highlights that processing large images, particularly on low-end devices with limited memory, is a common cause of OOM exceptions. Loading full-sized images into memory without proper optimization can quickly exhaust available resources, leading to crashes. The sources demonstrate this issue through a “bad app” example in Chapter 9, which intentionally loads full-sized images into a list view, ultimately triggering an OOM exception. The sources then present solutions to mitigate this issue, such as using the inSampleSize property of BitmapFactory.Options to load scaled-down versions of images or leveraging libraries like Picasso, which handles image resizing and caching efficiently.
3. Overdraw:
Overdraw happens when the system draws a pixel on the screen multiple times in a single frame. While some overdraw is inherent in Android’s rendering pipeline, excessive overdraw can significantly impact UI performance, leading to a less responsive and potentially laggy user experience.
Chapter 9 explains that overdraw is particularly problematic on older or less powerful devices with limited processing capabilities. It describes how to use the Debug GPU Overdraw developer option on Android devices to visualize overdraw in an app. This tool helps developers identify areas where unnecessary drawing operations are occurring. The sources provide practical tips for reducing overdraw, such as eliminating unnecessary background colors, flattening view hierarchies, and optimizing layouts to minimize the number of overlapping views.
Leveraging Google Play Services in Android Apps
The sources primarily focus on integrating Google Play Games Services into an Android application. Chapter 8 of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf,” which discusses improving code quality, provides a detailed walkthrough of creating a quiz app that incorporates these services. Based on this chapter, here are three key features of Google Play services that can enhance your Android app:
1. User Sign-In and Authentication:
Google Play services simplifies the process of user sign-in and authentication within Android apps. By leveraging the Google Sign-In API, developers can enable users to sign in to their apps using their existing Google accounts. This streamlined authentication process offers several benefits:
Improved User Experience: Users can seamlessly access your app without creating new accounts and remembering additional credentials.
Enhanced Security: Google’s robust authentication infrastructure strengthens the security of your app, protecting user data and reducing the risk of unauthorized access.
Access to Other Google Services: Sign-in through Google Play services can grant users access to other Google services integrated into your app, such as Google Drive for data storage or Google Maps for location-based features.
The quiz app example in Chapter 8 demonstrates the integration of Google Sign-In. The source code showcases how to configure the GoogleApiClient object, request the necessary scopes for accessing user information, and handle the sign-in process.
2. Leaderboards:
Leaderboards foster a sense of competition and engagement among users by allowing them to compare their progress and achievements with others. The Google Play Games Services API provides a framework for integrating leaderboards into Android apps. Developers can define and manage leaderboards through the Google Play Console, specifying scoring criteria and leaderboard settings. The API then allows apps to submit scores, retrieve leaderboard data, and display rankings within the app’s UI.
Chapter 8 demonstrates the implementation of leaderboards in the quiz app. It outlines the steps for creating a leaderboard in the Google Play Console, obtaining the leaderboard ID, and using the API to submit scores achieved by users within the quiz game.
3. Achievements:
Achievements provide a sense of accomplishment and encourage users to explore different aspects of an app or game. The Google Play Games Services API also enables the integration of achievements into Android apps. Developers can define various achievements in the Google Play Console, outlining the conditions required to unlock them. The API then allows apps to track user progress, award achievements when criteria are met, and display unlocked achievements to users.
While the quiz app in Chapter 8 focuses primarily on user sign-in and leaderboards, the integration of achievements follows a similar pattern. The source code provides insights into how to handle connections to Google Play services, submit data like scores and achievements, and interact with the various components of the Google Play Games Services API.
Key Elements of the Lean Start-up Methodology
The sources, specifically Chapter 10 of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf” which discusses beta testing and releasing Android apps, briefly introduce the Lean Start-up methodology as a valuable approach for app development. The sources emphasize the importance of not just focusing on technical aspects but also understanding user needs and iteratively refining an app based on user feedback.
Here are three key elements of the Lean Start-up methodology as highlighted in the sources:
1. Minimum Viable Product (MVP)
The sources describe the MVP as a version of a product that requires minimal effort to develop and is specifically designed to test key hypotheses about user needs and preferences. The core idea behind an MVP is to quickly get a functional product into the hands of users to gather feedback and validate assumptions.
Instead of investing significant time and resources into building a feature-rich application from the outset, the Lean Start-up methodology advocates for creating a stripped-down version that focuses on the core value proposition of the app. This MVP allows developers to:
Test Key Hypotheses: An MVP allows developers to test their assumptions about what users truly need and value. This early feedback can help identify potential flaws in the app’s concept or uncover unanticipated user needs.
Gather User Feedback: The MVP serves as a tool to gather valuable feedback from early adopters. This feedback can guide subsequent development iterations, ensuring that the app evolves in a direction that aligns with user expectations and market demands.
Iterate Rapidly: The feedback gathered from the MVP allows developers to iterate rapidly, adding or modifying features based on user input. This iterative approach minimizes the risk of building features that users don’t find valuable or investing resources in directions that prove to be unproductive.
The sources don’t provide specific examples of MVPs for Android apps, but imagine a fitness tracking app. An MVP might initially focus solely on tracking steps and calories burned, postponing the development of more complex features like sleep monitoring or heart rate analysis until the core functionality is validated and user feedback is gathered.
2. Split Testing and Actionable Metrics
The sources briefly mention split testing (also known as A/B testing) as a valuable technique within the Lean Start-up methodology. Split testing involves creating multiple versions of a feature or element within an app and randomly assigning users to different versions. By tracking user behavior and engagement across these variations, developers can gather data on which version performs better in terms of specific metrics, such as click-through rates, conversion rates, or user retention.
The sources emphasize the importance of actionable metrics, meaning that the data gathered should be directly relevant to the hypotheses being tested and should provide clear guidance for further development. By focusing on measurable outcomes, developers can make informed decisions about which features to prioritize, which variations resonate better with users, and how to optimize the app for user engagement and satisfaction.
The sources highlight the Google Play Store Developer Console as a platform that offers options for conducting split testing and gathering valuable data on app usage. It also mentions Google Analytics as a tool that can provide actionable metrics to guide the development process.
Imagine testing different onboarding flows for a new user in an e-commerce app. Split testing could involve creating two variations: one with a detailed step-by-step walkthrough and another with a more streamlined approach. By tracking user completion rates and engagement with subsequent features, developers can determine which onboarding flow leads to better user retention and long-term engagement with the app.
3. Continuous Deployment
The sources suggest that continuous deployment, a practice closely aligned with the principles of the Lean Start-up methodology, can enhance the quality and speed of app development. Continuous deployment involves automating the process of releasing software updates to users. This typically involves a robust automated testing framework that ensures code quality and stability, along with tools that streamline the deployment process to app stores or other distribution channels.
The sources acknowledge that setting up a continuous deployment pipeline requires some upfront effort but ultimately results in shorter development cycles and a more rapid release cadence. This allows developers to get new features and improvements into the hands of users quickly, gathering feedback and iterating based on real-world usage. The sources recommend tools like Jenkins and TeamCity for implementing continuous deployment pipelines for Android apps.
For example, imagine a social media app that wants to roll out a new messaging feature. With continuous deployment, every code change that passes the automated tests could automatically trigger a new release to a select group of beta testers. This rapid feedback loop allows developers to address issues quickly and refine the feature based on real-world usage before making it available to a wider audience.
It’s important to note that the sources provide a high-level overview of continuous deployment. This practice often involves complex technical implementations and infrastructure considerations, which are beyond the scope of the provided material.
The Lean Start-up methodology, as presented in the sources, emphasizes a data-driven and user-centric approach to app development. By embracing these key elements—MVPs, split testing, and continuous deployment—developers can create apps that are more closely aligned with user needs, are iteratively refined based on feedback, and are released to market more efficiently.
Install-Time vs. Runtime Permissions in Android
Chapter 10 of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf,” specifically the section titled “Runtime Permissions,” explains how the permission model changed with the introduction of Android 6.0 (Marshmallow). The sources, however, do not use the term “install-time permissions” explicitly. For clarity, it’s important to understand that install-time permissions refer to the traditional permission model in Android versions prior to Marshmallow.
Traditional Install-Time Permissions
Before Android Marshmallow, when a user installed an app, they were presented with a list of all the permissions that the app required. The user had to grant all these permissions upfront at the time of installation. If they declined any permission, the app could not be installed. This approach had some drawbacks:
Overwhelming Users: Users were often confronted with a long list of permissions without a clear understanding of why each permission was necessary. This could lead to confusion and reluctance to install apps, even if only a few of the permissions were critical to the app’s core functionality.
Limited User Control: Once a user granted permissions at installation, they had little control over how the app used those permissions. The app could potentially access sensitive data or perform actions that the user might not have intended or been aware of.
Android Marshmallow Runtime Permissions
Android 6.0 introduced a new runtime permission model that aimed to address these issues and give users more granular control over app permissions. Here’s how runtime permissions differ from traditional install-time permissions:
Permissions Requested at Runtime: Instead of requesting all permissions upfront at installation, apps now request permissions only when they are actually needed during the app’s execution. This means that users are not overwhelmed with a list of permissions at installation and are only prompted for permissions when the app is about to use a feature that requires that specific permission.
Granular User Control: Users have the ability to grant or deny individual permissions at runtime. This gives them greater control over what data and functionalities the app can access. Users can also revoke permissions that they have previously granted through the device’s settings.
Contextual Permission Requests: The runtime permission model encourages developers to provide users with context when requesting permissions. Apps can display a dialog explaining why a particular permission is needed, making it more transparent to users why the app is requesting access to sensitive data or functionalities.
Chapter 10 provides a practical example of implementing runtime permissions by modifying a messaging app to request the SEND_SMS permission only when the user attempts to send an SMS message. The source code demonstrates how to:
Check for Permission: Use the checkSelfPermission() method to determine if the app already has the necessary permission.
Request Permission: If the permission is not granted, use the requestPermissions() method to prompt the user for permission.
Handle Permission Response: Implement the onRequestPermissionsResult() method to handle the user’s response to the permission request, taking appropriate actions based on whether the permission was granted or denied.
The runtime permission model in Android Marshmallow represents a significant shift toward enhancing user privacy and control over app behavior. It encourages developers to design apps that are more transparent in their permission requests and to provide users with a better understanding of how their data is being used.
The build.gradle File: Orchestrating Android Studio Projects
The build.gradle file plays a pivotal role in Android Studio projects, serving as a central configuration point for managing dependencies, build processes, and project settings. The sources, primarily Chapter 1 of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf”, which introduces the fundamentals of Android Studio, highlight various aspects of the build.gradle file, emphasizing its significance in streamlining and controlling the build process.
Managing Dependencies
The build.gradle file is where developers declare external libraries and modules that their project depends on. These dependencies could include:
Remote Libraries: Libraries hosted in repositories like jCenter, Maven Central, or custom repositories.
Local Libraries: Libraries or JAR files included directly within the project’s directory structure.
The sources provide examples of declaring dependencies for libraries such as Parse, Universal Image Loader, and Gson:
The compile keyword indicates that the specified libraries are required during the compilation phase of the project. Gradle, the build system used by Android Studio, automatically fetches these dependencies and makes them available for the project to use. This centralized dependency management simplifies the process of incorporating external libraries and ensures that the project has access to the necessary code and resources.
Configuring Build Settings
The build.gradle file allows developers to fine-tune various build settings, including:
SDK Versions:compileSdkVersion: Specifies the Android SDK version against which the app is compiled. This determines which APIs and features are available during development.
minSdkVersion: Sets the minimum Android version required to run the app. This ensures compatibility with a range of devices.
targetSdkVersion: Indicates the Android version that the app is designed to target. This helps the system optimize the app’s behavior for that specific version.
Versioning:versionCode: An integer that represents the version of the app for internal use, typically incrementing with each release.
versionName: A user-friendly string that represents the version of the app for display to users.
Build Types: Defines different build configurations, such as debug for development and release for distribution. Build types can specify different settings, such as code optimization levels or whether to include debugging symbols.
Build Flavors: Allows creating different versions of the app within a single project. Flavors can be used to customize the app for specific device types, regions, or branding requirements.
The sources provide an example of a basic build.gradle file:
apply plugin: ‘com.android.application’
android {
compileSdkVersion 21
buildToolsVersion “21.0.0”
defaultConfig {
minSdkVersion 8
targetSdkVersion 21
versionCode 1
versionName “0.1”
}
}
dependencies {
compile fileTree(dir: ‘libs’, include: [‘*.jar’])
}
Gradle: The Engine Behind the Build
It’s worth emphasizing that the build.gradle file is processed by Gradle, a powerful and flexible build automation system. Gradle uses a domain-specific language (DSL) based on Groovy, a Java-compatible scripting language, to define build tasks and configurations. This DSL allows for a concise and expressive way to specify build logic.
The sources mention that Gradle is designed to handle complex build scenarios, such as:
Customized App Versions: Creating different builds of the same app tailored for specific customers or requirements, often referred to as “build flavors.”
Multiple APKs: Generating different APK (Android Package) files for different device architectures, screen densities, or Android versions.
Beyond the Basics
While the sources provide a foundational understanding of the build.gradle file, there are numerous other configurations and customizations that are possible. Gradle’s flexibility extends to tasks such as:
Code Signing: Configuring the signing process for release builds, ensuring the authenticity and integrity of the distributed APK.
ProGuard Optimization: Enabling code shrinking and obfuscation to reduce the app’s size and make reverse engineering more difficult.
Testing Integration: Integrating unit testing frameworks like JUnit or UI testing frameworks like Espresso into the build process.
Custom Build Tasks: Defining custom build tasks to automate specific actions or processes during the build lifecycle.
The build.gradle file, in conjunction with Gradle, empowers developers to manage dependencies, customize build settings, and automate the build process in a flexible and efficient manner. While the sources highlight fundamental aspects of this file, understanding the full capabilities of Gradle opens up a world of possibilities for optimizing and tailoring Android app builds.
Advantages of the Android Camera2 API
Chapter 6 of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf” focuses on capturing and sharing images within Android apps. It provides insights into the benefits of using the Camera2 API, introduced in Android 5.0 (Lollipop), compared to the older Camera API. While the sources don’t explicitly list the drawbacks of the older API, the capabilities of the Camera2 API strongly imply the limitations of its predecessor.
Fine-Grained Control and Flexibility
The Camera2 API empowers developers with significantly greater control over the camera hardware and image capture process, offering features that were previously unavailable or difficult to implement with the older Camera API. Some key areas where Camera2 excels include:
Manual Control Settings: Camera2 allows adjusting parameters like exposure time, ISO sensitivity, and focus distance, providing greater creative freedom for capturing images. This level of manual control was largely absent in the older API.
RAW Image Capture: Supporting the capture of images in RAW format, preserving more image data and providing greater flexibility for post-processing. This feature was not available in the older Camera API, limiting the quality and editing capabilities of captured images.
Burst Capture and High Frame Rate Video: Enabling the capture of bursts of images or video recording at high frame rates, opening possibilities for capturing fast-moving subjects or creating slow-motion effects. These capabilities were either limited or nonexistent in the older API.
Improved Preview Control: Providing more control over the camera preview, allowing developers to customize the preview experience and implement features like live filters or overlays. The older API offered limited preview customization options.
Asynchronous Operations and Performance
The Camera2 API is designed with asynchronous operations in mind, making it more efficient and responsive, particularly when handling complex image capture tasks. This asynchronous approach contrasts with the older Camera API, which often relied on blocking operations, potentially leading to performance bottlenecks or UI freezes.
Key aspects of Camera2’s asynchronous design include:
Non-Blocking Capture Requests: Capture requests are sent asynchronously, allowing the app to continue other operations while the camera hardware processes the request. This prevents the app from hanging or becoming unresponsive while waiting for the capture to complete.
Callbacks for Capture Events: The API provides callbacks to notify the app about various events during the capture process, such as capture progress, completion, or errors. This allows the app to react to capture events dynamically without having to poll the camera status repeatedly.
Background Threads for Processing: Camera operations can be offloaded to background threads, freeing up the main UI thread and ensuring a smoother user experience. The older Camera API often required performing camera-related tasks on the main thread, potentially leading to UI sluggishness.
The Camera2 API Implementation
The sources offer a step-by-step guide to building an image capture app using the Camera2 API. The code examples showcase the various classes and methods involved in managing the camera, previewing the image, and capturing a still photograph.
Note: The sources provide an in-depth analysis of the Camera2 API sample code but do not explicitly list the downsides of the old Camera API. Information about the limitations of the old API is derived from the context of the capabilities offered by the Camera2 API and my general knowledge of Android camera development. It’s recommended to consult additional resources or documentation for a more comprehensive comparison between the two APIs.
The Camera2 API, with its fine-grained control, asynchronous operations, and enhanced capabilities, represents a significant advancement in Android camera development. It allows developers to create more sophisticated and feature-rich camera apps, offering users a better and more versatile image capture experience.
Enhancing Adaptability with Fragments: Designing for Diverse Screen Sizes
The sources, particularly Chapter 5 (“Size Does Matter”) of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf”, emphasize the importance of designing Android apps that can adapt to various screen sizes and device types. Fragments emerge as a crucial tool in achieving this adaptability, allowing developers to create modular and reusable UI components that can be arranged and displayed differently depending on the available screen real estate.
Fragments: Building Blocks of Flexibility
Fragments, as described in the sources, are self-contained units of functionality and UI that can be embedded within activities. They possess their own lifecycles, layouts, and event handling mechanisms, making them highly modular and independent.
Addressing the “List-Detail” Challenge
The sources use the classic “list-detail” pattern to illustrate the benefits of fragments in handling different screen sizes. On a phone with a limited screen, a common approach is to display a list of items and then navigate to a separate screen to show the details of a selected item. However, on a tablet with a larger screen, it’s more user-friendly to show both the list and the details side-by-side in a single view.
Fragments in Action
The sources provide code examples demonstrating how to implement this adaptive layout using fragments:
ListFragment: A fragment responsible for displaying the list of items, often using a ListView or RecyclerView.
DetailsFragment: A fragment responsible for presenting the details of a selected item.
Layout Strategies
The sources outline two main layout strategies:
Phone Layout: For smaller screens, the activity_main.xml layout would contain a single container (FrameLayout) to hold either the ListFragment or the DetailsFragment. Navigation between these fragments would be handled programmatically.
Tablet Layout: For larger screens, a different layout file, perhaps named activity_main.xml (placed in the layout-large directory), would define two separate containers, one for the ListFragment and one for the DetailsFragment, allowing them to be displayed side-by-side.
Code Reusability and Maintainability
By employing fragments, developers can reuse the same ListFragment and DetailsFragment code for both phone and tablet layouts, reducing code duplication and simplifying maintenance. The logic for fetching data, handling user interactions, and updating the UI remains consistent, regardless of the screen size or layout.
Dynamic Fragment Management
The sources also highlight the dynamic nature of fragments, allowing them to be added, removed, or replaced within an activity at runtime. This flexibility enables developers to create more interactive and responsive user experiences, adapting the UI based on user actions or changes in screen orientation.
Beyond List-Detail
While the list-detail pattern provides a clear example, fragments can be used in various scenarios to create adaptive and flexible layouts. For instance, fragments can be used to:
Implement Tabbed Interfaces: Each tab can be represented by a separate fragment, providing a modular way to organize content.
Create Multi-Pane Layouts: Similar to the tablet layout example, fragments can be arranged in multiple panes to utilize larger screen spaces effectively.
Build Customizable UIs: Users can be given options to add or remove fragments to tailor the app’s interface to their preferences.
Fragments play a vital role in designing Android apps that can seamlessly adapt to a variety of screen sizes. Their modularity, reusability, and dynamic nature empower developers to create responsive and user-friendly interfaces that provide an optimal experience across a wide range of devices.
The Purpose of a Minimum Viable Product (MVP)
The sources, specifically Chapter 10 (“Beta Testing Your Apps”) of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf,” introduce the concept of the “minimum viable product (MVP)” within the context of the Lean Start-up methodology. The sources highlight that the MVP serves as a foundational element in this iterative and user-centered approach to product development.
MVP: Embracing Efficiency and Early Validation
The primary purpose of an MVP is to create a version of a product with the least amount of effort required to test specific hypotheses about user needs and preferences. This stripped-down version focuses on delivering core functionalities that address a fundamental problem or fulfill a key user requirement, while intentionally omitting non-essential features or refinements.
The sources emphasize that building an MVP allows startups to:
Gather Feedback Rapidly: By releasing an MVP quickly, startups can get their product into the hands of early adopters or beta testers, obtaining valuable feedback on its usability, desirability, and market fit.
Validate Assumptions: An MVP helps test the underlying assumptions about user needs, market demand, and the problem the product aims to solve. The feedback collected from users using the MVP provides crucial insights into whether these assumptions hold true.
Iterate and Improve: Based on the feedback and data gathered from the MVP, startups can make informed decisions about future development. They can prioritize features, refine existing functionalities, or even pivot to a different direction if the MVP reveals significant flaws or misaligned assumptions.
MVP Development Cycle
The Lean Start-up methodology, as described in the sources, revolves around a “Build – Measure – Learn” cycle. The MVP plays a crucial role in this cycle:
Build: Develop a minimum viable product that delivers the core value proposition.
Measure: Gather data and feedback from users interacting with the MVP. Analyze user behavior, engagement metrics, and feedback on features and usability.
Learn: Extract insights from the collected data and feedback. Identify areas for improvement, validate or invalidate hypotheses about user needs, and make data-driven decisions about future development.
This iterative process emphasizes continuous learning and adaptation based on real-world user interactions, rather than relying solely on assumptions or predictions.
Key Characteristics of an MVP
The sources do not provide an explicit definition of the characteristics of an MVP. However, based on their description, an MVP typically possesses the following traits:
Core Functionality: Focuses on delivering the essential features that address the primary user need or problem.
Simplicity: Strives for a simple and straightforward design, avoiding unnecessary complexity or features that haven’t been validated.
Rapid Development: Emphasizes speed in getting the product to market to start gathering user feedback as soon as possible.
Benefits of the MVP Approach
The sources highlight the following benefits of using an MVP:
Reduced Development Time and Costs: By focusing on core features, startups can significantly reduce development time and associated costs, allowing them to iterate more quickly and efficiently.
Lower Risk: The MVP approach minimizes the risk of investing significant resources in a product that may not resonate with the target market. Early validation helps avoid costly mistakes or building features that users don’t value.
Increased User Focus: The iterative nature of the MVP development cycle ensures that the product remains aligned with user needs and preferences throughout the development process.
Continuous Deployment and the MVP
The sources also mention continuous deployment as a practice that aligns well with the Lean Start-up methodology and the MVP approach. Continuous deployment involves automating the release process, allowing for frequent and incremental updates to the product based on user feedback and development progress.
It is important to note that while the sources provide valuable insights into the purpose and benefits of an MVP, they do not offer detailed guidance on how to define or build an MVP for a specific product. The process of identifying core features, prioritizing development, and designing the MVP will vary depending on the nature of the product and the target market.
The MVP concept, as presented in the sources, highlights the importance of a data-driven and iterative approach to product development, emphasizing early validation, user feedback, and continuous learning. It represents a strategic approach to minimizing risk, maximizing efficiency, and ensuring that the final product meets the genuine needs of its target users.
Three Stages of a Typical Software Release Cycle
The sources, specifically Chapter 10 (“Beta Testing Your Apps”) of “0409-Android Studio Cookbook.pdf,” and our conversation about the Lean Start-up methodology provide information about a typical software release cycle. While the sources do not explicitly list three distinct stages, they describe a general flow that can be understood as encompassing three primary phases:
Alpha: This initial stage involves internal testing within the development team or a small group of trusted testers. The focus during the alpha phase is on identifying and resolving major bugs, evaluating core functionalities, and gathering early feedback on the app’s usability and performance. The app in this phase is often incomplete and may have limited features or functionalities. The primary goal is to ensure that the foundation of the app is stable and functions as intended.
Beta (Closed and Open): The beta phase expands the testing audience to a wider group of users outside the development team. The beta phase can be further divided into two sub-stages:
Closed Beta: This involves a controlled release to a select group of invited beta testers. The selection criteria for testers might include demographics, technical expertise, or specific user behaviors that align with the target audience. This stage allows for more focused feedback from a representative user group.
Open Beta: This involves a public release of the app, making it available to a wider audience. Open beta testing helps gather feedback from a larger and more diverse user group, identifying potential issues or usability problems that might not have surfaced during closed beta testing.
Release: This final stage marks the official launch of the app to the general public, typically through app stores like the Google Play Store. By this stage, the app has undergone rigorous testing and refinement based on feedback from the alpha and beta phases. The release version should be stable, feature-complete, and optimized for performance across a range of devices.
Continuous Deployment and Iterative Releases
The sources, particularly in the context of the Lean Start-up methodology, emphasize continuous deployment and iterative releases. This suggests that even after the initial release, the software development cycle continues. New features, bug fixes, and performance improvements are released regularly based on user feedback and ongoing development efforts.
Google Play Store Beta Distribution
The sources provide specific instructions on using the Google Play Store’s beta distribution feature to manage beta releases effectively. This feature allows developers to control the release of beta versions to specific groups of testers and gather valuable feedback before the official public launch.
The three-stage software release cycle, as outlined in the sources and our previous conversations, highlights the importance of iterative development, user feedback, and continuous improvement in creating high-quality apps that meet the needs of their target audience.
Here is a chapter-by-chapter summary of the book “Android Studio Cookbook”:
Chapter 1: Welcome to Android Studio
This chapter introduces the reader to Android Studio and covers basic tasks. [1]
It discusses the advantages of Android Studio, including its user-friendly interface, powerful tools, and efficient workflow. [1, 2]
It guides the reader through setting up Android Studio and creating a simple “Hello World” application. [1, 3]
It also introduces Genymotion, a fast and feature-rich emulator for testing apps on different devices. [1, 4]
The chapter emphasizes the importance of code refactoring for improving code readability and maintainability. [1, 5]
Chapter 2: Applications with a Cloud-based Backend
This chapter focuses on building apps that utilize a cloud-based backend, specifically Parse. [6]
It provides step-by-step instructions for setting up a Parse account and integrating it into an Android app. [7, 8]
The chapter covers consuming data from the cloud using Parse queries, enabling app to retrieve and display data stored on the Parse platform. [7, 9]
It also guides the reader through submitting data to the Parse cloud, allowing app to store data generated by user interactions. [7, 10]
The chapter highlights Parse’s features, including its ability to store different data types, handle user authentication, and provide push notifications. [11, 12]
Chapter 3: Material Design
This chapter introduces Material Design, Google’s design language for creating visually appealing and user-friendly Android apps. [13]
It explains the key principles of Material Design, including the use of depth and shadows, vibrant colors, and meaningful animations. [13]
It focuses on implementing Material Design components such as Recycler Views and Card Views, which improve list display and create visually appealing cards. [13-15]
It guides the reader through adding ripples (visual feedback upon touch) and elevations to enhance the user experience by providing visual cues. [13, 16]
The chapter also covers creating smooth transitions between different screens and views, enhancing the visual appeal of the app. [13, 17]
Chapter 4: Android Wear
This chapter introduces Android Wear, Google’s platform for wearable devices. [18]
It covers the basics of developing apps for Android Wear devices, including creating fullscreen wearable apps. [18, 19]
It provides step-by-step instructions for building custom watch faces, allowing developers to design unique and personalized watch faces for users. [18, 20]
The chapter focuses on integrating notifications from Android phones to Android Wear devices, enabling users to receive timely and relevant information on their wearables. [18, 20]
It highlights the differences in user interaction between Android Wear devices and traditional Android phones and the need to consider these differences during the design and development process. [20]
Chapter 5: Size Does Matter
This chapter addresses the challenge of building Android apps that work seamlessly across devices with different screen sizes, including phones, phablets, tablets, and TVs. [21, 22]
It stresses the importance of considering screen size and context when designing app layouts and user interfaces. [23]
It provides practical tips and techniques for creating responsive layouts that adapt to different screen sizes and orientations. [24]
It covers the use of Fragments, which are modular UI components, for creating flexible and reusable layouts. [24]
This chapter also guides the reader through integrating the YouTube API, allowing apps to search for and display YouTube videos within the app. [21, 25, 26]
It provides insights into adapting app navigation and interaction patterns for TVs, considering the unique characteristics of TV screens and user behavior. [22]
Chapter 6: Capture and Share
This chapter focuses on capturing images using the device’s camera and sharing them with other apps or social media platforms. [27]
It guides the reader through integrating the Camera2 API, providing more control over the camera hardware and advanced features like manual control and raw image capture. [27, 28]
It covers the basics of image capturing, including handling camera preview, setting camera parameters, and capturing still images. [29, 30]
It provides a step-by-step guide on sharing images to the Facebook platform, including handling authentication, creating share dialogs, and publishing images to the user’s timeline. [27, 31]
It addresses orientation issues that can arise when capturing and displaying images, ensuring images are displayed correctly regardless of the device orientation. [28]
Chapter 7: Content Providers and Observers
This chapter explores Content Providers, a powerful mechanism in Android for sharing data between different apps. [32, 33]
It explains how Content Providers work, including the concepts of URIs, ContentResolver, and Cursors. [33]
It provides step-by-step instructions for creating a custom Content Provider to expose data from the app’s SQLite database to other applications. [34, 35]
It guides the reader through consuming data from a Content Provider, enabling app to access and display data provided by other apps. [32, 34]
The chapter also covers the concept of Content Observers, which allows apps to be notified of data changes in a Content Provider, enabling them to update their UI or perform other actions in response to data updates. [33, 36]
It demonstrates how Content Providers can be used to display Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) in the app. [32, 37, 38]
Chapter 8: Improving Quality
This chapter focuses on improving the quality of Android apps through the use of design patterns, unit testing, and code analysis. [39, 40]
It introduces various design patterns commonly used in Android development, including MVC, MVP, Observer, Factory, and Singleton patterns. [41, 42]
It provides practical examples of how to implement these patterns to create well-structured, maintainable, and scalable code. [42]
It guides the reader through unit testing using Robolectric, a framework that allows running unit tests directly on the JVM without the need for an emulator or device. [39, 43]
It covers code analysis using Android Lint, a static analysis tool that helps identify potential bugs, performance issues, and code style violations. [39, 44]
The chapter emphasizes the importance of regular testing and code analysis to catch and fix issues early in the development cycle. [39, 44]
Chapter 9: Improving Performance
This chapter addresses performance optimization in Android apps, ensuring apps run smoothly and efficiently, even on low-end devices. [45, 46]
It introduces memory profilers and performance tools available in Android Studio, including the Memory Monitor, Allocation Tracker, and Heap Viewer. [46-48]
It guides the reader through using these tools to identify memory leaks, analyze memory usage, and pinpoint performance bottlenecks in the app. [47-49]
The chapter highlights common performance pitfalls in Android app development, such as inefficient bitmap handling, excessive layouts, and overdraw issues. [46, 50, 51]
It provides practical tips and techniques for optimizing memory usage, including using efficient image loading libraries, recycling bitmaps, and reducing layout complexity. [50, 52, 53]
It covers the concept of overdraw, which occurs when the system draws the same pixel multiple times, and provides strategies for reducing overdraw. [46, 54]
Chapter 10: Beta Testing Your Apps
This chapter focuses on the final stages of app development, specifically beta testing and preparing the app for release on the Google Play Store. [55]
It explains the importance of beta testing for gathering feedback from users and identifying bugs before a wider release. [55]
It covers the use of build variants in Android Studio, which allows creating different versions of the app for testing and distribution. [55]
It guides the reader through setting up and managing runtime permissions in Android 6.0 (Marshmallow) and later, where permissions are requested at runtime instead of during installation. [55, 56]
It provides step-by-step instructions for publishing the app to the Google Play Store for beta testing, including creating a Google Play Developer account, setting up a testing track, and distributing the app to beta testers. [55, 57, 58]
Please note that this summary is based on the provided excerpts from the book “Android Studio Cookbook”. It is not an exhaustive summary of the book and there may be information not mentioned here. You may wish to consult the complete book for a more detailed and comprehensive understanding of the topics covered.
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
Rohan’s writing laments the historical divisions and violence that have plagued the region of Hindustan. It expresses nostalgia for a time when diverse cultures coexisted peacefully. The text criticizes religious traders and terrorists for disrupting this harmony and instigating conflict. It accuses certain groups of prioritizing profit over the well-being of the country’s inhabitants and highlights perceived injustices against Hindus during the partition. The writing further condemns the treatment of Bengalis, Balochs, and Pashtuns, alleging atrocities and betrayals. Overall, the author conveys a sense of betrayal, loss, and a plea to end cycles of violence and division and speaks of continuing human rights abuses.
Hindustan: A Land Divided – Study Guide
I. Quiz
Answer each question in 2-3 sentences.
According to the author, what characteristics have historically defined the land of Hindustan?
What event does the author identify as the beginning of the division of Hindustan?
How does the author describe the actions of some Hindus following the partition?
What specific actions does the author accuse Pakistan of taking against India after partition?
What is the significance of the “two-nation theory” in the author’s argument?
What happened to the “Bangla brother” mentioned by the author, and what does it represent?
What are the Baloch and Pashtun communities currently experiencing, according to the author?
What specific historical event involving a Baloch girl does the author reference?
How did Pakistan allegedly violate promises of safety made to Baloch leaders?
What question about the Baloch people does the author pose at the end of the excerpt?
II. Quiz – Answer Key
Hindustan has historically been a land known for its multi-religious, multi-communal, multi-cultural, and multi-lingual identity. It was considered a land of saints, sages, devotees, monks, and Sufis, embodying unity and peace.
The author identifies the arrival of “traders of religion” as the beginning of the division, who divided the beautiful land by establishing “furnaces of gunpowder for profit.” This signifies the introduction of religious conflict and violence for self-gain.
Despite the violence and killings in Lahore, some Hindus in Delhi showed patience and tolerance, keeping residents or infiltrators close to their hearts. The author also describes them granting loans to the newly formed Pakistan.
The author accuses Pakistan of sending terrorists into India after partition, instigating events like the Kargil War, the Pulwama attack, and the Pathankot attack. They also accused them of attacking the Lok Sabha in Delhi, and sending terrorists to Mumbai.
The “two-nation theory” is presented as the basis for the mistreatment of religious minorities and internal ethnic groups within Pakistan. The author argues the theory was not aligned with those who were being targeted and oppressed within the newly formed state of Pakistan.
The “Bangla brother,” referring to a leader from Bangladesh, was imprisoned by Pakistani authorities despite being elected with a heavy majority. This represents the suppression of Bengali identity and the betrayal of the trust placed in the Pakistani government.
According to the author, the Baloch and Pashtun communities are currently experiencing similar oppression and violence to what the Bengalis faced, including military operations, disappearances, and killings of community leaders.
The author references the alleged rape of a Baloch girl by a Captain, implying the abuse and exploitation of the Baloch community. They accuse the Captain of now lecturing on Islam in the guise of a priest.
Pakistan allegedly violated promises of safety given to Baloch leaders based on the Quran, killing them after guaranteeing their safety. This highlights a betrayal of trust and a disregard for religious oaths.
The author asks how many more old and young oppressed Baloch women will be made missing persons, how many military operations will be launched against them, how many Akbar devotees will be killed, and how many more partitions of the beautiful kingdom will they cause, suggesting ongoing and escalating persecution.
III. Essay Questions
Answer each question in a well-structured essay format, citing textual evidence.
Analyze the author’s portrayal of religious identity and its impact on the historical narrative of Hindustan. How does the author distinguish between genuine spirituality and the exploitation of religion for political or economic gain?
Examine the author’s critique of Pakistan’s actions and policies since partition. What specific events and accusations are central to the author’s argument, and how do they contribute to a broader narrative of betrayal and oppression?
Discuss the author’s use of emotional and rhetorical devices to persuade the reader. How does the language and tone contribute to the overall message and intended impact of the excerpt?
Compare and contrast the author’s depiction of the treatment of Bengalis and Baloch people within Pakistan. What parallels and differences does the author draw, and what underlying themes do these narratives reveal?
Evaluate the author’s perspective on the partition of India and its long-term consequences. How does the author frame the event in terms of loss, injustice, and ongoing conflict, and what solutions, if any, are implied or suggested?
IV. Glossary of Key Terms
Hindustan: A historical and cultural name for the Indian subcontinent, often used to evoke a sense of shared heritage and identity.
Iqbal: (Likely referring to Muhammad Iqbal), A poet, philosopher, and politician who inspired the Pakistan Movement.
Two-Nation Theory: The ideology that Hindus and Muslims of British India were distinct nations with separate cultural, religious, and political identities, leading to the partition of India.
Partition: The division of British India in 1947 into the independent nations of India and Pakistan, resulting in widespread displacement, violence, and communal conflict.
Kargil: Refers to the Kargil War, an armed conflict between India and Pakistan in 1999.
Pulwama and Pathankot: Locations in India that experienced terrorist attacks, attributed to groups based in Pakistan, increasing tensions between the two countries.
Kasab: Refers to Ajmal Kasab, one of the terrorists involved in the 2008 Mumbai attacks.
Baloch and Pashtun: Ethnic groups residing primarily in Pakistan and Afghanistan, who have faced discrimination and conflict with the Pakistani government.
Kalat: A former princely state in Balochistan, Pakistan, whose integration into Pakistan was marked by conflict and suppression of Baloch autonomy.
Akbar Bugti: A prominent Baloch leader killed in a military operation by the Pakistani army in 2006, leading to increased unrest in Balochistan.
Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the main themes and ideas from the provided excerpt from “Hindustan: A Land Divided by Religious Traders and Terrorism.”
Briefing Document: “Hindustan: A Land Divided by Religious Traders and Terrorism”
Main Themes:
Lament for Lost Unity and Cultural Harmony: The author expresses deep sorrow and regret over the division of the Indian subcontinent (Hindustan) and the erosion of its historical multi-religious, multi-cultural, and multi-lingual identity. They yearn for a return to an idealized past where love, peace, and tolerance prevailed.
Condemnation of Religious Divisiveness and Violence: The author vehemently criticizes those who exploit religion for political and economic gain, accusing them of instigating violence, hatred, and division among people who once lived harmoniously. They accuse these “traders of religion” of replacing “love-filled roses” with “furnaces of gunpowder.”
Critique of Pakistan’s Actions and Policies: A significant portion of the excerpt is dedicated to criticizing Pakistan’s historical and contemporary actions, accusing the nation of betraying the spirit of unity, engaging in acts of terrorism, and mistreating its own ethnic minorities. The author explicitly mentions events such as the Kargil War, the Pulwama attack, and the treatment of Baloch and Pashtun people.
Emphasis on Hindu Tolerance and Suffering: The author praises the Hindu community for their patience and tolerance in the face of violence and injustice. They highlight the perceived disparity in the treatment of Muslims in India compared to the treatment of Hindus in Pakistan after the partition.
Plea for Peace and Reconciliation: Despite the harsh criticisms, the author seems to imply a desperate plea for peace, justice, and unity, urging those responsible for the divisions and violence to reconsider their actions and embrace a more inclusive and compassionate approach.
Key Ideas and Facts:
Historical Harmony of Hindustan: The author paints a romanticized picture of pre-partition India as a land of saints, sages, and Sufis, where diverse cultures and religions coexisted peacefully. “In the name of humans, Afzal Rihan, our land of Hindustan has always existed for centuries as a beautiful cultural treasure and a great country without any rosary, which is known for its multi-religious, multi- communal, multi-cultural and multi-lingual identity.”
Religious Traders as Instigators: The author blames “traders of religion” for dividing Hindustan for profit and self-gain. “Alas, when the traders of religion divided this beautiful bouquet of nature, In the land that spews gold, where love- filled roses grew and smelled, there they set up furnaces of gunpowder for profit.”
Criticism of Pakistan’s Actions: The author lists numerous grievances against Pakistan, accusing them of supporting terrorism, betraying trust, and oppressing minorities. The author mentions events such as Kargil, Pulwama, and Pathankot, accusing Pakistan of attacking India despite gestures of goodwill. “Secondly the great poet who speaks love filled words of poetry came to Lahore as a guest, and as soon as he turned back you stabbed him in the back with the dagger of Kargil, the third one who was the apple of the eye of his people, when he came, you did Pulwama and Pathankot”
Partition’s Trauma: The author vividly describes the violence and displacement that occurred during the partition of India, portraying it as a period of immense suffering and loss. “Partition happened, Rajal became a slave and got looted in the storm of Sharafabad. Someone should ask them how they were destroyed, how their garden became a desert, how their happy home was torn to pieces, how they created a river of fire and blood”
Balochistan Allegations: The author accuses Pakistan of committing atrocities against the Baloch people, including enforced disappearances, extrajudicial killings, and the suppression of their political and cultural rights. “What kind of atrocities have been committed against the Baloch? Starting from shedding blood in the state of Kalat, breaking their elected orders with full vehemence, throwing popular leadership in jails and filing false cases against them, looting businesses and sending them to prisons.”
Hindu Tolerance Contrasted with Treatment in Pakistan: The author emphasizes the perceived tolerance of Hindus in India while highlighting the plight of Hindus in Pakistan, particularly in Lahore. “The greatness of the Hindu religion and its followers is saluted, that despite all these excesses and profit, they went to the extreme of patience and tolerance. When the real residents of Hindustan were being killed and slaughtered in Lahore, even then they kept all the residents or infiltrators in Delhi close to their heart, whoever has a doubt can certainly get the census of the before and after at every two places, Hindus cannot be found even if one searches in Lahore, whereas Delhi is still filled with Muslims”
Overall Tone:
The tone of the excerpt is highly emotional, passionate, and accusatory. The author uses vivid language and strong imagery to convey their sense of loss, anger, and disappointment. The writing is also somewhat biased, presenting a largely negative view of Pakistan and a more positive view of India and the Hindu community.
Potential Biases:
The author’s perspective appears to be strongly influenced by Hindu nationalist sentiments and a deep-seated resentment towards Pakistan. The historical narrative presented is selective and focuses on alleged injustices and betrayals by Pakistan.
Here’s an 8-question FAQ based on the provided text, formatted in Markdown:
FAQ: Understanding the Historical and Contemporary Issues in Hindustan
1. What is the author’s overall sentiment towards the idea of “Hindustan”?
The author views Hindustan as a historically rich, multi-cultural land known for its unity, peace, and spiritual traditions. The author laments the divisions caused by religious exploitation, violence, and external forces, contrasting this with the land’s inherent potential for harmony and love.
2. According to the author, what are the primary factors that have disrupted the harmony of Hindustan?
The author identifies religious traders and terrorism as the main disruptive forces, who for their own profit, have fueled violence and division, undermining the land’s natural unity and tolerance. The text highlights the exploitation of religious differences for political and economic gain.
3. How does the author portray the response of the “Hindu religion and its followers” to the historical violence and division?
The author expresses admiration for the resilience, patience, and tolerance displayed by Hindus in the face of violence and displacement. The author contrasts this with what is perceived as the continued presence and acceptance of Muslims in Delhi, even after significant violence and displacement of Hindus in Lahore.
4. What specific historical events are referenced as examples of the disruption and violence in the region?
The author mentions the Partition of India, the Kargil War, the Pulwama and Pathankot attacks, and attacks on the Indian Parliament and in Mumbai, as examples of the ongoing violence and disruption. These events are cited as evidence of broken trust and continued hostility.
5. What is the author’s critique of the “two-nation theory”?
The author implicitly criticizes the two-nation theory by highlighting the mistreatment and oppression of ethnic groups, such as Bengalis, Balochis, and Pashtuns. The author questions the logic of creating divisions based on religion, given the subsequent internal conflicts and injustices within the newly formed nations.
6. How does the author describe the treatment of Bengalis in the context of the two-nation theory?
The author describes the suppression and violence inflicted upon Bengalis, highlighting their initial support for the creation of Pakistan, and the subsequent betrayal of that trust through imprisonment of leaders and military actions.
7. What specific allegations are made regarding the treatment of Baloch and Pashtun people?
The author alleges atrocities against the Baloch, including extrajudicial killings, forced disappearances, military operations, and the exploitation of women. The author suggests a parallel between the treatment of Bengalis and the current treatment of Baloch and Pashtun communities.
8. What is the author’s final concern or question regarding the future of the region?
The author expresses concern about the potential for further partitions and divisions within the region, particularly given the ongoing conflicts and oppression of ethnic groups. The author questions whether those in power are actively pursuing a third partition of the region through their actions.
In the name of humans, Afzal Rihan, our land of Hindustan has always existed for centuries as a beautiful cultural treasure and a great country without any rosary, which is known for its multi-religious, multi- communal, multi-cultural and multi-lingual identity. It has always been called the land of saints, sages, devotees, monks and Sufis, in the words of Iqbal, whose right gave the unity the effect of gold. Whose pockets had filled the pockets of Turks with diamonds. Whose mountains are the essence of the chest. Whose land is full of fruits. Living in the air of which is the life of paradise. That is my country. That is my country. That is the country whose identity for centuries has been that both strength and peace is in the songs of the devotees. The liberation of the inhabitants of the earth is in love. While describing the greatness of the mountains of that country, Hindustan, Iqbal kept singing, O Mala-e-Fasil, Kishangarh, bowing down to your forehead, bowing down to the sky. Alas, when the traders of religion divided this beautiful bouquet of nature, In the land that spews gold, where love- filled roses grew and smelled, there they set up furnaces of gunpowder for profit In this poisonous future of mine and Iqbal, where songs of power and peace were sung, the attackers and the terrorists made it their duty to kill the real countrymen like carrots and radishes, full of profit The greatness of the Hindu religion and its followers is saluted, that despite all these excesses and profit, they went to the extreme of patience and tolerance When the real residents of Hindustan were being killed and slaughtered in Lahore, even then they kept all the residents or infiltrators in Delhi close to their heart, whoever has a doubt can certainly get the census of the before and after at every two places, Hindus cannot be found even if one searches in Lahore, whereas Delhi is still filled with Muslims, who can avoid Moni, the profit filled blood of friends and strangers is made from the profit and connivance of own and strangers Partition happened, Rajal became a slave and got looted in the storm of Sharafabad. Someone should ask them how they were destroyed, how their garden became a desert, how their happy home was torn to pieces, how they created a river of fire and blood, this is not enough, when their father was keeping Bharat in such a condition that he was getting a loan of 55 crores in oath confirmation, when at this time a buffalo of ₹ was coming, then who unleashed an attack on his countrymen, who left no stone unturned in theft, looting and information, who used a strange trick and said that it was the tribals who were found to be creating an army, when their first Prime Minister, after drinking all the sorrows of partition, came to you with a message of love for a new beginning, so that you also, without removing the tension, make you drink the water of the rivers of your land like love, then you people started sending terrorists as soon as his eyes closed and then one word claim And how many innocent people did he become the cause of death, how much wastage happened, secondly the great poet who speaks love filled words of poetry came to Lahore as a guest, and as soon as he turned back you stabbed him in the back with the dagger of Kargil, the third one who was the apple of the eye of his people, when he came, you did Pulwama and Pathankot, what kind of arrow have you people adopted, sometimes you attacked the Lok Sabha in Delhi, sometimes in Mumbai innocent people were killed by terrorists, becoming Kasab you killed like the Qais, what kind of people are you, who by showing generosity like their father, got your 90 Hajj warriors released from their captivity and handed them over to you, conquered the area of thousands of miles and gave you back, but how narrow-minded you are that on the murder of your Masna, where people were found celebrating and celebrating, all this was alien according to your two nation theory, but how did you treat these brothers of yours who not only destroyed your League, but also destroyed it? I had given them thirst, rather I tried my best to make your founder’s sister win, that Bangla brother whom the Bengali community had elected with such a heavy majority, holding him in high esteem. You rewarded the trust of your people by putting their leadership in jails and started cutting the Bengalis into pieces. You instilled such a daring in their young soldiers that not only the British Empire but even Hitler was stunned. Without any hesitation, you people caused another partition of this kingdom of India. What are you doing today with your Baloch and Pashtun brothers? Earlier you used to say that we will change the race of Bengalis due to hunger. Did your Commander in Chief not say openly that how is it possible that my soldiers fight in Bengal, but go to Jhelum to quench their thirst? You have been getting solace from Bengali women that today you people want to give the same Ajit, the same trouble to your Baloch Pashtun brothers and sisters, with the Baloch girl you had The Captain raped, today he is found lecturing on Islam in the guise of a priest. What kind of atrocities have been committed against the Baloch? Starting from shedding blood in the state of Kalat, breaking their elected orders with full vehemence, throwing popular leadership in jails and filing false cases against them, looting businesses and sending them to prisons. Weren’t these Balochs their own, whose leadership was killed with bad Ahdi Safaqi after giving the condition of life safety on the basis of Quran? This question is being raised all over the world that how many old and young oppressed Baloch women will you make missing persons, how many military operations will you launch against them, how many Akbar devotees will you kill, how many more partitions of this beautiful kingdom will you cause? You are not satisfied with two partitions, now you are bent on doing the third one.
इंसानों के नाम अफजल रिहान हमारा यह खिता हिंद सदियों से खूबसूरत तहजीब गहवारा और बिला तस्बी दामन अजीम मुल्क की हैसियत से हमेशा मौजूद रहा है जो मल्टी रिलीजस मल्टी कम्यून मल्टी कल्चरल और मल्टी लैंग्वेज की पहचान का हाम है हमेशा साधुओं ऋषियों भक्तों भक्ष और सूफियों की सरजमीन कहलाया बकौल इकबाल यूनानिमिटी को जिसकी हक ने जर का असर दिया था तुर्कों का जिसने दामन हीरों से भर दिया था बंदे कलीम जिसके पर्वत जहां के सीना रिफत है जिस जमी की बा में फल का जीना जन्नत की जिंदगी है जिसकी फजा में जीना मेरा वतन वही है मेरा वतन वही है सदियों से जिस देश की पहचान यह रही है कि शक्ति भी शांति भी भक्तों के गीत में है धरती के वासियों की मुक्ति प्रीत में है जिस वतन हिंद के पर्वतों की अजमत बयान करते हुए इकबाल गाता रहा ए माला ए फसील किश्वर हिंदुस्तान चूमता है तेरी पेशानी को झुककर आसमा अफसोस जब धर्म के व्यापारियों ने इस हसीन गुलदस्ता फितरत का बटवारा किया तो सोना उगलती सरजमी में जहां गुलाबों के मोहब्बत भरे फूल उगते और महकते थे वहां मुनाफ तों भरे बारूद की भटियां लगा दी मेरी और इकबाल की इस भविष में जहां शक्ति और शांति के गीत गाए जाते थे मुनाफ भरे जहरीले प्रोपेगेंडा हुए हमलावरों और जद हों ने असल देशवासियों को गाजर मूली की तरह काटना अपना कतब बना लिया हिंदू धर्म और इसके मानने वालों की अजमतों को सलाम है कि इन तमाम तर ज्यादति और मुनाफ तों के बावजूद उन्होंने समरो त हम्मल और बर्दाश्त की इंतहा कर दी जब लाहौर में हिंद के असल वासों को मारा और काटा जा रहा था उन्होंने तब भी दिल्ली में तमाम तर आबाद गों या घुस बैठ यों को सीने से लगाए रखा जिसे शक है वो बेशक हर दो मकामा पर पहले और बाद की मर्दम शुमारी मुलाज फरमा ले लाहौर में ढूंढे से भी हिंदू नहीं मिल पाते जबकि दिल्ली आज भी मुस्लिमों से भरा पड़ा है मोनी को कौन टाल सकता है अपनों और गैरों की मुनाफ और मिली भगत से मुनाफ भरा खून अलू बटवारा हो गया रजल कमी मजीन करार पाए और शरफाबाद के तूफान में लुटपुट गए कोई इनसे पूछे कि वो कैसे उजड़े इनका चमन किस तरह सहरा हुआ इनका हंसता बस्ता आशियाना किस तरह तिनके से अलग तिनका हुआ उन्होंने आग और खून का दरिया कैसे किया इसी पर बस नहीं जब इनका बापू मरन भरत रखे इस हालत कसम पुष्टी में 55 करोड़ की खती रकम दिलवा रहा था जबक इस वक्त ₹ की भैंस आ जाती थी तब किसने उसके देशवासियों पर यलगार कर दी चोरी डिके लूटमार और जनाकारी में कोई कसर उठाए नहीं रखी किसने अजब मुनाफ करत से काम लेते हुए कहा यह बलवा तो कबाइली थे जो लश्कर कशी करते पाए गए जब इनका पहला प्रधानमंत्री बटवारे के तमाम दुखों को पीकर नई शुरुआत की खातिर प्रीत का पैगाम लिए तुम्हारे पास आया ताकि आप भी तनाजा न मिटाते हुए अपने खिता के दरियाओ का पानी मैं प्रीत की तरह तुम्हें पिला दें तो तुम लोगों ने उसकी आंखें बंद होते ही आतंकवादी भेजने शुरू किए और फिर एक शब्द दावा बोल दिया और कितने बेगुनाह इंसानों की मौत का बायस बने कितनी बर्बादी हुई दूसरा प्रधानमंत्री कविता के प्रेम भरे शब्द बोलता महान कवि मेहमान बनकर लाहौर यात्रा पर आया तो तुमने इसके पलटते ही इसकी पीठ में कारगिल का खंजर गोप दिया तीसरा जो अपनी जनता की आंखों का तारा था जब आया तो तुमने पुलवामा और पठान कोट कर डा तुम लोगों ने यह क्या तीरा अपनाया कभी दिल्ली में लोकसभा पर धावा बोल दिया कभी मुंबई में हंसते बसते मासूम इंसानों को आतंकवादियों के हाथों भू डाला कसाब बनकर क साइयों की तरह मारा तुम कैसे लोग हो वो जिसने अपने बाप जैसी दरिया दिली का मुजहरा करते हुए तुम्हारे 90 हज सूर माओं को बक्त जुंबिश कलम अपनी कैद से रिहाई दिलवा हुए तुम्हारे हवाले कर दिया फतह किया गया हजारों मुरब्बा मील का इलाका तुम्हें वापस बख्श दिया लेकिन तुम किस कदर तंग नजर छोटे लोग हो कि अपनी इस मसना के जलमान माना कत्ल पर जहां खुशियां और शादिया ने बजाते पाए गए यह सब तुम्हारी टू नेशन थ्योरी के मुताबिक गैर थे मगर तुमने अपने इन भाइयों के साथ क्या सलूक किया जिन्होंने ना सिर्फ यह कि तुम्हारी लीग को ढाका में तश्न दिया था बल्कि तुम्हारे फाउंडर की बहन को जितवा के लिए एड़ी चोटी का जोर लगा दिया था वो बंगला बंधु जिसे बंगाली कौम ने सरा आंखों पर बिठाते हुए इतनी हैवी मेजॉरिटी से मुंतखाब किया था तुमने अपने लोगों के एतमाद का यह सिला दिया कि इनकी कयादत को जेलों में डालकर बंगालियों की तिका बोटी बनानी शुरू कर दी इनके नौज जवानों पर वो मजाल ढाए कि ब्रिटिश साम्राज क्या हिटलर के मजाल भी मान पड़ गए यूं बिला करर तुम लोगों ने इस खिता हिंद का एक और बटवारा करवा दिया आज तुम अपने बलोच और पख्तून भाइयों के साथ क्या सुलूक कर रहे हो पहले कहते थे कि हम भूख बंगालियों की नस्ले बदल डालेंगे क्या तुम्हारे कमांडर इन चीफ ने खुले बंदों यह नहीं कहा कि यह कैसे मुमकिन है कि मेरे जवान लड़े बंगाल में लेकिन जिनसी प्यास बुझाने के लिए जाए जेहलम में बंगाली ख्वातीन से तस्कीन हासिल करते रहे हो कि आज तुम लोग यही अजीत यही तंग अपने बलोच पख्तून भाइयों बहनों को देना चाहते हो जिस बलोच बच्ची के साथ तुम्हारे कैप्टन ने रेप किया आज वो मजज बनकर इस्लाम पर लेक्चर देता पाया जा रहा है बलोच के साथ कैसी-कैसी ज्यादति यां रवा नहीं रखी गई हैं रियासत कलात पर शब खून मारने से शुरू हो जाएं इनकी मुंतखाब हुकूम तों को पूरी टटाई से तोड़ते हुए 1 की धाई में पॉपुलर कयादत को जेलों में थोंस तक और इन पर झूठे मुकदमा बनाने तक वसाय लूटने और तें पहुंचाने तक क्या यह बलोच ही ना थे जिनकी कयादत को कुरान पर जान की अमान का हालत देने के बाद बतरी बद अहदी स फाकी के साथ मौत के घाट उतार दिया गया पूरी दुनिया में यह सवाल उठाया जा रहा है कि मजलूम बलोच ख्वातीन के कितने बुजुर्ग और जवान मिसिंग पर्सन बनाओगे इनके खिलाफ कितने मिलिट्री ऑपरेशन चलाओगे कितने अकबर भक्ति और मारोगे इस खूबसूरत खिता ंद के और कितने बटवारे कराओ ग दो बटवाड़ा जी नहीं भरा जो अब तीसरा करवाने पर तुले बैठे हो
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
This text comprises excerpts from a conversation, likely a recorded interview, between two individuals reflecting on the history of the India-Pakistan partition and its ongoing consequences. The speakers discuss the role of religion in politics, the resulting societal divisions, and the challenges of fostering peaceful coexistence between India and Pakistan. They analyze past mistakes and explore potential pathways toward reconciliation, drawing upon historical events and comparing their situation to other nations. The conversation is deeply introspective, filled with personal anecdotes and historical analysis. The overarching theme is the search for understanding and healing in the wake of traumatic historical events.
Analysis of Pakistani Society and Politics
Quiz
Instructions: Answer each question in 2-3 complete sentences.
What is the speaker’s relationship with Mujibur Rahman Shami sahab, and how long has it lasted?
According to the speaker, how do they differ from Shami sahab in their opinions?
What is the speaker’s view on the current state of their society?
What, according to the speaker, is the root cause of fanaticism in their society?
What historical slogan did the speaker say was created by their people?
What does the speaker identify as failures of the early Pakistani government?
How does the speaker describe the power of vote, and its impact?
What does the speaker say about the influence of democracy on religious communities?
What lesson does the speaker believe can be learned from the historical experiences of European countries?
How does the speaker explain the contradictory stances that Pakistan has historically taken regarding India?
Answer Key
The speaker describes Mujibur Rahman Shami sahab as their ustaad e mahatma, or great teacher, and states that they have spent approximately 34 years learning from him through reading, writing, and working together. They have a very close relationship.
The speaker states that while they respect Shami sahab, they have differences of opinion on issues such as politics and silence. They emphasize that these disagreements are normal and can be a source of learning.
The speaker describes their society as troubled, with social divisions, political distance, and family conflicts. They also mention issues such as an increasing population and the presence of external threats that are not being effectively addressed.
The speaker attributes the rise of fanaticism to a mix of factors including power struggles, geographic vulnerabilities, and the exploitation of religious slogans for political gain, leading to a climate of hatred and division.
The speaker says that they raised a slogan of Islam and said that they would build a system based on Islamic Akhtar, but they failed to prevent extremism from rising.
The speaker states that the early Pakistani government failed to maintain its importance, with the bureaucracy, military, and politicians becoming entangled in each other’s work. He said they got busy backstabbing each other, and could not decide who should do what.
The speaker says the power of vote was a new power, and when they realized that Muslims were a minority, the system ended up leading to the demand for separate majority areas and created new complications.
The speaker argues that democracy can exacerbate divisions within communities, turning differences into fault lines, and that the principle of majority and minority becomes a problem, even down to families.
The speaker notes that while European countries experienced intense conflict and bloodshed, they have moved towards cooperation, and that this offers a lesson for Pakistan and India.
The speaker explains that despite advocating for a separate state, Pakistan simultaneously sought friendly relations with India and other nations. They also point to examples like how they have argued about the treatment of Muslims in India while ignoring the treatment of minorities in Pakistan.
Essay Questions
Instructions: Write a well-organized essay in response to each question.
Analyze the speaker’s critique of the political and social landscape of their society. What specific issues does the speaker identify, and what solutions or remedies might be implied by his discussion?
Examine the speaker’s views on the role of religion in politics and its consequences. How does the speaker explain the shift from interfaith conflict to internal strife within their own community?
Discuss the speaker’s analysis of the historical events leading up to and following the partition of the region. What key factors does the speaker emphasize, and what implications do they have for understanding the present?
Evaluate the speaker’s argument for better relations between their country and its neighbor. What reasons does the speaker give to support his position, and what obstacles must be overcome to achieve this?
Explore the speaker’s reflections on the nature of identity, including religious, ethnic, and national aspects. How do these complex and often competing identities influence both individual and collective behavior?
Glossary of Key Terms
Ustaad e Mahatma: A term used by the speaker to describe Mujibur Rahman Shami sahab; translates to “great teacher” or “master.”
Akhlaq: An Arabic word that refers to ethics, morals, or manners. The speaker uses it in reference to Shami’s opinion on morality.
Islamic Akhtar: A concept meaning “Islamic Principles or foundations.” The speaker refers to a time when their people said they would build a system based on this, but failed.
Jamiat: An Arabic word for “association” or “group” often used to denote religious or political organizations.
Mushaira: A gathering where poets recite their work.
UNO: The United Nations Organization.
Ummah-e-Wada: An Arabic term meaning “a unified community.” The speaker references it when mentioning that Jews and Muslims should be one group.
Round Table Conference: A series of meetings between the British government and Indian political representatives in the early 1930s about the future of India.
Pakistan: A Critical Retrospective
Okay, here is a detailed briefing document reviewing the provided text.
Briefing Document: Analysis of “Pasted Text”
Introduction:
This document analyzes a conversation, likely an interview or discussion, between two individuals (referred to as “I” and “you”/ “Shami sahab”), likely conducted in the context of a Pakistani media outlet, given the references to Pakistani political history, and figures. The primary speaker (“I”) expresses a deep personal and intellectual relationship with the other (Shami sahab) whom he calls his “ustaad e mahatma.” The discussion delves into the complex history of Pakistan, its relationship with India, and the internal challenges it faces, particularly focusing on the role of religion, identity, and political choices made throughout its history. The speaker uses a conversational style, interweaving personal reflections with historical analysis.
Main Themes and Ideas:
Mentorship and Respect for “Shami sahab”: The speaker establishes a profound respect and affection for “Shami sahab” describing him as a mentor.
“When respected Mujibur Rahman Shami sahab is my ustaad e mahatma, I have spent a major part of my life, around 34 years, under his study and have learnt a lot from him by reading, writing and working with him…”
The speaker says that Shami sahab feels like a lover to him, illustrating an unusually close bond and deep respect.
The conversation is framed as a way to “talk about my sorrows” with Shami sahab, highlighting the speaker’s reliance on the latter for guidance and understanding.
Internal Challenges and Failures of Pakistan: The speaker laments the current state of Pakistan, citing problems at various levels.
“as a lover we are a victim of trouble, socially we are sitting, politically we are far away from each other, in the family we have pitted ourselves against each other.”
He identifies social division, political polarization, and family conflicts.
The speaker also touches on the problem of population growth, and the challenges facing them which require careful consideration and correction.
He claims that they now hate people of their own community.
He argues that the country is facing “very difficult situations”.
The speaker criticizes a shift towards “fanaticism” and lack of “sanity” in the society, noting that this did not exist before, suggesting a change for the worst.
He expresses concern that current system will go away, and that expenditure has become fanatic.
Critique of the Founding of Pakistan and Use of Religion: The conversation raises questions about the motivations and consequences of Pakistan’s creation.
The speaker questions the use of religious slogans to create Pakistan. “if you see, we had raised the slogan of Islam, we had said that we will build such a homework which will be based on Islamic Akhtar, but this slogan of ours and which is Islamic According to Ikhter, we had to create a picture of our base…”
He claims that the initial goal was to build a society based on “Islamic Akhtar” but blames Maulvis for hijacking the narrative.
He criticizes the failure to build on the vision of Iqbal and Quaid-e-Azam (Muhammad Ali Jinnah).
He points out the role of religion and its exploitation by political forces, which led to negative consequences.
He questions whether including religion in politics in that way was correct. “My question to you is that what was happening to the multi-national and multi-coloured comrades in the 20th century, was it right to include Yes in politics on the basis of a religion in such elections or was it a matter of politics use of religion Was this correct?”
The Role of Democracy and Majority/Minority Dynamics: The speaker delves into the challenges of democracy in a diverse and historically conflicted society.
He acknowledges that the power of the vote is a new power, which caused problems due to the minorities realizing they would be ruled over by the majority. “When the power of vote came, they realized that we are in minority here, now others will rule over us. There was a matter…”
He argues that the focus on separating majority areas led to complications.
He challenges the simplistic majority/minority binary, stating that even within a majority, there are divisions.
He suggests the needs of the poor were ignored in the new political process. “In my opinion, the poor will not be given much importance, nor was the storm of power given…”
He uses a personal anecdote about Rajput brothers to demonstrate how democracy can exacerbate divisions.
He questions why there is a need to separate, as Muslims are a large group in south Asia (not just in Pakistan). “I do not understand at all how Muslims were a minority in South Asia, if you estimate today, then 25 crore, if we are here If there are Muslims, there are a similar number in India, there are 20 crore Muslims in Bangladesh…”
Historical Context of Partition: The speaker discusses the circumstances surrounding the partition of India and its long-term repercussions.
He highlights that the British had brought democracy to the region but not the experience with its process. “it would have come with the British, because they had come as the British, they had captured this country and they had brought a regime with them due to which there was no control on the people. It had not been given to the British and people had not experienced it…”
He claims that limited franchise and local mergers resulted in losses for Muslims due to the strength of Hindus.
He argues that the feeling of “Mahrooni” (deprivation) then arose.
He states that the partition was meant to prevent communities from dominating each other, and to find a way of combining them together.
He posits that things could have been better despite the division and that relations could have been maintained better. “even after the division into these two Hasans, matters could have been settled in a better way, relations could have been maintained better…”
Comparative Analysis with Europe and Need for Reconciliation: The speaker makes comparisons with Europe to demonstrate possibility of reconciliation after conflict.
He argues that like countries in Europe that had fought, countries in the sub-continent should be able to do the same. “And for your Holi, in spite of that, yes a recommendation process has been started and you people are living with some relief, the exam is still going on there but on the date we can do this much in the middle, it works in its own way…”
He claims that the level of destruction from the partition was not as bad as in Europe, and they still live together now.
He highlights the need to learn lessons from Europe and for India and Pakistan to live together by being good to themselves.
He advocates for a future of cooperation and unity between India, Pakistan, and Bangladesh, suggesting something akin to a “double Asia”. “and when the foundation of this Sir was laid, it was understood that like Gaurav, this would be a double Asia and a parliament would also be formed and a wish and a strong We will be able to progress and live a united future and we will take our own people who come to us to our death dhaba.”
He points out that if Germany, France, and Britain can do it, then they can too. “If Germany, France and Britain can come together and establish good relations and fight in the future, then Pakistan, India and Bangladesh can also fight in this way, so that we can always protect our cities.”
Analysis of Historical Actions and Mistakes: The speaker acknowledges the mistakes made by all sides and calls for introspection.
He criticizes attacks from both sides, such as Kargil and Pathankot, highlighting the cycle of violence.
He highlights the need to look into ones self, and pray to God for mistakes. “Is it that we should look inside ourselves and pray to God for our mistakes that we are extending a hand of love towards you and you took it and then I said that a dagger was stabbed in your back from behind so the thing is to look at these things”
He points out how past actions of all sides were not justified. “we should learn lessons from them when we have made mistakes and mistakes have also been made by those who could not justify our mistakes and we too have made mistakes.”
He uses an example of a Mushaira (poetic symposium) to show how both sides grieved, and that they should move on from it.
He emphasizes that they must learn to pamper each other.
He quotes Quaid-e-Azam that relations between the two countries should be like relations between Canada and America.
He acknowledges that the first priority after partition was to send chopped bodies on trains, but that Gandhi and Nehru were also against this.
He suggests that many properties in Lahore are owned by Hindus, yet they cannot use them.
He argues that the Kashmir issue is unresolved and that taking it to the UN was a mistake. “now you should not have gone to the UN, you would not have given him an opportunity to fight…”
He claims the journey of past events will not take them anywhere and that they must realize their mistakes.
Critique of Division and the Idea of “One Ummah”: The speaker uses historical examples and religious texts to highlight the possibility of unity.
He questions the need to separate Muslims and Hindus and points out that both communities are still living in each other’s countries today.
He questions why the solution was seen that they could not live together, pointing out that there are many Muslims living in India.
He uses an analogy of majority and minority groups and the idea of “one nation” to illustrate how they could have all lived together, instead of dividing.
He points out that there were many kingdoms in India, and the idea of one united India was new and has been done in a way which causes divides.
He claims that in all the religious texts he has read, there is no mention of communities and different cadres.
He recalls a quote from Medina that says that Jews and Muslims will be one Ummah.
He points out that there was an idea of “one Asia.”
He points to a passage where it was argued that mixing of different groups allows for more growth.
Call for Self-Reflection and a Forward-Looking Approach: The speaker stresses the importance of introspection and understanding to move forward.
He argues that they have been affected by wrong decisions and by fanaticism.
He wants to understand why Muslims in India haven’t been wiped out.
He states that the reasons behind people coming here and there are from their mistakes.
He seeks an interview to express his thoughts and learn from “Shami sahab”.
He highlights that the words of Quaid-e-Azam had called for religious equality in Pakistan.
He points out that Pakistan and India were never supposed to be enemy countries.
He wants to know why Pakistan and India cannot be as friendly as India is to Bangladesh. “If India can have a friendly relationship with Bangladesh If we can be with Afghanistan, we can be with India, why can’t we do it, we can also do it…”
He states that they must pay for their mistakes and look at their actions.
He argues that the state should not be concerned with people’s religions.
He points out that riots took place during the partition.
He claims that the political use of religion has been bad and will continue to be, and gives examples in other parts of the world.
Key Quotes:
“When respected Mujibur Rahman Shami sahab is my ustaad e mahatma, I have spent a major part of my life, around 34 years, under his study and have learnt a lot from him…”
“as a lover we are a victim of trouble, socially we are sitting, politically we are far away from each other, in the family we have pitted ourselves against each other.”
“if you see, we had raised the slogan of Islam, we had said that we will build such a homework which will be based on Islamic Akhtar…”
“My question to you is that what was happening to the multi-national and multi-coloured comrades in the 20th century, was it right to include Yes in politics on the basis of a religion in such elections or was it a matter of politics use of religion Was this correct?”
“When the power of vote came, they realized that we are in minority here, now others will rule over us.”
“even after the division into these two Hasans, matters could have been settled in a better way, relations could have been maintained better…”
“And for your Holi, in spite of that, yes a recommendation process has been started and you people are living with some relief, the exam is still going on there but on the date we can do this much in the middle, it works in its own way…”
“If Germany, France and Britain can come together and establish good relations and fight in the future, then Pakistan, India and Bangladesh can also fight in this way, so that we can always protect our cities.”
“Is it that we should look inside ourselves and pray to God for our mistakes that we are extending a hand of love towards you and you took it and then I said that a dagger was stabbed in your back from behind so the thing is to look at these things”
“we should learn lessons from them when we have made mistakes and mistakes have also been made by those who could not justify our mistakes and we too have made mistakes.”
“If India can have a friendly relationship with Bangladesh If we can be with Afghanistan, we can be with India, why can’t we do it, we can also do it…”
Conclusion:
The text presents a critical examination of Pakistan’s history, its internal struggles, and its relationship with India. The speaker, deeply influenced by his mentor, “Shami sahab,” calls for a re-evaluation of past decisions, a recognition of shared mistakes, and a commitment to a future of peace and cooperation in the region. The conversation is imbued with a sense of urgency, a desire for reconciliation, and a call for introspection. The text suggests that political exploitation of religion, unchecked democracy, and a failure to learn from history have led to present problems, and that the only way forward is through unity and a sense of shared identity.
Pakistan and India: A Legacy of Division, A Future of Hope
FAQ: Exploring Identity, History, and the Path Forward
What is the core of the relationship described between the speaker and Mujibur Rahman Shami?
The speaker expresses a deep, lifelong mentorship and almost reverential relationship with Mujibur Rahman Shami, whom he refers to as his “ustaad e mahatma.” This relationship spans approximately 34 years, encompassing learning through reading, writing, and working together. The speaker views Shami not just as a teacher but also as a mentor and someone he loves and respects. The speaker uses hyperbole and metaphors to express the impact Shami has had on him. He also notes that despite some differences in opinion, he greatly values Shami’s experience and guidance.
What are some of the key challenges facing their society as described in this discussion?
The discussion highlights several critical challenges, including internal divisions and hatred, political polarization, a rapidly increasing population, and the external threat of “missiles.” The speakers lament that these challenges have led to societal fragmentation, a sense of being “victims of trouble,” and political alienation. They also note an increase in fanaticism and extremism, which they attribute partly to a failure to uphold their traditions and a misuse of religion in politics. They also address a history of “bedfooting” and infighting between different structures of the state.
Why does the speaker believe the idea of Pakistan was formed using the slogan of Islam?
The speaker says they had raised the slogan of Islam when Pakistan was formed, believing that they would build a society based on Islamic ideals. However, they feel they failed to create a true picture of their base following Islamic principles. They indicate that their slogan and its interpretation were hijacked by those not aligned with true Islamic values such as clergy members (Maulvi) and their interpretations were influenced by Ranjit Singh rather than Iqbal’s vision or that of Quaid-e-Azam.
What role did the concept of “majority” and “minority” play in the political discourse of the time?
The idea of “majority” and “minority” became a defining point in the political discourse, particularly with the rise of democracy and the power of vote. Muslims, realizing their minority status in a broader context, began to demand separation of majority areas, ultimately leading to the creation of Pakistan. The speaker notes that the concept of majority and minority was taken too far to the extent that even brothers could be divided due to religion. They point out how the definition of majority can be a complex one, noting even majority communities are often divided into multiple parts, and this creates complexities in democracy.
What are some of the major historical events and figures mentioned in the context of the discussion on India and Pakistan?
The speakers mention several historical events and figures, including the British rule, partition, leaders like Quaid-e-Azam and Pandit Jawaharlal Nehru, the conflicts in Kargil and Pathankot, the 1965 war, and the post-partition communal violence. They also reference figures like Gandhi and even Ustad Daman to highlight the emotional and social impact of these events. The speaker mentions the Round Table Conference with Allama Sahab and uses Ayodhya as an example as well. They also discuss the complex legacy of Gandhi, Nehru and Jinnah and their influence on the situation.
What does the speaker suggest about the concept of living together with respect despite religious or ethnic differences?
The speaker argues that despite historical clashes and divisions, it is vital to learn to live together with mutual respect. They provide examples of how Europe has overcome conflicts to build a peaceful environment. They mention that just because there are differences between people this does not mean it has to be a reason for conflict. The speaker questions how there is such an issue in living together when Muslims today live in India in very large numbers. He further discusses how religion was used in politics and it should not have been a reason for separation.
What does the speaker think about the future of Pakistan and India?
The speaker emphasizes the need to move forward and foster better relationships between India, Pakistan, and Bangladesh, much like the relationship between Canada and America. He advocates for overcoming the losses incurred due to division by understanding each other and working together. They feel that there is no need for a constant state of enmity between Pakistan and India, and note it is detrimental. He argues that the two nations should not have emerged as enemies and that both should work together. The speaker also refers to the fact that Europe is moving together and that India, Pakistan and Bangladesh should as well.
What is the speaker’s perspective on accountability and learning from mistakes?
The speaker stresses the importance of self-reflection, recognizing one’s own mistakes, and learning from historical errors. They acknowledge that both sides have made errors and that it is crucial to acknowledge them, rather than constantly blaming each other. The speaker laments their own failures and how they should have learned from their errors earlier. He stresses that both sides have to own their mistakes.
A Nation Divided: Shami’s Reflections on Pakistan
Okay, here is a timeline and cast of characters based on the provided text:
Timeline of Main Events and Discussions
Long-Term Relationship & Mentorship: The speaker has spent 34 years learning from Mujibur Rahman Shami, considering him a mentor (“ustaad e mahatma”) and a figure of profound respect and affection.
Current Situation Assessment (August – unspecified year): The speaker and Shami discuss the current state of their relationship and the problems facing their society. They acknowledge:
Their relationship is strained socially, politically and within their families.
There’s an increase in hatred, not just between communities, but within communities.
They recognize a sense of fanaticism taking hold.
They feel targeted by “missiles” (likely metaphorical, representing challenges).
The existing system is failing.
Historical Roots of Current Problems: They discuss the historical context behind their current problems
The creation of Pakistan and the use of Islamic slogans.
They discuss how the initial vision of Pakistan was diverted.
They look back to the initial leadership and governance of Pakistan, and the decline of its bureaucracy, military, and political structures.
They discuss the rise of extremism as a result of these issues.
The introduction of the concept of “vote,” where the Muslim community realized they were a minority in the greater India and began demanding separate areas for self rule.
They discuss the concept of a majority and how it is understood in the country, and the influence of democracy on this.
They reference the concept of a minority, and how in South Asia, there was a sizable population of Muslims – but it still resulted in their being a minority.
They reflect on the creation of a separate electorate for Muslims, and how this led to problems.
Reflection on Partition and its Aftermath: The conversation addresses the violence and displacement resulting from the partition of India and Pakistan, specifically:
The displacement of Hindus and Sikhs from parts of Pakistan, and Muslims from parts of India
The movement of chopped bodies on trains
Gandhi and the idea that he was a friend to Muslims
Pandit Nehru and how he is perceived as less friendly to Muslims
There was an idea that India and Pakistan could work together as partners, but this was abandoned.
The discussion notes how other European countries have been able to move past conflicts and reconcile, despite their historical wars.
Kashmir Conflict: They discuss the historical and ongoing conflict over Kashmir:
The speaker criticizes the decision to take the Kashmir issue to the UN.
They acknowledge their own mistakes and those made by others, calling for honesty and introspection.
They want to understand how this dispute evolved over time, and how there is no accountability for the mistakes of the past.
They want to discuss how both sides have contributed to the conflict, and to try to reach a new understanding.
The concept of war and the idea that they have failed to learn from history.
They speak to how, after 1965, neither side has been willing to speak to their mistakes.
Questioning the Idea of Separate Nations: They ponder if partition based on religion was a mistake, and discuss the current state of Muslims in India
They look at other religions and cultures, and how these differences are not the basis for hostility.
They cite ideas from Lajpat Rai and Savarkar, and ask if Muslims should have been segregated into their own areas.
The speaker reflects that it was not that everyone wanted their own segregated area, but the minority of Muslims demanded it, so the rest went along.
They question the validity of having a nation-state based on religion and how the concept of a majority does not always equal a superior position.
Historical Islamic Precepts: They discuss historical and religious teachings which promote unity, citing both:
The historical concept of “Ummah-e-Wada” which indicates all the major religions will come together as one.
They discuss a historical instance in which this message was suppressed.
There is mention of Maulana Abdul Kalam Azad who fought for the unity of India.
Call for Self-Reflection and Change: The speaker emphasizes the need for self-reflection, honesty, and learning from past mistakes, and also asks that the interviewee gives a simple explanation of their thoughts.
They call for a rejection of the idea that only one side can be seen as the victim.
They reference a speech by Quaid-e-Azam on the 11th of August that all Pakistanis would be considered equal regardless of their background or religion.
They want to build a relationship like that between Canada and America, and that this was the original intent.
They acknowledge there are many princely states, but they should be united.
The speaker feels that the partition was a political one and not based in animosity.
They question why Pakistan cannot work alongside India, just as European countries were able to move on from conflict.
They note the problems have mostly been caused by both sides and that blame should not be placed on one.
Current Challenges and Future Vision: They discuss the need to work together and move past the division.
They reflect on how political use of religion is a problem
They discuss how, in the Middle East, there are many similar problems with religion.
They make mention of the existence of Pakistan as not just a concept, but a real entity.
They reflect on the history of India as being composed of many kingdoms.
They express the desire to work to better the countries rather than keep fighting and rehashing the past.
They state that one cannot move forward if they continue to speak to the past.
They question why India and Pakistan cannot work together when there are other countries in the region that work well together.
Cast of Characters
Mujibur Rahman Shami: A highly respected figure, considered a mentor (“ustaad e mahatma”) by the speaker. He is described as someone the speaker has studied under for 34 years, someone who elicits deep respect, affection and is seen as wise.
The Speaker (Unidentified): The person recounting the events and conversation. He is a long-time associate and student of Mujibur Rahman Shami. He is deeply concerned about the state of affairs in his society, politically, socially, and within families. He is trying to understand the root causes of the problems and seeking a way forward. He is also trying to facilitate a discussion between him and Mujibur Rahman Shami so the public can hear both viewpoints.
Quaid-e-Azam: A key historical figure, founder of Pakistan. His original vision and intent for the country are referenced, with an ideal of equality for all citizens regardless of religion and as the architect of a more prosperous Pakistan. The discussion also includes his remarks about the relationship between India and Pakistan being like that of the US and Canada.
Iqbal: Referred to as a historical figure who had an ideal for Pakistan that was not followed.
Pandit Jawaharlal Nehru: The first Prime Minister of India. He is portrayed with some ambivalence, seen as having made mistakes regarding the Kashmir conflict, and some question if he was as friendly to Muslims as his contemporary, Gandhi. The conversation notes how, after partition, his policies were not viewed favorably by the Muslims of India and Pakistan.
Gandhi: A major historical figure in the Indian independence movement. He is portrayed as a friend to Muslims, with some of the people mentioned in the text noting how he would engage in Yagya for Muslims.
Ustad Daman: A poet who recited in a mushaira that was held in India after partition, and who expressed a deep sorrow over the bloodshed and division of the country.
Mount Lytton: (Likely a reference to Louis Mountbatten, the last Viceroy of India) The text references how he was advised against the partition of Punjab and Bengal.
Lajpat Rai & Savarkar: Historical figures whose views about the separation of Hindus and Muslims are referenced as an alternative model of the time.
Allama Sahab: This is probably Muhammad Iqbal who wrote the “nazm” that was referenced about creating a new Ayodhya.
Dr. Javed Iqbal: A historical figure who was shown a “khat” after his marriage was said to have occurred in “hell.”
Abdul Kalam Azad & Maulana: These are likely both references to Abul Kalam Azad, who is noted as fighting for the unity of India.
Vajpayee: Was the former Prime Minister of India who visited Lahore
Modi: Is the current Prime Minister of India who visited Pakistan
Let me know if you have any other questions or want to explore this further!
Partition’s Legacy: Muslim-Hindu Relations in South Asia
The sources discuss the complex and often fraught relationship between Muslims and Hindus, particularly in the context of the partition of India and Pakistan, and its aftermath. Here’s an overview of the key points:
Historical Coexistence and Conflict: Muslims and Hindus have coexisted in South Asia for centuries, but this relationship has also been marked by periods of conflict [1, 2]. The sources mention that Muslims ruled in the area for a thousand years, before British rule [1].
The Impact of British Rule: The British introduced a system of voting which made Muslims realize they were a minority and would be ruled by others [1, 3]. This realization led to the demand for separate majority areas, ultimately resulting in the partition [3].
The Partition of India and Pakistan: The partition was a traumatic event, marked by violence and displacement [2, 4]. There were massacres and the movement of populations [4, 5]. Trains arrived carrying chopped bodies, and there were also retaliatory attacks in India [4]. There was an exchange of populations, with Muslims moving to Pakistan, and Hindus and Sikhs moving to India [5]. The text notes that in Lahore more than 80% of properties were owned by Hindus, but no Hindus remain there today, while in Delhi there are still Muslim neighborhoods [4].
The Use of Religion in Politics: The sources discuss how the slogan of Islam was used to create Pakistan [6]. This use of religion in politics is seen as a cause of the fanaticism that emerged [6]. The idea of separating communities based on religion is also discussed [7, 8]. It is argued that the concept of ‘majority’ and ‘minority’ became problematic after the partition, creating divisions even within communities [3].
Extremism and Hatred: The sources highlight the rise of extremism and hatred, not just between communities but within them [6]. The text notes that “earlier we used to hate other communities, now after that we have started hating our own people” [6].
The Issue of Kashmir: The sources mention the ongoing dispute over Kashmir [5]. It is presented as an issue that has fueled conflict between India and Pakistan [5]. It is noted that the decision to bring the issue to the UN was a mistake, and that the parties should have resolved it themselves [5].
Contradictions and Missed Opportunities: Some of the speakers seem to suggest that the logic of partition was flawed because the people of the subcontinent had co-existed for so long, and that the idea of the partition as a solution was misguided [7, 8]. There were also opportunities to improve relationships that were lost [9]. It is argued that despite the partition, the people of India, Pakistan and Bangladesh should have worked to foster friendly relationships [9, 10]. The text suggests that they could be like the relationship between Canada and the USA [4, 11]. The idea of a united future was considered at the time of partition [9].
The sources emphasize that the conflict between Muslims and Hindus was exacerbated by political maneuvering and the use of religious identity for political gain [6, 12]. The sources also suggest that the focus should be on moving forward with mutual respect and cooperation, rather than dwelling on past grievances [2, 9].
The Creation of Pakistan
The sources discuss the creation of Pakistan as a complex event rooted in historical, political, and social factors, marked by both the desire for self-determination and the tragic consequences of partition [1-3].
Here’s a breakdown of the key points regarding Pakistan’s creation:
The Two-Nation Theory: The idea of separating majority areas and working separately emerged when Muslims realized they were a minority in British India [1, 4]. The British system of voting highlighted this minority status, leading to the demand for a separate state [2]. The slogan of Islam was used to create a picture of a state based on Islamic principles [1].
The Role of Political Leaders: Leaders such as Quaid-e-Azam played a key role in advocating for a separate Muslim state [1, 2]. The sources suggest that this was the result of the British system of voting and a realization of being a minority in India [2-4].
The Partition of India: The sources make it clear that the partition was a traumatic and violent event [3, 5, 6]. There were massacres and displacement, with trains arriving with chopped bodies and retaliatory violence on both sides of the border [3, 7]. The exchange of populations led to many Muslims moving to Pakistan and Hindus and Sikhs moving to India, with a great deal of suffering and loss of life [3, 8].
Flawed Implementation: The sources suggest that the partition was not well-executed [1, 2]. The division led to the rise of extremism and hatred, not just between communities but within them [1, 2]. The sources question whether the idea of dividing the subcontinent was the correct decision, or if the different groups could have found a way to live together peacefully [3, 6, 9].
Missed Opportunities and Contradictions: The sources note that the partition of India and Pakistan was not inevitable and that, if handled differently, the different communities could have lived together in peace. They cite the examples of how European nations have overcome historical conflicts and developed positive relationships [6, 10, 11]. The sources suggest that the idea of a united future for the subcontinent was also a possibility [10, 11].
The Kashmir Dispute: The sources highlight the ongoing dispute over Kashmir as a major point of conflict between India and Pakistan since the time of the partition [8]. The decision to take the issue to the United Nations is seen as a mistake that has complicated the relationship between the two countries [8, 9].
The Legacy of Partition: The sources make it clear that the legacy of partition continues to impact the region, with ongoing tensions and conflicts. The sources emphasize the need to move forward with mutual respect and cooperation, rather than dwelling on past grievances [5, 10]. The sources also suggest that the relationship between Pakistan and India should be based on mutual respect and cooperation, like the relationship between Canada and the USA [7, 11].
Religious Fanaticism and the Partition of India
The sources discuss political fanaticism in the context of the creation of Pakistan and the subsequent conflicts between Muslims and Hindus in the region [1]. Here’s a breakdown of the key points:
The Role of Religious Slogans: The sources state that the slogan of Islam was used to create Pakistan [1]. This use of religion in politics is presented as a cause of the fanaticism that emerged [1]. The sources suggest that this type of political rhetoric, using religious slogans, led to an environment of extremism and hatred [1].
Exacerbation of Existing Divisions: The sources indicate that political fanaticism heightened the existing tensions between different communities [1]. The sources mention that “earlier we used to hate other communities, now after that we have started hating our own people” [1]. This highlights how fanaticism can lead to internal divisions within a society, where people begin to turn against each other, not just those of other religions [1].
Fanaticism as a Deviation from Sanity: The sources describe fanaticism as an extreme reason that has entered into people’s thinking [1]. They suggest that this has led to a loss of sanity [1]. The text implies that this kind of extreme thinking is a deviation from rational thought and behavior [1].
The Impact of the Partition: The partition of India and Pakistan is seen as a major turning point that exacerbated political fanaticism [1, 2]. The violence and displacement of the partition created deep-seated resentment and anger that was easily manipulated by political figures [1]. The sources suggest that the trauma of the partition fueled the flames of fanaticism, making it more difficult for communities to coexist peacefully [1, 2].
The Cycle of Violence: The sources note that, once started, this fanaticism led to a cycle of violence and hatred [3, 4]. The sources suggest that mistakes were made by all sides, and that this cycle of blame and retribution made it difficult to move forward [5, 6]. The sources point to the need to recognize past mistakes, not to try and justify them [3, 5].
The Political Use of Religion: The sources also point to the role of political leaders and the political use of religion [7, 8]. They suggest that the political process in the region became a debate about partition and the use of religion for political gain [9]. This political strategy increased divisions and hatred, further fueling fanaticism [1, 9].
Missed Opportunities for Unity: The sources indicate that there were missed opportunities to avoid fanaticism and violence. The text suggests that, instead of dividing the country, the political leaders could have worked to unite the people and build a society where all communities could live together [6, 10]. The sources point to the examples of other countries, like in Europe, who have overcome such divisions and created peaceful relationships [3, 10].
In summary, the sources portray political fanaticism as a dangerous force that was fueled by the use of religious slogans, the traumatic experience of the partition, and the political exploitation of divisions between communities. The sources suggest that overcoming this kind of fanaticism requires recognizing past mistakes, promoting mutual respect, and rejecting the politics of division.
Religious Politics and the Partition of India
The sources discuss the complex and problematic role of religious politics in the context of the creation of Pakistan and the subsequent conflicts in the region [1-16]. Here’s a breakdown of the key points:
The Use of Religious Slogans for Political Gain: The sources highlight how the slogan of Islam was used to create Pakistan [2]. This is presented as a prime example of how religion was used for political mobilization and the creation of a separate nation [2-4]. The sources suggest that this use of religion in politics led to the rise of fanaticism and extremism [2, 3].
Religion as a Basis for Division: The sources point out that the idea of separating communities based on religion was a major factor leading to the partition of India and Pakistan [3-5]. The British system of voting made Muslims realize they were a minority, leading to the demand for separate majority areas [4, 5]. This created the idea that religious identity should be the primary basis for political organization and national identity [4, 5].
Fanaticism and Extremism: The sources state that the use of religious slogans in politics led to an environment of extremism and hatred [2, 3]. This resulted not only in conflicts between different religious communities, but also within them [2]. This political fanaticism is presented as a deviation from sanity and rational behavior [2].
The Problematic Concept of Majority and Minority: The sources question the logic of partition and the idea of religious majorities and minorities [4, 5]. It is argued that this division created problems, even within the communities themselves [4]. The sources suggest that the concept of ‘majority’ and ‘minority’ became a tool for political manipulation and division [4, 5].
Contradictions and Missed Opportunities: Some of the speakers in the sources indicate that the logic of partition was flawed, and that the people of the subcontinent could have co-existed peacefully [6, 7]. They suggest that the use of religion as a basis for political identity was misguided and that the political leaders could have worked to unite the people [7]. It is also suggested that the people of India, Pakistan and Bangladesh could have fostered friendly relationships like the relationship between Canada and the USA [8, 9].
The Kashmir Conflict: The sources also point to the ongoing dispute over Kashmir, which is linked to religious politics [10, 11]. The sources note that this dispute has further fueled the conflict between India and Pakistan. The sources criticize the decision to bring this matter to the UN [10].
The Legacy of Religious Politics: The sources show that the legacy of using religion in politics is one of division, conflict, and missed opportunities [1-16]. The sources emphasize the need to move forward with mutual respect and cooperation, rather than dwelling on past grievances [6-8].
In summary, the sources present religious politics as a divisive force that has had a negative impact on the region. The sources suggest that the use of religious slogans for political gain, the creation of political divisions based on religious identity, and the resulting fanaticism and extremism have been detrimental to the people of the subcontinent. The sources emphasize the importance of learning from past mistakes and promoting unity, mutual respect and cooperation [6-16].
India-Pakistan Conflicts: Partition’s Legacy and the Path to Peace
The sources discuss regional conflicts, particularly those between India and Pakistan, in the context of the partition and its aftermath [1, 2]. Here’s a breakdown of the key points:
The Partition of India: The partition of India and Pakistan is presented as a major source of regional conflict [1, 3]. The sources describe the division as a traumatic event that led to widespread violence and displacement [3, 4]. The creation of separate majority areas for Muslims and Hindus based on religious identity resulted in mass migrations and massacres, creating a legacy of animosity and distrust [1, 5]. The sources state that the partition was not well-executed and that it exacerbated existing tensions [3, 5, 6].
The Kashmir Dispute: The ongoing dispute over Kashmir is highlighted as a significant point of conflict between India and Pakistan [2, 7, 8]. The sources indicate that the decision to involve the United Nations in the Kashmir dispute was a mistake, as it complicated the issue [2]. The sources suggest that the conflict over Kashmir has been a major factor in the ongoing tensions between the two countries [2, 8].
Missed Opportunities for Unity: The sources suggest there were missed opportunities for unity in the region [1, 6, 9]. The text indicates that, if handled differently, the different communities could have found a way to live together peacefully [6, 9]. The sources present examples of other nations, like those in Europe, who have overcome historical conflicts and developed positive relationships [9]. The sources note that the relationship between Pakistan and India should be based on mutual respect and cooperation, like the relationship between Canada and the USA [4, 10].
Fanaticism and Extremism: The sources note that the use of religious slogans in politics led to an environment of extremism and hatred [1]. This fanaticism is not only between different communities but also within them, as people began to hate their own [1]. The sources suggest that this extreme thinking has led to a loss of sanity, with violence and displacement fueled by the political manipulation of religious identity [1, 8].
Cycle of Violence: The sources mention a cycle of violence and retribution [1-3]. Mistakes were made by all sides in the conflict and this cycle of blame made it difficult to move forward [3, 8]. The sources suggest that this has perpetuated the conflicts in the region [1, 10]. The text emphasizes the need to recognize past mistakes, not to try and justify them [8].
The Role of Political Leaders: The sources suggest that political leaders in the region have played a role in exacerbating tensions [3]. The political use of religion and the focus on partition led to a cycle of blame and hatred [1, 5, 8]. The sources imply that the political process became a debate about partition, using religion for political gain, which increased divisions and hatred [1, 5].
Cross-Border Issues: The sources mention cross-border issues like terrorism and the movement of people that have complicated the relationship between India and Pakistan [4, 9, 10]. The sources describe how, despite attempts at peace, such as when Vajpayee visited Lahore, devastating attacks like Kargil and Pathankot have happened [10]. These issues are presented as symptoms of the larger regional conflicts rooted in the legacy of partition and the political manipulation of religious identities [10].
The Need for Reconciliation: The sources emphasize the need to move forward with mutual respect and cooperation [9, 10]. The text suggests that the countries in the region should focus on building good relations and working together for the benefit of all [10, 11]. The sources call for an end to the cycle of violence and blame [8, 10].
In summary, the sources describe regional conflicts as a product of the historical trauma of the partition, the unresolved dispute over Kashmir, and the political use of religion. The sources emphasize the need to overcome past grievances and to move forward with mutual respect, cooperation, and a focus on building peaceful relationships in the region. The sources offer that if nations in Europe that have a long history of war and violence can achieve peace, then India, Pakistan and Bangladesh can do the same [9].
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
This collection of articles from the Al Riyadh newspaper covers a diverse range of topics, primarily focusing on Saudi Arabia’s diplomatic efforts, economic developments, and social initiatives. The paper reports on the Crown Prince’s dialogue regarding the Ukraine crisis and the Kingdom’s commitment to facilitating peace. Additionally, it highlights Standard & Poor’s positive credit rating for Saudi Arabia and the nation’s drive to boost investment. Several articles detail Saudi Arabia’s humanitarian and religious outreach, including Ramadan feeding programs and Quran competitions internationally. Furthermore, the publication includes local news, sports updates, cultural discussions, and economic analysis, offering a broad snapshot of current affairs.
According to the article, what is Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman’s stance on the Russia-Ukraine conflict?
What was the significance of Standard & Poor’s recent action regarding the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia’s credit rating, and what factors contributed to this decision?
Dr. Mohammed Ayman Sosan discusses the “Malameh As-Siyasah Al-Kharijiyah As-Saudiyah Tijaha Suriyah.” Based on the provided text, what is a key aspect of Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy approach towards Syria?
What was the record-breaking event hosted by Saudi Arabia in Indonesia during Ramadan, and what was its purpose?
Describe the historical and spiritual importance of Al Rawdah Al Sharifa in the Prophet’s Mosque.
What is the “King Salman’s Table” event, and what does it reflect about Saudi Arabia’s role in the Islamic world?
What are some of the investment opportunities being offered in the holy sites of Makkah, as mentioned by the Kedana company?
What is the current trend in the regional markets for olefins, and what are the challenges being faced by suppliers?
According to the article, what was the main announcement made by the US regarding digital assets, and what are its potential implications?
What were the initial demands of Syrian protestors in 2011, and what has been the significant change in the country as of the writing of this article?
Quiz Answer Key
The Crown Prince emphasized the Kingdom’s keenness to facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution to the crisis in Ukraine. This aligns with Saudi Arabia’s broader efforts to promote global peace through discussion.
Standard & Poor’s raised the Kingdom’s credit rating to “A+” with a stable outlook for both local and foreign currencies. This upgrade reflects the continuous progress in the Kingdom’s creditworthiness, attributed to the supported non-oil economic growth, market reforms, and diversification efforts in line with Vision 2030.
A key aspect of Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy towards Syria is its focus on supporting the Syrian people, providing aid, and assisting in rebuilding Syria as a unified, independent, and safe Arab state, free from foreign interference and preserving its territorial integrity.
The record-breaking event was the “King Salman’s Table,” the largest Iftar meal in ASEAN countries, held in Indonesia during Ramadan. Its purpose was to reflect the greatness of Islamic solidarity and strengthen the bonds of love between Muslim people.
Al Rawdah Al Sharifa is a highly revered area within the Prophet’s Mosque, located between the Prophet’s house and his pulpit. It is considered a garden of Paradise and a place for answered prayers, a center for knowledge, and a starting point for spreading guidance.
“King Salman’s Table” was a massive Iftar meal in Java, Indonesia, organized by the Saudi Ministry of Islamic Affairs. It reflects Saudi Arabia’s leading role in serving Muslims, strengthening their unity, and its continued support for Muslims at the heart of Indonesia.
Kedana company is offering long-term investment opportunities in the holy sites of Makkah, including developing the squares of Jabal Ar-Rahmah for commercial units and investing in a section of the Jamarat facility to create attractions for pilgrims and residents.
The pace of price increases is accelerating in the regional markets for olefins in March, with suppliers seeking larger increases to improve profit margins. However, new supplies are exacerbating the oversupply, creating challenges for buyers to absorb these higher prices.
The US President signed an executive order establishing a strategic reserve of Bitcoin and other digital assets. This signifies a formal recognition of the digital assets industry at higher levels of the American government and implies a long-term holding strategy rather than immediate selling by the government.
The initial demands of Syrian protestors in 2011 centered on calls for dignity, freedom, and the downfall of the Assad regime. A significant change as of the article’s writing is the reported fall of the Assad regime, following advances by opposition forces into Damascus.
Essay Format Questions
Analyze the various roles Saudi Arabia is portraying on the international stage as highlighted in the provided excerpts. Consider its diplomatic efforts in the Ukraine conflict, its economic standing based on credit rating upgrades, and its initiatives within the Islamic world.
Discuss the economic diversification efforts of Saudi Arabia as evidenced by the Standard & Poor’s rating upgrade, the investment opportunities in Makkah’s holy sites, and the ambitions in the semiconductor industry. What are the potential long-term impacts of these efforts?
Examine the significance of cultural and religious initiatives undertaken by Saudi Arabia, such as the “King Salman’s Table” and the focus on historical mosques. How do these initiatives contribute to the Kingdom’s image and influence, both domestically and internationally?
Evaluate the complexities of regional conflicts and international relations as reflected in the discussions about Ukraine, Syria, and the Israeli-Palestinian situation. What role, if any, does Saudi Arabia appear to be playing in these contexts?
Analyze the interplay between economic factors (such as oil prices, market trends in olefins, and the establishment of a digital asset reserve) and geopolitical events as discussed in the provided sources. How do these factors influence each other and shape the global landscape?
Glossary of Key Terms
ولي العهد (Wali al-Ahd): Crown Prince. The designated successor to the throne.
أزمة أوكرانيا (Azmat Ukraniya): Ukraine Crisis. Refers to the ongoing conflict involving Ukraine and Russia.
ستاندرد آند بورز (Standard & Poor’s): A leading international credit rating agency that assesses the creditworthiness of countries and corporations.
التصنيف االئتماني (At-Tasneef al-I’timani): Credit Rating. An assessment of the ability of a borrower to repay their debt obligations.
رؤية 2030 (Ru’yah 2030): Vision 2030. Saudi Arabia’s ambitious long-term plan for economic and social reform and diversification.
واس (WAS): مخابرات وكالة الأنباء السعودية (Saudi Press Agency). The official news agency of Saudi Arabia.
مالمح السياسة الخارجية (Malamih As-Siyasah Al-Kharijiyah): Features of Foreign Policy. The main aspects and principles guiding a country’s interactions with other nations.
المسجد النبوي (Al-Masjid An-Nabawi): The Prophet’s Mosque in Medina, one of the holiest sites in Islam.
الروضة الشريفة (Ar-Rawdah Ash-Sharifah): The Noble Garden, a specific area within the Prophet’s Mosque with significant religious importance.
مائدة الملك سلمان (Ma’idat Al-Malik Salman): King Salman’s Table. Often refers to charitable or large-scale meal initiatives undertaken in the name of the King.
آسيان (ASEAN): The Association of Southeast Asian Nations, a political and economic union of states in Southeast Asia.
المشاعر المقدسة (Al-Masha’er Al-Muqaddasah): The Holy Sites around Makkah associated with the Hajj pilgrimage, such as Mina, Arafat, and Muzdalifah.
الجمرات (Al-Jamarat): The pillars in Mina that are stoned by pilgrims during Hajj, symbolizing the rejection of evil.
الأوليفينات (Al-Olefinat): Olefins. A group of unsaturated hydrocarbons containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond, important in the petrochemical industry.
البولي إيثيلين (Al-Buli Ithilin): Polyethylene. A common type of plastic polymer.
نوتانيكس (Nutanix): A cloud computing company.
Kubernetes: An open-source container orchestration system for automating application deployment, scaling, and management.
البيت الأبيض (Al-Bayt Al-Abyad): The White House, the official residence and principal workplace of the President of the United States.
البيتكوين (Al-Bitcoin): Bitcoin. A decentralized digital currency, without a central bank or single administrator, that can be sent from user to user on the peer-to-peer bitcoin network without the need for intermediaries.
العمات الرقمية (Al-‘Umlat Ar-Raqamiyah): Digital Currencies. Currencies that are only available in digital form, not physical coins or banknotes.
هيئة تحرير الشام (Hay’at Tahrir ash-Sham): Levant Liberation Committee, a Sunni Islamist militant group involved in the Syrian Civil War.
داعش (Da’esh): An alternative name for the Islamic State of Iraq and Syria (ISIS), a militant group.
حماس (Hamas): A Palestinian Sunni-Islamist fundamentalist organization currently governing the Gaza Strip.
يونسيف (UNICEF): The United Nations Children’s Fund, an agency responsible for providing humanitarian and developmental aid to children worldwide.
الأونصة (Al-Ounsa): Ounce. A unit of weight, often used for precious metals like gold.
الرئيس ترمب (Ar-Ra’ees Trump): President Trump. Refers to Donald Trump, the former President of the United States.
أوبك + (OPEC+): A group of oil-producing countries comprising the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) and several allied non-OPEC countries.
نيورو سينما (Neuro-cinema): A field that studies what happens in the brain when watching films and dramatic works.
اإثراء (Ithra’): اختصار لمركز الملك عبدالعزيز الثقافي العالمي (King Abdulaziz Center for World Culture). A cultural center in Dhahran, Saudi Arabia.
MBC: Middle East Broadcasting Center, a pan-Arab media conglomerate.
صناعة الأدوية (Sina’at Al-Adwiyah): Pharmaceutical Industry. The sector involved in the discovery, development, manufacture, and marketing of pharmaceutical drugs.
أشباه الموصالت (Ashbah Al-Mawasilat): Semiconductors. Materials that have electrical conductivity between that of a conductor (such as copper) and an insulator (such as glass), crucial for electronic devices.
الهوية (Al-Hawiyah): Identity. The characteristics that determine who or what a person or thing is.
التحول (At-Tahawwul): Transformation. A thorough or dramatic change in form or appearance.
الإستقرار (Al-Istiqlal): Stability. The state of being stable; resistance to change or deterioration.
ردة فعل (Raddat Fi’l): Reaction. An action performed or a feeling experienced in response to a situation or event.
موسم الرياض (Mawsim Ar-Riyadh): Riyadh Season. A large entertainment and cultural festival held annually in Riyadh, Saudi Arabia.
إكسبو 2030 (Expo 2030): The World Expo scheduled to be held in Riyadh in 2030.
كأس العالم 2034 (Ka’s Al-‘Alam 2034): The FIFA World Cup scheduled to be potentially hosted by Saudi Arabia in 2034.
النفط (An-Naft): Oil. Petroleum, a liquid mixture of hydrocarbons that is present in certain rock strata and can be extracted and refined to produce fuels including gasoline, kerosene, and diesel oil; mineral oil.
الأمن الصحي (Al-Amn As-Sihi): Health Security. Measures taken to protect public health against diseases and other health risks.
الاكتفاء الذاتي (Al-Iktifa’ Adh-Dhati): Self-Sufficiency. The ability to fulfill all needs without external assistance.
الجزائية (Al-Jaza’iyah): Penalty (in sports).
الفار (Al- الفار): VAR (Video Assistant Referee) in sports.
Date: October 26, 2023 (Based on the request date) Subject: Review of Key Themes and Information from “Al Riyadh” Newspaper (Issue 20715, March 16, 2025) Source: Excerpts from “20715.pdf” ( جريدة الرياض – العدد 20715 – السنة الثانية والستون – الأحد 16 رمضان 1446هـ 16 مارس 2025م)
This briefing document summarizes the main themes, important ideas, and key facts presented in the provided excerpts from the March 16, 2025 issue of the Saudi Arabian newspaper “Al Riyadh”.
Main Themes:
Saudi Arabia’s Role in International Diplomacy and Conflict Resolution: A significant portion of the front page highlights the Kingdom’s active engagement in facilitating dialogue and seeking political solutions to international crises, particularly the conflict in Ukraine.
Economic Growth and Investment: The newspaper reports on positive economic developments, including an upgrade of Saudi Arabia’s credit rating by Standard & Poor’s, citing the Kingdom’s efforts towards economic diversification and investment attraction.
Developments in Saudi Foreign Policy: The excerpts touch upon Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy approach towards Syria, emphasizing support for the Syrian people and a unified, independent, and secure Syria. Additionally, the Crown Prince sent a congratulatory message to the new Canadian Prime Minister.
Preservation and Development of Islamic Heritage Sites: The newspaper features articles detailing the historical and spiritual significance of the Prophet’s Mosque in Medina, including the Rawdah Al-Sharifah and the Prophet’s Mihrab. There is also news about the development and investment opportunities in historical sites within the Holy Sites (Masha’er).
Social and Cultural Initiatives in Saudi Arabia: The excerpts cover various social and cultural events and initiatives, including a large Ramadan iftar organized by the Ministry of Islamic Affairs in Indonesia, the honoring of accomplished students in the Qassim region, and a seminar on the legacy of Prince Mohammed bin Fahd. The “Ithra” center’s cultural programs during Ramadan are also mentioned.
Economic and Market Trends: The economic section reports on the accelerating increase in olefin prices, factors influencing the oil market (including geopolitical tensions and potential changes in production), and the gold market breaking the $3,000 barrier. There is also a piece on the potential and capabilities of the Saudi pharmaceutical industry.
Developments in Regional Conflicts and Humanitarian Issues: The newspaper covers ongoing conflicts and humanitarian situations in Palestine (Gaza and the West Bank), including reports of displacement, Israeli military operations, and efforts to provide aid. The situation in Syria and Lebanon are also briefly touched upon.
Sports News and Developments: The sports section reports on various events, including Yazeed Al-Rajhi’s victory in the Dakar Rally Saudi Arabia 2025, Al Nassr football club’s victory, and Colombian player Jhon Duran’s absence from a match against Brazil. The Saudi Handball Federation’s appointment of a new Spanish coach is also announced.
Regulatory and Organizational Changes: The Saudi Olympic and Paralympic Committee is reported to be implementing stricter financial regulations for sports federations.
Most Important Ideas and Facts:
Saudi Mediation Efforts in Ukraine: Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman reiterated to Russian President Putin the Kingdom’s keenness to “facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution to the Ukraine crisis.” The article highlights Saudi Arabia’s leadership in supporting international peace initiatives and its belief that dialogue is the only way to achieve lasting global peace. The Kingdom has hosted discussions between Ukrainian and American officials, reflecting its strong diplomatic influence.
S&P Credit Rating Upgrade: Standard & Poor’s raised Saudi Arabia’s credit rating to “A+” with a “stable” outlook for both local and foreign currencies. The agency’s report attributed this to the Kingdom’s “continuous progress in the credit rating,” driven by a supportive non-oil economic growth, diversification, and capital market development, which balances the risks of high sovereign foreign debt service and costs, aligning with the goals of Vision 2030.
Saudi Foreign Policy Towards Syria: Dr. Mohammed Ayman Sosan, the Syrian Ambassador to Saudi Arabia, outlines features of Saudi foreign policy towards Syria, emphasizing the Kingdom’s support for the Syrian people following the fall of the Assad regime. Saudi Arabia has participated in various meetings and conferences regarding Syria, affirming its commitment to a unified, independent, and secure Syria, and supporting a political transition that preserves the rights of all Syrians.
Significance of the Prophet’s Mosque: Articles detail the spiritual importance of the Rawdah Al-Sharifah, quoted as being “a garden from Paradise” by the Prophet Muhammad (peace be upon him). The historical evolution of the Prophet’s Mihrab (niche indicating the direction of prayer) is also described, noting the renovations undertaken during the Saudi era.
Investment Opportunities in Mecca’s Holy Sites: The Kidana company, the development arm of the Royal Commission for Mecca and the Holy Sites, has presented a package of long-term investment opportunities in historical sites within the Masha’er. These include developing the squares of Jabal Al-Rahmah (Mount of Mercy) and parts of the Jamarat facility into commercial units and exhibitions to enrich the experience of pilgrims and residents. The average daily number of visitors to the Masha’er is reported to be 15,000.
King Salman’s Ramadan Iftar in Indonesia: A massive iftar (breaking of the fast) event organized by the Saudi Ministry of Islamic Affairs in Central Java, Indonesia, set a new record in ASEAN countries, with over 28,000 fasting individuals attending. This reflects the Kingdom’s efforts to strengthen ties and promote solidarity among Muslims.
Gold Price Surpasses $3,000: The spot price of gold reached an all-time high of $3,004.86 per ounce during the week, driven by investors seeking safe-haven assets amid economic uncertainty and geopolitical tensions.
Palestine Conflict and Humanitarian Crisis: Reports detail ongoing Israeli military operations in the West Bank and Gaza, resulting in Palestinian casualties, displacement, and damage to infrastructure. International organizations warn of increasing food insecurity and the need for humanitarian assistance.
Saudi Pharmaceutical Industry Potential: An opinion piece emphasizes the significant potential of the Saudi pharmaceutical industry, highlighting the Kingdom’s growing market, regional leadership, and Vision 2030 goals. It stresses the need for integrated strategies to localize manufacturing, attract investment, and promote research and innovation.
Stricter Financial Oversight for Saudi Sports Federations: The Saudi Olympic and Paralympic Committee is implementing a strict financial agreement to address potential overspending by sports federations, emphasizing the director’s administrative role and limiting financial authority.
Quotes from Original Sources:
Crown Prince to Putin on Ukraine: “# ولي العهد لبوتين: المملكة حريصة على تسهيل الحوار والوصول لحل سياسي ألزمة أوكرانيا” (The Crown Prince to Putin: The Kingdom is keen to facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution to the Ukraine crisis.)
S&P on Saudi Arabia’s Credit Rating: “رفعت وكالة التصنيف الائتماني )S&P( ستاندرد آند بورز تصنيف المملكة الائتماني إلى »A+« مع نظرة مستقبلية »مستقرة«.” (The credit rating agency (S&P) Standard & Poor’s raised the Kingdom’s credit rating to “A+” with a “stable” future outlook.)
Prophet’s Saying on Rawdah Al-Sharifah: “…قال النبي -صلى الله عليه وسلم-: “ما بين بيتي ومنبري روضة من رياض الجنة”” (…the Prophet – peace and blessings be upon him – said: “What is between my house and my pulpit is a garden from the gardens of Paradise.”)
Kidana on Investment in Holy Sites: “طرحت شركة كدانة، الذراع المطور للهيئة الملكية لمدينة مكة والمشاعر المقدسة، حزمة فرص استثمارية »طويلة الأجل«…” (Kidana Company, the development arm of the Royal Commission for Mecca and the Holy Sites, has presented a package of “long-term” investment opportunities…)
Article on Modern Media: “لب الإعالم الحديث، وبناء القصة وما وراءها من تجارب هي فحوى الرسائل التي يتجاوز تأثيرها المواد الإعلامية التقليدية…” (The core of modern media, and the construction of the story and the experiences behind it, are the essence of the messages whose impact goes beyond traditional media materials…)
Gold Market Report: “بلغ الذهب الفوري أعلى مستوى له على الإطلاق عند 3004.86 دوالرات للأوقية” (Spot gold reached its highest level ever at $3004.86 per ounce.)
Commentary on Saudi Pharmaceutical Industry: “تمتلك بلادنا مقومات تجعلها قادرة على تطوير قطاع الأدوية وتحقيق الاكتفاء الذاتي…” (Our country possesses the components that make it capable of developing the pharmaceutical sector and achieving self-sufficiency…)
Conclusion:
The excerpts from “Al Riyadh” on March 16, 2025, present a snapshot of Saudi Arabia’s multifaceted engagement across international politics, economic development, cultural initiatives, and regional issues. The emphasis on diplomacy, economic growth, and the preservation of Islamic heritage underscores the Kingdom’s key priorities. The reports on regional conflicts and global market trends provide context for Saudi Arabia’s actions and policies. The inclusion of social and sports news offers a broader view of current events within the Kingdom and its interactions with the wider world.
Saudi Arabia: Diplomacy, Economy, Culture, and Markets
FAQ on the Provided Sources
What was the main diplomatic focus of Saudi Arabia as highlighted in the article? The main diplomatic focus highlighted was Saudi Arabia’s commitment to facilitating dialogue and finding political solutions to international crises, particularly the conflict in Ukraine. The article emphasizes the Crown Prince’s communication with President Putin, reiterating the Kingdom’s keenness on this matter. It also mentions Saudi Arabia’s history of mediation efforts and its hosting of talks between involved parties, reflecting its desire to foster global peace and stability through diplomacy and dialogue among nations with differing political views and backgrounds.
What positive economic development was reported for Saudi Arabia? The positive economic development reported was the upgrade of Saudi Arabia’s long and short-term sovereign credit ratings in both local and foreign currencies by Standard & Poor’s (S&P) to ‘A+’ with a ‘Stable’ outlook. S&P cited the Kingdom’s continued progress in diversifying its non-oil economy, developing its capital markets, and implementing its Vision 2030 objectives as key factors for this positive assessment. The report indicates that this progress balances the risks associated with higher external financing needs and debt servicing costs, ultimately attracting foreign investment.
What was the primary subject of Dr. Muhammad Ayman Sawsan’s article? The primary subject of Dr. Muhammad Ayman Sawsan’s article was the features of Saudi Arabia’s foreign policy towards Syria. The article discusses the Kingdom’s consistent stance on supporting the Syrian people, its efforts to help them rebuild a unified, independent, and safe Arab state free from foreign interference, and its emphasis on a political transition that preserves the rights of all Syrians. It also highlights Saudi Arabia’s active diplomatic role in various meetings and conferences concerning Syria following the fall of the Assad regime.
What was the significance of King Salman’s Ramadan iftar in Indonesia? King Salman’s Ramadan iftar in Central Java, Indonesia, was significant as it set a new record for the largest iftar table in ASEAN countries, with over 28,000 fasting people in attendance. Organized by the Saudi Ministry of Islamic Affairs, Dawah and Guidance, this event reflected the greatness of Islamic solidarity and brotherhood. Beyond just a meal, it was a message of peace and love from Saudi Arabia, reaffirming the Kingdom’s role in serving Muslims and strengthening unity among Islamic nations. This achievement also built upon a previous record set by the ministry in Indonesia in 2024.
What initiatives were highlighted concerning the development and preservation of historical and cultural sites in Saudi Arabia? Several initiatives were highlighted, including the Prince Faisal bin Mishal’s reception of the Qassim Region Women’s Committee’s report on their developmental work, emphasizing support for productive women and families to achieve sustainable development in line with Vision 2030. Additionally, under the patronage of Prince Abdulaziz bin Fahd bin Mohammed bin Turki Al Saud, the Al-Anoud Foundation held a seminar titled “Prince Mohammed bin Fahd: Achievements and Legacy,” focusing on historical impact. Furthermore, Kadana Development Company offered investment opportunities for historical sites in the Holy Sites of Makkah, aiming to enrich the experience of residents, pilgrims, and Umrah performers by creating commercial outlets and exhibitions that showcase the historical narrative of Makkah. The second phase of a project to renovate and restore 30 historical mosques across 10 regions was also mentioned, aiming to rehabilitate these sites for worship, preserve their architectural authenticity, and highlight the Kingdom’s cultural and religious depth, aligning with Vision 2030’s focus on preserving heritage.
What was the key concern regarding the market for olefin products in the region? The key concern regarding the market for olefin products in the region was the accelerating pace of price increases in the regional olefin markets. New supplies were exacerbating the oversupply situation, creating challenges for profit margins. While suppliers aimed to improve these margins with significant price hikes, there was uncertainty about whether buyers could absorb these increases. Weak import competitiveness, particularly from the United States due to high shipping costs and stable local prices, was also a major factor influencing the polyethylene market.
What were some of the main themes discussed at the Nutanix .NEXT On Tour event in Riyadh? The Nutanix .NEXT On Tour event in Riyadh covered several main themes related to advancing digital transformation. These included leveraging modern digital platforms like cloud computing and the shift towards enterprise artificial intelligence, the introduction of the Nutanix Kubernetes Platform for seamless migration to cloud-native applications, hybrid cloud computing as an enabler of digital transformation, and Saudi Arabia’s bid to host the 2034 FIFA World Cup, including the role of AI in football with a special appearance by Saudi national team coach Hervé Renard. The event also highlighted Nutanix’s significant investments and strategic partnerships in Saudi Arabia, such as opening a new office, increasing employee numbers, becoming a regional headquarters, partnering with the Digital Government Authority, and empowering local talent through training programs.
What was the significant development concerning gold prices and global stock market value? Gold prices broke the $3,000 per ounce barrier for the first time, driven by investors seeking a safe-haven asset amid economic uncertainty and geopolitical tensions, including the potential for escalating trade wars. Simultaneously, approximately $3 trillion was wiped off the global stock market value in the preceding week, with most of these losses concentrated in the United States. This reflected investor concerns over trade policies, economic slowdown fears, and rising geopolitical risks, leading to increased demand for safe assets like gold and a sell-off in equities.
Ukraine Crisis: Saudi Arabia’s Diplomatic Efforts
Based on the sources, there have been discussions and efforts related to the Ukraine crisis talks.
Saudi Arabia welcomed Kuwait’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine. In a statement from its Ministry of Foreign Affairs, the Kingdom affirmed its support for and belief in reaching a solution to the crisis in Ukraine through peaceful means. Saudi Arabia also appreciated Kuwait’s efforts to find a political resolution.
Similarly, Saudi Arabia also welcomed Qatar’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine. The Kingdom’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs expressed hope that these discussions would contribute to reaching a resolution to the crisis in Ukraine. Saudi Arabia also expressed its appreciation for Qatar’s diplomatic efforts aimed at bringing international viewpoints closer, reiterating Qatar’s firm belief that dialogue is the optimal choice for resolving regional and international crises and conflicts. The Ministry further reaffirmed Saudi Arabia’s support for all efforts aimed at establishing peace through cooperation among nations.
Earlier in the year, the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia itself was involved in facilitating discussions related to the Ukraine issue. According to one source, on the sidelines of hosting the US Secretary of State for talks with Russia, then-US President Donald Trump acknowledged the Kingdom as a “special place with special leaders” for holding such discussions. These talks took place in Riyadh.
Furthermore, the Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud had a phone call with the President of the Russian Federation, Vladimir Putin. During this call, they reviewed the existing areas of cooperation between the two countries and ways to enhance them. The call also involved a review of the efforts being made to resolve the Ukrainian crisis, and the Crown Prince emphasized the Kingdom’s keenness to exert all good offices to facilitate dialogue and everything that leads to a solution.
Saudi Arabia’s Diplomatic Efforts for Peace and Stability
Based on the sources and our conversation history, Saudi Arabia has been actively involved in diplomacy across several areas, demonstrating its commitment to regional and international peace and stability. Here’s a discussion of Saudi Arabia’s diplomatic efforts:
Efforts to Resolve the Ukraine Crisis:
As discussed in our previous conversation, Saudi Arabia has shown a keen interest in facilitating a resolution to the Ukraine crisis. Crown Prince Mohammed bin Salman emphasized the Kingdom’s eagerness to facilitate dialogue and reach a political solution during a phone call with Russian President Vladimir Putin.
President Putin expressed his gratitude to the Kingdom and its leaders for their efforts in settling the Ukrainian crisis, recognizing Saudi Arabia’s important role as a mediator. He also acknowledged the Kingdom’s political and economic standing and its pivotal role on the international stage, highlighting the trust major powers have in Saudi Arabia’s ability to act as a neutral and impartial mediator.
Furthermore, then-US President Donald Trump, in February of the previous year, acknowledged Saudi Arabia as a “special place with special leaders” for hosting talks between the US and Russia on the sidelines of a visit by the US Secretary of State to the Kingdom.
Saudi Arabia welcomed Kuwait’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, affirming its support for a peaceful resolution.
Similarly, the Kingdom welcomed Qatar’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, expressing hope for a resolution through these discussions and appreciating Qatar’s diplomatic efforts.
Broader Diplomatic Engagement:
The Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Saudi Arabia reiterated the Kingdom’s support for all efforts that contribute to establishing international security and stability and creating favorable conditions for development and prosperity.
Saudi Arabia welcomed the agreement between the Republic of Tajikistan and the Kyrgyz Republic regarding border demarcation and expressed congratulations to both countries, wishing them continued stability and prosperity.
The Kingdom has been actively involved in efforts to achieve national consensus among Syrians and has consistently emphasized the importance of preserving Syria’s territorial integrity, national cohesion, and sovereignty, opposing foreign interference. Saudi Arabia has called for political solutions to the Syrian crisis to alleviate the suffering of the Syrian people, many of whom have become refugees or displaced.
Saudi Arabia welcomed Kuwait’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, emphasizing its belief in peaceful resolutions for the Ukrainian crisis.
Similarly, the Kingdom welcomed Qatar’s hosting of talks between the United States and Ukraine, expressing hope for a solution and appreciating Qatar’s diplomatic endeavors.
Saudi Arabia has stressed the necessity of a political horizon for the Palestinian people and a negotiated solution to the conflict with Israel that meets their legitimate needs and aspirations, promoting comprehensive peace and stability in the Middle East.
The Kingdom has also expressed its concern over the increasing tensions and hostile actions in the West Bank, urging a reduction in these actions and affirming its readiness to engage with Arab nations to outline proposals for reconstruction and a path towards the future.
Saudi Arabia welcomed the convening of the Syrian National Dialogue Conference and the agreement between the Syrian government and the leader of the Syrian Democratic Forces, which aims to integrate all civil and military institutions to build a unified Syrian state. The Kingdom has also provided humanitarian aid to the Syrian people through King Salman’s Relief Center.
The Kingdom welcomed the invitation to the Syrian Foreign Minister, Mr. Asaad Al-Saybani, to participate in meetings of Arab foreign ministers and the resumption of Syria’s membership in the Organization of Islamic Cooperation, in which Saudi Arabia played a significant role.
In summary, Saudi Arabia’s diplomacy, as reflected in the sources, is characterized by a proactive approach to conflict resolution, a commitment to peaceful dialogue, and a willingness to support and facilitate international efforts aimed at achieving stability and peace in various regions, including the Ukraine and the Middle East. The Kingdom leverages its political and economic influence to play a constructive role on the global stage.
Saudi Arabia’s Credit Rating Upgraded to A+ by S&P
Based on the sources, Standard & Poor’s (S&P) raised the Kingdom’s credit rating to “A+” with a “stable” future outlook for both local and foreign currencies.
The agency provided reasons for this positive revision in its report:
The upgrade reflects the Kingdom’s continuous progress in its credit rating and the maintenance of a stable future outlook.
This progress is attributed to the supported and growing economic sector within Saudi Arabia.
The diversification of the non-oil local financial market is also a key factor.
This diversification is seen as balancing the risks associated with high sovereign external debt service and costs.
The positive rating also reflects the Kingdom’s progress in achieving the targets of its Vision 2030.
In summary, Standard & Poor’s increased Saudi Arabia’s credit rating to A+ with a stable outlook, highlighting the positive developments in the Kingdom’s economy, particularly the growth of the non-oil sector and the efforts towards achieving Vision 2030 goals, which contribute to balancing financial risks.
The Prophet’s Mosque: Key Historical and Sacred Features
Based on the sources, Al-Masjid an-Nabawi (the Prophet’s Mosque) in Medina holds immense religious and historical significance, receiving exceptional care throughout history.
Here are some key aspects discussed in the sources:
The Prophet’s Chamber (Hujra): The mosque houses the chamber of Aisha (may Allah be pleased with her), which contains the grave of the Prophet Muhammad (peace and blessings be upon him), as well as the graves of his two successors, Abu Bakr Al-Siddiq and Umar ibn Al-Khattab (may Allah be pleased with them). This sacred area is referred to as the “Noble Enclosure (al-Muwajaha al-Sharifa)“. Angels are said to descend upon this pure spot day and night, invoking blessings upon the Prophet.
The Noble Enclosure is surrounded by walls and had four doors to Aisha’s chamber: a southern door facing visitors, the western door known as Bab Fatima, Bab Aisha, or Bab al-Wufud, the eastern door towards al-Baqi’, and the northern door called Bab al-Tawba, al-Amin, or al-Tahajjud.
Within the Noble Enclosure, facing the Noble Rawda, is the Prophet’s window, located between two pillars. This marked the spot where the Prophet (peace be upon him) used to pray and the direction of his bed and the mihrab (niche indicating the direction of prayer). Another window is situated at the end of the eastern wall, near Bab al-Baqi’.
The sources emphasize the great attention and preservation efforts dedicated to the Noble Enclosure from the time of King Abdulaziz Al Saud to the present reign of King Salman bin Abdulaziz Al Saud.
The Prophet’s Minbar (Pulpit): The minbar is a prominent feature of the Prophet’s Mosque and is considered “a piece of Paradise” according to a hadith.
Initially, the Prophet (peace be upon him) would lean against a palm trunk while delivering sermons. Later, a two-stepped minbar was constructed for him. It is narrated that the original palm trunk yearned for the Prophet when he began using the minbar.
The minbar was about three and a half cubits high (the trunk) and the seat was two cubits long. During their caliphates, Abu Bakr, Umar, and Uthman (may Allah be pleased with them) used the minbar in a manner reflecting their respect for the Prophet’s position.
The minbar’s construction and appearance evolved over time, with Uthman (may Allah be pleased with him) being the first to cover it with al-Qibtiyya cloth. Later, it was made of various materials like wood and marble, and the number of steps sometimes increased.
The Saudi government has consistently provided care and maintenance for the minbar, including covering it with a transparent sheet and applying gold plating when necessary to preserve it as a testament to the precision of Islamic art.
The Prophet’s Pillars (Asatin): The original pillars of the Prophet’s Mosque were trunks of palm trees. Several of these pillars were later known by specific names, each with its own historical significance:
Al-Mukhallaqa (The Perfumed): This pillar marks the spot where the Prophet (peace be upon him) prayed after the direction of the Qibla was changed.
Aisha: Located near the Prophet’s bed in Aisha’s chamber, where she (may Allah be pleased with her) used to pray.
Al-Rawda (The Garden): Situated overlooking the Noble Enclosure, it had a window and was a place for the Prophet’s i’tikaf (seclusion) and where his palm-leaf bed was located.
Al-Hanana (The Yearning): A reminder of the original palm trunk that yearned for the Prophet.
Al-Surir (The Bed):.
Al-Muharras (The Guarded): Where Ali (may Allah be pleased with him) would sit to guard the Prophet.
Al-Wufud (The Delegations): Where the Prophet (peace be upon him) received Arab delegations.
Al-Tawba (The Repentance) / Abu Lubaba: Named after Abu Lubaba (may Allah be pleased with him), who tied himself to this pillar as a penance until Allah accepted his repentance.
Khokha of Abu Bakr Al-Siddiq: A small door or opening from the house of Abu Bakr Al-Siddiq (may Allah be pleased with him) led directly into the mosque. It was notable for being kept open at night when other such openings were closed.
Mihrab of the Prophet: The niche indicating the direction of prayer used by the Prophet (peace be upon him) is another significant feature.
The sources highlight Al-Masjid an-Nabawi as a place of immense historical and spiritual importance, with specific locations like the Prophet’s Chamber, the Minbar, and the original pillars carrying deep significance and being subjects of continuous care and attention.
Saudi Arabia Economic Investments and Vision 2030
Based on the sources, there are several key areas related to economic investments in Saudi Arabia:
Stimulating Investment and Economic Diversification: Saudi Arabia is actively working to stimulate investment, which is expected to enhance the growth of the non-oil sector and improve the economy’s resilience in the medium term. This drive to boost investment is a significant part of the Kingdom’s efforts to diversify its non-oil local financial market, aiming to balance the risks associated with external debt. The goal is to achieve the targets of Vision 2030.
Positive Economic Outlook and Growth Projections: As a result of these efforts, Standard & Poor’s (S&P) anticipates a median real GDP growth of 4% during the period of 2025-2028. This positive projection indicates confidence in the ongoing and future economic investments within the Kingdom.
Investments in Specific Sectors:
Technology and Digital Transformation: Events like the “Nutanix” forum highlight the focus on cloud computing and artificial intelligence and how these technologies can empower organizations. Partnerships with global technology leaders are also being showcased. These activities suggest investments are being made and encouraged in the digital and technology sectors.
Sports and Entertainment: Saudi Arabia’s bid to host the 2034 World Cup would necessitate substantial investments in infrastructure and related industries.
Pharmaceutical Industry: There is a clear drive to establish pharmaceutical manufacturing facilities and expand production lines within the Kingdom. The government encourages agreements with international companies to localize drug manufacturing technologies. The Public Investment Fund and the Saudi Industrial Development Fund support pharmaceutical projects, providing crucial funding and facilities for factory construction. Furthermore, the presence of advanced research centers like King Abdullah University of Science and Technology contributes to the development of pharmaceutical research.
Semiconductor Industry: Saudi Arabia has ambitious plans to become a significant player in the semiconductor industry through initiatives like the “Alat” company, backed by the Public Investment Fund. This is seen as a unique opportunity to deepen its economic independence by possessing another source of power alongside oil. The strategy involves partnering with leading global semiconductor companies, building ecosystems focused on suppliers, manufacturers, and research institutions, and developing a skilled workforce. The Kingdom may initially focus on specialized semiconductor markets such as those for military applications or artificial intelligence.
Financial Stability and Credit Rating: The raising of the Kingdom’s credit rating by S&P to “A+” signifies a positive assessment of its economic management and the potential returns on investments within the country. The stable outlook further reinforces the confidence in the Kingdom’s economic trajectory.
In summary, the sources indicate that Saudi Arabia is actively pursuing economic investments across diverse sectors, including technology, sports, pharmaceuticals, and semiconductors, as part of its Vision 2030 goals. These investments are aimed at economic diversification, boosting non-oil sector growth, and enhancing the Kingdom’s global economic standing, which is reflected in positive ratings from agencies like Standard & Poor’s.
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
The provided text highlights concerns about the state of democracy, freedom of expression, and human rights in Pakistan. It argues that true democracy necessitates freedom of speech, which is often stifled in the country. The speaker expresses solidarity with marginalized communities, such as the Baloch and those affected by the merger of FATA into KP, who face systemic discrimination and lack basic rights. The text also addresses the plight of Afghan refugees in Pakistan, alleging inadequate protection and denial of rightful compensation. Ultimately, the speaker urges the government and media to amplify the voices of these oppressed groups, address their grievances, and ensure their fundamental rights are respected.
Study Guide: Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan
I. Quiz (Short Answer)
According to the text, what is an essential component of democracy?
What does the text suggest about the state of democracy in Pakistan?
What specific right does the law supposedly grant to citizens, according to the text?
Which community led by Manzoor Pashteen is mentioned as facing problems?
What human rights issues are mentioned in relation to the Baloch people in Balochistan?
How does the text describe the human rights situation under the Taliban government in Afghanistan?
What was the impact of the attack on Afghanistan, and its related consequences, on Pakistan?
What are some of the issues facing the people of FATA after its merger into KP?
According to the text, what should be done to support the oppressed sections of society?
What is mentioned regarding the response of the community to the violence it has faced?
II. Quiz Answer Key
Freedom of expression is stated to be an essential component of democracy, highlighting the importance of individuals being able to voice their opinions without fear.
The text implies that democracy in Pakistan is flawed, characterized by restrictions on expression and stifling of dissenting voices.
The law supposedly grants the right to assemble and express one’s views, provided it is done without violence.
The Pashtun community, led by Manzoor Pashteen, is specifically mentioned as having faced significant problems.
The text mentions recent incidents involving the Baloch people in Balochistan, suggesting human rights violations are taking place and that the populace knows about this.
The text depicts the human rights situation under the Taliban government in Afghanistan as dire, characterized by extensive violations without historical precedent.
The attack on Afghanistan resulted in many refugees seeking asylum in Pakistan, and the war created many ongoing problems.
The people of FATA, after its merger into KP, are facing issues such as a lack of compensation, unemployment, and inadequate infrastructure, education, and employment opportunities.
The text argues that the voices of oppressed sections of society should be amplified, and their concerns addressed with government intervention and media attention.
The community has consistently opposed violence and condemned it, even in the face of immense suffering, imprisonment, and death.
III. Essay Questions
Analyze the text’s critique of democracy in Pakistan. What specific examples are used to support the claim that freedom of expression is limited?
Discuss the human rights issues raised in the text concerning specific groups in Pakistan (e.g., Baloch, people of FATA). What recommendations does the text offer for addressing these issues?
Compare and contrast the text’s depiction of the human rights situation in Afghanistan under the Taliban government with its portrayal of human rights in Pakistan.
Evaluate the text’s argument that supporting oppressed groups and giving prominence to their voices is essential for a functioning democracy.
Assess the role of the media in highlighting and addressing human rights issues in Pakistan, according to the perspective presented in the text.
IV. Glossary of Key Terms
Democracy: A system of government in which power is vested in the people and exercised directly by them or through elected representatives.
Freedom of Expression: The right to articulate one’s opinions, ideas, and beliefs without fear of censorship or retaliation.
Human Rights: Basic rights and freedoms that belong to every person in the world, from birth until death.
FATA (Federally Administered Tribal Areas): A former semi-autonomous tribal region in northwestern Pakistan, now merged with Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP) province.
KP (Khyber Pakhtunkhwa): A province in northwestern Pakistan.
Balochistan: The largest province of Pakistan, located in the southwest of the country.
Taliban: An Islamic fundamentalist political and military organization currently ruling Afghanistan.
Oppressed Section: Refers to groups within a society that are subjected to unjust treatment, control, or marginalization.
Compensation: Something, typically money, awarded to someone as recompense for loss, injury, or suffering.
Infrastructure: The basic physical and organizational structures and facilities (e.g., buildings, roads, power supplies) needed for the operation of a society or enterprise.
Pakistan: Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights Analysis
Okay, here’s a briefing document summarizing the main themes and ideas from the provided excerpt from “Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan.”
Briefing Document: Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan
Source: Excerpts from “Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan”
Date: October 26, 2024
Summary:
This document presents a critical perspective on the state of democracy, freedom of expression, and human rights in Pakistan. The speaker argues that a true democracy necessitates freedom of expression and criticizes the restrictions placed on certain groups and issues within the country. The document highlights the plight of marginalized communities, including the Pashtuns, the Baloch, and Afghan refugees, emphasizing their lack of basic rights, compensation, and opportunities. It also touches upon the situation in Afghanistan under the Taliban, highlighting the severe human rights violations occurring there. The speaker calls for greater media attention, government action, and public support to address the grievances of these oppressed sections of society.
Key Themes and Ideas:
The Intertwined Nature of Democracy and Freedom of Expression: The speaker asserts that democracy is fundamentally dependent on the freedom to express oneself. The absence of free expression signifies a deficiency in the democratic system. “In a country where there is democracy, there is also freedom to express. There is no concept of democracy if there is no freedom to express.”
Restrictions on Expression in Pakistan: The speaker criticizes what they perceive as limitations on freedom of speech and assembly in Pakistan, particularly concerning sensitive issues or specific groups. “If one wants to say something, then people start getting stifled. There is a restriction on a particular issue.” The speaker contrasts this with the legal right to assemble and express views peacefully, arguing that suppressing dissenting voices through power is “against democracy and the law. It is against humanity.”
The Plight of Marginalized Communities: The document focuses significantly on the hardships faced by specific groups within Pakistan, including:
Pashtuns: The speaker references Manzoor Pashteen and his movement, noting the “major problems” faced by this community.
Baloch: The speaker mentions the treatment of the Baloch people in Balochistan, referring to “recent incidents” that are reportedly known to the public through media coverage.
Afghan Refugees: The speaker highlights the long-term presence of Afghan refugees in Pakistan following the conflict in Afghanistan and expresses concern that they are not receiving the rights or compensation they are entitled to, despite promises from international organizations.
Lack of Basic Rights and Opportunities: A recurring theme is the denial of basic rights, adequate compensation, infrastructure, education, and employment opportunities to marginalized groups. Specifically, the merger of FATA into KP is mentioned in the context of unfulfilled promises of compensation and lack of economic opportunities.
Human Rights Violations in Afghanistan under the Taliban: The speaker draws a comparison between the situation in Pakistan and the situation in Afghanistan under the Taliban, citing the “human rights violations that are happening under the Taliban government” as unparalleled in Afghan history. The speaker was also disturbed with how Afghans were deported to Afghanistan.
Call to Action: The document concludes with a plea for greater attention to the voices of the oppressed, urging the media, the government, and the public to support their cause. The speaker emphasizes the non-violent nature of these communities and the need for the government to address their problems and find solutions. “This voice should be given prominence. We should raise our voice in their support. Our media should also write for them.” The speaker also notes the massive support that these populations have.
Important Considerations:
Perspective: It is important to note that this document presents a specific viewpoint, likely that of a human rights advocate or a member of a marginalized community. It is crucial to consider other perspectives and contextual information to gain a comprehensive understanding of the issues discussed.
Generalizations: The speaker makes some broad generalizations about the treatment of certain groups. Further investigation is needed to verify the accuracy and extent of these claims.
This briefing document offers a starting point for understanding the complex issues of democracy, freedom of expression, and human rights in Pakistan, particularly as they relate to marginalized communities. It is essential to consult a variety of sources and perspectives to develop a well-rounded understanding of these issues.
Frequently Asked Questions about Democracy, Expression, and Human Rights in Pakistan
1. What is the fundamental connection between democracy and freedom of expression in the context of Pakistan?
In a genuine democracy, freedom of expression is essential. The source emphasizes that democracy is meaningless without the right to voice opinions, assemble peacefully, and express views without the fear of stifling or restriction. The ability for individuals and groups to express dissent and advocate for their rights is seen as a cornerstone of a functioning democratic society.
2. What are some examples of restrictions on freedom of expression that exist in Pakistan, according to the source?
The source mentions a tendency to stifle opinions, restrict expression on particular issues, and hinder the rights of individuals and political groups to assemble and express their views peacefully. The speaker critiques actions taken by those in power to suppress or obstruct dissenting voices, highlighting a discrepancy between the legal right to express oneself and the practical reality.
3. What specific communities are identified as facing human rights challenges in Pakistan, and what are those challenges?
The source specifically mentions the community led by Manzoor Pashteen, the Baloch people in Balochistan, and the people of the former Federally Administered Tribal Areas (FATA) now merged into Khyber Pakhtunkhwa (KP). The Baloch are described as facing mistreatment, while the people of FATA have allegedly not received promised compensation, lack infrastructure, educational institutions, employment opportunities, and basic facilities.
4. How does the situation in Afghanistan, particularly under the Taliban government, relate to the discussion of democracy and human rights in Pakistan?
The source contrasts the lack of democracy and widespread human rights violations under the Taliban government in Afghanistan with the principles that should be upheld in Pakistan. The treatment of Afghan refugees in Pakistan and the discomfort caused by deportations to Afghanistan are also mentioned, highlighting concerns about the protection of vulnerable populations.
5. What criticisms are raised regarding the treatment of internally displaced persons (IDPs) from FATA after the region’s merger with KP?
The source alleges that many people from FATA have not received the compensation promised to them following the region’s merger with KP. Further, the source claims that the area lacks adequate infrastructure, educational institutions, employment opportunities, and basic facilities, leaving residents feeling as though they lack the rights afforded to citizens.
6. What is the speaker’s call to action regarding the issues faced by marginalized communities in Pakistan?
The speaker urges support for the oppressed and marginalized sections of society. They call for giving prominence to their voices, raising awareness about their issues, and advocating for their rights. They specifically call on the media to report on their situation and for the government to listen to their problems and find solutions.
7. How is the non-violent approach of certain communities emphasized in the context of their struggles for rights?
The source highlights that the communities they are discussing, despite facing significant suffering, imprisonment, and even death, have consistently opposed violence and condemned it. Their commitment to non-violent means of advocating for their rights is presented as a testament to their dedication and a justification for their voices to be heard.
8. What actions does the source suggest should be taken by the government and media regarding marginalized communities in Pakistan?
The source urges the government to listen to the problems of marginalized communities and find solutions to them. The source also calls on the media to write about these communities, give prominence to their voices, and raise awareness about their struggles. The goal is to ensure that their concerns are addressed and their rights are protected.
In a country where there is democracy, there is also freedom to express. There is no concept of democracy if there is no freedom to express. There is a strange kind of democracy in our country. If one wants to say something, then people start getting stifled. There is a restriction on a particular issue. The law gives the right to assemble and express one’s views. If there is no violence, then any planet, any party, any political group has this right. To give them respite through power is against democracy and the law. It is against humanity. So when he gave this plan of the strike, these people created a lot of ruckus and also hid. The community which Manzoor Pashteen is leading now has already faced major problems. The way the Baloch are being treated in Balochistan, the people know about the recent incidents of the people. All the people have been listening to the media. When the attack on Afghanistan took place, many people who We took refuge here, a long time has passed, the war is still going on there, till now we have seen that the Taliban government has come, democracy is not found there even after searching, democracy is not a thing at all, in fact the amount of human rights violations that are happening under the Taliban government cannot be compared in the history of Afghanistan, the way people were thrown from here and sent there, this thing was very uncomfortable for the Afghans, although we have been taking from the big Amjad International Committee that we protect the Afghan refugees, we bring compensation and bring it back, but they do not give the rights to those who are entitled, FATA has been merged into KP, there are many people, they have not been given the compensation that was promised to them and they are unemployed, there is no infrastructure there, there is no industry there, there are no good educational institutions for them, there are no places for their children, there are no employment opportunities, they do not have the right that they are not citizens of Pakistan, why should they not be given their basic facilities, why should they not be given their rights Labourers should not be given wages. This is the voice of this oppressed section. This voice should be given prominence. We should raise our voice in their support. Our media should also write for them. They are the people who have always opposed violence and condemned it. If they had done violence, even then there was objection to those thoughts. They suffered so much, many of their people were put in jail and killed, in spite of that they did not follow the path of martyrdom. So many people of Badshah Khan’s Talimabad Khar come out in their defense with them, so many people of such a huge population should be united. Their voice should be heard. Their government should listen to their problems and find solutions to them.
जिस मुल्क में जम्हूरियत होती है वहां आजादी इजहार भी होती है डेमोक्रेसी का कोई तसवर नहीं है अगर आजादी इजहार ना हो हमारे मुल्क में अजीब किस्म की जम्हूरियत है य कोई भी बात कहनी हो तो कने लग जाती है फला मसले पर बंदिश हो जाती है आईन ये हकता है इतमा का इकट्ठे होने का अपने ख्यालात का इजहार करने का अगर वायलेंस नहीं है तो कोई भी ग्रह कोई भी पार्टी कोई भी सियासी जमात यह हक रखती है ये उसको कुशल देना ताकत के जरिए ये जम्हूरियत और आईन के खिलाफ है इंसानी ब याकूब के खिलाफ है तो उन्होंने जब ये रके का प्लान दिया तो इन लोगों ने काफी इतरात किए और बस लुकिया भी की मंजूर पश्तीन अब जिस तबके की कयादत कर रहे हैं उनके साथ पहली बड़ी तियां हो चुकी है ों के साथ और बलूच के साथ जो सलूक हो रहा है बलूचिस्तान में भी पिछले दिनों पर्सन के वाकत भी सारे आवाम जानते हैं हमारे मीडिया में सारी श्रोता आई हुई है सन की फोसे जब अफगानिस्तान प काब हुई थी बहुत से लोग जिन्होंने पनाह ली थी इधर एक जमाना बीत गया अब वहां लते जंग अभी तक चली आ रही है अभी तक देखि तालिबान की हुकूमत आई है उसमें डेमोक्रेसी ढूंढे से नहीं मिलती है कोई चीज ही नहीं है डेमोक्रेसी वाली बल्कि ह्यूमन राइट्स की जितनी वायलेशन तालिबान की हुकूमत में हो रही है इसकी तो मिसाल नहीं मिलती अफगानिस्तान की हिस्ट्री में लोगों को यहां से जिस तरह को में फेंक के वहां भेजा गया तनों को अफगान को ये चीज बत अजियत नाक थी हालांकि हम लबी चौड़ी अमजद इंटरनेशनल कमटी से लेते रहे हैं कि हम अफगान रिफ्यूजी की हिफाजत करते हैं हम मुआवजे लेके खा आ जाते हैं लेकिन जो हकदार है उनको हक अदा नहीं करते फाटा को केपी में मगम किया गया कई सायल है उनको वो फिटी नहीं दी गई जो उनके साथ वादे किए गए थे व उसमान खते हैं वहां कोई इंफ्रास्ट्रक्चर नहीं है वहां कोई इंडस्ट्री नहीं है उनके लिए अच्छे तालीमी इदार उनके बच्चों के लिए नहीं है रोजगार के बके नहीं है उन्हो का ये हक नहीं है कि वो पाकिस्तान के शहरी नहीं है उनको क्यों उनकी बुनियादी सहूलियत ना दी जाए उनको उनके ू क्यों ना दिए जाए मजदूर मतीन दर इस दबे हुए तबके की आवाज है इस आवाज को सरबला किया जाना चाहिए उनकी आवाज में हम आंगी करनी चाहिए हमारे मीडिया को भी चाहिए कि उनके लिए लिखे बोले वो लोग हैं जिन्होंने हमेशा वायलेंस की मुखालफत की और उसकी मजम्मत की है अगर वो वायलेंस करते फिर भी इतराज था वो उन विचारों ने इतनी मारे खाई उनके कई लोगों को जेलों में रखा गया मारा गया इसके बावजूद उन्होंने शद की राह नहीं अपनाई उन्होंने बादशाह खान की तालीमाबाद खर की इतने ज्यादा पखत निकलते हैं उनकी हि मायत में उनके साथ तो इतनी बड़ी आबादी के इतने उनके जिर्गे को मकत होना चाहिए उनकी आवाज सुनी जानी चाहिए उनके हुकूमत को चाहिए कि उनके मसाइल सुने और उन्हे हल
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
This collection of text is a comprehensive animation course introduction. It outlines the software, including Blender, Character Creator, iClone, and ZBrush, needed for character creation, animation, environment design, and audio editing. The course emphasizes character design and rigging, frame-by-frame animation, lip-syncing, and environment creation. The lectures cover pre-production, production, and post-production, including concept development, script writing, storyboarding, and voice casting. It also provides practical guidance on using AI tools for generating character sketches and images for storyboards. Finally, the text contains the course creator’s instruction on basic modeling in Blender to produce props and environments for the animation project.
3D Modeling & Animation Study Guide
Quiz: Short Answer Questions
What is a PNG file, and why is it useful in the context of character creation? PNG files are image files with the capability to save transparency. This is useful for character creation because it allows the character to be placed on different backgrounds without showing a background behind the character.
Describe the basic steps for finding environment references using online resources like FreePik. First, go to FreePik and search for your desired environment, like “classroom” or “library”. Next, filter the results to find vector images that suit your project’s style and script, then download the relevant files.
Why is sketching in Adobe Photoshop important in the pre-production phase? Sketching in Photoshop helps create custom environment references. It allows for manipulating shapes and colors to design a classroom or library layout, including tables, walls, and other visual elements.
Explain the use of the Pen Tool in creating custom shapes within Adobe Photoshop. The Pen Tool is used to create precise and complex shapes that are not readily available as basic geometric forms. It allows for creating outlines and selections, and adding layers and colors.
Why is voice recording and audio editing crucial in animation pre-production? Voice recording and audio editing ensure clear and appropriate voiceovers for characters. Editing can involve enhancing audio quality, removing background noise, and adjusting pitch to suit different character types (adults, teens, or children).
What is the purpose of using a website like 11 Labs in voice-over production? 11 Labs is used to convert adult voices into those of children or teens, allowing for characters with voices that better match their age. It also enhances audio quality and provides options for selecting different voice styles.
What is the significance of Storyboarding in animation? Storyboarding is important to plan the animation’s visual narrative and workflow. It helps organize the scenes, camera angles, character placement, and dialogues, ensuring a coherent and well-structured final product.
Briefly outline the steps for creating a storyboard using Adobe Photoshop. First, set up a grid-like layout using rectangles. Add scene numbers and descriptions. Place character and environment references into the grid and insert script notes or dialogue snippets below each scene.
What is the purpose of dividing an object into multiple parts during the editing phase of 3D modeling in Blender? Dividing a model allows for intricate adjustments. This customization ensures it matches the desired level of detail.
What is the purpose of “Extrude” in Blender? Extrude is used to expand a selected face, edge, or vertex outward, adding volume or length to an object.
Essay Format Questions
Discuss the importance of pre-production in animation, detailing how environment design and character references contribute to the final product.
Compare and contrast the techniques of creating a storyboard using readily available assets versus using original sketches.
Describe the process of voice recording and editing for animation, explaining how tools like 11 Labs and Adobe Audition enhance the final audio output.
Explain the significance of character creation in Blender, including how an understanding of basic shapes, tools, and modifiers contributes to a 3D object.
Discuss the role of audio, and the way the different sources presented here describe audio’s contribution to the final animation.
Glossary of Key Terms
PNG: (Portable Network Graphics) An image file format that supports lossless compression and transparency, commonly used for web graphics and character design.
Vector Image: An image composed of mathematical equations rather than pixels, allowing for scalability without loss of quality. Often used in graphic design and illustration.
FreePik: An online platform that provides free vector graphics, stock photos, and other design resources.
Adobe Photoshop: A raster graphics editor used for image manipulation, photo editing, and digital painting.
Pen Tool: A tool in Adobe Photoshop used to create precise paths and shapes, commonly used for drawing custom illustrations and shapes.
11 Labs: An online platform for generating realistic AI voices, commonly used in animation and voiceover production.
Adobe Audition: A digital audio workstation used for recording, editing, and mixing audio files.
Storyboarding: A sequence of drawings or images that outline the key scenes of a video or animation, used for planning the visual narrative.
Headshot Plugin: Used for creating 3D characters from a 2D picture.
G Brush: Software used to customize the dimensions of a 3D character’s body type.
T Pose: A pose that the character holds to ensure all body components are accessible to the designer.
Mesh: The framework of vertices, edges, and faces that define the shape of a 3D model in Blender.
Edit Mode: Mode used to customize the shape of a 3D model.
Extrude: Expands a face, edge, or vertex outward, adding length to a 3D object.
Vertices: Single coordinates in space.
Faces: The space between edges.
PBR Textures: Physically Based Rendering, describes lighting and texture details for computer graphics.
Dynamics: Settings that change based on the environment, allowing a brush’s dynamics to change its style and size.
3D Animation: Pre-Production and Production Techniques
Okay, here’s a detailed briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided source excerpts.
Briefing Document: 3D Animation Pre-Production and Production Techniques
Overview:
The provided text details a series of lectures or tutorials on 3D animation, covering pre-production processes (module 2) such as environment design, voice recording/editing, and storyboarding, and delving into production techniques (modules 3 & 4) with a focus on character creation and prop/environment creation within Character Creator 4, ZBrush, and Blender. The overall goal is to equip individuals with the skills to develop 3D animations, even if they have limited resources or drawing abilities.
I. Pre-Production (Module 2): Environment Design
Theme: Creating reference images for backgrounds and environments.
Key Ideas:The instructor demonstrates how to source reference images from websites like FreePik.
Emphasis is placed on adapting these references to the specific needs of a script.
Alternative: create the environment reference from scratch using basic shapes in Adobe Photoshop. This involves using the rectangle and pen tools to construct elements like whiteboards, tables, and walls. “What you simply need to do is click here second one you have to use the shape tool and Second, use the pen tool here okay.”
The Pen Tool is important for creating custom shapes. “It is necessary to create a custom shape somewhere You need to create a custom shape for.”
The instructor distinguishes between 2D and 3D animation workflows, noting that 3D requires designing each element (table, whiteboard, wall) separately.
II. Pre-Production (Module 2): Voice Recording and Audio Editing
Theme: Generating and refining voiceovers, particularly for child or teen characters.
Key Ideas:The instructor identifies a common problem: adult voice actors struggle to convincingly portray children.
Solution: Use a combination of normal voice recording (using a microphone like Boya M1, mentioned as affordable and effective) and AI-powered voice modification. “I have to record the guys dialogues you sowed m1 is a mic, it is a very powerful mic and It is also within a very reasonable price.”
The website 11 Labs is recommended for converting adult voices to sound like children or teenagers. “The website is 11 l you guys can tell me about it You must have heard that you should not worry In this you will get 10000 credits which are They are available for free, okay.”
Audio editing software (Adobe Audition) is used for noise reduction, normalization, and enhancement. The tutorial details specific effects and settings for improving audio quality.
III. Pre-Production (Module 2): Storyboarding
Theme: Structuring the animation’s narrative flow.
Key Ideas:The instructor outlines prerequisites: script, character designs, environment designs, and recorded dialogue.
Storyboards can be created using various software (e.g., Canva, Adobe Illustrator), but the tutorial focuses on a method within Photoshop.
A template is created using rectangles to represent scenes, descriptions, and durations.
Characters and environment references are imported into the template.
Dialogue references are added to link specific audio recordings to the corresponding scenes. “The dialogue that Ali had recorded What was the number one dialogue of Like Ali? dialogues like we gave our numbers and told our If you remember, did you save the dialogues? We saved our dialogues by giving numbers.”
The instructor contrasts this “shortcut” method of storyboarding (using existing assets) with a more professional approach involving sketching and drawing skills.
IV. Production (Module 3): Character Creation
Theme: Creating and sculpting characters using Character Creator 4 (CC4) and ZBrush.
Key Ideas:CC4 and ZBrush are presented as complementary tools for character design. The plugin Headshot is useful for creating faces. “In this module three we will discuss the characters You will learn to design cartoon and Both types of realistic and complete characters that have characters Rigging is also included and in addition Characters’ outfits and accessories we will work on etc as well.”
The tutorial explains the CC4 interface and content management.
A key technique is using a reference image to generate a base character in CC4 using the Headshot plugin. The instructor stresses selecting the appropriate body and skin type (male/female, baby, clean/soft/old).
Morphs (shape adjustments) in CC4 can be used to refine the character’s features, but ZBrush is recommended for more detailed sculpting.
The importance of posing the character in a “T-pose” before exporting to ZBrush is highlighted.
ZBrush is used for sculpting and further customizing the character’s features and body shape. The “Move” brush is specifically mentioned for creating a stylized, cartoonish look.
ZBrush’s UI and navigation is explained and the tool’s “divide” function is mentioned in terms of smoothing out polygons.
V. Production (Module 3): Custom Accessories & Outfits
Theme: Designing and implementing custom accessories and outfits for characters.
Key Ideas:ZBrush is again used for creating the 3D models.
The instructor demonstrates how to add a new mesh (e.g., a ring/necklace) to the character in ZBrush. They also show the difference between using w to get the move tool versus using the rings move tool, and how they had to select the character in order to move the ring tool correctly.
The importance of properly aligning and scaling the accessory to the character’s body is emphasized.
Extrude tool was used on the vertices to create a 3D shape.
The shirt is selected in CC4 and the PBR texture is applied.
Skin deformation is important, making sure the clothing merges properly with the character.
Emphasis is also placed on where to find outfits and meshes and clothing items to drag and drop onto the character.
VI. Production (Module 3): Materials and Textures
Theme: Enhancing visual realism and style through materials and textures.
Key Ideas:The instructor reviews how to change a character’s texture and hair.
The tutorial promotes using PBR Textures website for details on the clothing fabric.
Drag and drop the textures into the base color on CC4.
Deforming the skin on the clothing to merge properly with the character, however the teacher in this case did not have to do this.
VII. Production (Module 4): Prop and Environment Creation in Blender
Theme: Creating and modifying props and environments.
Key Ideas:Emphasizes the importance of skilled developer.
Blender’s user interface explained.
Creating a plane for the ground.
Constructing the scene uses raw materials.
The need to know the dimensions are of what you are creating, such as a house, to make sure it is accurate.
Focus on edit mode, faces, edges, and vertices when creating the shape. Subdividing is mentioned to change the shape.
The meaning of Extrude and extracting is described.
Creating a gate for a house.
Overall Themes:
Practicality and Accessibility: The lectures aim to provide solutions for animators with varying skill levels and budgets, offering alternatives to complex drawing or expensive resources.
Integration of Tools: The tutorials emphasize a workflow that combines the strengths of different software (Photoshop, CC4, ZBrush, Blender) to achieve specific goals.
Step-by-Step Guidance: The instructor provides detailed, step-by-step instructions and troubleshooting tips for common challenges.
This document should provide a comprehensive overview of the key concepts covered in the source excerpts. Remember to consult the original sources for more detailed instructions and visuals.
Animation Storyboarding and Workflow FAQs
Storyboarding & Animation Workflow FAQs
1. How do I remove unwanted elements from an image before using it in my animation?
Use an image editing tool like Photoshop. Select the eraser tool, adjust its size for precision, and carefully erase the unwanted areas. Ensure all extra elements are completely removed for a clean, transparent image. Save in PNG format to preserve transparency.
2. What file format should I use to save my transparent character images?
Always save character images with transparent backgrounds in PNG format. This format preserves the transparency, ensuring your characters integrate seamlessly into any environment without a visible background.
3. How can I find suitable environment references for my animation projects?
Websites like FreePik offer a variety of vector images that can be used as environment references. Search for specific locations (e.g., “classroom,” “library”) and filter results to find vectors that match your script’s requirements. Download these resources to use as guides for creating your animation’s setting.
4. How can I create custom environment references if I can’t find suitable pre-made images?
Use a tool like Adobe Photoshop. Utilize the rectangle and pen tools to draw basic shapes for walls, tables, and other elements. Customize the colors and arrangements to create a unique environment reference tailored to your animation’s needs. This is especially helpful if you need a very specific background.
5. How can I alter my voice to sound like a child or teenager for animation projects?
Use software like ElevenLabs to convert your normal voice into a child’s or teenager’s voice. You can upload your audio and select a voice profile that matches the desired character. The software will modify your voice, saving you the need to hire a voice actor and still enhancing audio quality.
6. How do I clean up audio recordings for animation?
Software like Adobe Audition is great for audio editing. Remove background noise using noise reduction tools, normalize the audio to equalize volume levels, and enhance the sound with filters and equalizers. Clear audio recordings are essential for creating a high-quality animation.
7. What elements are required when setting up a storyboard for an animation?
To create a storyboard, you need:
A script: This will provide the basis for all of your scenes.
Character references: These will help you keep your characters looking consistent.
Environment references: You will use these as a template for each scene.
Dialogues: You need to have voice recordings to put in the video, these are needed to make the scene make sense.
8. How can character creator be used in animation to customize character designs?
Character Creator 4 allows you to customize characters using morphs and plugins. Alter facial features, body proportions, and overall appearance to match your character’s design. Additionally, you can customize clothing. You can then export to other 3D modeling applications for texturing.
Animation Tools, Software, and Production Pipeline
Various animation tools and software can be used to create animations, each with its own unique features and capabilities. Here’s an overview of some of the animation tools mentioned in the sources:
Blender: Blender is a powerful, free, and open-source tool suitable for both beginners and professionals. It can be used for basic modeling and environment design.
Cinema 4D: This software is great for creating realistic and cartoon-style characters.
Character Creator: In Character Creator, characters are created and designed, and then brought into iClone for animation. A Headshot plugin is used to design a base character, and after creating the character, morphs are used. Sculpting can be done in ZBrush.
iClone: iClone is animation software where you can create various animations on characters, work in depth, do lip-syncing, frame by frame animations, and final rendering. You can animate all kinds of characters and easily apply animation presets.
ZBrush: ZBrush is helpful for adding detail and realism to characters. It is used for sculpting and modeling.
Adobe Audition: This software is used to enhance the quality of recorded audio. Noise is removed from the background. The dialogues or voice-overs are applied to the characters.
Video Editing Software (e.g., Filmora, CapCut): These are used to merge scenes, design sounds, and mix music, sound effects, and dialogues.
The animation pipeline generally involves the following stages:
Pre-production: This includes concept development, idea generation, script writing, storyboarding, and voice casting.
Production: This includes making 3D models, creating props and environments, texturing, rigging, layout, camera angles, animation, scene creation, and rendering.
Post-production: This includes compositing, visual effects, audio editing, sound design, music, and final output.
Animation Character Creation: A Comprehensive Guide
Character creation is a key aspect of animation, involving multiple stages and tools. Here’s an overview of character creation, drawing from the provided sources:
Software and Tools:
Character Creator: This software is used for character creation and design.
iClone: After designing characters in Character Creator, they are brought into iClone for animation.
ZBrush: This tool is used for adding detail and realism to characters through sculpting and modeling.
Headshot Plugin: The Headshot plugin for Character Creator is used to design base characters.
Blender: Can be used for character creation.
Character Design Process:
Designing and Rigging: Characters are designed and rigged. Rigging involves placing bones inside the character to give it movement.
Types of Characters: There are human characters, animal characters, and toon characters. Human characters can be realistic or cartoon-like.
Creating Realistic and Cartoon Characters:
Realistic Characters: These are easier to make compared to cartoon characters.
Cartoon Characters: Cartoon character creation may involve using the move tool and other brushes in ZBrush to adjust features like the eyes, nose, and face.
Pre-Production:
Concept Development: This involves developing the concept and generating ideas.
Script Writing: The script defines characters, dialogues, actions, and scenes.
Storyboarding: Characters are drawn and illustrated in 2D to create them in 3D later.
Character Designing: Involves references for characters.
Production:
3D Modeling: Making 3D models of the characters.
Texturing: Applying textures and materials to the characters.
Rigging: Rigging the characters for animation.
Character Detailing in ZBrush:
Sculpting: ZBrush is used to sculpt and add details to the character.
Mesh Detailing: The geometry is divided to smooth out the polygons for detailed work.
Brush Tools: Tools like the move brush and standard brush are used to modify the character’s features.
Accessories and Outfits:
Designing Accessories: Accessories such as rings or lockets can be added using tools within ZBrush.
Creating Outfits: Outfits can be extracted from a character mesh and customized.
Applying Textures: Textures can be applied to clothing and accessories using PBR textures.
Animation:
Frame-by-Frame Animation: Animation is done frame by frame.
Animation Presets: Readymade animation presets can be applied to characters.
Additional Considerations:
References: Using references for character design.
AI Tools: AI image generators like Free Pic can be used to create character sketches based on client instructions.
Skin Weights: Skin weights are adjusted to ensure proper deformation.
Morphs: Morphs are used to refine character features.
3D Formats: FBX and OBJ are common 3D formats for characters.
Animation Software Tutorials and Guidance
The sources provide guidance and tutorials for various software used in animation, including character creation, environment design, audio editing, and more. Here’s a breakdown of the tutorials and guidance available for different software:
Character Creator 4: The source material includes a “getting started” guide that introduces the Character Creator 4 interface and tools. There are tips for designing a base character. The sources recommends having the zip file available for any new plugin or addon that needs to be installed.
ZBrush: The source material contains a tutorial on sculpting characters in ZBrush. It emphasizes the importance of understanding the software interface and provides guidance on using shortcut keys.
Blender: The source includes an introduction to Blender, covering its interface, tools, and basic modeling techniques. The sources details how to rotate the interface. Tutorials are available for basic modeling techniques.
Adobe Audition: The source provides a tutorial on voice recording and audio editing using Adobe Audition. It explains how to record dialogues, enhance audio quality, remove background noise, and apply audio to characters.
In addition to software-specific tutorials, the source material offers guidance on the animation pipeline, idea generation, storyboarding, and other aspects of the animation process.
3D Modeling with Blender and ZBrush Techniques
3D modeling is a crucial aspect of animation, involving the creation of three-dimensional representations of objects and characters. The sources discuss various tools and techniques for 3D modeling, especially within Blender and ZBrush.
Here’s a breakdown of 3D modeling based on the provided sources:
Software and Tools:
Blender: Blender is used for 3D animation and modeling. It provides tools for basic modeling, environment design, and creating props. The sources note that 3D animation developers use Blender.
ZBrush: ZBrush is a tool for sculpting and adding detail to characters. It is used for detailed modeling and adding realism to characters. ZBrush is used in conjunction with Character Creator for creating cartoon characters from realistic base characters.
Modeling Techniques in Blender:
Basic Modeling: This involves using primitive shapes (meshes) like cubes, planes, circles, and cylinders to construct 3D objects.
Editing Mode: To modify a mesh, you must enter edit mode, which allows manipulation of vertices, edges, and faces.
Subdividing: Dividing a mesh into smaller sections for finer control and detail. Subdividing is needed when customization is required.
Extruding: Extending faces to create more complex shapes. The Extrude tool increases the shape or size of an object.
Scaling, Rotating, and Moving: Adjusting the size, orientation, and position of objects in 3D space.
Character Modeling:
Base Character: Character Creator and its Headshot plugin are used to design base characters.
Sculpting in ZBrush: ZBrush is used to sculpt and refine character details. This can be done after creating a base in Character Creator. The sources discuss using the move tool and other brushes in ZBrush to adjust features like the eyes, nose, and face to create cartoon characters.
Custom Accessories and Outfits: These can be designed in ZBrush to fit the character.
Environment Design
Environment Design: The sources mention using Blender for environment design.
Props: indicate that props can be made inside Blender
General Concepts:
3D Space: 3D modeling operates in a three-dimensional space with up, down, left, right, forward, and backward directions.
Raw Materials: Meshes are raw materials used for construction in 3D.
Grid Lines: Grid lines help align objects and characters to the ground plane.
Workflow:
Concept and Reference: Before modeling, it’s helpful to have a concept and references.
Iterative Process: Modeling often involves iterative steps of shaping, refining, and detailing.
File Formats:
3D Formats: Common 3D file formats include FBX and OBJ.
Comprehensive Animation Course: From Basics to Advanced Techniques
The animation course being described is designed to take individuals from the basics to advanced techniques in animation. Here’s an overview of what the course introduction entails, based on information from the sources:
Course Overview: The course aims to explore animation tools and techniques. It starts from the very basics and progresses to an advanced level, covering everything from A to G. The course is structured as a complete story and is considered better than many advanced or paid courses.
Learning Objectives: The course will cover what needs to be learned and how to perform in the final animation. It details the quality of animation expected.
Character Creation:
The course teaches how to create various types of characters, including animal, human, and toon characters.
It covers creating both realistic and cartoon characters.
It also includes designing outfits and accessories for characters.
Software Tools:
The course provides an overview of the software tools used in the animation process.
The primary software used includes Character Creator, iClone, ZBrush, Blender, Adobe Audition, and video editing software.
Animation Pipeline:
The course will cover the animation pipeline, including pre-production, production, and post-production stages.
Pre-production: This includes concept development, idea generation, script writing, storyboarding, and voice casting.
Production: This includes 3D modeling, creating props and environments, texturing, rigging, layout, camera angles, animation, scene creation, and rendering.
Post-production: This includes compositing, visual effects, audio editing, sound design, music, and final output.
Idea Generation:
The course includes guidance on creating unique and interesting animation stories.
It teaches how to find inspiration, free imagination, create characters and plots, structure stories, and finalize them through drafts.
Script Writing:
The course emphasizes the importance of writing a good script.
It introduces using AI tools like Chat GPT to assist with script writing, including defining characters, dialogues, scenes, and situations.
Character Designing: The course includes character designing, and how to find references for characters. It teaches how to use AI image generators to create character sketches.
Environment Designing: The course also touches on environment designing.
Voice Recording and Audio Editing: The course includes how to record and edit audio, customize audio using AI, and generate dialogues.
Storyboarding: The course will also cover storyboarding.
Additional Resources: The course may provide additional resources such as SFX packs. There may also be packages available that include characters, environments, and other assets to help accelerate the animation creation process.
Master Animation Course For Beginners in Hindi CG Opinions
The Original Text
I welcome all of you to such a journey which will take you into a new world of animation Today we will explore those tools and techniques which are a complete Universe [music] [music] is the car I’m sitting in right now I am an existent in real life it doesn’t even do that this is a 3d car with a I put myself in place and did this I it is Blender is a powerful tool that even beginners can use A treasure for both professionals and professionals not less than and this is cinema 4d which [music] As is clear from its name, this is This software is realistic and cartoon Great for creating characters And it is a unique software, in this you can Draw realistic cartoons with ease Characters in Disney style You can create whatever you imagine You can create the same character but remember that this software is just and only to create human characters or Hideo characters or toon animals The most ideal for creating characters there is software this software i call it iclone I also call him brother because there is only one Both the softwares of the company are same one is to design the crack and the other to do the animation means that In the character creator we create characters design and then bring it to Iclone We do animation of those characters only end movements and here’s yours and mine The most favorite animation software whose The name of this animation software is Iclone Inside you can create lots of animations on character He can work in more depth and detail You can do that too very easily With this one software inside you guys can do everything Can animate all kinds of characters You can do lip syncing frame by frame Can do animations and even final render can and its name is z bush g bush Add detail and realism to your characters very helpful in giving This happens with the help of just this one tool Very focused on the verticals of your characters can work in greater depth action is a kind of skill which needs to be learned It requires your complete focus so I want you guys to complete it Completely focus on yourself Watch all the lectures by Evolve Watch this complete video carefully This complete video is a complete story in itself. This is a course, it starts from the very basics And I will go till the end, from A to G I will take you I will teach animation in this and I am sure I say that these big animations There are advanced courses or paid courses This course is a thousand times better than those courses which I am providing you for free I am here so you guys have shared this video somewhere I don’t want to skip it and what I am talking about I need you, whatever you give me What I want is that you guys like my channel Subscribe as much love as you can Give that away and share the video with your friends Lazily share guys our first module This is the first lecture of which is named Introduction to the Course Within this course What do you have to learn, what do you have to learn You will get to learn and how you will perform in the final What quality of animation is this? You will find all these things in detail So guys first of all I will define it inside number I’ll teach you how you’ve how to create characters two characters There are many types of animal characters and there are human characters and Apart from this there is another type also those toon characters are characters meaning they get mixed up animal and Now the human characters in this which we The software you will use Using softwares we can do animal and Both types of human characters Basically we will learn to create characters What is needed the most is human characters have to be created because The animal characters are what we Those of any species are free You get it inside and you will get this course All the animal characters inside They will get together now, humans There are two types of characters the first one is realistic and the second one Cartoons are realistic characters It is very easy to make, it is very easy Compared to cartoon characters we are we will use the method with that method Creating cartoon and realistic characters You don’t have to work very hard for it, and The quality will also be awesome, so its how will we design the cuts inside them How to create accessories for outfits and where to buy You will get likes from dressing up a character do we have to wear shalwar kameez or else we whether to wear pant shirt or any kind The second outfit could be any If we have to dress the character then these are the outfits Where do we get the end accessories from and How we designed the character ourselves We have to do all this in this course We will learn inside when we design characters will design a character well It has been done and its designing is complete if it is gone then the next step comes after that he knows about rigging but this course The software we will use inside is a to design the character inside We just have to design the character or we’ll have to sculpt it No need to rig the character Rigging means that the character We have to place a bonus inside so that we to be able to give it movement, it is exactly like that Like there is a character in real life for Example is yourself, if you have a b body If there is no bonus inside then you can harm your body If you cannot give movement then the characters It is very important to place the bonus inside and the process of rigging that takes place It is very time consuming so You will get complete rigging automatically inside it you will get it so what will happen that your hard work It will be saved and your time will also be saved, so guys Designing and Rigging a Character The next stage after that is character Frame by frame animation of characters Animation has to be done, it has to be paused so that we can use it in our script If we could act accordingly then we would have done the character The animation that needs to be done is done frame by frame We put in a lot of effort into the animation it has to be done but for the character I have also made one for you regarding animation It has made it easy for you to read the characters inside it You will not have to bother to post You will get readymade presets of animation Simply find the preset you want and it has to be applied on the character After that comes the turn of the character’s lips about syncing so in this course I will tell you The easiest and best way to lip sync I will tell you the method, so what you need to do is Simply access your recording has to be done and the recording You have to bring your laptop or PC inside and then you put that on top of the character You have to apply the audio and your The characters pick up the waves of that audio and he will start speaking very smoothly and If you get a realistic feel of the character Frame by frame animation before animation There is a step before this as well which is very What is important is the environment then you can design the character’s animation Environment design first and then later You can do it and later prepare for that environment You can bring your character inside but Here it would be more reasonable that first You design the environment Small models come as props inside objects come or else its In addition, visuals also come when If you design the environment then After that, adapt your character to that environment. you have to bring it inside and after that you If you want to animate your character then To complete the character’s animation After that you have to render it. Create each scene and render it And when all your scenes are complete if we go then we will learn that we have How to finally bring those scenes and merge them Inside your video editing software And how did we design the sounds there? or how to use sfx Then there’s the music sound effects and the dialogues you have or whatever is behind it There is a voice over in the background How did you mix up all three things? All these things have to be done, we will tell you in detail You will learn inside and finally save your video After export, we provide the client with how to provide it or make it social How to use it across media platforms I want you to publish all this Guys, I will teach you our module one in detail This is the second lecture of and the name of this lecture is Here is an overview of the software tools used We will talk about those tools in this lecture and software which is included in this complete course inside we are going to use this So guys to make the complete animation First of all we will use religion comes from the character creator and its There is a plugin Headshot Plugin Headshot Plugin what basically works is that inside it We have to design the character as a base The base character has to be made the base After creating the character we started working on the morphs. Needs to do a bit of tinkering with Meaning the body parts of the character they have to adjust a little bit After that again the brush is used which we have Create a character inside the Character Creator After that it has to be taken inside the brush and you have to do sculpting there, which This is a sculpin process, then we When we need a cartoon character so firstly we have to design a You will create a realistic character in any of your Regarding photos, we do not share any of our photos insert the headshot inside the plugin and then What will happen next is that the Headshot plugin will give us that A character realistic to the photo he will create the character and provide it when he Once the character is ours then we we will take it inside the j brush which is basically for sculpin and Sculpin is used for modeling It is a very famous software for Android and quite People in the industry are more professional If we use this then we bring it inside it You will sculpt your base character to convert into cartoon character so when we draw our character inside the brush Once the sculpin is completed then we The character creator will take him back and going inside we give him clothes When our character is worn by the guy Our character will complete our appearance Once it is ready, then we will will export as an avatar then after that We’ll take him inside the Iclone A very easy Iclone animation There is software in which it is very easy to With this, quite professional animation is created. We will complete our work by coming here Animation work can also be done using key frame animation. and also animation presets If you can apply then I recommend you I would suggest you apply animation presets But I can help you in making key frame animation I will also tell you the method so that if you get any Custom animation presets If you don’t find accord then your frame animation After that post that character and finalize it. give its animation a succinct shape Here inside the icon, just click on the character here we will animate the environment We will not design the environment To do this we will use a blender I’ll show you basic modeling inside Blender. How to do it and reach the advanced level How to use modeling tools I will tell you this in a very easy method Manage your objects inside the FPA by Props need to be imported and brought inside your iclone and there By arranging small things, a complete Anyway, we will have to give it a shape of environment We also manage our environment inside Iclone you can make it but for example you have If you want to use a ready-made environment So that ready-made environment is called Iclone. bring it inside and use it there and one Giving it a final look with final lighting It is easier but in small size Designing the props is pretty much it it is difficult and we just need the character More tools for animation here If we get to see it, we will use it of blender so if we need a custom thing You have to make it as per your wish and bring it with you For example, regarding the environment, we have a Do you want to bring a table or choose one of your choice? Do you want to bring a chair or a room of your choice If you want to design living room or kitchen then We will design and bring our own icons by bringing it in and here we are bringing our character Render your scene by animating the If you give then we will go, after that our final A final editing software will be available in inside this we will use fim or any also other video editing software You can use it but I will give you a cap inside it I will provide both cut and fire in this Friends, inside the complete course here We have one software left whose name is Adobe Audition Basics Inside Adobe Audition What will happen if we use our mobile phone You will have to record your audio or dialogue would have recorded that We will take the dialogue inside Adobe Audition We will come and edit our audio there. have to enhance its quality There will be some noise in the background whatever will happen will have to be finished and After that again the same dialogues or voice over then if it is a voice over then it We need to apply it to the characters We won’t need simply final editing inside a layer within the software You will have to add it but if those are dialogues with whom the characters have to lip sync then we have to find those clones inside the icon Dialogues will have to be taken turn by turn And you will have to apply it on the characters So how will this all happen, I will give you details I will try to explain to our This is the third lecture of module one and this Lectures are very important Because this is where you can start creating animations. you will start you will start because behind All the things that I told you All things from the course overview Was it related or related to software But now from here I will tell you those things I will tell you something related to our animation How do we start the animation? This is basically where we start learning if you do then the name of this lecture is Understanding the Animation Pipeline Inside, we will talk about three things first Pre production on number two On production and post number three So Guy Prey on the Production Stages what happens inside the production that its Inside we have to develop the concept We have to generate ideas inside it. You have to bring an idea into your mind This is a unique idea to tell your story and then when inside our mind If a unique idea is developed then we The script has to be written now What are the things in script writing Dialogues are included in it There are actions and scenes included There is a description of the scene What are the things inside the description It happens here in your details You have to define that you are number one This scene will come at second place, this scene In the first scene you will see so many characters I have to show so many probems I have to show so many You have to show visuals and so many dialogues there are all these things after that Here comes the turn of story boarding You have to draw your own characters Illustrate has to be done in 2D so that you can create them in 3d later When you illustrate in 2D your Meaning of characters and your environment that after your scenes then you Share your story board with your team or with your You have to get approval from the client when your The client or your team can send your story board If you approve it then after that the story According to the board you can create your characters the scenes and the visuals that you have When it comes to final designing then guys when you People design their own characters If you create the environment then after that The thing you need to do is number three Voice casting will have to end What’s inside voice casting of recordings There are guys in it who are voice actors or the voice artists who They say that you have to wait for them They have to choose, you have to see this that your story inside your story on the board or inside your script that what are the characters, what is their age and what are their Also what is their gender if they are female If there are characters then they are for female actors Where do you get your voice artist from? There are two methods for this, the first method is this It happens that you are a voice actor voice Hire the artist you have for animation or you can use artificial From Intelligence to AI in your dialogues which If you want to get text to speech done then give me this Which method suits you better yes you can do that but I will tell you about it I will tell you inside how you recorded the audio. How to edit what you want to record and the finale is your dialogues How to apply on characters And I will also tell you that How did you get AI to customize your Audis to suit your needs? to generate the dialogues and for you Which are the most useful AI tools? you can then when your pre production The concept will be clear, it will be completed Ideas will be generated and stories will be created Your board will be complete, your voice will be If you have done the casting then after that you If you want to move towards production then after that Then what you have to do is to make your characters Making 3d models for making props you have to create a end environment when you are in 3d You can make characters and props If you create the environment then after that you textures on top of those environments or You have to apply the materials They have to give the colors and then after that Then comes the rigging, you can rigg the cactus too you can do it and apart from that whatever props you have you can rig them too if you I want to show you motion graphics but I you already defined that we The need to rig your characters If it doesn’t happen then it will come again after that When it comes to animation in production In this we have first number layout Now we have to see what is inside the layout Planning happens here, camera angles of her movements and scenes The next frame is for composition frame animation of the animation which is here for objects and characters I have told you about the characters. was that we were using animation presets but how to place your objects To animate it we need to use key frame We will use animation of objects Where do we need animation? It may help you in future by itself You will understand, then the turn comes for the scene Inside the scene montage of the montage we have You have to combine your characters Props can be obtained from the environment or All things related to visuals Your small objects are done Inside your scene setup and its creation We have used as many small elements as possible all those things that I had done happened We combined them all in one scene You have to show it and then your turn comes again There comes two renderings inside the rendering things are most important Lighting comes first if If you do not know how to do good lighting then Then you can make a nice render In this I will tell you in detail that How to do good lighting And then comes the turn of rendering You have placed your 3d models inside 2d images Effects inside frame by frame detail After applying it, it has to be rendered Hai To Guy Pre Production And Production So we have talked about it in detail Now comes the turn of post production Number one in post production But the thing is compositing and visual Effects Compositing and Visual Effects So what happens in compositing is that Inside this we have to combine our Backgrounds are separated from layers with effects Merging our text layers and we This happens to all the scenes which We rendered it using animation software and whatever post production was done That is our final editing work Inside video editing software If it happens then it’s the turn of the guy after compositing When it comes to visual effects we call it in short Inside the case it says VF and here we have to add special effects and When I apply this to you practically If I show you, you will understand it yourself Now it is the turn of audio editing The first number seen here is sound designing is called sound designing What happens inside is that your animation To enhance you have used sound effects You have to supply likes if you are any When the character is running then the running sound The sound that comes from running is an effect You have to apply that if your character If you are simply walking then by walking you will become real The sound of footsteps in life or Whatever sound there is, you have made that sound your own. of your frames inside the animation An accord has to be set or a scene It’s raining or snowing inside or if gusts of wind are blowing You have done everything according to that thing Adjust your sound according to the situation Effects that apply SFX If so, I will give you the complete SFX Pack is also provided free with this course I will do it now its your turn for the music Music needs to be played in the background without music your animation or your The video is lifeless without the music Your animations with or without music Or whatever you believe in your videos They change totally, then their turn comes next There is a way to mix the audio in which You have to balance the dialogues According to sound effects and music Or the music needs to be balanced According to your dialogues that if somewhere But during your animation a character he started speaking he started speaking From where the audio waves of his speaking Your music will start from there audio waves that are slightly decreased what will happen is that your music Slow down a bit and what you These are the dialogues that you can hear clearly And now finally let’s talk about the final what happens inside the output that we Create your animation in a specific way Export as per desired format The format you want to do is mostly mp4 format It is used for videos and we have mp4 I have to export it inside here Format alone doesn’t matter Hey guys there is a lot of quality control here Quality control matters Your things come first The ratio of the video depends on which one you have watched. Publishing your video on the platform Is youtube1 ba 9 ratio is separate for this Ratio is used in the same way then your facebooksignup.in ding your video You have to export and then Then what you have to do is to make your animation Distributor is within distribution What happens inside it, number one It is seen that what you have created is animation which animation is made what do you want to convey to the audience has anyone made an animation tutorial You have created a course, you are marketing that course If you want to do it then you just have to do that You have to choose the audience that will be in the animation are you interested or if you have any Create animation for a specific product If you have done this, then you have reached your audience with your Skills on how to deliver animation You should know this marketing skill or have you created a moral story and you can read that moral story [music] I will tell you all the things in detail Explain guys this is our module two whose The name is pre production and in it our The first lecture is idea generation and today we We are going to talk about idea generation only This video will help you how to Create unique and interesting animation stories can add unique and Creating interesting ideas is an important skill and Today I will tell you five important steps I will tell you, after knowing which you will become a good And you can generate your own unique idea This is the first step for stories Finding inspiration through books and Reading stories of different kinds Read stories like Science Fiction Fairy Tales and historical stories that will take you through new Movies and animations can provide ideas Watch various animations and movies and note what is special about them Learn from the world around you in your life whatever is happening as friends nature spending time together or attending a special event Looking at all this might give you ideas On the second number, free your imagination do what if means what would happen to you ask the question what would happen if animals can you talk to me about what would happen if the kids Magical powers mix up situations Do two or more different Mix up situations and see what happens For example, there is a story called a science fiction story. And if we add ferries to it So how would you feel friends, you are at number three Characters and plot of the story Munfarid and Create interesting characters that have their own should have a special feature such as a The cat who is a scientist, now let’s talk The plot of the story above the plot of the story It should be such that the viewers like it come to a magical forest or All your tasks inside a futuristic city All your characters are visible All the characters of one story According to the running order comes at number four the structure of the story, which includes a beginning, a middle And these three things are very good for you The story should have a clear structure Should be an interesting start should be full of problems and challenges There should be a middle and a beautiful ending There should be conflict and challenge in the story Add conflicts and challenges to attract viewers remains interested in number five Finalizing the story comes through drafts Write multiple drafts of the story and make them better and better when you Write drafts of the story and then Then take feedback from your friends or teachers Seek feedback so you can improve your story so that we can make it better and correct the mistakes in it whatever mistakes there may be, whatever shortcomings there may be You can improve them, remember the best Ideas are those that come from the heart let your imagination run free Gaining inspiration from various sources and create a story that will captivate viewers Our guys take us to the magical world This is the second lecture of module two which The name is script writing is a good First step to create animation You have to write a good script when Until you write the script, you will How will you define the characters in your mind When nothing is clear inside So you can give your animation a final shape. If you can’t give it then I have AI here A very powerful tool from whose name is chat gpt and about it You already know it in more detail It is not neat to tell but what is here The tricks that I’m going to tell you about helps you have a very very fun You can get the script written by A Chat GBT with proper dialogues and well This will also define your scenes It will define the situations in my mind Inside as we discussed in the first lecture In the first lecture of this module we talked about It was about idea generation so my mind I have a very unique idea and it The unique idea is that of a time traveling There should be a classroom where children study and those When you go into your school library and there he finds a book which that ours is related to time travel what kind of a thing is this picking up the imagination If the script writes it here, then I will promote it in detail here that you also make me the plot of the story ok After that the names of the characters are Also define two dialogues and write them along with it two and every thing that is a part of a story It is an important part of the script And on the basis of which we can make a good animation you can make it so I am going to promote it here If I give it I say that Me write a script Two Own So he wrote the script for the animation and now I stop here enter it here and because by mistake I went there and just now I wrote the prompt cut I didn’t have it, when I passed my intermediate first, then I I say that please this Script Easy Urdu to be in so that my Hindi students also be understood well and the characters define the name also And dialogues with Write down other situations too Also define the scenes with directions two more with in every Also mention the duration of the scene Two ok now let’s see what it does So Titled Time Travel Adventure Characters Ali, Sara and a teacher and a librarian have come, okay is scene one Classroom duration of which is 2 minutes The camera zooms in to a talking classroom students are chatting, some are reading and the the teacher is explaining a lesson about Historical Events Teacher and Children this is Those important historical events that We should always remember Ali Whispering to Sara Ali sparring in Sara’s ear What a boring topic it is Sara yes friend I wish we could see all this ourselves Scene Two School Library Duration Three 3 minutes the bell rings ok so so guys our I have this complete script now What you simply have to do here is You have to click on the copy which is there and Now you have added a new text here A file of the document has to be created and Just paste the script inside Now you can close GPT by clicking here. you can do it so now we need to know about this script You have to create your characters according to your own You have to create the environment and tell your story Now I have to make a board, not proper characters we will make it in complete 3d, we will just Ruffle will define your characters Accordingly, firstly we mean their sketches we will prepare it and according to them it is they will create those characters okay we will make references you can also get it generated from and the scenes are those scenes we Sleep with inspiring animation or AI Now if I briefly tell you So let me tell you what we need to do to According to the script, first we have to They have to design characters on numbers sketches have to be made so that they can be used as models later can we do it okay after that then we have a We have to create that environment for the environment as well we have to make sketches so that we can use those sketches According to that then give it a proper final shape can we show that there is a final Our final environment looks like this We will give them the proper model of blender inside okay but for now we have Characters for story board here We have to make sketches of the environment Make sketches and write your dialogues Later, the story was told according to the scenes We will define the scenes inside the board and Within the scenes, we have the duration and dialogues which yes I will write it down and also write the situation So guys we will give this module of ours to you The third lecture is called Characters Designing Now in this lecture we will discuss proper I will not design the characters in fact We can find references for the characters here we have to design it okay because we are Our time is in pre-production Module two is pre-production and I told you in detail that pre Inside the production we only Story boards to prepare your references Create a reference for the story board and story board We have to finalise it then when we make the story board we will finalise it after that We have to move towards our creation properly we have to design the environment and Props have to be made, then characters and in this way all these things are made into a will go with the sequence and if this if you go with the sequence then you will get a to create professional animations it’s a quality you’re preparing it’s okay They are coming to you in all their forms and stories boarding and this is what we call pre production When it is present inside then it is pre production what’s inside that during pre production All these lectures inside are our ideas generation script writing these two lectures so We already have our characters now designing is environment designing then If there is voice recording and audio editing then These five lectures are very important The story behind designing this thing okay to make the board so story Why is the board important? I I mentioned earlier that the story board is It is important because when we If changes have to be made then do it in the story board It is easy to make changes inside and if we When you have completed an animation After creating a complete animation, It is difficult to make changes so if our The client asks us to make changes so whatever we can put inside the story board changes will have to be made, they will do it because It is very easy to make changes in the story board It happens that we talk a lot here and there It has gone out so we need characters infact character design References to characters are to be made here So there are two ways, guys, one way is this It happens that you take any reference You can take any reference of any kind You have to take it and you can use that reference You can design your own characters that reference for you If you want to take reference for designing then I have told you the other methods. It is very easy, you will go to Pinterest simply go up and here any character that is You can take a reference for that, okay and What type of references do you need to take? If you want to make it yourself then what is its pose? You should be the only one for him The face of the characters is for you it matters more and for that You see this, this is your picture These two should be there for reference Whatever is on air, those shows should be there, it is natural okay these two should be visible and The characters have their own appearances Must be of very high quality So look, we have an example here as well. If it is lying then these are the reference images It is from them that we develop our character let’s design it if for example that We do not have any reference images It is not available and we can create the sketch ourselves want to do and then after that sketch According we design the character or If client provides us with a sketch How can we get what we want according to him? If you have to design a character from I’ll tell you the method for that too, but If we have to make a sketch ourselves We have to give our own promotion to our customers According to your requirements or your According to the client’s requirements so what we have to do is we have to do We have to visit free pic here AI image This is a generator, you just have to click on it it’s okay and whatever your client tells you Instructions are given same instructions You can make it a base and create the source here You have to give your prem, now see our what was the script that we generated There were four characters in it, Ali Give us all the teachers and librarians This character is the most important one Ali Sara is currently studying in this school what should be their characters 14 If they had A for 15 years then we would have called it Are K Create 14 years old Old Female Character drawing okay now after that then this is from us Here the style will ask what is your style what should we say our The style should be sketchy, okay, then color If he asks us what the colour should be If you give any sketch then it is clear That only this color will work for you which is black And it is white, okay this is your color If it works then after that we will see the camera angle If he is asking then we tell him that you are like this do that one Cyanamide You can keep studio lighting and structure Let it be by default and then You do not need to change the mode or size here You can pick whatever you like from here I’ll keep 69 as it is and the numbers are off Image You have only one count here right now You have to do it and simply click on create Give Now it is look at us she gave us a sketch of what she is If we create it and give it to us, then we have a The character is here, okay, now this is what we call it that created a 15 years old male character 15 Years Old male character and will do some addition here From our side, we have done this simple proverb the isn’t it but we’ll add here I am a male character Drawing Vid Desi The outfits are okay because our characters are he is desi who lives in india and pakistan are used and all other things are bye Leave it as default and click on create again Click on Okay, this also created a reference for us. after doing this he gave it to me anyway this drawing If I didn’t create a style, I just kept drawing but he made it a little more realistic If you did it then it doesn’t matter, we need a reference that’s all we need and now here we are for the rest characters he is one of our teachers and If there is a librarian then we say bye to him By default I will pick any character The passes which are already made are fine yes i will use them only then my These two characters are important for me but to add it inside story board So I will take their references with shame for that I go here I click and go to home if you If it is not generated by AI then simply click here You can also search be a librarian Draw cartoons or sketches or anything So here you have to see your Requirements According to me the free filters are I will put it here and there is a librarian The librarian can be either male or female It could be so or it could be a female as well, we are female the librarian takes it here okay so this is one character we have ok let’s download it Here But now let’s see the second character is the teacher okay this would be a librarian and the other We need a teacher on this number. So our teacher should be female and Come here and write your name in search filter cartoon so this is what we have this one The teacher has come, there is some ad so this is our I think it fits the story We will also download this on here Okay, so this is the reference we have here. When they got together, now the characters We have the reference and it is ready now Simply what you have to do is go to Adobe here This is the character I have right now, what should I do? I’m gonna unlock it here After that I go to select and then click on subject I will simply click, then ours the subject is the main subject this is the one I have been selected from here and I am in Mass Now I will click on the rest There are extra things left here If it is not removed then what can I do simply that we take from here we have there is a tool are tool first one pick it Do it and increase the size and like this You can find all the extras here delete it from there race it okay and this Rest this delete has been done ok So let’s do this as well, in the same way you did this Same is the case with this character too It is ok to do it When all your images are transparent So you have to go to Simply File here and then click on save as and Save the format on your computer from here You have to select PNG PNG If you select the format then it will show you Your picture is transparent then it will save without background so where You also want to keep this in your pictures I will create a new folder here hoon characters And save it here with the teacher’s name hmm simply and in the same way you did the rest You have also named the characters one by one Let’s save Know what your characters are Their references are ready, these are ready Now we have to place it inside the story board but before that what we have Environment references also need to be prepared So our next lecture is Depending on the environment, the method is the same It will happen but some things will add more energy to it It will happen, I will tell you the way that how do you want to do it then let’s go As we move on to the next lecture, Guys Our module to pre production and today Our lecture is environment designing Lecture four is called Environment Designing is like the previous lecture We will have to work on this too but Some things are a little different in their approach Majeed I will tell you the extra here So if you want to look at this carefully then our We can see what kind of environment it is This is our script tha classroom is okay and then school so this is the library so these are the two main scenes One of our classrooms and the other of the school library so what do we do here now is the first number of But you have to go to Free Pick and search here have to do it Classroom is the first way, this is the second way Then I tell you in the classroom you You searched and got what you want Looks good according to the requirements right you that classroom is here Take it from here and simply download it One be it went and after that we search here Are library here you can see the vectors which are Apply the filter above and now you have everything Vectors are here and this one is a reference It looks pretty good it’s ok as well This is also ok you should see which reference you get It looks so good and your video is Suitable as per your script There is also it and you will find it on second and third number When you create it in 3D then It will be very easy for you to make So this is what it has, these three qualities Well, it looks good here as well we can put the librarian up here But both our characters will come and this When we make it in 3D it will take a lot of time to make it. We are facing more difficulties because of this also If you are not present then you can also read it here You have to download these zip files infact which is being downloaded so both of these have come to us one this one here it is let’s cut it from here And we come to CG O Pinions We had the folder here called Characters Now let’s create a folder inside it are the environment the spelling of is wrong let’s say it’s okay no and let’s put it here now others place the other file here as well Now let’s see what you have to do at this place That is to right click on it and select xxx Simply click on it and the file Delete it and delete both of these as well. give it to me and delete this one above it as well just jpg jpg which is the file j pack it should stay with you okay it’s with you Now it is important for me to get the same slide with the other one do the same with the zip file, ok and this too Delete them now both of them have reached you so we got the characters as well and The reference of our environment is also we’ve come here okay so inside this our which was a lecture on environment designing Scuttle four is ok so environment If for example client of designing Tell you I didn’t like it okay so what you have to do is you have installed Adobe Adobe Photoshop has to come inside Photoshop to come inside of So then what we need to do here is we need to do a little drawing sketch you will have to make it, what is its method There is a tool for this called Pen Tool or this Pen Tool Use If it happens then we will use this tool We can hide the picture from here. let us give and inside this we have here But now you have to prepare your reference So how to make a reference, it is very easy What you simply need to do is click here second one you have to use the shape tool and Second, use the pen tool here okay we have to do it, we will use the pen tool ok to create custom shape Here we have the paint and here we have the shape tool so what we do now is that here Let’s grab a rectangle tool from here and But we create a white board okay here this is our white board Well it’s not a white board but a black one This is a board, now it has become a white board The white board is done right and now after that We here at If you want to bring a table then you have to make a table How to create a table simply again You have to take rectangle two from here okay here it is and press control t your from the keyboard and then scale it like this You can show its length here by pressing two more shift increase it from above ok and you can change its color You can do any of this from here we’ll make it black okay [music] And now what we have to do from here again take the rectangle tool And this is how we created a desk here. You have to do it, okay, so now copy this press lowlt and on this side here like this Tax Then press Alt again to select it do sorry press lt This is selected then alt and move it Let’s take this okay on this side and a little bit on this side then art Let’s press and move it up here like this So this is our table here It is ready now, the colour of this is We change the color of this one here we do it Here we go and this color is fine and this is our This means it has legs, not a table If you want to keep your legs behind then we do it like this that this thing which is ours, it is ours this rectangle in fact we call it If we bring it to the top then this is our front has come over okay this is our table This white board is gone and now what’s next here the wall will come we are here again Let’s take the Rectangle Tool from and place it here and below place it below And let’s color it here. From Like, we give any color friend and its There is no issue, it can be given in any colour I gave it that color, okay, so this We have a wall behind us here okay and This table has come, the teacher will be standing here and what is here next is here next to this Chairs etc. will arrive and the children will sit I am telling you the way that How did you create your own reference? I want to know how to make an illustration in Photoshop inside it’s okay and there’s this space left underneath it so what we do is again make a rectangle Let’s take two and here but and the color it has is we make it solid white and this one let’s place it at the bottom okay this is it Now see how easily we have done this method I have prepared a reference for the classroom okay if you want to make dice here then You can also make dice using the same method, so now What is the use of the Pen Tool here? Pen Tool What is the basic purpose of the Pen Tool? It is necessary to create a custom shape somewhere You need to create a custom shape for For example, if we want to make a pencil here, then How will we make a pencil Press Alt I want to make a pencil at this place so I To zoom in on this area, press Alt After that what do you do that the mouse there is a scroll wheel, turn it up okay scroll it up and now here But this is how we want to make a pencil now here if we want to make it further then We could have grabbed it a little and moved it like this hold down the left mouse button press the left mouse button and rotate it a little If we do this, then this circle is formed here And now simply click here like this and now this side is on this side okay and this we have a pencil here for this sorry now you right click on it and make Click on the selection and then OK to make the selection. After clicking on it you can do this from here do the polygonal lace tool and then you can go here Click on this plus icon Do the new layer, now this new layer has been added inside we have to fill it on fill then click here Let’s click on the color and click on the color After doing this, let’s see that the pencil What should the colour be, it can be any we look at the references Let’s search for pencil here. So we have this yellow pencil here. It is the color of a pencil and there are some lines inside it so here we are But only yellow color fills it inside I filled it with yellow color and pressed OK and then what do we do here now right click and select d And now let’s see what colour it is. what is the color of this thing guys which color is that, it is a little brown is light brown color so what we Let’s do this by selecting it here like this This area is right click on it and fill it of the same layer we get the color from here are these I took this color and after that we If you want to create lines here If you want to make anything we can make it here i will make an eraser like this by taking it out a little bit in place, that means makes a razor and then Let’s give it white color, let’s do it okay okay and the rest of it from the back if you If Majeed wants to do something, he can do it too okay this is the way to go here anyone can Create custom shapes to create custom things if it’s okay to create something then this The shape of a classroom is what we have here If you have given small things in PNG Even after bringing it here it is transparent inside You can add it inside and if you want 2d animation If you do it then do 2D animation So if you are a 2D animator then this lecture is for you A very wonderful and one for you I mean it is quite suitable, it is like this Munfarid is different from this, a bit 3D This is why it is a little different from animation that for 2d animation its actually same as it The background is what is used Whereas in 3D we first design it like this designing has to be done and then Prop props had to be designed in 3D is like designing this table separately You will need a separate white board and a separate wall And its floor is separate, so it’s ours This lecture has also been completed Environment Our next lecture will be on designing Again of voice recording and audio editing In the final we worked on story boarding we will do it and then our module two is be complete will go assalamu alaikum guys our module To pre production and our lecture today This lecture is voice recording and audio Editing today’s lecture is our cup of tea It is going to be interesting and very important the reason for this is that as many also most of the students have come at this time they are mostly adults and adults for what happens to the adult characters are their voices, they themselves are Whatever it is, they can generate that voice. Artist being and voice artist that is You can record voice on your mobile from phone or any recorded There are audios of kids which are for kids Dialogues are those dialogues that make us I and she are enough to generate us problems occur such as the one we have today This is the script we are working on Inside the one on which we want to create the animation The two adult characters are teacher and librarian but with this Joe Maine The characters are those two kids or you take the kids or else it is of little use Take that teen infact about teenagers If the characters are of teenagers or Audis for Kids Characters That Are What They Are It would have been very difficult to generate them So basically in today’s lecture This is the problem you have, I will solve it So in today’s lecture I am going to tell you Aa these two will solve your problem It will happen that if you are an adult character if you are raising voice for that then on that You don’t need to do any editing You just need to clear the audio a bit in that. will fall from behind aa the nice thing has to be removed and something further i.e. take its pitch a little or You will have to do all that editing Things Come Butt Joe Kids Characters or will they be teen characters How do I make the audios I will tell you the method, so first of all your your normal voice your normal voice even if she is an adult, she is in it for you Now I have to record all the dialogues. Let me tell you what kind of dialogues you read I have to record the guys dialogues you sowed m1 is a mic, it is a very powerful mic and It is also within a very reasonable price You can get it within 1500-1600 Pakistani Rupees. It comes from local market and also from India You will get this in India for Rs 8,900 If you get this mic then with this mic you Your dialogues in your mobile phone Now we have to record our script All the dialogues in the Most of the dialogues that are coming are from this Time comes first for these two or three characters There is one Ali and Sara and now see the most First of all, the character of the teacher and the children These are the important historical events that One should always remember that there is a good Another thing that is very important is that of females and mail which are voices and its also I I am going to tell you the solution, okay You get three solutions in one video you’re going to if you’re a male character He himself is a male artist and has created his own animations Want to make your own audio You don’t want to hire any voice artist in this If you want to start then what do you have to do I will tell you the way, you have your own Normal voice which is in your normal audio I want to record the voice from whom did you sow m1 There is a different microphone inside the mobile phone You have to record the dialogues After recording, you took them away it is inside my pc now look at these By the way, I had recorded this These are our normal records I had a mic lying with me, I did that with it You did not do well with my bones which started my There are five to six lectures You must have seen the audio of all the It’s very amazing and wonderful audio I recorded all the audio from Bo M1 itself. All those lectures are recorded by Boya M1 I have recorded it from okay so The m1 can also be connected to the PC It goes and you have a mobile inside it too It connects with the phone as well inside which its basically b m1 i am here I am showing you the screenshot here You can see that there are two options in this there is one called micro its sorry one The option is for this mobile phone okay and secondly you have option if the camera is ok then If you want to connect it with your PC then When you connect it to the PC you switch to the camera and if By connecting it to your mobile phone you can make voice calls. If you are recording then you have used your mobile phone it’s okay if you switch it to You have to do so much work, then after that You need to record your audio in which Also do it if you are doing it inside a mobile phone So after recording there you clicked here But save all those dialogues in your PC. put it separately in a different folder I have to keep it here as I have the first one There is a dialogue, I will play it for you hmm what a boring topic this is no it is such a boring topic right yes this is in this He is saying that this is such a boring topic I haven’t edited this audio yet I want to enhance the audio further tells him the way but if you record from soya ave If you do it then you will have to do most of the editing There will be no need to do the audio first it is very good from this then rest of it is All of these are dialogues of the teacher. Dialogue and children, these are the important ones Historical events that will always be remembered yes in this the teacher is saying that and Children, these are all important Historical events that we will always remember you should remember okay this is a dialogue so All these dialogues of mine have come, Ali ka ali two ali three ali four sara one sara two saara three and this is teacher’s okay now How did you convert them into male or female? want to do and teen teen characters or else How did you choose kid characters in kids? I have to convert them, okay first step what will we do inside so that we can get all these You will record it in your normal audio in your normal voice and then again Save them on your computer and After that we’ll go here again The website is 11 l you guys can tell me about it You must have heard that you should not worry In this you will get 10000 credits which are They are available for free, okay So see this is 10000 total credits are the ones that I have 9,535 left and that’s a lot of them right now I generate a lot of deos from these I can do at least 10 to 15 Animations can be made using free credits. okay you will go after that then whatever you are You can create new accounts by using multiple G mails You can do that by making it and as long as you have g Till the mails are over you will remain the same you will reach this level that your channel it will be monetized and after that whatever you are You can subscribe to this if you start If you want to take it, you can take it too You can afford it, no issue it’s not that expensive ok You have to pay this monthly and for this You would have received the credits yes by the way right now we have it here a There is an option, it is text to speech And this is speech to speech, so you have two ways You are here if you want to record your audio I don’t even want to afford a mic if you can’t do anything then you simply Paste your text here and After that you have to generate your audio Select the character from here and click OK All of these are characters below You have to play it and see and if you Much of the audio is recorded The professional way is to Record the audio and then use speech to come to speech come to speech After that you clicked on upload audio here After clicking on upload audio, do it You have to go inside the same folder where you have you’re keeping your dialogues okay so this There is a dialogue of a teacher, I am posting it here I select it and now I am here We have to select it because our teacher is female If you had looked inside the script We should consider the female character here. So now you have played them all one by one I want to see which female character it is Just trust yourself here or this one Correct this female character has arrived now you Simply click on generate speech And kids, this is that important historical Events that should always be remembered are amazing Friend, now look at this it automatically takes care of me The audio has also been enhanced How bad was my audio at that time? You must have heard, I will play it again and show you yes this was our actual dialogue see more Children, this is that important historical Watch the events, there are two things you will find in it You will be seeing that one of its The audio is very low but the quality is ok It is bad and this is the male voice on the second number But what has he done to us that we He also converted the male voice to female. and then enhanced its audio as well I did it and kids this is it important sorry ya historical Events are generated every minute Speech But kids this is what’s important Historical events that will always be remembered you should look at this okay now you have simply You just have to click on download and it’s done One of ours has been downloaded and it has arrived We would have done the dialogues for everyone in turn first And now you should delete it from here. again I have to go to upload audio and now pick up ali from here After taking Ali, now from here you have I want to take a character from a teen actor group Fifth note of musical scale I Fifth note of musical scale I’m good. I’ll get this for Sarah. Jessica’s gut will be good for Sarah re single row b ma government of the people by the people f the people yes this one is it This will work for this teen character It’s ok, Ali’s will do for the tractor So let us choose this one, click on it. and then click on generate speech Click Look, this is such a boring topic ok and download this as well Are so here it comes teacher let’s rename it teacher because he has changed his name It has come to us Ali one ali one okay it’s done and now after that Then delete it again and come here again Let’s go to Ali To Ok and generate speech let’s go to the library there’s some Interesting Mill will go and download this as well renaming it Are its ok with ali u then i will take it in turns I generate everything here and then Then I will continue the video further You have written all the other dialogues using the same method. do it ok This is such an old book it seems It has been there Time Travel Adventures yes friend i wish we could see All yes, anyway there is nothing new in the library the books have come Yes, there are some new books in the library anyway. have come [music] Look what is the name of this book So guys, all our dialogues are here But I am ready, I will close it I’ll give you here and now I’ll take you along These are our dialogues and we From here, press Control Shift select it and cut it and keep it in the same folder Here are our dialogues and now we know there’s a little bit of Adobe Audition If you want to do editing then I have Edible Edition The Edible Edition is available here 2021 I had also provided this If no one has it then let me know I will send you the link when you open it After that you click on close here have to do it after that You have to do it in such a way that whatever is your first This is a dialogue, I am here to just give you a I will edit the dialogue and show you the rest you can do yourself. If you want to edit everything then we are teacher’s guy it’s dialed let’s bring it here just simply drag and drop and It’s here now look here it is yours The whole timeline goes like this And here your frames are showing up. And this thing, this DB where it is written this is what has happened, this is its volume, if If you want to increase or decrease it then do it like this you can do it from the middle well if you have If you want to cut any part then simply click here Select it like this and press delete from your keyboard and this end one too Delete it and do it a little bit from the beginning too you can also delete it okay now if you The noise needs to be removed from the back If there is any noise in the background then how do you want to do it then you have to do it for that All you have to do is click on facts Noise Detection and Adaptive Noise Detection You have to click on it and by default all Leave the settings as is and apply it okay it’s done and then now you I have to normalize this and go to favorites And here by clicking on Normalize -1db If you want to give this, then normalize your audio it will equalize all the audio, okay If it makes it equal then its waves will be equal It has happened a little bit here and there where it is more its value is less I spoke a little loudly, there were some waves there If it is up then there is no issue now If you want to enhance it a little more if yes then how do you do that on your effects You have to go there and now you have clicked on filter and here go to equalizer and graphic Click on equalizer 10 bands And from here you set this one to 16 hertz. You have to take the one for 15 and 10 You have to keep the 8’s in the middle a little bit above five and with that you Just turn these three up a little bit I have to tease you a bit and now try playing it and Children, this is that important historical events that should always be remembered okay So how was our first audio that you heard and now its quality is so amazing and It has been perfected, now you just apply it You have to click on it and now you go to the file Go to & export and click on file and click on browse and wherever Do you want to put your dialogues there? you can keep amo lap teacher and you can do this Save it, OK and click on Yes Do it, and do the rest of your tasks in the same way You have to edit the dialogues as well Be it dialogues or your voice You have to do the voice over also using the same method If you are doing voice over then you have to edit it. and you don’t want to go to lab 11 So you simply have to record your From mic voya m1 or any normal from the mic and then here same method You have saved your audio in Adobe edition from here You have to edit these two to three settings which I just repeated to you After doing this your audio will be four times If it gets better then you can close it now If you can then our dialogues are ready here So this is our today’s one Lecture Voice Recording & Audio Editing Lecture five is complete, let’s go now we are story boarding On the other hand guys our module is for pre production And our lecture today is lecture six. Story boarding on top of story boarding So in today’s lecture we will talk about story
board If you know the method of making it then you will To create a storyboard, you need to It is very important to have knowledge of these things and not only having knowledge of these things it is necessary but all of this Have the items and their assets ready with you You should have a script ready like this You should have the characters ready You should have your environment ready And you should have your dialogues Should they be ready, we have all of them Things are available, we have done voice recording We had designed the environment I mean prepare the reference of the environment had made references to the characters We already had the script and On the basis of this script we have created the characters had created and designed the environment designed the environment and Dialogues were recorded voice voice voice over or dialogues which are there we recorded it okay and these Now we will make a story board with these things take all these things and use all these things While doing this we will make a story board and today Our module two after lecture six of Our pre production will be finalized It will be finalized, after that we will start production He will start his work properly So let’s go for the story board for this. Basically you can use cava as well There are multiple softwares even that you can find You can also make your story in points You can also make the board in Adobe Illustrator Whatever software you know how to use Anything related to graphic designing If you know how to use software then You can complete your story board So I’m ado And within this, whatever our Our work will also be ad Our project is now complete here We have some photos here for the story board. Graphs to set up what graphs are How to set it, it is a very easy method Simply take a rectangle from here and draw it here like this and its color is solid white Now after that you have placed it here and take the rectangle tool and now this You have used the Rectangle tool here it looked like this here give it like this ok and its color is what you have keep it solid black and now what do you do That is to press Alt on your keyboard and move this side is like this hold this one a little bit turn it this way And you hold it and turn it to this side, this is equal should happen okay guys it’s done and now Similarly, all the rectangles here You can access all these by pressing shift select it and press control g So their group will be formed, now you have created this group To copy something press Alt and paste it Place it above like this: This group has been copied to you And by holding this group you will move downwards Sorry Click and select this group and You place it at the bottom now how will I I’m dragging it down to my There are three or four arrows on the top of the keyboard. There are keys that have arrows on them. You See there are four keys with arrows on them which keys are there So if you have ever played games GTA Y City etc then these three arrows are always in the background These four arrows are used by a vehicle It is okay to drive exactly those are the same arrows those are the same sorry keys arrows If that is okay then press the down arrow down If you turn it to the side then you are going downwards like this okay guys put this here place and what your group one should do is give it a little turn it up Take it and now group A, group one which is the copy one. you just turn it up a little bit and now you have Making another copy of Group C Lat Press and then do a little deck on top, then another The copy is made and you can see this copy below bring it here in this way now you have One thing to keep in mind is that amid all this The distance between them should be equal The distance between all should be equal So I think in the middle of all of this The distance is almost equal but the difference is huge there is no almost equal distance right now Now what you have to do is you have to do it like this Now here we have to take another rectangle tool And this is how you have to drag it here like this okay guys again here But this is how it grew bigger, a little control ji We do well the best way is that we Let’s copy this by pressing ‘L’ above. let’s move it to this side and then move it to here But let’s move it, okay, like this Let’s press make another copy and let’s move it this way okay so this Here we have it set up I have set my background and here But this is the place where we add our pics We will choose our background and our environment and your characters and then after that here But this is where we will write our script. I will write my dialogues and I will write them that this is scene one scene two and like this ok now let’s write scene one here Scene to scene th like this and now from here Take the Guy’s Horizontal Type Tool Text Type Tool And delete all this here which is bye The whole font was written by default I deleted it and now I write here are scene one and below Select the text tool on the side and select the text from here Select the layer and scroll down on the side it happened And here comes our scene one guys this is scene one came and now it’s like this We have to copy this using the same method By pressing L and dragging it to this side you can do it. Do it or grab it and pull it this way, here okay this is our scene here scene Two and similarly inside all the rest you have seen one scene two scene three and this one is a copy I did it, now I have to edit it, scene two If we have to write here then we will again go horizontal Type Tool But let’s select it and somewhere here But you can also click like this in the middle of the text So I selected it and removed it. After doing this we will write it here Now that we have our background that’s what it is for our story board If it is ready then remember what we have to do now to you that we created the characters and If we converted it into PNG then You have taken those characters first open it up hey where did we keep the characters I think we created a folder by the name By default this one and here it is our we have characters but before that we have to You have to see that your script is what is basically in the script so you remember what is in our script inside our script I’m going to go here But let’s see what happens with our script what’s inside Tha guys is ours The script is ok but the topic is boring no okay this was our script this was our The characters have arrived, scene one, see this, scene one it is written classroom 2 minutes and if you If you want to write this thing here then click here But can you write where here scene one and Scene one, write its duration here like that I would write here hmm what is its duration its duration 2 minutes so it is necessary that you include duration along with it so that when you create the animation Sit down so you don’t have any difficulty Story Board That is why it is made So that you do not get confused during animation So here we write Duration minutes okay now click here this is four over the arrow and place it here it it is quite big press control t your from the keyboard and then minimize it Here like this here But okay this is our scene one here Duration 2 minutes and now what do we do that now we have here in scene one Do scene one according to your script? is the camera zooms into a building classroom students are chatting some Reading and the teacher is explaining a lesson about historical events okay so now See this is our scene one and of this scene one There are so many things inside that the camera can zoom in Now here it has given the proper details. how the camera animation should be After that you went further into the scene This thing we have is that the camera zooms into a belling classroom okay this thing We did not add anything inside the story board. inside the story board we have just Placing the Environment and Characters Correct and now here we are with our character whatever is there, open it are here now But this is our character Ali and this Sara, okay these two characters have come We have opened them and You have to hold and drag it here within a project with a story board and press t tomorrow and paste it here Now let’s come towards Ali like this here too place it here I’ll show you scene one here. You have to create the rest of the scenes yourself. It is okay to make it according to the script Hey guys so these two characters have come to us I saw that this is what is inside the class room Both characters are sitting back to back now There should be a reference to the classroom as well A reference to the last time we did a classroom it was made, we see it lying with us or else if not then what we have drawn I didn’t save it myself but We took reference from the classroom, we Let’s open it here now with this as well You have to slow down the same from here first unlock and then drag do it in your story board section and press control t several times like this It happens that the resolution of the pictures is very it is very high and for our project if it was not matching with you then you simply You have to press Alt from the keyboard and then Place the wheel of your mouse on your side If you want to rotate it then it will zoom out like this It will go and now you can hold it and make it smaller like this Take And place it here now alt again Now press scroll up Scroll the scroll wheel up and here you have your classroom okay Now this needs to be adjusted here so now what have you to do is that now you This is the classroom layer, this layer put it at the bottom right here But at this place ah sorry down below majeed it will come down here it The white rectangle will come right above it. if yes then the background is your environment There are as many layers of environment as I have brought the background reference for this Background means environment reference Whatever layers there will be, all those layers Whatever background you have, it is yours The solid white background we used Below that for your story board you have has to place so that you have to place the sorry on it okay so that your background comes behind And on top of that, what you have is the environment. if go then See now it must come to your mind that when Our environment has come here, so this Then what about this solid white one? what is its purpose i will tell you Now I will tell you here basically I am going to tell you the first method I have already discussed with you that I have created different assets here. References were made to the characters References were created and references to the environment I had made it, you just need to place it and you just write it here it is not completed complete it first Let’s see the environment has arrived Characters have arrived, scene one has been written and duration I wrote it for 2 minutes but here is our If the script did not come, what did you do here? You have to do that, your script is here But I want to write it down, okay so the script is here But are the students inside the classroom? chatting some are reading so here we have Students simply have to write this here r chatting and some r We do the reading color White if you want to write complete that zoom into classroom is okay where Are the kids studying or talking amongst themselves? they are doing it and the teacher is giving them lessons is it about some historical event I am telling you all this You can also write the details here but I am simply writing this here The students of R chatting and sum r reading ok guys so this is how you write it here and you can reduce the font size let me keep 30 from here There are 48 this is done this is your scene one here if scene If you want to write forest here then you can write it here also Can I write in a little more details? I am going with Mazrat so this is the method basically its okay to make a story board Now what is a professional method story To make a board, you need a drawing inside it. you need to do drawing You must have drawing skill the method that was there, this was the method that In which we have separately defined the reference characters. The environment was prepared separately Like was free with the help of AI tools by going to the pic and then after that we have here bring this and place all these things You have given this method inside this section then To use when you have drawing skills not if you have a drawing skill If you do a little bit of sketching then then what you have to do then you have to do this that here you get This work will be done professionally, here you will get it brush tool is available guys here this brush The tool is okay, let’s place it once, okay let’s do this and see this here is the description of this brush We get these readymade presets See all of these We have all these different presets here You can get it now, pick any one of these For example let’s pick this one okay we have picked this up and after that we You can start drawing here as per your wish Now we have to select the color, let’s see which is the by default color bye the default color is ok so I I press control g and I see that what is inside my scene two where is it now is scene to scene to school library okay School School School Library and Duration 3 minutes the bell rings okay and and Further signaling the end of the class students pack their bags and head towards the The library is now available for this script here Accordingly you have to draw here Now you will not need proper characters not just creating a proper environment You need to prepare a reference, understand to do or else give the client a little It is ok to satisfy you for that He approves your reference and says that things are exactly in their places and this is the place this thing should be here like i would make a little book here yes, we make one here yes we have made one got the wardrobe right here is a cupboard okay and here it is his who have shells come went to that cupboard and we call it ji What is here is not inside these shells here but the books are kept okay here in these I have kept such books inside the shells here is a little bit of my drawing so good There are two ways of drawing: no and good to do a digital drawing such as that’s what I’m doing right now what is it digital drawing is ok both are doubtful for digital drawing in conditions and also paper for drawing What is drawing that we learnt in school? I had done my own drawing in j j maane over the notebooks we used to draw There was a copy of the drawing on which we used to draw with the help of pencil hard The copy which is called soft copy above we’re drawing and if you’re a Using a Pencil End Razor Help Razor help you to make your notebook more beautiful You can also write a page of text on top of a copy of a drawing. do you draw above do you draw something So that would be called a hard copy drawing, okay? and what do we call it soft copy drawing or we can call it digital you can also call it drawing okay so digital Drawing is a little tough You will get investment in digital drawing You don’t have to do it but it is a bit tough which is on your hard copy which you have For that you have to do drawing What investment will you have to make to get a I’ll need a copy and a pencil You will need to take a razor and with its help you will I have to do my drawing but that is easy, okay So this became a wardrobe and here we go Let me give you this one, it is the floor here But whatever is there is lying for sale, it’s ok there is a chair here Is Sorry there is a chair here as well and here But two The character is sitting and reading Okay, so with this method you have made your How to Create a Story Board Story Board This method is to be made professional method is this most of the animators or Then there is a video editor who uses this method Use your own story board okay to make and in this method You might even enjoy it a bit If it is interesting then this method is the story Now our next lecture is on making a board. which are our next modules Now it is up to the proper production Our next module is Production Our pre production has been completed Your idea generation in production script writing character designing Environment designing infact all these References of those who had prepared the voice record and audio editing and story boarding well one thing is left that the voice recording which We did it inside the story board what is the work so guys you have put your You had recorded the dialogues, just mention Ali has to do his first dialogue In which scene should the first dialogue come? You did not write the dialogue properly Here you just have to write dialogue one and You have to provide reference along with it that you have The dialogue that Ali had recorded What was the number one dialogue of Like Ali? dialogues like we gave our numbers and told our If you remember, did you save the dialogues? We saved our dialogues by giving numbers These were our dialogues, here they come, see this Ali one ali two this is infact ali one ali two ali th sara one sara to sara th teacher and Teacher one okay so now which dialogue is of one You have to get inside the scene, read the script after seeing and reading your script Use that dialogue in your story board. Just add the reference, that’s all the work If you have some confusion here So I will guide you properly Simply write the text above OK So now we move on to our next towards the module named Character creation and basically what we have from this The production work is about to begin okay so let’s meet again in our next of new lecture saath so guys our module to pre The production has been completed and now Our module three is the name of this module Character Creation Basically from here we about to start production going to start production now In this module three we will discuss the characters You will learn to design cartoon and Both types of realistic and complete characters that have characters Rigging is also included and in addition Characters’ outfits and accessories we will work on etc as well so let us Let’s start with two softwares for this we will use cc f means that character creator 4 end z bush with it character Headshots is a plugin from Creator Fur The plugin that I provided to everyone if no one has it then text me Do it, I will provide you a head shot Plugin to this we use If you do then I will tell you our first this is the lecture this is our first lecture getting Started with Character Creator for this We will basically introduce its character Using Creator 4 and Its Interface and Tools I will tell you in detail about so let’s get started this is what we have Character Creator 4 as you can see right here But by default one project is open in this I haven’t given any name to the project. If CC project is written here then Its interface is very simple and very user friendly It is friendly for you to work in it No need to have much knowledge about it there are some basic things if I talk about them Let me tell you here in some detail You will understand it well first Watch the lecture that inside the character creator How do we basically get started? and how our characters will be formed and how we how to arrange things and How we use the tools So here you are looking at the top menu bar First of all you can go to the top menu bar like here that you see in every software we get the first of 1 we have the file In which we can create a new project You can open the project Recent You can open the projects from here you can save the project You can save the project with a new name can import with inside it We can make any file and any 3D object And we can export our own made The character which we are discussing here did we create that character or will we create it If we want to export it then it In different format we are here We can export and here if we If you want to export only the head then that too can do and these were some special things There were important things that I I told you and by clicking on exit You can turn it off and on from here as well You can close this if it comes in edit Here in the edit you will find more things. You will not need anything else here, just Preferences only if needed what happens in preferences Use the tools of this software according to your needs You can order it from here Go to preferences and do some editing can make changes for example The shortcut key here is the pen camera. I want to zoom the camera for example Zoom the camera here and there is no one here right now there is no object lying there so we I don’t feel like I am zooming in here Or it is not happening when there is a character So that character will zoom in and zoom out so what is its shortcut command that you can Its shortcut is the best one that the scroll wheel of your mouse if you move it up and down then this zoom in zoom out well these things these are the outputs to this area which The area is ours and we have control over that area To do this, keys will be used and when we do this when you reach the area here then I will tell you in detail First, we’re starting here. and in this we have inference from the file started is now in edit and in edit All you need is NEET Preferences that if you have done it according to your own Gals you have to control what’s here ok so I need it anytime today I did not need to go into preferences to set my yes one thing to do according to settings Whose icon is also needed here yes and you also need character creator what matters is that you know that someone also when you open the software like is it a blender or else Are you using Unravel Engine or Maya or use any software in 3d If so, you will see grid lines showing up What are grid lines? Basically, they are Grid lines are the lines that define your objects Match your props to your characters to the ground to align What you have to see is where the ground is and according to that ground you do your things needs to be aligned so if you here If you want to show grids then simply Show Grid You can show grids here. I have to give and close the grids now what’s going to happen is the show is that this grid which This is a kind of reference to the ground because this is our ground and above the ground above these grid lines All our objects will appear on top our characters are to come Accessories related to the characters or whatever it is you are making your okay inside the software so this grid That’s why lines are important but After rendering when you render the thing if yes then after that you will get grade grade lines which she doesn’t show up So let’s go after that comes the character In this you will never get any information about anything Not Neat about Using the Tool it will be necessary because all these things that we have shows here and We can also do this in a shortcut way here You can select it later on slowly Slowly you will start taking care of everything yourself You will understand it and get into the modification So here you can merge some materials You can optimize the materials you can and now here are the skin weights etc You can click on all these things You will understand later when we see the characters and while creating the characters process during the manufacturing process We don’t need anything anywhere in between Have to apply on the character in the character If you want to make any changes or do anything then According to us we have to pick up things from here It will be ok, you will understand it yourself later It will be revealed what neat and mash they had like this it is here and this is the render and for rendering you know any If you have made something and given it a final If you want to see the look then click here the render for it You have to go to and its shortcut command You are getting it here f10 and if you come here in view then here But You can see these shortcuts inside the view here XJ & C & HOME & REMAINS center end camera view and camera here The view comes here, it’s the most It is important but you need to come into view There won’t be any need as we have All the tools are openly available here You have come here openly in front of us It is done fine and neat inside the plugins You will need plugins and Windows see this These two things are important if your work Space as per your requirements according to the show is not happening or as you you are watching the tutorial for example that you you are watching this tutorial right now and In this tutorial you will learn how to use this character creator that the work space looks something else and you When the character creator is opened For practice, you will need some workspace And if it is visible then you have to go to Windows He will need to arrange his workspace then you have to go to the workspace and Standard Advanced Visual Effects Final Render and preview and all panels all of this You have got all of these according to your needs here The first number is the standard, which This is the best, you have to keep this for yourself OK when you click on Standard If you do then you will have all your information here All content will be shown from the character creator Related content will be shown and if you have If this content is not showing then there is no reason for this there is no problem there is no issue because I had as much content as I could about the character The creator will provide it to you separately. It is given that when will we need that content Now she reads, see I have content here I am here for the characters For example if I come to hairs Here I have this in her hair style All the hair is visible but here it is If the download icon is appearing then Why does the download icon come that we We keep the character creator separate and the content that the character creator creates if we have to buy it separately If you have a content manager here It shows up but here in the content manager You are getting download issue like this If it is then you don’t have any problem with it If I need anything then I will buy all of them Folders Different folders Content there The one with the manager, I have given you the link I had given it to him, it’s lying inside it, okay There is a separate folder for actor and skin The makeup is different, the hair is different All the folders for clothes are separate Just keep your folders separate You have to open it as per your wish You have to open the desired accessories Do you want to pick accessories or outfits? there you are and just here is the character that you Just drag and drop it on the one you have created I will tell you how to do it later Explains everything in detail and practically hmm okay so now we’re basically here We don’t need this content manager We don’t see the content manager here. We have to do it, let’s close it and hide it If we need it here, we will give it to you We have an addon and a plugin We need that plugin of character creator You have to keep it visible here if you Click here on the headshot and then even after clicking here If the headshot plugin is not showing then you What you have to do is go to plugins Then go to Headshot and you have Headshot v2 Or if you have Headshot version one I have version two if you have version two If it is one then you have to click on it, okay If you have a head short then show it You will know what a head shot is for If you know it well, if you don’t know, I’ll tell you Let me give you the help of a head shot here we are Design your own characters ok you can create characters of your choice So this was our plugins menu. It arrived and it has this script inside it Now these scripts here are basically All the software we have 3D animation or 3D animation Now these are different scripts Who makes the scripts now? Just like there are developers, there are third parties Whatever they are, they make the script every When we add a script inside a software In fact, we do this on our back end coding happens on top of it okay now coding In which it occurs mostly which The scripts are python Python consists of What is Python a language is ok just like atml is one language, similarly python is a language Most of what is in Python is scripts There are more Pythons than Cinema 4D in the same way you get the effect of a blender Scripts are also available in Python Most of the blenders are donus ok in the same way as adobe after effects You also get scripts if you This is free and you can run it from anywhere in Python. Scripts are available for any specific and a specific task for the software more than one thing to do Any work within specific software To make it easier you need to do some get plugin get script So keep it saved with you so that you can learn coding. In appearance, it is fine in the form of coding There will be Python programming and that script You simply have to load it here but okay for example do you have any script that is used to edit a text document is it lying inside the file or on its own If it is in the format then you have loaded it Go to Python and open it by clicking on it. You can add a separate plugin here. Okay, so there are two types of plugins There are basically addons, one is zip The complete software which is made with the file which we simply install Like the headshot plugin we have separately I had installed it from and it would show up here and there are scripts on the second number You can simply open those scripts. You need to install them It does not happen and when you open the script if it is of automatic software then it There is coding, it gets added inside it happens and then whatever happens to that script With the help of whichever plugin you are It was created so you have a show becomes visible inside your software It goes and you complete your task in it. can do it ok and help you in neet you will never have to or just what you have If you need help then open the Plugins window and its Apart from Preferences and Files in Edit etc but you will get shortcut commands for all these All these shortcut commands are visible in front You have to remember what you are and what they According to work it is good here is a I’ll give you a little tip, here it is that if you need shortcut of any software Commands don’t come If so, you You have to go to youtube0 gpt and there I have to go and give him the command, I have to prompt him that Brother I am using character creator 4 and all the shortcut commands it has He defines what I am in details. give it to him and he will write the shortcut commands and then Their detailed work will also tell which What is the purpose of shortcut commands? ok so i think it happens like this This will make it easier for you and I will be able to remember you You won’t even need each one Separate shortcut commands of the software It is not prompted and you have the text Inside the document files, you have The script was generated using the shortcut command He made it for you, you saved it You have to take it and keep it in a separate folder and Whenever you open any software and If you start working inside then do the work during that text document file You have to open it and after opening it, your I have to keep it close and minimize it And wherever you need any Shortcut commands that you are missing So simply you can edit that text document You have to open the file and use the shortcut You have to see the command and then according to that It is ok to work so now let’s come down here and sleep this is it, this is a shortcut created here is to create a new project such as the file I was here to make a new project but But it is also visible that it is open in the same way to open the project and save to do that we won’t need them If you press the shortcut command control s That will save our project. okay or if we control o then our will open the project and press control n If you do it, it will create a new project. then you have used more shortcut commands you have to use it, it saves your time and Your work is also professional when you work If you are doing it then you look professional okay or whenever in front of anybody you will open the software, run it and or When you go to give an interview somewhere then If you have a grip on shortcut commands then what will happen to you that you are a professional You will write it and your CV will be your glory You will become stronger and people will accept you well here it is again for export that export as OB and FBX as you no these are the formats of 3d fpx OJ is a 3D format. OJ is also a 3D format. if oj fpx or usdt all these all formats are ok if these We can find any file inside the format so that means it is a 3d The file is there and we can open it. for any of your 3d software inside and that’s how we use our 3d software When I make anything, then that We exported the object or character You have to do this for any of your 3D formats inside it’s ok inside any other software for example to take it here We designed the character and If you want to take it in a blender then In which we will export it, we will call it as a FB will do an export ok that’s me I will tell you how when I reach the finals. You have to do well, then you will come again Here is the shortcut for undo and redo commands you know well this is goji now There is a show going on here but we unable to select because we have No character is present here but upload to sketch fab that if we We created the character directly from the sketch If you want to upload then do it from here maybe this is a brush we need it We will need it when we Here you will create your base character and taking that base character inside the g brush You have to go, this is the selection tool, selection If you have selected the tool and After selecting you can click on any thing When you click, that item will be selected which will lie within your view point It must be lying inside your work area. And this is your move to tool any To move an object you first need to First you have to select it then move we have to do this but we are not able to select it stay because right now we have a view point Nothing exists and it is the same thing to rotate the object or character This is for scale up and scale down One thing I would do is to be nice Let me make it clear here that what we characters here you will create those characters We can manually do this here using the scale tool Cannot scale up or scale down from In fact, we cannot be made bigger or smaller. have to work on her different muffs Then that character becomes bigger or smaller its reason is this its reason is that that character A it is not boneless it has bonus inside it they have rigging in it okay So whatever things involve rigging which have bonuses that we have We have to animate them manually or cannot minimize any software ok inside so now after that we have this home and The center is fine, there won’t be any need for them, yes This is zoom pane pane and rotate these are three isn’t it this one rotates the work area or To pan or move, zoom in and It is used to zoom out. ok See there are two ways, zoom in and zoom out To do that you can turn your mouse wheel down Rotate it upwards so it zooms in If you turn it towards you, it will zoom out and the other way is that you Select it and then click OK Hold down the left mouse button and If you drag the mouse forward then this It will zoom in and Drake will be drawn backwards. If you do this, it will zoom out, okay like this In the same way you can download it here using the same method. can move right left up down ok right to left and up to down and so on you can kind of rotate it okay Well, this thing is very important when we create the character here then You have manually added that character here. is that by zooming in or zooming out or From the center or from right up down you If you do not want to see any specific part If you want to focus on then do this method you don’t have to do that what you have to do If you want to see it from the front then That’s your overall character show from the front It will be okay, look at it this way from the right If you want then the show will be done right like this you can from the bottom, from the back and if on her face If you want to focus then you will click on the face It will focus on the face, okay so here If we don’t have any character then So right now no condition applies to it All these things are not happening here leave it, there is no need for them, okay and all these that’s also good now we come down to It’s all about our work I have already told you what our view is This is the port where our character show will take place our output will show ok our Character or accessory objects etc we will have shows this is modified Whatever character we create here, that panel Use this panel to modify the character We have to come inside where this is this panel Inside we go to the modify panel What work will have to be done here Majeed What tools do we have here in the menu What is there will be shows and inside each menu What all do we need to know if we go there individually? we will have to do this work when we become characters If you make them and work on them then you will also things on their own slowly step by step you’ll get it okay now here it is headshot plugin from here basically this thing isn’t this the area from here we You have to start with your character if its ok for designing then our first The lecture was character creator getting Getting Started with Character Creator and its E-Books his introduction and cc introduction to cc4 interface and tool now i am not feeling well My throat is down for three to four days now it’s bad and that’s why I I was unable to create the tutorials as they are And on number two here is our flood The situation remains the same The weather has turned very bad, very bad It is raining and our area is a bit sa becomes backward due to which here But there is a lot of problem with the light, okay? So my lectures are a little late these days. I am very happy with you I am sorry I am sorry I apologise that this thing a little try to understand that here But things are a bit bad these days The light comes because of the rain She comes and goes and I have no idea It does not happen like this most of the times but it happens many times It has happened many times that I have lost half of my The tutorial is recorded and the light goes out and all of it it gets spoiled ok its all his The output is what goes like this since this condition remains, then just as The weather will become a little normal and so will my health If everything goes well, I will give you 15 to 20 Within a day, all the All of them are remaining lectures I will try to upload it but I will tell you the next thing within 10 days There are 10 days, within those 10 days everything is If I upload all the lectures then our The next lecture will be a creating Base Character We have a base character inside it and design that base character Some very important things to design I’m going to give you some tips okay which I very recently which I have tried them and have done research on them and The ones I’ve tried myself Practically it was quite useful for me I will definitely share it with you thank you so Much friends our module is three Character creation and our lecture today This is a lecture on creating a base character Today we will be designing a base character Use the Character Creator and Headshot Plugin While doing this we need a reference image As much time as you want in 3D animation You feel like doing things practically Only as much time as you spend on research The better your research, the more Your character will become better I took a reference image so I would make an animation There are many more to see on Pinterest here If the reference image is there then you have The reference image needs to be taken Guys you have to take it in such a way that Both airs should be shows and of course Straight face of your character should be okay and looking into the camera and Any kind of expression on the face shouldn’t be like it is now this I downloaded the reference image After downloading the reference image we have to take this first ado it is not ready yet how can it be ready This is the thing that I am going to tell you today I’m still what I’ve never told anybody before Haven’t you told me Shadows were coming from one side to the other side But that face would have been perfectly fine It was a big problem for me, so I A very simple solution has been found for this it’s easy i will tell you what you All you have to do is close this now and you’ll leave. Straight Ado what did you do now after doing this here to do is that what is here No, you have to take it, it’s a tool, polygonal tool this center one is ok pick it up After picking this up you have now absolutely its nose is in the center or the nose is the tip is right in the center of it you see here You have to draw a line from it exactly in the center Okay, so I’m here to center it like this I absolutely drew a line Lee A did not come to the center Let’s start the selection from here or is it okay now and in this way you have on either side whichever side is your correct side No, you have to take that side from here Okay, this is how the selection should be done After doing this, now you have to right click And click on layer by copy, ok hey guys this is your layer which has been copied Now what have you to do, you have to come now on the image and from here you click on duplicate You have to click and do ok, now do the second one The image that you have, I mean that you have two here The projects have been completed. a project and what do you do now Is that this is the one that you duplicated You have to flip it, I’ll tell you how you have to flip it now you have it here It has to come on the image It has to come on the image rotation and flip canvas horizontal okay here You duplicated this and now the one above the layer above was the one you put the one you split, copy and cut You had to grab it like this and pull it Bring it here to another project Correct and right here in the center you have adjust it exactly center or now it’s ok what do you do now Now you have to take the brush tool from here you have the brush tool to get the brush tool After that you have to decrease its size It’s okay from here and now from here you You have to select the color wherever you brush You want to use yours from there If you want to select that color then I will do it here I select this color from here and I would reduce its opacity I would pay you round about 25 to 5 i am ok ok now this thing matters a lot here depends on which layer you have selected That’s it, now you have two layers, now below You can click on that layer from here If you try hiding it, you will see it here in the middle A line is visible which is the line in the middle In fact, basically this is the line We have to cover the line so how did we do it We have to cover this line, we will put it here than select OK and unhide Do and my brush is here like this Ferate ok now you have to select the color No, from here the color comes exactly in the center You have to select the one that is available here But it is fine and the size of the man is this much You have to take it as much as this line of yours comes here Just covering this line a little bit you just take And this is how you position your brush from here Keep moving around if the opacity seems low increase the opacity a bit okay now come back down here now this Select the color and place it here Kind So now select this one here do it okay now come down a little bit Select I am sorry now here But a little hard work is required for this, your guys So we can do one more thing as well sa do it let’s hide this one and the one above Select the layer and move it a little bit move the side a bit and see yes this will let you use the brush tool You don’t have to do a little down here We will have to do it anyway but here it is for us Only this area, this one is so small This is what matters, the rest doesn’t, but Its nose has become a little smaller If it is then we can go and adjust it later maybe that is not an issue so now we will solve this Simply go to file and save it. I have told you both the methods which you you can do it which feels better if you If you want to work harder then use the first method You can do this by using the brush tool Your image will be clean here but we After generating the character again you can bring its textures here and then if you want to generate the character here After doing this the texture remains same on it We have to normalize the way things are If you want you can bring it here again So now you go to the file and save the image again Save it on your computer and here Select the format JPG from here and save it from here two ok this is done now do one more thing this The image that we had set up in Photoshop Inside we have to scale it up a bit is image up scaler this is the website its use I told you earlier that select it at 400 take it and now wherever you are your character reference image is lying you have to select it and have to click on start You just have to wait a bit here depends on your internet speed you can download it take it and it will download your image ok This is your reference image see the quality He has made it so much better, now you can generate it you can do it now you have to get the character In the creator and from here if like this If the interface is not showing then try the plugins Go and get your head shot by clicking here okay so this is the interface like this now what you have to do is to show it The image that was there friends track it and You have to drop it here, at this place and As soon as you drag and drop it will appear to you will ask what your body type is and your what is your skin type so you I want to keep the mail here clean and soft You have to keep it and if your character is female So you have to select female and if If your character is a small child, a baby You selected here here also baby You have to select it, okay and if here After selecting, do not check here So it is necessary to make noise that here There should be a check right but our If it is not a character baby then what do we do with it should we do it or simply leave it unchecked Click on mail and clean and save and do it on generate okay so if your The character is such that if someone adds a little If yes, then it is right for you to click on Old here mail and here Old now we click on generate here it is within two to three minutes Your character will be generated and given to you Depends on which PC you have Which processor is it? Which graphics card? Fitted to You don’t have to do anything just wait for it Letting go of your work This is the work that is being done by you putting a dent do it in blender or maya This is all auto system its manually it’s sorry what has it done here We have seen the characters here looking at the reference I have generated it and given it but in this and in this a little difference So how do we eliminate this difference now? to do we have two methods the first method that we can do here by using morphs can but a lot of students have This issue is coming that these muffs have work with them If these mobs are not working for you then If you are not doing it then leave them to it ok what you should do is simply live together You have kept your character in the brush as it is you have to take it there okay then you Do all the work within your heart Right now we have a little bit of work to do for it Now I have to do it on textures and next Inside the lecture we will use it inside the G brush will take this realistic character Try to make it in a little cartoon style Now we will try on its mobs If your mobs are working for you Let me tell you about it on the fly That’s how you should work with headshots You must be working on the rest of your body Are the muffs working or not? matter we have head shot muffs here okay so let’s see that we have this has come to our head And see this there are two kinds of muscles, one for the head The second head shot is for the head shot which muffs it is quite detailed The hand muffs are not very detailed so You must have either of these If he is coming then try to control both of them It’s the same method, I’ll tell you how it is Suppose you have opened your eyes a little here if you want to scale if you want to scale up then you have Simply click on the eyes and select the eye scale But you have to click here now you see this is over by going to 100 It’s not happening much more than this even if If you want to do this then simply do this here See slider okay this bake slider on top of it You just click and as soon as it’s back If you click on the slider then it will appear here changes still exist ok but here But it is back and you can see it more You can increase it but it is so big And if it doesn’t look good then I’ll undo it does hmm yes it came so fine Its done and now its left like this You can suggest as many things as you want here. can you like the nose, the nose has a little scale Do you want to increase its height? Do you want to decrease the nose? You want to adjust the depth to what it is The nose tip is here The nose tip is here Bring it down a little and the nostril width is increase it a little bit, this is all work You can do it in that as well, even inside the bush You can do it in a better way there okay now you have to do one thing that you control Press wherever you want to save it Save your character there. so that if the power goes out, it will be available for you So that you do not have any problem, I will tell you further that we what to do now next which is our lecture there will be this character in it we will use g brush We will take you inside and after going there I will tell you in detail inside the brush that you have made its body parts bigger or how to do a little cartoon style How to make mobs of it in Minecraft You did fine and with that you can save your objects If you want to add extra If you want to add objects then how do you do that? You can do it and I will also tell you that you have done it Outfits inside G Bash to keep your custom how to wear outfits ok if for For example, the assets I gave you You can choose the outfits of your choice from them If you don’t get it then you do as you please how to make outfits inside g bash If it is professional then I will tell you the method I will give you the opportunity to work hard on it It’s ok to work Guys, we will meet again in the next new lecture Our module three is underway with Character creation and our lecture today This lecture has three sculpin characters in g Brush and this lecture is a little bit It is possible that in some places you will find There may be confusion but I will try to I will keep clearing things up with time and If you understand it well, then you have understood it Focus on watching this lecture Because there are some complicated things in this is about to come and this is all of us This is the lecture within the course that You may see some complicated things You will get the rest of our previous lectures It was very easy and the upcoming lectures were also ours Our lectures on blender will be easy He might be a little bit older than this It may be more complicated, but still If you can pick things up very well If you take it then I hope that you get it in the first go itself If you will understand this well then let us now The character needs to be taken inside G Bush So I have G Bush I have given you the same version in 2024. It has been provided and now you have to do it like this that is if you already have an open hedge brush So you can close it, there is no issue So now we have to first teach this character a T pose. Now you have to bring it inside in T pose How to bring it till you are in T pose I will not keep this character unless you you can take this inside your brush yes but when will you bring me back for sculpin After working on it, when the character If you bring the character back to the creator then This will cause a lot of problems for you Let’s do this inside a T post. What we need to do is to have t There is a preset inside the post here now let me show you how it happened Now I have asked where the preset is. That preset has been provided to you Along with that, if the assets were given to someone If you don’t get it then I’ll tell you whatsapp2 this one is simply a preset We have to drag and drop it here on the character and as soon as you drag If we drop the end then our character will be T it will come inside the post okay now we will z If you can take me inside Braj then now What should you do by taking this to Jee Braj? Select the Selection Tool to go to and then select the character and Then you click here to go to z A before this step you have to install The Bash in your PC and you’ve seen the 2024 version Install the one I provided I hope you have installed it already and you simply put z b here After installing, click here Now you have to do some settings on Goji here I am asking you so why don’t you put all the information here Settings should be left by default like Yes, just select the T pose here. To get it go here and click on Goji is like if you click on goji then now you You can see that your G brush is here If the cursor has appeared then it means that G Brush Yours is opening, you haven’t opened it yet you have to wait don’t click now you have waited Do you want to do it or see now that your G bash is open went close it from here and now Simply click once on the light box click on the light box and now you have Look carefully here what to do Hold down the left mouse button and Drag it in any way and your character will appear Now after doing this you did not click You don’t have to click anywhere just After dag you have to click on edit I have to start making it, I have clicked on edit If you do not click on edit then You can’t do any work here. Now you understand the shortcut keys Shortcut keys are very important now the same buttons on your keyboard and mouse You have to control this interface from your which is a character or any object interface I am lying down, I have to control it, okay see how to do it now press lt Hold down the left mouse button and keyboard button and move the mouse downwards then it will Your character which is moving up and down right and left Left is ok so whichever side you want to move the mouse to You can also drag your mouse to any side your character will move in that direction okay so this is your character right here now In the same way you can zoom it in and zoom it out. If you want to do it then how will you do it, press ult again from the keyboard and mouse of the mouse which is sorry the left and right of the mouse The button is used to move it it happens but alt alt with alt key It is okay if you engage with Alt key If it is from your keyboard then left or right mouse button If you use both right buttons then this move will happen your character will move okay and if you You will press the control key on your keyboard control key then after that you can use your mouse Press the Right button along with the Control key to You have to press and hold from the keyboard and also the right mouse button is what you need to do is hold on Press the Control button and both buttons on the keyboard the right mouse button with the mouse to press both of these Hold down and move the mouse upwards If you drag it will zoom out and If you drag it towards you it will zoom in it will go okay so in the same way now if If you want to rotate then press For this you need to press the key from any keyboard. There is no need to select, just your Hold down the left mouse button and in this way you just drag the mouse this will rotate your character okay your The scene will rotate and you can control it from here as well you can see this will give you some navigation It can be seen here here When you clicked, this is exactly our character It’s completely straight now, okay We will press it alt and move it to end center So now after doing so much work You got an understanding of the shortcuts to the interface Now after that there is some more effort to control These are things that you will understand as you go along Now you will go to the next task which you have to do This is what you have learned here on geometry. You have to click and you will see its vertices and You can see its polygons that Its polygons are not smooth then you have to change its You want to smooth out the polygons If you smooth it out you can go into more detail about it If you can work then you can work on the divide You have to click here to see this divide You have to click on it just once you divide If you click on it it will become smooth okay See it got smoother after that one time Again you click on divide twice Just click on divide and it will be smooth it will happen and it will become so smooth that you You can work on it if you want more If you keep dividing on this issue, then you will keep doing it its polygons will keep increasing okay so this It will become smooth but when you do it like this You will take your character back In the creator, you may find something The problems that we have to face Could it be just one problem It could be that your character creator will start lagging because your The character will become very heavy, okay? You just clicked on divide it twice if you want to do it then you have to do it so smooth that you Can you work on it now, what have you done? you have to do that look here are some things We can see this when we move our cursor if you are bringing me here then you should come here A small circle appears in red color This circle which is here is actually ours There is a brush, it’s ok, with the help of this brush We have to do a scull here so look now This is the size of the brush here like this we You can increase this 1000 times It has increased but we want more than this If we are not able to do it then we need more than this If you want to increase it, what will you do, double it click it up here Or you doubled up on the dynamics here Double click on OK Dynamics If you click this Look what you have now, that is the size of your bush This makes you appear bigger than your character okay now from here it is giving If you can decline, what should you do now? that whenever you have to sculpt inside then You have its mirror which is inside the brush, You have a mirror on your brush, you turn it on to take a mirror means that one Whatever changes happen on one side, they will happen on the other side Those changes will be applied automatically If you don’t need to work hard then Simply press X on your keyboard press x and you can see that I I’m bringing the brush to one side, so On the other side also you will see red color here. The circle is visible, if it is ok then it means one If there are changes on one side then on the other side It will be automatic, what should I do here now? I think Bush’s style is here I’ll change it and I’ll move it here but okay let me take a brush and see Here is how to select a brush Click here and then Select the brush of your choice You just used the move brush which is I have selected it, okay, I have taken the move tool here. But what do I do now that its If I want to make some changes on my face on its head like I can see from here on its head I want to pitch it a little bit so I like this it see okay i got it and like this I want to control it a little bit in the center as well I am doing it and if you have any idea about its organs Doing detail working on the upper face organs If yes then you should do it according to your organs You have to select the brush size, it’s ok Like I have done here according to the nose if I have done this then I will touch the tip of the nose I want to move it down a little bit here But this is how I did it, okay And I want to spread it out a little bit, like this So basically the purpose of the move tool is to spread it out what happens what is the purpose of this It is used to move the mesh so whenever you have done it in cartoon style If you want to create characters then you need to use the move tool will it be okay with the organs to tamper But if you want to add a separate mash on top of it If you want then what you have to do I will tell you later but first Now let’s do a little work on it We need to make its eyes a little bigger So what will we do, let’s increase it here The size of the brush is a little smaller like this From We’ll move it And as we look at it from every angle will move So our eyes will get bigger ok but if you want to enlarge your eyes then The inner one is what you see here The eye ball is visible in this eye ball according to what you have to do okay so now we Work on it in a little more detail I want it to be whatever face is there on the face here I am but I want to make some wrinkles okay if yes then how will I make that character If I want to look a little old or You want to show me a cartoon, look at your Work has to be done according to imagination Whenever you have to do it, whenever you have to do it then your imagination and your requirements according to your To work according to the script It is very important for you to know the basics of the tools. The basics of tools are important I told you what tools you should use How to do it, what to do in which software Which tool will do the work in which software For what purpose am I used I’ve told you the rest is up to you now depends on your creativity It depends as long as it is inside you You will not bring creativity to things If you cannot make things unique then If you want to make it unique then you need a little unique level But there is a need to go and think, okay this is it the whole responsibility, the whole execution, It all depends depends on your thinking about what you are You think unique and what unique do you make well now it is like that If you know how to make unique things then do it like this You have also brought unique things into animation Your characters have to come, no matter how many The environment should not be too good, it is this good There might not be props, the visuals might not be that good You may not be that good but if your script It’s good if you are unique then people will watch your videos I will share it further, okay so here it is now what we do is use the brush from here Let’s change the style a little bit Let’s change the brush style a little bit and Now we can use the brush that we need from here. Look there are a lot of them to take so I will take a few I myself get confused as to who I am If we want to take a brush here then we have to put it here brush up or let’s take this dumb standard and After this, decrease its size a little. and see if that works Let’s increase the brush a little bit Now after that set the size of the bush to let’s change the style from here And this is the standard brush, this one Take it here Now the work that a standard brush does is No, basically it is used to increase the Would here it looks
like this here it has mixed the mash a little okay increased the polygons a bit increased it and now it has been increased a little let’s zoom and do some detail work on the nose it is like this So when you depict the organs of any character You spoil it a bit with reality Apart from this, it is made in cartoon style. goes okay so if you’ve If you want to keep it realistic then you should use G brush You don’t need to bring it inside Realistic your character in the character creator itself So the character is formed in the same way but if If you want to make it a little cartoon then You need to bring it inside your brush. I would have studied neat so here I zoom out and now Next I will tell you what to do Here But now look, we have done some work on the face. Now I don’t want to work on it any more I told you the method, I told you the method that’s how you should work on this right now If you look forward to watching the video then If you practice by watching the tutorial In practice also you have to do it like this I have to work as much as I have worked Once you practice and become proficient at the tools If you get a grip then after that Then you have to show your creativity. You can do your work according to your imagination. You have to focus as much as possible on your character The more time you give to your character, the more your character will grow It will be even better, just that much Perfection lies in your character If it goes then we can do some work on it Are Guys, you could have done some work on the rest of the body If you do it on the face then it will be fine for the rest of the body Once you’ve worked on the top, now work on the rest of the body To work here we first have to So we had to take our move tool move the brush and increase the size a little I have to do it and with this I can zoom a little bit I will do these And I will move it now, okay? I want to make it in a cartoon style. If we press Ctrl+G then it will undo Whatever work you have will go from anywhere If it goes wrong I adjust the brush size I’ll decrease it a little and make it’s neck I will make this in a little cartoon style This way I will increase this now So this is our work done so much on this and Now if Majeed goes into detail and works If you want then this is your whole brush here The styles are available, it is fine as per your choice Take the brush here and paint over your character Keep working, it is right, mind the shortcut keys to be kept inside and a) your brush, enter the size of the brush here looking at it and then the rest of it Things that are important to your character’s appearance Accordingly here you have added things on it have to keep doing it, have to keep applying and one I forgot to mention here that if did you get your own brush from somewhere For example, I have taken the I have taken the brush, is it standard? What is the purpose of a standard brush It is okay to increase it here. It is used to increase polygons here if you want to smooth it out If yes, then you will press shift from your keyboard And you will smooth it out from here like this. if it is then it will make your mash smooth This made the mash smoother so I undo I do it here I don’t need to create a mesh here so I would have done it by the way from here also it’s done okay it’s just that it’s okay And now let’s see what work you have to do now You haven’t worked on accessories yet Keep one thing in mind here, that you yes the work that a man has to do inside him has to be divided into two parts, the first one which The part is to work on your character and in the second part you have created a character If it is right then you need to work on the accessories Now you have worked on the appearance of the character I have done whatever you mean to do on this You had to do a sculpt, you have done it character After sculpting the character you have now I will take it back once you make sure That the sculpting of your character is complete It has gone and you needed it that much to sculpt so now you have sculpted the character need to go back to character creator okay then after that again what do we do We will work on this accessories But now you have to click on All, see It is good here when you are here for the first time If you click on All for the first time then this will happen to you Which other software do you like Is it a blender or is it Maya or cinema? 4 It’s done one by one about all of them If he asks then you have to skip it, okay? So when the turn of character creator comes in the end then when it comes to character creator If he asks then you have to continue, ok If yes then he will ask for the first time, not after that I will ask you to continue this here now and as soon as I continue it will View Goji Options here and buy now Everything has to be left as default Settings and you have clicked on Just Update here Click on It’s good to see whatever changes we have made I made some changes on my character You can see from here we I had enlarged it a bit, its chest was It had to increase its width a little bit I had done some work on the neck so she did it completely You can see all the changes Work on the nose of the character inside out You can also see that here it’s been ok So now this character is a proper cartoon How to look stylish and still look a little If it looks realistic then it is realistic The region of visibility is its textures and It has accessories as we work If we go, our character will become a cartoon character Okay, now we have focused on its accessories. Have to work after working on accessories then what we will do is that we can We will only work on textures Not making a cartoon out of a mash up of characters infact we know about the character They have textures and they are a bit cartoonish too It has to be brought in style only then Our character looks like a cartoon OK, so now we are working on its accessories. to do so our next lecture will be G Brush Key Inside G Brush we have created character How to make accessories for if You don’t need to make accessories inside the brush so you can see the assets that I have given you Go and see the assets given below The clothes of character creator are outfits You will find the outfit inside it Just drop the dragon on the character The dragon has to be brought from outside and dropped which it’s your choice it’s okay If you like shirt then drag and drop the shirt if you want to do hairs then drag your hairs and you have to drop it, if you have paints then you have paints Drag and drop lets you create outfits there is no need but if you wish that the outfits are not available there and you Outfits or accessories of your choice If you want to make it then I will tell you how to make it I will tell you about this in the next lecture Practice and learn from anywhere, any way is there any issue or any confusion So without any hesitation ask me I will guide you guys our module Three is character creation and our today’s Lecture is lecture for making custom Accessories & Outfits So to create custom accessories and outfits The ideal software for us is If you are a fan then we have to be careful about our character I want to go inside G Bush What did we do in the previous lecture? sculpted inside the brush its After sculpting the character, your The character took the character back In the creator and now again we are talking about character Create your character with G Brush from the creator The same method will take you to it, click on Goji Have to keep all settings by default You have to click on tea post and goji Clicking we are just within few seconds here The brush will come open and now we Click on the outfits to see what the outfits are We have to design outfits anyway by moving the character inside the G brush You can design there without even going there there is no issue but what will happen here is that If we bring the character then our according to the character’s reference for If the character becomes a reference for us Character’s Body Type Shape according to body shape Accordingly we are here to design accessories and then go to character creator We need to do more work with accessories We just won’t need the skin You will have to deform your character’s body with and apply to then you have to click on the light box and Drag your character like this And click on edit and now click on the bottom Let’s move the character here right here like this and now we Zooming out the character yes this is enough and now here But let’s click on the nose here. Our character has become absolutely straight now We have designed character accessories here. Here you have to do the geometry of the character There is no need to go in and divide anymore There is a need to increase its sub divisions here infact now what we have to do is that Now we have to add a new mesh here If you want to add a new mesh then click on add new mesh It is very simple and very easy on the tool Click here and then see all this tools this is all tools okay click on it and Now click on insert here. After clicking on it, you have now seen a If you want to take the raw shape then in raw shape we have to take it here But plane and sphere are also available here You are getting cylinder and you are also getting cube I am getting it too, ok, I am getting the ring too so now for example you have For example one of the accessory accessories Create a ring for your character’s neck if your character is female or a Fantasy characters that appear in fantasy movies if characters are used inside then for that how do you do that i am here But I’ll get a ring right now I am talking about accessories here because Making accessories is a little easier Better than cloth outfits Then I will tell you that you how to design the outfits You have to pick up the ring here, okay now Your ring has arrived here, it has been added It has been added inside, now you have to do it like this You have to press Dab from the keyboard press dab and now let’s see that Where is my ring I think It is very small and there is an add on here somewhere if it has gone then Okay, now let’s move the character a little bit. here we do it in fact w of the character The purpose of clicking on this is this what happens when we click w Then the options of move tool would appear here Press Alt and drag the mouse what would have happened if we did that our area which is our interface, user interface Move the place where our output is being shown It is happening but what do we have to do now We have designed this work inside this user interface inside the area that we have here objects are lying or characters are lying If we want to move it then we have to dub it Despite this the move tool is not shown here. The reason this is happening is that here our The ring is selected And that ring is so small that it covers its body then when the ring is hidden inside the body hidden inside is the automatic move tool which if they are also hidden inside it then Now what should we do in this situation Now we have to select the character We will select the character only then we will see the character If you can move it then look at it carefully You will see an arrow key, click on it If you do this then your character will be selected it looks like this character is clicked on As soon as it is selected, the character will be ours It has become prominent in the front, okay so first It was not prominent, now it has become prominent It’s a little light now what do we do now double press that right and now we have the move tool now If it is not showing then the move tool is at the bottom it must be somewhere near his feet, okay So we’re going to drag this up here towards the foot. let’s do it okay and now we’ll catch it let’s take it to this side see this side ok this is where we took it and now we’re going to take it zooming out a bit This is it and now we click here again on this arrow down arrow so this Look, our ring is lying here. This is our ring lying right here If it has happened then what do we do now that it happens again Let’s undo this with the Control key Why do we need to control the character? I want to take it back to my location because The character has just come to us that character’s eyeball and its cavity here we have the character If the line doesn’t line up then we will control it let’s do it again let’s do it again ok there is a minute It is not getting undone by pressing control-G So we do this manually with our arrows press the key once and click Are And let’s do this here manually, okay so it’s a bit messed up here But if something like this happens Even if a situation arises or any matter arises here It may go bad, some problem may arise and somewhere But if you are not able to understand then there is no issue You can have a backup in the character creator it is lying there just simply ji brush Close your eyes and live your character again take it inside the brush okay so now Bringing the character inside the brush again We go there and there is confusion about one thing It happened to me, which I am accepting what happened was that the move tool ji Ring move tool not showing inside bushing He was infact lying right at the bottom While I was here before I could ring I never brought it here ever I did not insert Always insert sphere I do that and the sphere always comes to the center Whereas the one I added to the ring She had come down to the bottom so the light box Let’s click on and drag the character here and on edit and now move it down and Zoom out a bit too let’s zoom out okay and this Our character is here, now we are on the tool go there and then click on sub tools let’s click on insert and now here Let’s take the ring from there, the ring has come down Guys, it is lying down near us the ring is lying here okay and now What we’re doing here is scaling up This ring has to scale this ring So press Dab once more and this center one Click on it and it will be your ring scale it is getting scaled up it is ok Neck according to character’s body Accordingly we have to scale it and now Just move it upwards and it will happen automatically The move tool came because I already had it here But the DUB was selected properly Is and to go back to go back to go back To hide the move tool, you must press If you want to do it then it will be hidden, press the button If you do this then the move tool will be shown. Okay now. We focus and zoom are the characters in this area where its neck is right and let’s move it here like this now We scale it down to its neck according to this or this has happened and now you rotate it down it is like this so you should rotate it like this ok guys rotated it and now we have to do it on this When Sculpin makes sure your The object is properly aligned with the body Is That’s okay it’s done and now we’re over it So let’s do the sculpin Press Q to hide the move tool will go will disappear and now we have here I want to sculpt according to my body, it is ok So let’s take the move tool from here, which This is my favorite and the brush size is increasing the and I reduce it a little bit like It was told in the previous lecture that If you double click on Dynamics then the brush will appear. the size is doubled will go okay now we can adjust this Choose the right one according to your body type. Is [music] and make the size a little smaller and I Just this area, put it a little down towards here something like this We have to make the shape of and here you can see ho that I am doing it from one side to the other side But if it is not happening automatically then do X come on both sides Went Okay, so this is a simple example. The main problem was that a new mesh With Assisting Mesh you have created the new mesh How to add and both meshes you how to control it ok how I have to arrange one after the other on both of them one how do you work and both of them How do you choose one after the other? So the method is exactly the same, more than this There is nothing rocket science in it now It depends on you which one you choose You just have to make all kinds of accessories using your tool I have to go to all the tools and whatever want to create that by clicking on insert You have to add this type of shape here ok And you can freely customize these shapes You can do it if you are completely independent When you are independent and you can create any shape You can customize it for you Design whatever you imagine you won’t have any problem doing it, it’s correct So these are all the shapes that You are completely independent here. You can customize their polygons which he is changing it completely you can do this inside polygons with their vertices inside the edges inside okay so this is a Now that the method is done, we have made a small accessory I made a simple sea and put textures on it How to apply it, we will know later when Our next lecture will be on textures. okay inside of that we’ll talk about it will do it ok so guys here is this ring we had designed it, now here we are If you want to make outfits for this then make outfits The method of making it is If you make it manually, absolutely Use the same method as I used for this made an x-ray here a ring here I am saying sorry for this here I have a locket like a necklace which is like this I have been calling it a ring for a long time now Had been If it is meant for ring fingers then it I made a locket for this so I guess So here we have the outfits for it If you want to make then you know inside the outfits shirts and pants and things like that Much comes and nothing else comes So here we have made a simple shirt. yes I will tell you the method, it is very easy You have used your own skills to Making things according to the requirements If you want to stay, it’s ok, very easy way, simply you Click here and your character will be Selected by clicking on the arrow The character has been selected, first you did your This locket was selected here and now here But now you have to do one thing here You have to click this which you can stock here It is written, you have to click on it and From here you drag rectangle above it Click on the drag rectangle After clicking, you press Control You have to do it from the keyboard and this is how it works The more area you want to use, the more accessories You have as much area as you want to make outfits You have to select this area, it should be selected okay it’s selected and now here But you will find a tool like this one from Ext See this article by clicking here and keep the by default settings and Simply click on Extract And this is how you did it in an exclip After doing this you click on accept okay guys this is so much work Now what you have to do is that now you have But You have to click on the dots again and here you have to select the move tool from there or you also want to do it ok And now this is after selecting the move tool Look here this is what has happened What is its reason, why is it built here but it is made so that this area no this had also been selected so if so If these things appear in front of you then you will see such things The meaning is visible for example here This extra mesh is created here So you did not select this place okay so you just have to do this Select the area till the neck That’s right, I control it like this I’ll let it be because it’s done now We can’t do anything more with it now We have to do it like this, now we have to take it with us We’re back to our character creator inside so I click here I make the character absolutely straight and Let me zoom out and take a look Majeed if you adjust it a little with this If you want to do it then you can do it with the help of move tool you can adjust it and if you want to smooth it out So you can simply divide it into the following: was coming You have this geometry and by dividing it can you smooth it out ok like this So if you have this one then even if it is like this This goes for example if this ever happens to you If it is gone then you can do this one thing too You can shift here by going to the standard bush by holding down and reducing the brush size If you smoothen it here then this will happen to you The mesh which was created, this mesh slowly It will slowly start to end okay So let me go, okay, I’ll do it this here but increase the size of and and shift We can end it here by pressing ok give it So it would have been better if you had turned on symmetry But if you didn’t do it before, you won’t do it now We still don’t do it because now a If it happens on one side then put it on the other side spoil it further I will give it to you okay guys so this is fine this is ko hi Like the high neck, it is of that type Once it’s done, let’s go, okay, this and this adjust it a little bit are according to the shape of its neck I think it’s okay to tamper with it further I don’t do this with this and this once divide it again and a little bit let’s smooth it out okay so now I’ll just I will do it sir, I press my hair. sorry, let me press control and zoom it out I do it and now You have selected the shirt and this shirt is fine The shirt is selected and now you clicked on lt and clicked on all sorry Here But And where did it go? Click here. ok and continue with this and that is yours You can update it here now Do the same with the locket that you had made You can also buy neck pendant for neck by first selecting the shirt in this way You can export it by clicking on All. I have to give it back in the character creator okay and after that you have here his rather that She has also come along, it’s okay, thankfully she too It has come together, okay, so see this This was such an easy method to make an outfit here here we have tried to make it so many times Here is a shirt for this in simple way have you made it or have you made a top or whatever you can also say this ok now its your turn Now comes the option to apply textures on it So the method for applying textures is He When we apply textures to the character You will learn the method to do the character Just a little bit of adjusting the textures If we learn the method then our outfits or accessories will suit them How to apply your textures above Or you can also know the method to edit it It will be detected automatically and with the same method You have also tried to match the textures of your outfits. Is it okay to apply or do you want to make it so by the way These things are ours which are in our next lecture I hope that there will be a discussion inside it today Within a short time of the lecture you have you would have learned a lot of things that You probably never got this much results with this method before I could not learn from the beautiful and easy method yes hello guys i hope you You will be fine today after a long time I am uploading the lecture, first of all I will tell you I am sorry to everyone and I regret this thing that I was missing for quite some time in this matter There was a reason for this, although there were many There were reasons but one reason which was common to you and me It was very useful to everyone I was looking for one thing And finally I found textures end something related to the material that our How is it going to be very useful It’s going to be useful, you’ll know it now The hard work of our days is our few It is going to merge within seconds How do you see now our previous The lecture was on making custom accessories and outfits module thi ka lecture four tha Today we have detailed working on taxes and I just found something related to this First, I’ll show you my A project that The final time we made it character we open it The interesting thing is that now you can do this in Photoshop. There is absolutely no need to go also this is basically for cartoon characters if you are making cartoon characters so its best for them Here we have a skin preset We have both available for mail as well We have also added skin presets for females. We have to apply it on this and we have to use Adobe There will be no need to go inside Facebook There is a need to work on taxes You won’t need it but I will tell you both methods I will tell you how to do it if you have Do you want to work hard and do cartoons? You are working specifically on characters as you can see our cartoon This is just a character, this is not realistic We did a lot of tinkering with its muffs I have done the changes so let me show I will provide this thing to you One thing you have to do is message me pay taxes Both of these we Apply to any one if the character is female So apply it for a female character if there is mail then our character is on mail If there is mail then we will pick it up and just drug and Let’s drop it at the end here No changes need to be made, it will remain by default give and apply give it to ok guys You can see our character cartoon it’s done exactly now here on top of it There are many things that you will do at this time I can’t see like her eyebrows here we will bring that and moreover We will apply the rest of the things on top of this. Like hair and the things I told you about You will find those that have been provided You are provided with a content manager loan premium content all things inside it you will find it okay then I will go into it I’m here and now I’m going to go to the hair First of all in the group, we are eyebrows If you apply eyebrows on top of it our character If it’s a cartoon, then we will draw these eyebrows on it You can also apply this much realistic stuck and dropped is not an issue it is done Now we of this applying bed on top I’m gonna drag and drop it Its right above you can see that our The total look of the character should change Just these three things have to be applied From eyebrows hair which is your sorry skin which It was preset and apart from that its bed end must Both were in the same group, okay Now apply hair on it I come in here and this is done by dragging and dropping it on top of it Are So it’s a bit like Disney style Our characters are like that, It’s done, okay, so pretty much its look Change has happened, now one thing comes on top of it that is the texture of its eyes Where will you get them, I will tell you this I will provide inside what I have you here Now I am providing you the template AI as well I’ll do it okay this is the mail and this For females then stag and drop it on this Do not click on replace here You have to click on Material Only here have to do it okay keep this in mind now see Can you first imagine what kind of character we have? was and is now our It has totally changed now when we work do its which we custom its mean shirt We will work on what was created here If you work on its textures then You will see a lot of effects because right now its over his shirt There is no tax applicable of any kind the shirt here we have a necklace like this yes it happens he made this okay so this There are two things that we have to work on now There is no need to work hard, simply You have to go and search here PBR textures so this is pbr which is textures Take note of this website which is pb.com There are lots of textures here for free It is available to you here Now we have the fabric which is taxed here ok to look for There is Cloth and Fabric, click on it And now here are the textures you like. yes you just have to get it from here okay then I go to the next page and these ones look good to me I’ll take it and it’s good here He has told me to download every texture set on this website well here this thing is very important okay this See A I Have Texts Sets for Unity Unroll Engine and Many Others for the Users off bander maya 3ds cinema 4d sketch fb And more choose BL file from here You have to download the BL file which is there. This is a z file, you can download it Take Like it will be downloaded on the open folder Click to open it Take these and you can use all the textures drag and drop it outside here so now This is one of the things that we work on normal map and the other one is this diffuse this is it okay you should have seen these two first What you need to do is that you have entered the character creator I want to come back, make sure that your the shirt is selected not selected If yes, then double click and select it After that come to the modify panel here click on above text and see this a layer of it is formed here now this which This is the base color, above this you have But these ones Drag and drop textures here Have to apply it over the base color, okay it’s done And now this one, which is the normal map, you here But here you have to drop the dragon on the bump okay over here and like dragon drop If you do this then it will ask you whether it is a bomb or not If it is normal then you have said normal, normal, but normal You have to click on it, it’s ok, you have to do it ok And as soon as you click on normal You can see that you have a lot of Details can be seen on the map which It is basically for details ok to create the details If it happens then you can do it in the same way from this website Who metal is metals okay go into it and You can see any metal from here, You have to download the texture and On which you have to drag and drop Here is the necklace we made okay above so now i will delete it here I am doing it so I told you the method So you can see that you can also see the roughness in it giving details are also visible and You can also see the luminance on top of it. yes everything is visible ok good Now, we come to those things which We have accessories and outfits lying around related to okay good one thing here And now we have to do it To this its did not deform the skin Deforming is very easy because Unless we deform the skin This shirt does not merge with the character’s body Now I will tell you how to select its character I will do it and you will see it by changing its pose Let me show you so you can see the edited post and here I am He did it automatically yes he did it automatically this is very good it was good when we We created the character inside G Brush and When I brought him here, he automatically removed the skin deformed or it could be that I did it in the previous lecture I don’t remember if you guys you guys see In that lecture if I saw skin deformity if you did it then you would know the method If not, then he did it automatically you don’t have to do this thing okay And if he didn’t do it, for example he washed his skin It does not deform your skin the thing is your shirt is properly animated If it is not happening then you have modified the panel I want to come here at Etuber Ettringite You have to keep it and apply it, see this is the default If you want to keep it and apply it on the skin The shirt that you have with you is made of skin it will deform with ok So let us now come to what we have We have assets lying around which are shirts and the paints are lying there we kissed them If you want to use it this way then I am going to download it from here I will delete it and now I am back To my content manager, which I have provided you with provided to the people and here come the shirts in clothes People to whom I provided this file I didn’t do that for them with the Animation Pro Pack. You must have given the file, please check it There are shirts lying inside it too With the same method you can just drag and drop okay and now we will give this one to you Just pick up any shirt from here and that’s it drag and drop it here It looks fine like this on the scrap tati Watch as the drag and drop according to the skin according to her body I am absolutely fit, no extra effort We don’t need to do this now in the same way we come into folders with paints go and from here this paint is on top of it I would have dag and dropped it it’s done and this is how we come in shoes and from here these shoes on this do drag and drop yes, our character is complete Is Now if you want to wear glasses then You can do that too, you should come here sir Back to Accessories inside here in the head and this is what we have accessories are here you’re getting a hat and more glasses so here we have sunglasses but let’s just drag and drop it onto it and if you wear these sunglasses a little bit want to do it in [music] Do you want to adjust it this way turn it up a little bit ok This is our character completed and I hope you will like it a lot and If you want to go into more detail about this and work on it you do it specially on sculpting and your You can do any kind of work according to your imagination You can make any character even I used these skin presets. Those cartoon characters of kids are complete like the cocoa melon inside you It appears that the beans are made like that I did not get the same quality but it was very better quality such that you We will watch our next lecture. We have also discussed the use of presets for this I put it inside, it didn’t have that much space for us Let’s remove the lecture from here Six because using presets It’s not that hard, just duck and drop It has to be done, okay so now we will move on moving on to our module four, in which we Create props and environment Fine Inside the Blunder If yes then the next module is interesting going to happen and to a large extent it is difficult for you people too But you might not have paid any attention to it If you want to see it then you will understand things well. If there is any confusion, I will go somewhere You should tell me what is the need and thank you so much good Now do one thing, that character Select it first and then save it go to file and then export as Avatar select this and by default All other settings and click on export do it And you can put this inside any of your folders where you created the character okay let’s keep this and save it now this is ours The character is all ready for animation 100% and inside iClone we have its animation but before doing the animation we will Environment of Props inside Blender so that the same environment of Props We prepare our character keeping this in front of us do animation well here I’m going to show you a I am going to talk about something which is very important for you It will be useful if you guys The animation seems a bit tricky So you want to avoid this problem and If you want to save your time then my I have a package, inside that package you will find You can also find my advanced animation course whatsapp2 characters will be found human Animal characters will also be available You will also find human characters Characters give you accessories and outfits and you can choose the one you like You can make changes, you will get the environment you will get the visuals After taking this package you will feel very happy You can start creating animations quickly and You can complete an animation in a day. where you have to spend weeks That’s where you can go to create an animation. An animation can be made in one day using the package By completing Details and demo description inside one You can view my website using the link There is a link, go there and you will see a total of three There are packages which you want to buy. You can buy three different packages with different prices and within them again According to the prices we have assets which are They are integrated so you can try the demo first see see details and after that if you If you are satisfied then you can say bye hey guys our module four is props and environment creation in blender today Our first lecture is introduction to Blender Now What is Blender a Software Do you know the purpose of 3D animation It is very famous for this, 3D is very common According to the developers this is the software Basically it is also used for 2D animation and also for 3d animation but mostly The developers at this 90 are doing 3d animation for 2d animation do not use it because its for 2d animation This is not considered so good 2d Many more for animation There are softwares, well our debate is that on top of our 3d animation so we’ve Using Blender for 3D Animation Purposes I have to do it now and you open it I will show you, do you have any version? If you have a blender then there is no problem for everyone The interface is more or less the same There is a slight difference in his tools It doesn’t happen much and you are using 3.2 Or 4.2 so I am using 3.2 because the donuts that are inside it are like Sketch Fap addon must be properly installed It was done and similarly the rest of the add ons are We use car for car rigging for animation or we can do it for simulation So he works quite well in it. If it is ok in comparison to 4.2 then I recommend it to you I will tell you to do the same thing which will previous version is ok So it has been opened so now you saw it It must have been like that once I opened it Again, let me show you, double it You have to open it by clicking and click on General You have to click here now a question has arisen It must be going on in your mind that we will how to install blender Organization View this Blender Me Search Do it simply with your blender and this blender mark came on in a minute you Simply search for Blur and see this Bander d and this is what it is right here The version you have is the latest version right now blender 4.2 okay bander 4.2 so you Blender You can install either 4.2 or 3.2 You can also get its previous version In this search it here get blender 3 Fifth note of musical scale 2 Okay, look, this is where I brought you. All these versions are coming from here This is ver 3.2 3.3 LTS is written I don’t know about it What do you mean we went so deep no never So you can download it from here You can see where you can download it There is an option for 3.2, it is fine, you can do 4.2 also. There is no issue, it is the latest version and I Install the advance I’ll give you and see. ok otherwise you can do 3.2 Well, I hope that most of you are on 80. developers they already have it well ours Our topic is relevant and it is Take a good look at the Blender interface Understanding Blender’s Introduction yes it is ok and use its tools in proper way to understand from so that inside this we can do modeling Do this and modeling in a very easy method Easy method and advanced method to make We can adopt a better method Now we will click on General, simply 2D Its on animation not on sculpin or vfa do it on general always you always do it like this and there are so many things to do here You can do this by holding down the left mouse button You have to keep it and select it and delete it Now you have to press its user interface The work area has become MT And here you see the lines below these are called grid lines okay And now let’s start from here Blender icon has appeared on the top menu bar you know that inside the top menu bar You always find the File menu in every software inside it is visible then there is edit What happens in the file is that we create a new Let’s create a project Already a project If it is ready then let’s open it Save the project and click on Shortcut commands are used: Control/S end control shift s to save a To save with a new name, click and Apart from this, Control O is already made OK to open the project and Along with this, their shortcut commands are also mentioned. is also gone and if we click on edit So here in the edit, whatever we need The thing that needs the most is that it is needed Whenever you change any settings within Preferences Installing New Plugin or New Addon if it is there then you should always have its zip file with you I need his rar file, you can have his zip file with him You must have the files available that plugin of the addon ok come on edit and you have to come to preferences and here Click on ads and install and Wherever that plugin has the requirement of that addon, By selecting the file you have You have to click on install addon and that is it the addon will be installed so I told you I told you that I will provide you advance are ok If yes, then you need to install them. If necessary, you can install it using this method okay it’s very easy and now after that Render is the render option we have at the end we use it whenever we have any After preparing the animation here, its I need to take a render and export it in mp4 or any other format After that the window will open a new window window or a new main window these things that we never need it here This is so that you can use your brain more there is no need for it here its okay and right now we Here is the layout and this is the modeling Look here we are inside the layout If you click on layout then you will see here But the timeline will be the show, okay and If you come into modeling then you will find the timeline below The timeline will not be shown when you see it then you will have to neatly see it when you Click on the layout and see the timeline This will be useful when you have the animation ready. You’ve done it and want to preview it okay you have to see the preview of it and Modeling then sculpting then UV What is the need of all this editing? Menus are used for a purpose when Slowly slowly we will move forward will do modeling inside this then after that If you apply textures on it then you will get you will understand everything okay and Now here you will find some more tools as well. Their base basic purpose is visible what is this selection tool To select any object it’s okay to move that thing sorry to move from center point this this is move tool world move tool it is called Four arrows are visible now suppose that I Let me add a mesh here, add a cube If I want to move this cube so it is important for me to have Select the move tool from the Move Tool Until I select I will not be able to move the object right left or up down I can’t move from such a center You can move it by holding it but If you want to move with accuracy then use this this way you can move it okay it’s three arrows point you towards three dimensions okay it’s three dimension of 3D The meaning is clear from here with these arrows three dimension up and down right to left And then after that this arrow is there Basically it is used for back and forth and if we take it this way, then this If there is right to left then it means three These things move inside the dimension she acts as if she is a realist happens in the real world and so on If you want to rotate it then use the rotate tool You have to select it and you can rotate it are from here and this is also ok and if You want to scale this object If you want to scale then look at this thing You have to understand if you see this side If you want to scale then look like this here You will grab the green one from this side of the scale It is happening and if you hold the blue one then go up is scaling towards okay and this If you hold it, it will be a scale in front and back right now you are not able to see the proper one that’s why because I changed its rotation There was a cube again and look here it’s red The scale is turning green from here to here is scaling from this side and Its height is above the blue one it is increasing ok so in the same way whatever other things are there There is no need to understand them here and now We delete it from here and Now we come to this side, this is what it is You are seeing this view here port view port shading is okay and it It is basically used to give you the final render to show that you have placed something here If you have made it then its final render if you I want to see you like me here once again here But if I add a cube then now for this cube I have not posted any material of any kind above It is okay if it has not been applied nor is it But do not add any kind of lights or light effects It is done so its final render is like this you look kind of tired is that okay If you want to see this a inside your tex mode that on top of it you Look at the materials that you have applied if you want then click here ok And if you want to see it in solid mode If yes then click here, it is correct so this is the difference and if the wire frame mode If you want to see inside then click here You mean the wire frame, inside it is like this Understand that wire frame means this that you can see its x-ray, is it okay So now after that there’s this little arrow here It is visible, if you click on it then This arrow is a transformation for this arrow here inside this arrow You mean that any object that you added is there any character lying here So you have calculated its location rotation and scale Or if you look at its dimensions If you want to customize then do it from here You can ok like this see its location Change is happening on X axis and Y axis this is happening on the z axis this is happening on the In this way its rotation is also changing so There are two methods for getting its rotation location And what is the method to scale it? First I told you from here that You can move it using the move tool from there You can rotate it with the rotate tool and here you can do this with the scale tool and so on Similarly you can also transform from here Even after coming inside its location is on x axis axis and z axis okay I mean that the one which You could see the arrows, I will show you right now Let me bring it into Y-frame mode and here But if we select it, look at this what is this this is the z axis okay and if This way you can’t figure out which is the z axis Which is the Y axis and which is the X axis If so, you can find out like this Object mode is available in Simply Modeling You have to come in and then go to your view port You have to come inside the shading and move from here move the red one by selecting the tool by selecting the move tool and moving it to this side If you move, it is telling you here Whatever these changes are within the access If changes are happening then it means that it is the same Access means getting an access so this is access if it is happening in If it is happening in the y axis then it means this one The green one is this axis and this one Our z axis is done, just like this Then you will know the rotation automatically that how many on the x axis x axis degrees it is rotated on this or that axis And on the z axis so now on the x axis It has moved and rotated 9.6 degrees sorry okay so after this other than that you just need to transform here but here you don’t get to see You can also see all these amazing tools I will meet you specially here to see you you get ads from here go to preferences and install it ok Now you can go to preferences and delete any I installed the addon so now here is my I have two addons installed, one is Sketch second rbc is ok and this is a third one as well this is a screen cast keys are ok so now whichever addon you want to install If you want to use it then simply click on that addon Click on it and activate it it was just a little work okay and now come this way Go here and you can see the layers like in any software For example I can add a cylinder here. when I do this then a separate layer of the cylinder is created Now you can remove these layers from here If you do modeling then it is possible that something If some models are mixed with the layers You have customized a specific model If you want to do it then you will have to know that one Specific means hiding the other model If you want to do it then you can hide it here and if you want to delete it So you can delete it by selecting it from here. You can also delete it by selecting it from here. can you do it okay so right now we have no No layers within any collection these things are lying here You will understand later what these are This base is used basically here right now You will need to specify the output properties for the render which it is showing here and layers The tool is showing the properties Here and you will find textured materials There is a tool for this that is being shown and the rest This is what it looks like inside the blender about the interface, about the tools and its later on when we model things Proper then you will understand very well that how things are designed inside it See how it’s animated Blender seems a bit difficult at first but when we are inside it well practise the basics If we understand then after that our If it becomes very easy for I would try to show you the blender It should be understood well so that DP can be understood You have to work inside it It should be easy for you even I I will tell you the process of modelling which I will tell you the method, it will be very easy You will feel as if it is really it was child’s play alright so now what we The next lecture is going to be basic modeling techniques so we will focus on this Guys we will debate, this is our module four Props and Environment Creation Blunder and Today’s second lecture is basic Modelling Techniques Basic Modelling Techniques Inn Blunders are now a days a part of understanding the basic techniques first think carefully about some things Understand do it like blender is a three dimensional the software is a D software and our This world is also a three dimensional world where we go up, down, left, right, and forward can move backwards If so, I will give you a simple example Now here you have created an environment we have to do it because our lecture is ours Module is basically what we have here We have to create an environment for the environment Anything could be inside here There might be a road here too There could be a forest as well as a city here There could be a small house here as well It could be a very big bungalow also It could be anything that is ours found in the real world okay So the method that I am going to tell you here You can make any kind of thing using this method You can do anything that you keep inside your house Do you see anything inside your room? if that too is lying there and you want to design it then you can also design it ok so now look inside blender we have here But if an environment needs to be created then So I will give you a small example The thing is that now we have started living our real life which is our three dimensional world inside We have to make something inside it Construction has to be done, let’s assume that We want to build a house so its construction To do this we need two things it occurs what are those two things first of all one skilled person who gives us that construction do it and we need it on second number You will need raw material like steel bars Cement Gravel Gravel and Also Bricks etc. bricks etc. come, okay and Apart from this, one more thing will be needed We must also have space on which to We have to do construction, i.e. a plot If we want then let’s go here first So let’s make a plot but look at the raw We get the material inside the blender itself. Now when it comes to a skilled person Who is the skilled person around you? Look around, who is there to guide you Infact you will do the construction yourself who wants to build something here You are a skilled person, you are a developer ok just follow my instructions and then you have to work further on it Later you will see to what extent you are capable in modeling you can go deep okay now here I am a I will take whatever plot there is, good one a one of the things in our previous lecture guys i skipped it was that we This interface, the user interface, we have called it How to rotate is the best way It was an important thing friend, how could I do it I can forget it so if you rotate it If you want to do it then see this from here with the mouse From here you can hold the left button and you can rotate it any way it’s ok You can see this everywhere in your real world. you are fine now we will move on to our second lecture If we continue then first of all we have to I want to take a plot here, I will go to add And let me add a plane here on the mesh. Now I understand the dimensions of this plane Take this and I have a five marla house here. I have a plot and on top of it If you want to construct then first of all this plane that whatever dimensions there are I need to know those dimensions Making according to 5 marla plot I will have to I go and search K How Meni fit yard by fit in one meter not yard Ok fit in five marla The plot is fine and now look at the five marla plot The square feet inside are so square meters ho so many square meters it fits okay so now here But we also have to see one more thing, how many fit in fi marla plot how Meni Feet just need to add one thing in leth and width f okay now let’s see 25 feet by It is 45 feet, okay, one of five marla If the plot is 25 feet wide and 10 marla then He will be 50 or 90, it’s simple and now Here we have to search for blender look inside us here now its go into transform as before I had told you about the dimension in this Aa G transform If you come in then here you will see the meters show You don’t get to see fit shows here If the meter were to show, now it would be interesting to see that 25 feet How many meters are there in it? Search here How do I move into the new tub? Meni Meters in m These 25 feet are 7.62 sir You have to get the meter from here copy and now come to blender and then later here you see now one thing you Each side also has its own width and length You can keep it this way or it depends on you if you want to keep it then keep it on this side now it is on this is going towards the x axis then this side is its width and this side is what is its length so now we have this no this thing needs to be added to the width okay Because there were more than 45 who were more fit Those varieties will come in length and those which are shorter It would be less, meaning it was 25 less than 45. so in which width will it come If we go then we have equalized 25 There are more meters built inside the meters 7.62 So now we add this to the width itself so if you want to do it then now turn this side a little bit let’s scale it up and see that it looks and Let’s see what changes happen here changes are happening in the y axis So now this is what we copied Let’s paste the value v in the y axis press it and then press enter, ok hey this will be the width of this and now we go it is here, now let us add it here 45 and 45 equals 13.7 166 which is in meters let’s copy these and now the dimensions We are here to give you access to your ex inside Let’s paste this and it’s done height sorry length ok So now there are two things that have been added here are its length and its width and height then will be When we do construction on it and it It depends on us how much height we have But how high do we have to go? construction has to be done, okay now this is our The plot that the guys have is ready. Now we have to do construction on it So the basic modeling techniques are These are the things that come inside and more There are also many things that I will do further I will tell you now the construction on this We need raw material to do this We get the raw material here mash Come and see, click on the add in the mash and This is all the raw material here, this is a total of eight Here you will find materials and meshes You can see raw meshes These ones in which there is a plane, a cube, a circle is u sphere is esu sphere is cylinder who is this toso is this torres now this is joe raw these are the material, these are the meshes, these meshes We go so deep inside and work we will modify them, we will customize them We will do that lying inside our house You can make anything you want ok so now look i will add it from here hmm for example a cube now this cube I want to learn how to modify first. It is important to model that I need a method to modify this cube Now modeling does not mean this that you placed a cube here and this cube gave it the shape of a brick and here I kept on applying it, I kept on applying it, it’s okay here And adding multiple things and modeling No, it doesn’t mean that you Modelling will come only when you can process this cube in this way value to this extent By then you will learn to customize this cube You can create anything using a single cube make it right here and see now First of all, to customize it What we need is for us We have to take this into edit mode until we We will not take it into edit mode If you cannot make changes to it then click here Look, we’re in object mode right now here. You will click on the small arrow and go to edit mode If you click on it then we have now come to Edit Now in mode, please understand this here my face, edges and what is inside it These are our faces, these are ours those ages have come and this is what it is When vertices come then edges face and tucks this A complete whole is made up of three things the object is created okay now look at this no this is what you see here What is this edges these are our vertices right this is the ones with corners, these are the vertex, these are the you can see these ones right now i am here I click on edges what is this this s okay these men should know these three things To select separate separate you have to first you have to go to them like ages If you want to select then first divide the edges into edges You will have to go here for the edges tool You will have to select it irrespective of your age I have to click on the sorry face If yes then your face has been selected what is a face or is there a face if there is a face then How many faces are there in total like laddu It has a grain of how many are there inside it There are six in total so one doti and this in a way there are three here as well so this is our total of three what is the face at this time and inside it what is this one is edges and what is this its vertices are correct so these edges are Catching up with Faces and Vertices we are here the object of any object on the We can modify it by doing a small thing Let me show you for example that I am making this cube I want to stretch it a little and make it longer I want its height from the corner If it increases a little, what will I do with it? First in this I will click on its vertices and then Then I’ll select this vertex and then I’ll take the move tool and move it to this side I will move it from here Its width is increasing, this scale Everything is going well from here and that’s how I do the control ji and I have to select from face and If I want to increase my face then I will increase my face I will select it and move it to this side with the move tool I will increase it ok now here we do it like this that everyone Let’s select the cube To and select the vertices on the right Let’s click and click on subdivide So as soon as I gave it to you, I divided it all up if I clicked then this is my cube multiple Multiple has been added inside the cubes Now what is the total number of cubes inside it? The cube has become four here, four there My total is inside eight cubes The object is divided like this So if I divide it further into sub-sections then now There are total 16 cubes inside this Majeed Cubes whatever is there has been added in it, okay In the same way, the more you do it the more you When do we need to divide everything? We need to divide when We have defined the object as any object A lot of customization is required inside it More changes have to be made I have to go deeper into it okay so then we have to divide it into sub It is neat but keep one thing in mind Keep in mind that you can hold any object as much as you want Everyone will keep dividing you more and more the heavier the object becomes When the object is heavy then your project If it also becomes heavy then again once again I will do everything If I divide it, I have done this much that I am fully in favor of the changes Look now Now as soon as I came into edit mode and opened everything If you divide then there are some fun tools here too I have it available to see here Now, out of these tools, whichever tool we need The one that will need the most attention is here from extrude this one extrude okay Now if I want to extract it I’ve always What is the meaning of extude happens inside anything, inside anything Anything is fine to increase the If you want to increase then you need to use Extude tool Now you will have to use Extude always You have to apply it, look above the faces click here this is a face and now I want to extract this fus face from here If I want to increase it then I have There are two methods, either I will press my e from your keyboard and then simply e Just press it and then do nothing After that you tracked the mouse a little towards this side If you want to do it on this side then do it from here it has been excluded ok execute it now this face is also done in the same way Do you want to execute the plus icon? You can also move this side of the mouse by clicking on it You can do it by holding the left button but The easiest method and the most professional one That is, select the face then press and this side ok here it is It is not important to execute the thing Select it, only then you will get selected is selected and the face is selected I have done it, even if you press and e it will still appear like this it will be done ok you have to execute it You won’t have to be neat to select but you You will select execute only when you Click on the plus icon and click on it you want to do okay one more thing here What is even more important is that as soon as you stop If you go here all the divisions will be added now you stay here i stayed here So he divided everything It is okay for him to stop here, now he has to do more If you divide it then you add all the divisions if you want to do it then you have to stop here when You have to make changes inside this face as well I have to bring it from here to this side, okay stop here and then do this a little I moved forward and selected this face and this way it went this way okay guys So these were some basic modeling techniques if If you understand it well then Doing the modeling inside Blender for you There is a lot of this and I hope that these things help you You must have understood that it is not that difficult it’s not that difficult okay so now what do we do Let’s do that now a new project is done here I make Sorry our next lecture is next We do all the rest of our work within the lecture itself. in which we will create a proper environment Will design, create props and model Various Props for Animation Guys Ours Module Four is Props and Environment Creation in Blender and our lecture today Lecture Three Creating Props Modeling various props for animation okay so joe We designed the characters Animate those characters inside the creator If you want to do it in any environment then I will create an environment here. Use a simple environment and this method While doing this you can use any kind of environment can you make it I added it here okay yes i have placed any dimension here there is design matter and then you pay attention to the dimension Keep that when you have someone company you are making it and giving it to For example, there is some such company which is related to house etc. architecture it provides services ok and inside it What is different to them is The maps of housing societies are have to build or have a house made inside D then you notice the dimension now what we need to do here is to keep If you want to build a small house here then So first we build four walls and for the four walls you know that here You have to take a simple cube and of The dimensions have to be changed and It has to be given the
shape of a wall and add here You have to do it and after that its height We reduce it a little bit from here, keep it like this taking Now focus on one thing here. here at we go we are different because of this we get views Here in our wet pad we are working on the forest If you click, we can see this from the front showing okay this is how we When we click on to, it will show us from the bottom showing a little let’s click on five Majeed went to the bottom by clicking on Sen so it’s showing us this from the top view We have to see it from a different view If you use it then you can click on it If you do it with a damp pad, you will see this from the top it’s from the top angle okay so from the top angle After watching you can adjust it here. have to take accuracy With and this I think this is okay and this is how you do it now Do this by taking the move tool and holding Control C and control and can If yes then it has been copied and after copying it to this side also a wall here Make it ok and control it again in the same way c and control b take it and now its rotation If you want to change it then I will do it The rotation is shown here changes from and I’ll move it this way here and now I’ll shorten it here so ok now again control c and The control and this side are also marked fine Now look here are our four walls It has become what it is, but now it is here what we have to do in this place is that a Making the gate We have to make a door through which people can go out as well If possible, select this cube Then we will go to edit mode and click on right By clicking we will divide everything and then Later you will divide everything again you will divide it okay And then again they will divide everything now You did not want to take it out from the center If it is there then check in the center which one is here What is there is becoming a friend 6 sa 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 a friend’s 6 years and eight this one is the one in our center If it becomes possible then what should you do that you have to select the face from here And in this way it selects all the faces you have to take it and press delete and then end click on the vertices yes sorry it’s this one okay so it’s cut right down the center it’s done and this is our path here It has been built from where we can get out yes the green gate is ready okay now we have done it here But basically construction has to be done here now But we want to build a proper small villa If you want to build a house then again the same method is here We take a cube from the top and now we take a cube from the bottom Let’s make a cube Subdivide Subdivide subdivide it happened so much that it We can make full changes in this go to object mode and first you Locate it carefully at its place give and sorry his group has been formed with him [Appreciation] Let’s go to object mode and then click on add Let’s go and add a cube here. and first give it a location are here But we have set its location and now we go to edit mode subdivide yes i think this is enough okay and now what do we have to do guys we have this The faces below are all select them. You have to select all of these by pressing shift We do You should select it from all sides all the faces are This is done now you do this with the scale tool take the and scale it from here like this Look at this and move it a little downwards do it here like this it’s ok like this So this is done and now you come here again and again Only if you practice will you learn things well you will understand that you have done modeling inside this how to do it how to work in it Is Now this thing that I’m making, it Basically I’m building a futuristic building it happens right, it stays here okay now By pressing shift, select as many faces as you want yes, let me select these as well and now I I press E to execute and just a little bit of it out I will take it out, that’s it, it’s okay and now again I Press shift from here And select these faces. I take it, press e and now these I have to put a little bit inside here I press shift again and the one here I will also select the faces and make them a little let me take it out from here ok see it’s done So I’ll make it a little bit easier Ok inf now i do it like this in object mode go huh see this is a futuristic little thing Our building which has been constructed now I here i do it like this I’ll take one from here the cylinder and this cube that I put on top I’ll pick it up from here and I’ll take the cylinder I scale down I right click and click on Shat Smooth If I click it, it will become very smooth Already happened With the damp pad I selected the intake and the top from view its showing me this so i have tried this Place it in every corner by giving it a perfect location. have to give Now let’s do this so that this cube select then press shift and select these cylinders And now we’ll place them down here like this Are Now let’s select this cube in edit mode I go now here’s one thing I’m going to do in my in your mind according to your own mind Create your own concept here I’m living in a futuristic building so you Always look at any reference before doing anything If you want to make it then it will be easy for you to make it You will know what you really are when you are not aware that If you are making it then you are proper till then If we cannot work in this way then now we will do it like this Let’s do a good job of making a selection here There is also another method, from here If you click on Select Less then you will see this You can make the selection in this way by seeing this See the whole selection from this center it has already happened look look it’s okay and now I Let me take the move tool. Okay, now let’s extract it. And if we do this with the move tool then what is the difference between that and extract If we move it then what is the difference and If we move it with the move tool, what is the difference then if you do it with move tool then it will This is how you do it Look at the rest of them who are also edges will mix it together and make it exactly one it’ll make a slope it’ll make a slide okay But if you exude, then only The area you have selected Only that much area of yours will go upwards. and now I want it to go up from here What should I do then if the slope is towards that now I want to grab the scale tool from here Having more do it this way okay and now I I do it from here And now I’m going to move it this way I’ll scale it I think it’s enough, it goes into object mode so this is my little futuristic The building is as it is without any concept that it has already been made so when you look at the reference If you want to make it then you have to make it using this method only So it will be very easy for you to make it now see One thing has to be understood here that If we have to apply tax on it then First of all to apply for tax We have this base that we have, we have used it We have to select the base, we have selected it have to do it and I want to come to the material here okay and I have to click on new sorry I have to come on this
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
1. What are the YouTube Partner Program requirements for monetization?
To join the YouTube Partner Program and monetize your channel, you need:
1,000 subscribers
4,000 hours of watch time
2. How can I quickly gain subscribers and watch time?
Focus on creating high-leverage videos that audiences already want to watch. Here’s how:
Identify Top Channels: List the top 10-15 channels in your niche.
Analyze Their Top Videos: Note their top-performing videos, links, and upload dates. This gives you proven video ideas.
Focus on Recent Success: Prioritize topics that performed well in the last 6 months, indicating current relevance.
Consider End-of-Year Trends: Include topics relevant to the upcoming year (e.g., “2025 goals”).
3. How important are titles and thumbnails?
They are crucial for attracting viewers!
Click-Worthy Packaging: Analyze successful titles and thumbnails in your niche.
Clear and Specific Titles: Use titles that clearly signal the video’s content and offer specific solutions.
Engaging Thumbnails: Use text, visuals, and design elements that grab attention and convey the video’s topic.
4. What makes a strong video script?
Well-Researched Content: Study the top videos on your chosen topic. Note key points, insights, and common advice.
Personal Experience: Add your own unique stories and lessons learned to make your content stand out.
Address Audience Questions: Dive into the comments sections of popular videos to find unanswered questions.
5. How do I create a compelling video intro?
A strong intro hooks viewers and keeps them watching.
Reiterate Title/Thumbnail Message: Briefly remind viewers what the video is about.
Establish Your Authority: Provide proof that you’re knowledgeable on the topic.
Make a Promise: Clearly state the value viewers will gain from watching.
Offer a Compelling Reason to Stay: Tease something interesting that comes later in the video.
6. What video length is best for monetization?
Aim for videos between 10-12 minutes.
Shorter videos may not generate enough watch time.
Longer videos are more time-consuming to produce, potentially affecting your consistency.
7. What are essential video production tips?
High-Quality Audio: Use a clear microphone or AI tools for voiceovers.
Visuals Matching Script: Ensure visuals reinforce what you’re saying.
Clear Text and Subtitles: Make your videos accessible and easy to follow.
Appropriate Background Music: Enhance the mood and tone, but avoid music that distracts.
8. Is AdSense revenue enough for YouTube income?
AdSense can be unreliable as a sole income source. Diversify your income streams by:
Exploring sponsorships
Affiliate marketing
Selling merchandise or digital products
Offering services related to your niche
YouTube Monetization Accelerator: A Study Guide
Key Concepts
YouTube Partner Program (YPP): The program that allows creators to monetize their videos through ads and other revenue streams. Requirements include 1,000 subscribers and 4,000 hours of watch time.
Niche: A specialized area of focus for your YouTube channel (e.g., cooking, gaming, beauty).
High-Leverage Video Ideas: Topics that have a proven track record of success and audience engagement in your niche.
Evergreen Content: Content that remains relevant and valuable over time.
Saturated Topics: Areas where there’s a lot of competition, potentially making it harder to stand out.
Algorithm: YouTube’s complex system for recommending videos to viewers. Understanding current algorithm trends is key.
Packaging: The elements that entice viewers to click, including the video title and thumbnail.
Clickbait: Misleading titles or thumbnails that promise more than the video delivers.
Core Content: The main substance of your video, including well-researched information and personal insights.
Intro: The critical first 30-60 seconds of your video that aims to hook viewers.
Voiceover: The audio narration of your video. Using your own voice can enhance connection and authenticity.
Visuals: The images, footage, and graphics used in your video. Effective visuals support and enhance the message.
Subtitles: Text that displays the spoken dialogue, making content accessible and engaging for a wider audience.
Background Music: Audio that sets the tone and mood of your video.
Batch Creation: Producing multiple videos at once to maintain a consistent upload schedule.
AdSense: Google’s platform that connects advertisers with YouTube creators, allowing for ad revenue.
Quiz
Instructions: Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.
Why is it important to analyze the top-performing videos of successful channels in your niche?
What are the key elements of effective video “packaging” and why are they so important?
What strategies can you use to develop “meaty” and informative core content for your videos?
Describe the four key elements of a “banger intro” that keeps viewers hooked.
Why is using your own voice for the voiceover recommended?
How can you use visuals effectively to enhance viewer engagement?
What is the recommended video length for optimal monetization potential?
Why is consistency in uploading videos so crucial?
How does focusing on a consistent posting schedule benefit your channel’s performance?
Why is relying solely on AdSense revenue not advisable for building long-term YouTube income?
Quiz Answer Key
Analyzing top-performing videos reveals audience preferences and current trends within your niche. This helps you identify proven video ideas and understand what’s resonating with viewers.
Effective packaging involves a compelling title and an eye-catching thumbnail. These elements grab attention, create intrigue, and accurately represent the video’s content, encouraging clicks.
Develop strong core content by researching top videos on your topic, adding your unique insights and experiences, and addressing unanswered questions found in comments.
A strong intro reiterates the video’s promise, establishes your authority, makes a clear benefit statement for the viewer, and offers an incentive to watch until the end.
Using your own voice adds authenticity and allows viewers to connect more personally with you and your content.
Visuals should directly support your narrative, providing clarity and keeping viewers engaged. Well-coordinated visuals make information more memorable and enjoyable.
The ideal video length for monetization is 10-12 minutes. This length balances content depth with viewer attention spans.
Consistency signals to the algorithm that you’re a serious creator, leading to increased impressions and visibility for your content.
Consistent posting builds viewer anticipation, establishes a reliable content schedule, and improves your channel’s overall discoverability.
AdSense revenue can fluctuate and is influenced by factors beyond your control. Diversifying income streams (e.g., sponsorships, merchandise) is essential for sustainable growth.
Essay Questions
Analyze the importance of understanding your target audience when developing content for YouTube. How can you research and identify your ideal viewers, and what strategies can you use to create videos that resonate with them?
Explain the concept of “video optimization” for YouTube. What are the key elements involved in optimizing your videos for search and discovery?
Discuss the role of storytelling in creating compelling YouTube videos. How can you craft a narrative that engages viewers, conveys your message effectively, and encourages them to take action?
Evaluate the impact of AI tools on video creation. How can AI assist YouTubers in tasks such as scripting, voiceover, editing, and visual enhancement? What are the potential advantages and drawbacks of incorporating AI into your workflow?
Develop a comprehensive strategy for growing a YouTube channel beyond monetization. Consider factors such as community engagement, cross-promotion, and leveraging other platforms to expand your reach and impact.
Decoding YouTube Monetization: A 10-Week Plan
Source: Excerpts from “Pasted Text”
I. Setting the Stage for Success
A. Understanding Monetization Requirements: This section outlines the fundamental requirements for joining the YouTube Partner Program: 1,000 subscribers and 4,000 hours of watch time. It emphasizes that achieving this milestone doesn’t necessitate hundreds of videos or years of effort, showcasing a personal example of a single video leading to monetization.
B. The Power of a Proven System: This part introduces a strategic system designed to replicate successful results, emphasizing the importance of leveraging proven strategies rather than relying on chance or prolonged waiting periods.
II. Identifying High-Leverage Video Ideas
A. Researching Top Channels in Your Niche: This section instructs creators to identify 10-15 successful channels within their chosen niche. The aim is to analyze what these channels are doing right and glean insights from their strategies.
B. Analyzing Top-Performing Videos: This segment guides creators to delve into the top-performing videos of the selected channels, noting the topics, links, and upload dates. This exercise helps generate a preliminary list of 20-30 high-leverage video ideas based on audience demand.
C. Focusing on Recent Success: The focus here shifts to identifying topics that have performed exceptionally well in the last 6 months, aligning with the current algorithm and trends. Examples are provided to illustrate how to differentiate between evergreen and currently trending content.
D. Shortlisting High-Impact Ideas: This section advises creators to shortlist 10-15 high-leverage ideas from their research, prioritizing those with a proven track record of success and relevance to the current YouTube landscape. It also suggests incorporating end-of-year ideas that capitalize on upcoming trends.
III. Creating Compelling Packaging
A. Prioritizing Title and Thumbnail: This part emphasizes the crucial role of titles and thumbnails in attracting viewers, advocating for their creation before scripting to encourage creative freedom.
B. Analyzing Successful Examples: Creators are encouraged to analyze the titles and thumbnails of top-performing videos within their chosen topic. This analysis should focus on identifying common themes, such as text usage, specific angles, and intrigue-building techniques.
C. Emulating and Innovating: This segment suggests initially mirroring the titles and thumbnails of successful videos as a learning tool, gradually incorporating unique spins and personal touches as creators gain experience.
IV. Crafting Engaging Content
A. The Importance of Well-Researched Scripts: This section stresses the significance of high-quality content for viewer retention, highlighting the scripting process as key to delivering valuable information.
B. Researching Top Videos and Comments: Creators are instructed to analyze the top 5-7 videos on their chosen topic, noting key points and addressing unanswered questions from the comment sections. This research forms the foundation of a comprehensive and informative video script.
C. Adding Personal Insights and Experiences: This segment encourages creators to incorporate their own experiences and insights into the script, adding a unique and relatable dimension to the content.
V. Crafting Captivating Intros
A. Hooking Viewers in the First Minute: This section highlights the critical role of a strong intro in capturing viewer attention within the first 30 seconds to 1 minute, emphasizing its impact on video performance and YouTube’s algorithm.
B. Analyzing Effective Intro Structures: Creators are advised to analyze intros of successful videos, observing current trends in length, build-up, and directness of content delivery.
C. A Golden Formula for Intros: This part provides a four-step formula for creating impactful intros: reiterating the title and thumbnail message, establishing context and credibility, making a promise to the viewer, and offering a compelling reason to watch till the end.
VI. Streamlining Video Production
A. Leveraging AI Tools: This section promotes the use of AI tools like InVideo to expedite the video creation process, emphasizing efficiency and minimizing time spent on editing and conceptualization.
B. Four Key Focus Areas: This part outlines four crucial elements for high-quality video production: clear voiceovers (ideally using the creator’s own voice or a cloned version), synchronized visuals matching the script, clear text and subtitles, and appropriate background music that enhances the video’s mood.
VII. The Power of Consistent Publishing
A. Maintaining a Regular Schedule: This section emphasizes the importance of consistent video uploads, ideally one video per week, to signal commitment to the YouTube algorithm and increase content visibility. Visual evidence demonstrates the significant impact of consistency on channel views.
B. Batch Creation for Efficiency: Creators are encouraged to batch-create 3-4 videos in advance to ensure a smooth publishing schedule and maintain momentum.
VIII. Diversifying Income Streams
A. Going Beyond AdSense: This section advises creators to explore alternative income sources beyond AdSense, highlighting its potential unreliability and limitations.
B. Exploring Additional Monetization Avenues: Creators are encouraged to research and incorporate strategies for generating revenue beyond traditional advertising, referencing a previous video dedicated to this topic.
The provided text focuses on advice for YouTubers to achieve monetization, making a timeline or cast of characters isn’t applicable. The text doesn’t describe a narrative with events or a set of characters interacting.
Instead, it’s a “how-to” guide with the speaker (“I”) as the sole voice giving instructions. There’s no plot, just steps to follow.
Summarizing the Advice:
Goal: Monetization by 2025 (1,000 subscribers, 4,000 watch hours).
Timeline: ~10 weeks to create content for the rest of 2024.
Content Strategy:Find top 10-15 channels in your niche.
Analyze their BEST performing videos (last 6 months ideal).
Create 10-15 videos based on proven topics, including “end of year” themes.
Video Creation:Packaging First: Title/Thumbnail based on successful examples.
Script:Well-researched core content from top videos + personal insights + answer viewer questions from comments.
Compelling Intro: Reiterate title, establish your authority, make a promise to the viewer, offer a reason to watch till the end.
10-12 minute length for optimal watch time.
Production:Clear voiceover (AI tools can help).
Matching visuals/audio.
Text and subtitles.
Fitting background music.
Publishing:Batch create 3-4 videos for consistent weekly uploads.
Consistency signals seriousness to the algorithm.
Beyond AdSense: Explore additional income sources for reliable YouTube revenue.
Key Takeaway: The text emphasizes working smart by leveraging proven content ideas and production techniques to maximize your chances of YouTube success.
YouTube Monetization Fast Track: A Summary
This briefing document summarizes key points from a YouTube video focused on achieving monetization quickly. The speaker offers a strategic plan to reach 1,000 subscribers and 4,000 watch hours by 2025.
Identify Top Channels in Your Niche: Create a list of 10-15 successful channels in your chosen niche.
Analyze Top Performing Videos: Examine the top videos from these channels, noting topics, links, and upload dates. This builds a preliminary idea list based on proven audience interest.
Prioritize Recent High-Performers: Focus on topics that performed well in the last 6 months to capitalize on current trends.
“This gives you an idea of topics that are currently working well according to the current algorithm space.”
Capitalize on End-of-Year Trends: Include topics related to the upcoming year (e.g., “How to glow up before 2025”) as they gain traction towards year-end.
2. Packaging for Clicks: Title and Thumbnails
Study Top Videos in Your Chosen Topic: Analyze the titles and thumbnails of high-performing videos within your chosen topic.
Identify Common Themes and Patterns: Observe trends in text usage, specificity, and intrigue-building tactics.
“They approach procrastination from a specific angle instead of just saying how to stop procrastinating.”
Emulate Successful Strategies: Initially, closely mimic successful title and thumbnail structures while learning and gradually adding your unique spin.
3. Scripting for Engagement: Content is King
Research Top Videos: Review the top 5-7 videos on your chosen topic and note down their key points.
Add Personal Experience: Enhance content with anecdotes and lessons from your own experiences.
Address Unanswered Questions: Dig into the comments section of these videos to find unanswered questions and incorporate them into your script.
Craft a Compelling Intro: Hook viewers within the first 30-60 seconds by reiterating the video’s promise, establishing your expertise, outlining the benefits, and offering a reason to stay until the end.
“This is perhaps the most important part of your scripting because if you don’t get this right people are likely to drop off in the first 30 seconds.”
4. Video Production: Optimize for Engagement
Crystal Clear Voiceover: Use your own voice for authenticity and consider AI tools like InVideo for voice cloning and time-saving.
Visuals Matching Script: Align visuals with your narrative to maintain viewer attention.
Clear Text and Subtitles: Improve accessibility and comprehension with on-screen text and subtitles.
Mood-Appropriate Background Music: Select background music that enhances the video’s mood.
5. Consistency and Additional Income
Batch Creation for Consistency: Produce 3-4 videos in advance to maintain a consistent upload schedule of one video per week.
“Consistency is important because it signals to the algorithm that you are a serious creator.”
Explore Additional Revenue Streams: Don’t solely rely on AdSense. Diversify income sources through affiliate marketing, merchandise, or other strategies.
This multi-faceted approach aims to create high-quality, engaging content that attracts viewers, encourages watch time, and ultimately, accelerates your path to YouTube monetization.
Here are some strategies creators can implement to accelerate their YouTube monetization journey, based on the provided source:
Create a list of the top 10-15 channels in your niche and analyze their top-performing videos, especially those uploaded in the last six months. This will help you identify current trends and topics that audiences are interested in. [1, 2] You want to create content that has already proven to be successful and is currently performing well. [2]
Create a list of 10-15 video ideas based on your research, focusing on topics that have performed well in the past six months and are relevant to the current algorithm. You can also consider including one or two “end-of-year” ideas related to the upcoming year (e.g., “How to Glow Up Before 2025”). [2]
Prioritize your video packaging: the title and thumbnail. An engaging title and thumbnail are crucial for attracting viewers and getting them to click on your video. [3] To develop effective packaging, look at the titles and thumbnails of the top-performing videos in your niche, particularly those that have been successful within the past year. [3] Identify patterns and common themes, and try to emulate them in your own titles and thumbnails. [3]
Develop a well-researched script that incorporates information from top-performing videos, personal experiences, and unanswered questions from the comments section. This will make your content more comprehensive and valuable to viewers. [4]
Craft a compelling intro that reiterates the message from your title and thumbnail, sets context, makes a promise to the viewer, and offers something that compels them to watch the entire video. A strong intro is crucial for retaining viewers. [5]
Ensure high-quality audio and visuals. Use a clear voiceover and make sure your visuals match your script. [6] You can also use text and subtitles to make it easier for viewers to follow along. [7] Choose background music that fits the mood of your video. [7]
Maintain a consistent publishing schedule. Posting one video every week is a realistic goal. Consistency signals to the algorithm that you are a serious creator and can lead to increased impressions and views. [7]
Explore additional income sources beyond AdSense. Relying solely on AdSense can be unreliable, so it’s essential to diversify your revenue streams. [8]
By implementing these strategies, creators can increase their chances of reaching the monetization requirements and building a successful YouTube channel.
To identify trending video topics and tailor content to attract viewers, creators can use the following strategies:
Researching Top-Performing Channels and Videos
Creators should begin by identifying the top 10 to 15 channels in their niche and making a list of their top-performing videos. [1]
This will give them an idea of the topics that are currently working well and that audiences are interested in. [1, 2]
When selecting topics from the list, creators should prioritize those that have performed well in the last six months to stay current with the algorithm and avoid saturated topics. [2]
It is also helpful to consider end-of-year ideas, especially in the last two months of the year, as topics related to the upcoming year tend to trend. [2]
Analyzing Titles and Thumbnails of Successful Videos
Creators should analyze the titles and thumbnails of the top-performing videos for the chosen topic. [3]
This will help them understand what kind of packaging is currently working and attracting viewers. [3]
Creators should pay attention to patterns in the titles and thumbnails, such as the amount of text, the level of specificity, and the use of intrigue. [3]
They can then emulate these patterns in their own titles and thumbnails, while adding their own unique spin. [3, 4]
Crafting Engaging Content
The core content of the video should be well-researched, drawing from the top 5 to 7 videos on the chosen topic. [4]
Creators should incorporate personal experiences and insights to add value and authenticity. [4]
They should also address unanswered questions from the comments section of those top videos. [4]
The introduction is crucial for hooking viewers and keeping them engaged. [5]
Creators should reiterate the message from the title and thumbnail, set up context, make a promise to the viewer, and offer something compelling to encourage viewers to watch until the end. [5]
A video length of 10 to 12 minutes is recommended as a sweet spot for monetization. [6]
Optimizing Video Production
Creators should prioritize a crystal-clear voiceover, using their own voice for authenticity and connection. [6]
AI tools can help with voice cloning and speed up the video creation process. [6]
Visuals should match the script to maintain attention and enhance storytelling. [6]
Clear text and subtitles should be included to improve accessibility and retention. [7]
Background music should fit the mood of the video, and if unsure, it is better to omit music altogether. [7]
Consistency in publishing is key for signaling seriousness to the algorithm and increasing impressions, views, and ultimately, monetization opportunities. [7]
In addition to these strategies, creators should consider diversifying their income sources beyond AdSense, as it can be unreliable. The sources provide a detailed approach to identifying trending topics, crafting engaging content, and optimizing video production to attract viewers and achieve monetization goals.
Here are the key components of successful YouTube videos that lead to consistent viewership and monetization, according to the sources provided:
Create videos on topics that audiences already want to watch. You can do this by researching the top performing videos in your niche and creating content on similar topics. [1, 2] For instance, make a list of the top 10 to 15 channels in your niche and identify their top performing videos. [1] Note the date of upload to identify currently popular topics. [1, 2] To stay current, look at videos that have performed well in the last six months to a year. [2, 3] The sources use “Charisma on Command” and “Easy Actually” channels as examples. [2] This will give you a list of high-leverage video ideas that have a proven track record of success. [1]
Focus on your video packaging, especially the title and thumbnail. A compelling title and thumbnail are essential for attracting viewers to your video. [3] When crafting your title and thumbnail, analyze the titles and thumbnails of the top-performing videos in your niche and identify common themes and patterns. [3] For example, you might notice that successful videos in your niche use a lot of text on their thumbnails or that their titles are very specific. [3]
Create well-researched, informative, and engaging content. The content of your video is what will keep viewers watching once they click on it. [4] Start by checking the top five to seven videos for the topic you are creating your video on. [4] Incorporate the best points from each of these videos into your script. [4] Additionally, share your personal experiences and insights related to the topic to add a unique perspective. [4] To make your content even more comprehensive, look at the comments of these top videos and address any unanswered questions. [4]
Craft a compelling introduction. The first 30 seconds to one minute of your video are crucial for hooking viewers and keeping them engaged. [5] To write a captivating intro:
Reiterate the message from your title and thumbnail. [5]
Establish your credibility by providing proof that you know what you’re talking about. [5]
Make a promise to the viewer that the video will help them in some way. [5]
Offer something compelling that encourages viewers to watch the entire video. [5]
Keep your videos concise, aiming for a length of 10 to 12 minutes. This length is ideal for maximizing watch hours, which is essential for monetization. [6]
Produce high-quality videos with clear audio, visuals, and text. [6]
Ensure you have a crystal-clear voiceover using your own voice for a more personal connection. [6] The source recommends using AI tools like InVideo to clone your voice, saving you time and ensuring consistent audio quality. [6]
Match your visuals to your script to maintain viewer attention. [6] The source mentions “Decoding YT” as a good example of using simple but effective visuals that match the storytelling. [6]
Include clear text and subtitles to make your videos accessible to a wider audience. [7]
Choose background music that complements the mood and tone of your video. [7]
Publish videos consistently. This signals to the algorithm that you’re a serious creator, which can lead to more impressions and views. [7]
Explore additional income sources beyond AdSense. While AdSense is a common way to monetize YouTube videos, it’s not always reliable and may not generate substantial income. [8] To build a sustainable income from YouTube, diversify your revenue streams by considering other monetization options. [8]
By following these key components, you can increase your chances of creating successful YouTube videos that attract a consistent audience and generate revenue.
Understanding YouTube Monetization
YouTube monetization allows creators to earn revenue from their videos. However, joining the YouTube Partner Program and earning money requires meeting certain eligibility requirements and implementing strategies to attract and retain viewership. Here’s a breakdown of the key aspects of YouTube monetization:
Eligibility Requirements:
1,000 Subscribers: You need to grow your channel to a minimum of 1,000 subscribers. [1]
4,000 Hours of Watch Time: Your videos need to accumulate 4,000 hours of watch time within the past 12 months. This signifies viewer engagement and interest in your content. [1]
Strategies to Accelerate Monetization:
Content Strategy:
Niche Down: Identify a specific niche for your channel and create content that caters to a defined audience. This helps attract a loyal viewership. [1]
Trending Topics: Research top-performing channels in your niche and analyze their most successful videos, especially those uploaded recently. This helps identify current trends and viewer preferences. [1, 2]
Evergreen vs. Current: Prioritize creating content on topics that are currently performing well, rather than solely relying on evergreen topics that may be saturated. [2]
End-of-Year Ideas: Leverage upcoming trends, like incorporating keywords related to the new year as the year ends. This can boost the visibility of your content. [2]
Video Optimization:
Compelling Packaging: Invest time in creating engaging titles and thumbnails that accurately represent your video content and entice viewers to click. [3]
Thorough Research: Script your videos based on in-depth research, including insights from top-performing videos in your niche, personal experiences, and unanswered questions from comments. [4]
Engaging Intro: The first minute of your video is crucial. Craft a compelling intro that restates the video’s premise, establishes your credibility, promises viewer benefit, and encourages them to watch till the end. [5]
Optimal Length: Aim for video lengths between 10 to 12 minutes, striking a balance between providing value and maintaining viewer attention. [6]
High-Quality Production: Ensure professional-quality audio using a clear voiceover, preferably your own. Match visuals to the script, use clear text and subtitles, and select background music that enhances the mood. [6, 7]
Channel Growth:
Consistent Uploads: Adhere to a regular publishing schedule, ideally uploading one video per week. This signals to the algorithm that you are a dedicated creator, leading to increased impressions and potential viewership. [7]
Promote Your Videos: Actively share your content on social media and other platforms to expand your reach beyond YouTube.
Monetization Beyond Ads:
Diversify Revenue Streams: Don’t rely solely on AdSense revenue. Explore alternative income sources such as affiliate marketing, sponsorships, merchandise sales, or offering paid memberships or courses. [8]
Key Takeaways:
YouTube monetization requires a combination of meeting eligibility criteria and implementing effective strategies to attract viewers, create engaging content, and grow your channel.
Focusing on providing value to your audience through high-quality, well-researched content is paramount for building a loyal viewership and achieving monetization success.
Success on YouTube takes time and effort. Remain consistent with your content creation, adapt to platform changes, and constantly seek ways to improve your channel and videos.
Generating Effective Video Ideas for YouTube
The sources emphasize the importance of selecting video topics that have a proven track record of success. Here’s how to generate effective video ideas that resonate with your audience and contribute to your monetization goals:
Research Top-Performing Channels in Your Niche: The sources recommend identifying the top 10-15 channels in your niche and analyzing their most successful videos [1, 2]. This provides valuable insight into what viewers are currently interested in. Pay close attention to the upload dates of those videos, focusing on those published within the last six months to a year [2, 3]. This helps ensure you’re tapping into current trends and avoiding topics that might be saturated.
Prioritize Topics with Recent Success: While evergreen content has its place, the sources highlight the need to stay relevant by creating content on topics that are currently performing well [2]. For example, if a channel’s most successful videos were uploaded several years ago, those topics might be highly competitive and less likely to perform well for a new video. Conversely, if a channel has multiple successful videos uploaded within the last six months, those topics indicate current viewer interest and algorithm favorability.
Leverage End-of-Year Trends: As the year draws to a close, consider incorporating topics related to the upcoming year into your content calendar [2]. This could involve creating videos focused on “how to prepare for [upcoming year]” or “[niche-specific] trends for [upcoming year].” By capitalizing on these anticipated trends, you increase the likelihood of attracting viewers interested in those topics.
Explore Comment Sections for Unanswered Questions: The sources suggest examining the comment sections of top-performing videos in your niche [4]. Look for unanswered questions or recurring themes in viewer comments. Addressing these unmet needs within your content provides valuable information to your audience and positions you as a helpful resource. This can lead to increased engagement and potentially attract new subscribers.
Combine Proven Topics with Your Unique Perspective: While researching successful video ideas is crucial, it’s equally important to infuse your content with your own experiences, insights, and personality [4]. This authenticity helps differentiate your content from others covering similar topics. By sharing personal anecdotes and relatable experiences, you build a stronger connection with your audience and foster a sense of trust.
Consider AI Tools for Generating Ideas: While not explicitly mentioned in the sources, AI tools can assist in brainstorming video ideas. For example, ChatGPT can provide topic suggestions based on keywords or themes you provide. However, it’s essential to use these tools as a starting point and refine the ideas based on your research and knowledge of your niche. Remember to verify any information generated by AI tools as it might not always be accurate or up-to-date.
By combining these strategies, you can develop a pipeline of compelling video ideas that cater to audience demand, leverage current trends, and showcase your unique perspective, ultimately contributing to your channel’s growth and monetization potential.
The Importance of Packaging: Titles and Thumbnails
The sources highlight the crucial role of video packaging in attracting viewers and driving clicks, which ultimately contribute to monetization. Specifically, they emphasize the significance of titles and thumbnails as the first point of contact between your video and potential viewers.
Analyzing Successful Examples:
The sources advocate for a data-driven approach to crafting compelling titles and thumbnails. They recommend analyzing the top-performing videos in your niche to understand what resonates with audiences. This involves:
Identifying Common Themes and Patterns: Pay close attention to the wording, structure, and visual elements used in successful titles and thumbnails. Are they concise and impactful? Do they use specific numbers or keywords? What kind of imagery do they employ?
Staying Current: The sources stress the importance of analyzing videos that have performed well within the last year or so. This is because trends in title and thumbnail design can evolve over time, influenced by changes in the algorithm and viewer preferences.
Key Elements of Effective Packaging:
Specificity: Instead of generic titles like “How to Stop Procrastinating,” successful videos often use more specific and targeted titles that address a particular angle or solution. Examples from the sources include “How to Stop Procrastinating (For People with ADHD)” and “The 5-Second Cure to Procrastination.”
Intrigue: The sources suggest using titles and thumbnails that pique viewer curiosity and create a sense of intrigue. This can involve highlighting a unique benefit, posing a question, or hinting at a surprising revelation.
Clear Communication: Titles and thumbnails should clearly convey the video’s topic and value proposition. They should be easy to understand and visually appealing, using high-quality images or graphics that relate to the content.
Text on Thumbnails: The sources note that many successful videos incorporate text on their thumbnails. This helps to reinforce the message of the title and make the video’s topic more readily apparent to viewers browsing search results or recommendations.
Iterative Process:
The sources acknowledge that crafting effective titles and thumbnails is an ongoing learning process. They recommend starting by emulating successful examples and gradually adding your own unique spin as you gain experience and understand what works best for your audience. They also encourage experimentation and A/B testing to refine your approach over time.
Additional Considerations:
While the sources primarily focus on titles and thumbnails, other aspects of video packaging can also influence viewer engagement. These include:
Video Description: A well-written description provides additional context about your video and can help improve its visibility in search results.
Tags: Relevant tags help categorize your video and make it more discoverable by viewers searching for specific topics.
End Screens and Cards: These interactive elements can promote other videos on your channel, encouraging viewers to watch more of your content and increasing watch time.
Crafting a High-Quality Video Script
The sources provide a detailed framework for creating a video script that not only delivers valuable content but also optimizes viewer engagement and watch time, both crucial factors for YouTube monetization.
Research and Content Development
The sources emphasize the importance of thorough research as the foundation of your script. This involves:
Analyzing Top-Performing Videos: Examine the top 5-7 videos on the topic you’ve chosen, focusing on recent uploads. Identify the key points, arguments, and insights presented in those videos. Take notes on the structure, flow, and delivery style.
Incorporating Personal Experience: Infuse your script with your own experiences, insights, and unique perspective. This adds authenticity and helps differentiate your content.
Addressing Viewer Questions: Review the comment sections of the top-performing videos and look for unanswered questions or recurring themes. Integrate responses to these questions into your script to provide additional value and establish yourself as a knowledgeable resource.
Structuring Your Script
The sources outline a specific structure for your script, designed to maximize viewer retention:
Engaging Intro (First 30 Seconds to 1 Minute):Reiterate Title and Thumbnail Message: Begin by restating the promise made in your title and thumbnail, assuring viewers that the content aligns with their expectations.
Establish Context and Credibility: Provide evidence that you have expertise on the topic. Briefly share your background, experience, or research related to the subject matter.
Make a Promise: Clearly state how the viewer will benefit from watching the video. What problem will you solve? What knowledge will they gain?
Offer a Compelling Reason to Stay: Encourage viewers to watch till the end by hinting at a valuable takeaway, a special offer, or an exclusive piece of information revealed later in the video.
Core Content:Present Well-Researched Information: Deliver the main points of your video, drawing on the research you conducted, your personal experiences, and the viewer questions you identified.
Maintain a Logical Flow: Structure your content in a clear and organized manner, using transitions and signposts to guide the viewer through the information.
Call to Action:Encourage Engagement: At the end of your video, prompt viewers to like, comment, subscribe, and share the video.
Direct Viewers to Other Resources: If relevant, point viewers to other videos on your channel, your website, or social media profiles.
Scriptwriting Tips
Write for the Ear, Not the Eye: Remember that your script will be spoken aloud. Use conversational language, short sentences, and a natural speaking rhythm.
Focus on Clarity and Conciseness: Avoid jargon or overly complex terminology. Get to the point quickly and make sure your message is easy to understand.
Incorporate Storytelling: Weaving in personal anecdotes, case studies, or real-world examples can make your content more engaging and relatable.
Use a Scriptwriting Tool: Consider using a dedicated scriptwriting program or template to help you organize your thoughts and format your script professionally.
A Note on AI Scriptwriting Tools
While the sources don’t specifically mention AI scriptwriting tools, these tools can be helpful in generating ideas and drafting initial scripts. However, it’s crucial to exercise caution and critically evaluate any content generated by AI.
Fact-Check and Edit: Always double-check the accuracy and completeness of the information provided by AI tools. Edit the script to ensure it aligns with your voice, style, and the specific needs of your audience.
Maintain Originality: AI tools can sometimes generate generic or repetitive content. Use them as a starting point, but strive to add your own unique insights, experiences, and creative flair.
Efficient Video Production
Once you’ve solidified your video ideas, honed your packaging (titles and thumbnails), and meticulously crafted your script, the sources emphasize that the actual video creation process should be relatively smooth and efficient. They provide specific guidance on streamlining video production, leveraging AI tools to save time, and prioritizing elements that enhance viewer experience:
Voiceover
Clarity is Key: The sources stress the importance of a crystal-clear voiceover, noting that poor audio quality can be more detrimental to viewer experience than subpar visuals. [1]
Authenticity through Personal Voice: Using your own voice for the voiceover is encouraged, as it fosters a stronger connection with viewers and adds a personal touch. [1]
AI for Efficiency: The sources suggest using AI tools like InVideo to clone your voice, allowing you to generate voiceovers for multiple videos without repeated recording sessions. This significantly reduces production time. [1]
Visuals
Synchronization with Script: The sources highlight the importance of aligning your visuals with the spoken content of your script. This keeps viewers engaged and prevents their attention from waning due to uncoordinated visuals. [1]
Matching Visuals to Storytelling: The sources use the example of Decoding YT’s channel, which features simple edits but effectively matches visuals to the narrative, creating a captivating experience. [1]
AI and Stock Footage: AI tools like InVideo can aid in generating visuals, and if the generated visuals don’t align with the script, they can be replaced with personally uploaded videos or relevant stock footage from the platform’s library. [1]
Text and Subtitles
Enhanced Accessibility and Engagement: The sources recommend incorporating clear text and subtitles into your videos to facilitate easier comprehension and maintain viewer attention. [2]
Background Music
Mood Congruence: Selecting background music that matches the mood of your video is crucial. For instance, a horror video would benefit from suspenseful, eerie music. [2]
Prioritizing Experience: The sources advise against using music altogether if you’re unsure about appropriate selection, as ill-fitting music can detract from the overall viewing experience. [2]
Production Timeline and Consistency
Batch Creation for Consistency: To maintain a consistent publishing schedule, the sources recommend creating a batch of 3-4 videos upfront. This process should take approximately 2 days and allows you to stay ahead of your content calendar. [2]
Weekly Publishing for Monetization: Aim for a publishing frequency of one video per week, as this consistency signals to the YouTube algorithm that you’re a dedicated creator, potentially leading to increased impressions, views, and ultimately, faster monetization. [2]
The sources provide a real-world example of how consistency significantly impacted channel views, illustrating the importance of regular content uploads for YouTube growth. [2] They emphasize that consistent publishing is crucial for triggering the algorithm to favor your content. [2]
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
Roger Wambolt, a Senior Product Trainer at Corel, delivers a session exploring the capabilities of CorelDRAW 2021. The presentation covers various components of the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite, such as CorelDRAW.app and Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021. It goes over the interface and features, including the Welcome Book, workspaces, the new document dialog box, and the Pages docker. Moreover, the training discusses importing and exporting, working with templates, object selection and alignment, shaping, the crop and knife tools, interactive tools, transparencies and lenses, and the power of PowerClip. The presentation also explains many types of creative effects available and how to customize the CorelDRAW experience.
CorelDRAW 2021 Study Guide
Quiz
Instructions: Answer the following questions in 2-3 sentences each.
What are the primary applications included in the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021, and what is the main function of each?
Describe the interactive property bar in CorelDRAW. Why is it also referred to as the context-sensitive property bar?
Explain the purpose of dockers in CorelDRAW. How can you access and manage them within the software?
Outline the different workspaces available in the Welcome Book. Which workspace would be most beneficial for users migrating from Adobe Illustrator, and why?
When creating a new document, what considerations should you take into account regarding the rendering resolution? How does it impact performance and file size?
Describe the autofit feature in CorelDRAW 2021. How can it be used to adjust page size to fit the content on the page?
Explain the multi-asset export feature in CorelDRAW 2021. How does it streamline the process of exporting multiple objects in various formats?
Describe the differences between “copy” and “duplicate” in CorelDRAW. Why is “duplicate” generally recommended?
Explain how the “Alt” key and “Control” key can be used to make selections.
Describe the process of creating a cut line around a raster image.
Quiz Answer Key
The CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021 includes CorelDRAW (vector illustration and page layout), CorelDRAW.app (online graphic design via the web), Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 (raster manipulation), Corel PowerTRACE (bitmap-to-vector conversion), Corel CAPTURE 2021 (screen capture), and Corel Font Manager (font exploration and management). Each application serves a distinct function within the broader graphic design workflow.
The interactive property bar, or context-sensitive property bar, is located below the standard toolbar and dynamically changes based on the tool selected in the toolbox. It provides additional functionality and options specific to the active tool, offering a streamlined workflow.
Dockers are panels within CorelDRAW that provide additional tools and functionality, such as object management, effects, and more. They can be accessed via the “Windows” menu under “Dockers” or by clicking the dockers icon, allowing users to turn them on or off as needed.
The Welcome Book includes workspaces like Light, Default, Touch, Illustration, Page Layout, and Adobe Illustrator. The Adobe Illustrator workspace is designed for users migrating from Illustrator, as it places tools in familiar locations, easing the transition to CorelDRAW.
When creating a new document, the rendering resolution determines the quality at which lenses and transparencies are rendered. For large-format prints, a lower resolution (e.g., 96 dpi) can speed up rip time and decrease file size without significant loss of quality.
The autofit feature adjusts the page size to fit the content on the page by creating a margin around the selected objects. It streamlines the process of resizing the page to match the artwork, ensuring a perfect fit.
The multi-asset export feature allows users to export multiple objects in different formats and resolutions simultaneously. This is found by opening up the Export Docker via the Windows menu. This is a faster way to generate assets for web and print from a single document.
“Copy” creates a temporary file in the Windows clipboard, potentially bogging down the system with temp files. “Duplicate” (Ctrl+D) creates a copy directly within the document, avoiding temp files and improving performance, so it is the recommended method.
Holding down the “Alt” key while clicking allows you to select objects layered beneath other objects, “digging down” one level at a time. Holding down “Control” will allow you to make selections within a group of objects.
A cut line can be created around a raster image in CorelDRAW using PowerTRACE. Convert the image to vector using outline trace, reduce the colors to a minimum, set the option to not delete the original, and then use the boundary tool on the resulting vector object to create the cut line.
Essay Questions
Discuss the importance of workspace customization in CorelDRAW. How can users tailor the interface to enhance their productivity and workflow efficiency?
Explore the capabilities of Corel Font Manager and its integration with CorelDRAW. How does it simplify font management and selection for graphic design projects?
Compare and contrast the various interactive tools available in CorelDRAW, such as blend, contour, envelope, extrude, and drop shadow. How can these tools be used to create unique and visually appealing effects?
Analyze the role of PowerClip in CorelDRAW for creating layouts and designs. How does PowerClip facilitate the placement of objects inside containers, and what are its practical applications in graphic design?
Evaluate the significance of PowerTRACE in converting raster images to vector graphics. How does PowerTRACE benefit designers working with logos, illustrations, and other bitmap-based assets?
Glossary of Key Terms
Vector Illustration: Graphic design using mathematical equations to create images that can be scaled without loss of quality.
Raster Manipulation: Editing and modifying images composed of pixels (bitmaps).
Bitmap: An image composed of pixels, with resolution limitations when scaling.
PowerTRACE: CorelDRAW’s tool for converting bitmap images into vector graphics.
Docker: A panel in CorelDRAW that provides access to various tools, settings, and features.
Workspace: A customized arrangement of tools, menus, and palettes in CorelDRAW tailored to specific tasks.
Rendering Resolution: The resolution at which lenses and transparencies are rendered in a document.
Autofit: A CorelDRAW feature that automatically adjusts the page size to fit the content on the page.
File I/O: File input/output, referring to the processes of importing and exporting files.
Multi-Asset Export: A CorelDRAW feature for exporting multiple objects in various formats and resolutions simultaneously.
Object Docker: A docker that displays and manages the objects within a document.
Marquee Select: Selecting objects by dragging a rectangle around them with the pick tool.
Grouping: Combining multiple objects into a single unit for easier manipulation.
Shaping: Modifying the shapes of objects using tools like weld, combine, and simplify.
Virtual Segment Delete Tool: A tool for quickly deleting segments of lines or curves.
Interactive Tools: Tools that create dynamic effects, such as blends, contours, and drop shadows.
Blend: A tool that creates a smooth transition between two objects.
Contour: A tool that creates a series of outlines around an object.
Envelope Tool: A tool that distorts objects by manipulating their outlines.
Extrude: A tool that creates a 3D effect by extending an object into depth.
Drop Shadow: A tool that adds a shadow effect to an object.
Transparency: Making an object partially or fully see-through.
Perspective: Creating the illusion of depth and distance in an image.
Artistic Text: Text that is treated as an object, allowing for more creative manipulation.
Paragraph Text: Text contained within a frame, suitable for larger bodies of text.
Variable Font: A font with adjustable parameters, such as weight, width, and slant.
PowerClip: Placing an object or group of objects inside a container.
Graph Paper Tool: A tool for creating grids and tables.
Power Trace: The process of converting a raster image to a vector image within CorelDRAW.
Scripts and Macros: Automated sequences of commands that can be executed to perform repetitive tasks.
Pointillizer: A tool to create pseudo halftone effects.
Workspace Customization: Tailoring the CorelDRAW interface to suit individual preferences and workflow.
CorelDRAW 2021 Training: Features, Techniques, and Productivity
Okay, here’s a detailed briefing document summarizing the key themes and ideas from the provided transcript of a CorelDRAW 2021 training session.
Briefing Document: CorelDRAW 2021 Training Session Review
Source: Transcript of CorelDRAW 2021 Breakaway Session presented by Roger Wambolt, Senior Product Trainer at Corel.
Overview:
This document summarizes a training session focused on CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021, highlighting new features, interface elements, and time-saving techniques. The session covers a range of topics from basic interface navigation to advanced features such as PowerTRACE, multi-asset export, object manipulation, shaping tools, effects, and workspace customization. The presenter, Roger Wambolt, emphasizes productivity and ease of use for both new and experienced CorelDRAW users.
Key Themes and Ideas:
CorelDRAW Suite Components:
The training begins by outlining the core components of the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021.
CorelDRAW (Vector illustration and page layout)
CorelDRAW.app (Online graphic design)
Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 (Raster manipulation)
Corel PowerTRACE (Bitmap to vector conversion) – Part of CorelDRAW
Corel CAPTURE 2021 (Screen capture utility – Windows only)
Corel Font Manager (Font exploration and management)
“in CorelDRAW Graphic Suite 2021 it includes CorelDRAW which is vector illustration and page layout; CorelDRAW.app is an online graphic design interface via the web; Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is for raster manipulation or editing bitmaps; we have Corel PowerTRACE, which is part of CorelDRAW itself and it, allows you to convert bitmaps to vector objects; Corel CAPTURE 2021 is a screen capture utility, and I should point out that it’s only available for Windows; and, then finally we have the Corel Font Manager with uh giving you the ability to do font exploration and it’s a management tool allows you to create collections and that sort of thing.”
Interface Navigation and Customization:
The session provides a detailed overview of the CorelDRAW interface, covering the menu bar, standard toolbar, interactive (context-sensitive) property bar, toolbox, page navigation, status bar, color palette, and dockers.
Emphasis is placed on the context-sensitive nature of the property bar, which adapts to the selected tool.
Dockers provide additional functionality and can be accessed through the Windows menu or a dedicated icon.
“Now let’s take a look at the interface from the top we have a standard drop down menu across the top where you find most of the commands below that is a standard toolbar or button bar and it includes some of the more common features such as new document open print import export and that sort of thing below that is the interactive property bar also called the context sensitive property bar as it changes depending on the tool that you select within the toolbox and it gives you more functionality to these tools”
Welcome Book and Workspaces:
The Welcome Book offers quick access to new documents, recent files, templates, learning resources, and the Corel Store.
Multiple workspaces are available, including Light, Default, Touch, Illustration, Page Layout, and Adobe Illustrator (designed for Illustrator users transitioning to CorelDRAW).
“Now let’s take a look at the Welcome Book now the welcome book is located this tab right here if this by chance isn’t opened up you can go to your help menu down to welcome screen and in here we have the get started now get started allows you to start with a new document you can continue editing when you’ve previously edited or recently edited”
New Document Features:
The “New Document” dialog box includes options for naming the document, selecting presets, specifying the number of pages, choosing single-page or multi-page view (a new feature in 2021), and setting the primary color mode and dimensions.
Rendering resolution affects the quality of lenses and transparencies. The trainer advises lowering this for large format prints to reduce rip time and file size.
Autofit Feature:
The Autofit feature automatically adjusts the page size to fit the content, allowing for margin adjustments.
Objects on master layers are not affected by Autofit.
“now one of the other features that we’ve added in 2021 is the autofit I love this feature I’m going to deselect the everything on the page you’ll notice my interactive property bar shows my page information here this icon is referred to as autofit so what i’m going to do is I’ll click on the autofit icon and here I can set up a margin”
Pages Docker:
The Pages docker facilitates editing multi-page documents with single-page and multi-page views.
Users can rearrange pages by dragging them within the docker.
Objects can be moved between pages by dragging them in the docker.
“now let’s take a look at the Pages docker the Pages docker gives you the ability to easily edit multi-page documents from the windows menu I’m going to go down to dockers and I’ll select pages now within the Pages docker I have the ability to do a single page view I can do a multi-page view”
File I/O (Import/Export):
The training covers importing images, with options for external linking, high-resolution output (for OPI servers), resampling, and cropping.
CorelDRAW 2021 introduces multi-asset export, allowing users to export multiple objects in various formats (JPEG, GIF, PNG, PDF) with customizable settings.
“so i’m going to import an image i’ll click on my import icon alternatively i could have done a control I or file import and i’m going to bring in this image here one thing I want to point out here is bottom right hand corner on the import icon i have a drop down here i have the ability to import this i can import it as externally linked i can import as high res for output provided i’m using an opi server in this case i am not and that’s why it’s grayed out i also have the ability to resample and load or crop and load”
“one other new feature that we’ve added to CorelDRAW 2021 is the Multi-asset export to access the Multi-asset export from the Windows menu I’m going to go down to dockers and I’ll select export”
Templates:
Creating new documents from templates is simplified with the “New from Template” option in the File menu.
Templates provide a head start on designs.
“so new from template or templates as I mentioned very easy to create new documents based on a template it’s simply a matter of going to the file menu and selecting new from template and what this is going to do is it’s going to open up a template dialog box in here we can see that I have my templates I can also select all templates and with all templates selected we’ll be able to see the templates that are provided with the software”
Object Docker and Selection/Alignment:
The Object docker provides a visual representation of objects within the document, allowing users to turn visibility on/off and lock objects.
Selection can be done with the pick tool (single click or marquee select).
The tab key cycles through objects in the order they were created.
Alignment tools (T, B, L, R, C, E) are used to align objects.
The Alt key allows “digging down” to select objects underneath others (e.g., in a stack of objects). The control key allows selection of multiple elements within a group.
“now I mentioned the uh Object docker. Object docker is a docker that parks on the right-hand side as most dockers do and in here I can see elements that are within the document here we can see I have a number of pages if I wanted to I can select this icon and that’s only going to show me the elements that are on this one particular page I can change pages up here as well and one thing you’ll notice if you’re a user of older versions of krill draw we enhance this quite a bit in CorelDRAW 2019 where we now have a visual representation of the objects that are on screen”
“selecting and aligning objects so selecting of course is done with the pick tool i can single click on an element and that will select that i’ll do a ctrl z to undo that if i left click and drag it’s what we refer to as a marquee select so i’m going to marquee select this area and you can see that i can actually take this and pull this aside now if we have objects grouped together i don’t need to do a marquee select it’s simply a matter of single clicking and moving that element”
Copy vs. Duplicate:
The presenter strongly recommends using “Duplicate” (Ctrl+D) instead of “Copy” (Ctrl+C) and “Paste” (Ctrl+V) to avoid creating temporary files that can slow down the system.
The “Duplicate” function can remember the distance for duplication.
Ruler origin can be reset by dragging from the intersection of the rulers.
“so copy versus duplicate i usually recommend that users do duplicate rather than copy when we do a copy of an element i want you to watch my cursor i’m going to do a ctrl c to copy and you’ll notice that my cursor turned to a little blue circle spinning circle it’s actually called a throbber but what was happening there it was taking the content from that image and copying it to the windows clipboard to do that it creates a temporary file watch my cursor once again when i do a ctrl v to paste that back in again i got that circle back it was reading from the temp file and it was dropping it into my document for me now the problem with that is that we end up building up a lot of temp files on the system”
Shaping Tools:
CorelDRAW provides various shaping commands (Combine, Weld, Simplify) to modify objects.
The Shape tool allows for corner rounding, chamfering, etc.
Shaping commands are based on the last object selected.
The Freehand tool can create straight lines (with Ctrl key for constraints) or freehand curves.
“so let’s talk a little bit about shaping now shaping in CorelDRAW is done of course with the shape tool there’s also a number of different shaping commands so if I select this rectangle you’ll notice on my interactive property bar at the top there’s some some things i can do with this I can change the type of corner rounding on this so for example if I grab my shape tool now I can change this to a chamfer let’s go back to the rounded corner”
Crop, Knife, and Virtual Segment Delete Tools:
The Crop tool crops selected areas. If nothing is selected, it can delete the entire design.
The Knife tool splits objects. It offers options for two-point lines, free lines, bezier curves, overlaps, or gaps.
The Virtual Segment Delete tool removes segments. Holding the Alt key allows marquee deletion.
“i’m going to show the crop tool now so in my toolbox i have a couple of different tools here i’m going to grab the crop tool i’ll left click and drag and i will double click that’s going to crop this out but you’ve noticed that it’s gotten rid of the entire design this is actually a common call that we used to get on the support line the reason it did this is because i did not have anything selected”
“the next tool i want to show is the knife tool and with the knife tool i’m going to tap my space bar marquee select this get my knife tool back and you’ll notice on the knife tool setting on the property bar i have the ability to do a two-point line i can do a free line i can do bezier a number of things here i also have the ability to set an overlap or a gap now if i’m doing a vinyl for windows and i want to span a couple of window panes then maybe i want to do a gap to allow for the aluminum uprights in there if i’m doing embroidery and i want to create a split front then i’ll want to go with an overlap”
“virtual segment delete tool we used to have to take a circle if i wanted to cut a piece out of this circle i would have to convert the circle to curves i’d have to add nodes break the nodes apart break the entire thing apart and then delete that element with the virtual segment delete tool it made it much much easier i can draw a line across here i’m going to grab my virtual segment delete tool and then simply click on this line here and that will delete that and then of course i can select this line and delete it and so i’ve cut the top off”
Interactive Tools (Blend, Contour, Envelope, Extrude, Drop Shadow):
These tools provide interactive effects.
The Blend tool creates a smooth transition between two objects. Blend objects have control objects that determine their color.
The Contour tool creates multiple contours inside or outside an object (useful for creating applique designs).
The Envelope tool distorts text or objects. Double-clicking a node removes it.
The Extrude tool creates a 3D effect.
Drop Shadows include regular drop shadows and inside drop shadows (new in CorelDRAW 2020).
The Block Shadow tool creates a block shadow effect, which can be broken apart.
“i’m going to show you some of the interactive tools within CorelDRAW now i’m going to right click and i just want to make sure that i have lock toolbars deselected that then will allow me to click and hold and i can grab the gripper bar at the top and pull this toolbar right out so this gives me the ability to bring the tools out at hand and this is just to start to customize the interface so if i use these two little tools a lot i don’t want to have to go digging through that i can bring them out on screen the first one i want to show is a blend and i simply left click and drag and so i’m blending from one object to the next”
“select this element and then I’ll click on extrude and this now allows me to pull this back and i can change my vanishing point to wherever i want to zoom in a little bit and in the interactive property bar at the top there’s a number of different features”
“the inside drop shadow and this is a new one we added in 2020 with this one i simply click and drag and that will create a shadow for me”
Perspective:
CorelDRAW 2021 adds the ability to draw in perspective (not covered in detail in this session).
Perspective can be added to bitmaps via the Objects menu.
“in CorelDRAW 2021 we’ve added the capability to draw in perspective I will not be covering that here you’ve already seen that in the in the previous presentation but uh I do want to show you perspective with bitmaps that we’ve recently added to CorelDRAW”
Text (Artistic and Paragraph):
CorelDRAW supports both artistic and paragraph text.
Artistic text is created by clicking on the page and typing; paragraph text is created by dragging a text frame.
Text can be fit to a path using “Fit Text to Path” (either right-click and drag or Text menu).
Variable fonts allow for modifying font parameters.
“in CorelDRAW there’s two types of text we have artistic text and paragraph text they’re both created using the same tool so on the left-hand side in the toolbar I’ll simply click on my text tool and now if I click on my page I can type artistic text to create paragraph text with the text tool selected it’s a left click and drag and i create a paragraph text frame now in this frame if i was to right click for example i can insert placeholder text and that will give you a visual representation is what this is going to look like”
“one more thing on text is variable font support and that’s relatively new in CorelDRAW as well so with variable fonts you have the ability of changing certain parameters of that font with the font selected and let me just move my page over to this side with the font selected i’ll click on this icon it’s a drop down with all the different properties that i can change for this piece of text now this particular font has quite a large number of variables that i can modify most pieces of variable text that i’ve seen or most fonts that i’ve seen will typically have one two three or four options that you can play around with”
Corel Font Manager:
Corel Font Manager allows users to explore and manage fonts, create collections, and use watched folders.
Fonts don’t need to be installed to be used (reducing system slowdown).
Fonts can be filtered by various criteria.
“let me just bring up Corel Font Manager and in chrome Font Manager you’ll notice that i have libraries on the left hand side i have a number of filters here on my toolbar across the top i have the ability to create what we call a watched folder now a watched folder is a folder that’s located on your hard drive and any font that you put in there the Font Manager will pick up on and we can make use of that you no longer have to have the font installed in order to be able to use it in fact if you look on the right hand side fonts that have the green bar are fonts that are installed those that have the yellow bar they’re not installed”
Clipart:
Clipart is accessed through the Connect Content docker.
Users can add their own clipart collections (local or network).
“clipart is very easy to access so to access my clipart i’ll go into the connect Content docker i already have that open so I’ll click on that and in here you can see we have a add the clipart up here i have the ability to search so just type in horse and very quick it’s found a number of images that have horse as a keyword to use that of course simply click and drag and i can bring that in on the screen and then make use of that of that image”
PowerClip:
PowerClip allows users to place objects inside containers (text, objects, etc.).
Right-click and drag is the recommended method.
Containers can be centered, and their contents can be edited.
PowerClip can be used in conjunction with the Graph Paper tool to create effects like murals.
“gives me the ability to take an object or group of objects and put that inside a container now this container can be a piece of text it can be an object or a group of objects I’m going to select this bitmap image I’ll right-click and drag and left the mouse button go and power clip inside it’s as easy as that a lot of people will go to the objects menu and do power clip there I find this quite a bit quicker”
PowerTRACE:
PowerTRACE converts raster images to vector images.
“Group by color” is important for vinyl cutting or screen printing.
Color reduction and editing are possible in the PowerTRACE dialog box.
PowerTRACE can be used to create cut lines around bitmap images.
“so power trace allows you to convert from a raster image to a vector image i’m going to start with this one here and if i go to the trace bitmap menu i can also access this from the bitmap menu as well but we have it on the interactive property bar so much quicker to access from here i’ll click on the drop down go to outline trace and then i’ll select clipart this opens up my powertrace dialog box i’m going to make that full screen”
“with this image I’ve often been asked how do I take a bitmap image and create a cut line around it so I want to do a print cut solution I need a cut line around this easy way to do that is within power trace I’m going to go to outline trace again I’ll select clip art and here what I’m going to do on the colors tab I’ll reduce my number of colors right down so I’m going to bring that down to about three or four colors”
Bitmap Handling (Cropping, Resizing, Resampling):
Be aware of the difference between cropping with the Shape tool (soft mask) and the Crop tool (permanent). Convert to Bitmap after cropping with Shape tool to make it permanent.
Rotated bitmaps can increase rip time; convert to bitmap to resolve.
Resizing images by dragging the sizing handles only changes the visual footprint, not the actual bitmap size. This can lead to increased file sizes and printing times. Convert to bitmap to reduce the bitmap size.
“customers will import bitmap images click and drag to size them the way they want them put them on their screen maybe they’re doing a uh a catalog of sublimatable items that you create so you’ve got 25 bitmap images on a page that you’ve imported resize down and then you go and print it and you wonder why it’s taking so long to print when you resize an image down in this manner by using the shaping handles take a look at the resolution down below you’re not reducing the size of the bitmap itself you’re only reducing the visual footprint of it”
PHOTO-PAINT includes labs for advanced image manipulation.
The Cutout Lab removes backgrounds.
The Image Adjustment Lab adjusts temperature, saturation, brightness, contrast, highlights, shadows, and midtones.
“i’m going to select this image here I’ll right-click and I’ll select edit bitmap now this is going to launch PHOTO-PAINT for me um now I’ll maximize the screen and from the image menu I’ll go down to cutout lab this gives me the ability to remove the background”
“next is the image adjustment lab so I’ll select this image right click and select edit bitmap and let’s maximize PHOTO-PAINT and now from the adjust menu I’m going to Image Adjustment Lab”
Distressed Effects:
A distressed effect can be created by converting an image to grayscale, adjusting the tone curve to intensify blacks and reduce whites, converting to black and white (line art), and then setting the fill to white and the outline to nothing.
“effect now this can be done with a raster image i find that rusted metal this is an old piece of weathered wood maybe a photograph of ripples on a a swimming pool stuff like that work quite well what i’m going to do is i’ll start off by resizing this image to completely cover my artwork now from the bitmap menu i’m going to go down to mode and i want to select grayscale next i’m going to go to my effects menu down to adjust and i want to bring up my tone curve”
Non-Destructive Effects:
CorelDRAW (from 2019 onward) supports non-destructive effects (applied to both bitmaps and vectors).
Effects can be turned on/off, edited, and reordered.
Object styles can be created from bitmap effects and applied to other objects.
“new to quell draw 2019 we’ve added the ability to create non-destructive effects these effects can be applied to both bitmaps as well as vector so i’m actually applying bitmap effects to a vector object”
Art Styles:
Art styles (Acrylic, Neon, etc.) can be applied to objects through the Effects menu. These effects are fairly processor intensive.
“styles are a lot of fun to play with if I go to my effects menu down to creative and in here I have art style now there’s a number of different art styles that we have available to us first one is smooth acrylic these effects are fairly intensive and there is a control within tools options that I can have it use GPU processing as well to improve the speed of that”
Scripts/Macros (Color Swatch Creator):
Scripts and macros can automate tasks.
The Color Chart Creator macro creates color swatch documents based on open color palettes. This script only works with color palettes that are currently open.
“down to scripts and then run in here under macros in i want to select color chart creator and i’ll click run once again in this dialog box when i hit the drop down you’ll see i have a number of palettes in here these are the palettes that i’ve just opened up as well as my document palette across the bottom so i want to select this palette here i can add a date printer information i can also set the spacing i’m going to bring that spacing down to two i can put an outline around each color i don’t want to do that and i’ll simply click ok and as you can see it’s created the document for me”
Pointillizer:
The Pointillizer effect creates pseudo-halftone patterns.
Patterns can be based on circles or custom shapes (e.g., for creating cross-stitch patterns).
“i want to show you one more with this process so I’m going to select this clipart image under shape you can see I have circle I also have custom I’m going to select custom I’ll click on select and I’ll click on this it’s just a piece of text I created with the letter x and I’ll apply so I’ve taken this clipart image and I’ve now created a cross stitch pattern”
Custom Color Palettes:
Custom color palettes can be created from a document or selection (Windows Menu -> Color Palettes -> Create Palette from Selection).
“from time to time you’ll want to create a custom color palette based on a document or a selection i’m going to select this element and then from the windows menu i’ll go down to color palettes and then create palette from selection so very quickly it’s brought the dialog box i’m just going to call this flower and i’ll click on save and what that’s going to do is it’s going to create a custom color palette for me and it’s docked over here and this is based on the colors that are in this particular file”
Workspace customization is a key feature for productivity.
Keyboard shortcuts can be customized (Tools -> Options -> Customization). The presenter uses customized shortcuts for page navigation, wireframe, and grouping/ungrouping.
Custom toolbars can be created by dragging commands onto the screen (using Ctrl+Alt+Left Click).
Workspaces can be exported and imported (for sharing or upgrading).
“I want to talk about I briefly mentioned this at the beginning is learn.corel.com this is our Discovery Center and it’s here where you can access all sorts of items things such as tutorials so there’s tutorials for graphics, for PaintShop Pro, VideoStudio that sort of thing you’ll also find a Q&A series this is a Q&A series for CorelDRAW as well as a PaintShop Pro so when we get customers sending us questions or common questions that come in through the support line we have videos on here that will take you through the Q&A of that you’ll find a link for free stuff we have regular contests in here that you can enter with your artwork support as well as community so it’s a great place to visit it’s easy URL to remember it’s learn.corel.com”
“from time to time you’ll want to create a custom color palette based on a document or a selection i’m going to select this element and then from the windows menu i’ll go down to color palettes and then create palette from selection so very quickly it’s brought the dialog box i’m just going to call this flower and i’ll click on save and what that’s going to do is it’s going to create a custom color palette for me and it’s docked over here and this is based on the colors that are in this particular file”
Learn.Corel.com (Discovery Center):
learn.corel.com is the Corel Discovery Center, offering tutorials, Q&A series, free content, contests, support, and community resources.
Conclusion:
The training session provides a comprehensive overview of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021, covering both fundamental and advanced features. The presenter emphasizes the importance of customization and efficient workflow techniques to maximize productivity within the software. The session highlights several new features in the 2021 release, making it a valuable resource for both new and experienced CorelDRAW users.
CorelDRAW 2021: Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions about CorelDRAW 2021
What are the main components included in the CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021?
The suite includes CorelDRAW (vector illustration and page layout), CorelDRAW.app (online graphic design), Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 (raster editing), Corel PowerTRACE (bitmap-to-vector conversion), Corel CAPTURE 2021 (screen capture, Windows only), and Corel Font Manager (font exploration and management).
How can I access learning resources and templates within CorelDRAW?
The Welcome Book (Help > Welcome Screen) provides access to “Get Started” tutorials, recently edited documents, templates (File > New from Template), workspaces, learning materials (learn.corel.com), the Discovery Center, and the Corel Store for purchasing content like applications, plugins, and fonts.
What’s new in the New Document dialog box in CorelDRAW 2021?
The New Document dialog box now includes options for single or multi-page view. You can specify the name, preset, number of pages, page view, primary color mode, and dimensions. You can also set the rendering resolution, which affects how lenses and transparencies are rendered. Lowering the rendering resolution for large format prints can decrease the file size and speed up rip time.
How does the Autofit feature work in CorelDRAW 2021?
The Autofit feature (found in the interactive property bar when no objects are selected) allows you to automatically adjust the page size to fit the content on the page with a specified margin. It does not affect elements on master layers.
How can the Multi-asset export feature in CorelDRAW 2021 help me export assets?
The Multi-asset export docker (Windows > Dockers > Export) allows you to select multiple objects and export them in various formats (JPEG, GIF, PNG, PDF) with individual settings (resolution, transformations). You can duplicate assets with different settings and add assets with existing settings for streamlined export.
What is the difference between copying and duplicating objects in CorelDRAW, and which is recommended?
Copying (Ctrl+C, Ctrl+V) uses the Windows clipboard, creating temporary files and potentially slowing down the system, and it is therefore not recommended. Duplicating (Ctrl+D) creates a copy directly within CorelDRAW, remembering the distance and is the recommended practice to prevent build up of temp files.
How can I customize my workspace in CorelDRAW for increased productivity?
You can customize keyboard shortcuts (Tools > Options > Customization > Commands), move interactive tools out for closer proximity and export the workspace (Tools > Options > Workspace > Export) to share with other designers.
What are the benefits of using Corel Font Manager with CorelDRAW?
Corel Font Manager lets you explore, organize, and manage fonts without needing to install them in Windows, preventing system slowdown. Fonts that are not intalled have a yellow bar and fonts that are installed have a green bar. You can create collections, use watched folders for automatic font detection, and filter fonts within CorelDRAW based on your collections.
CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021: A Quick Overview
The CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021 includes several components:
CorelDRAW is for vector illustration and page layout.
CorelDRAW.app is an online graphic design interface accessible via the web.
Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is for raster manipulation and editing bitmaps.
Corel PowerTRACE is part of CorelDRAW and converts bitmaps to vector objects.
Corel CAPTURE 2021 is a screen capture utility, available only for Windows.
Corel Font Manager allows font exploration and management. It helps create font collections.
The CorelDRAW interface consists of the following:
A standard drop-down menu at the top.
A standard toolbar with common features like new document, open, print, import, and export.
An interactive property bar (context-sensitive) that changes based on the selected tool. It provides more functionality to the tools.
A toolbox on the left-hand side. Tools with a small triangle in the bottom right corner have additional tools underneath.
Page navigation in the bottom left corner to move between pages.
A status bar at the bottom to indicate what is selected and provide information about that item. The right-hand side of the status bar shows the fill and outline.
A color palette on the right-hand side, set up based on the color mode of the document.
Dockers on the right-hand side that offer additional tools and functionality. Dockers are accessible via the windows menu or by clicking the icon.
CorelDRAW: Vector Illustration and Bitmap Conversion
CorelDRAW is used for vector illustration and page layout. Corel PowerTRACE, which is included with CorelDRAW, allows for the conversion of bitmaps to vector objects.
Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021: Raster Manipulation and Editing Bitmaps
Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is used for raster manipulation or editing bitmaps.
CorelDRAW has features that allow a user to work with bitmaps:
PowerTRACE converts bitmaps to vector objects.
Bitmaps can be imported.
CorelDRAW 2021 has added the capability to add perspective to a bitmap.
Bitmaps can have effects applied to them.
Bitmaps can be cropped.
CorelDRAW allows a user to up sample bitmaps.
PHOTO-PAINT labs include:
Cutout Lab to remove backgrounds.
Image Adjustment Lab to modify image properties such as temperature, saturation, brightness, contrast, highlights, shadows, and midtones.
CorelDRAW Interface Overview
The CorelDRAW interface includes:
A standard drop-down menu at the top of the interface where most of the commands can be found.
A standard toolbar that functions as a button bar, which includes common features such as new document, open, print, import, and export.
An interactive property bar, also known as a context-sensitive property bar, that changes depending on the tool selected within the toolbox. It gives the user more functionality for the tools.
A toolbox on the left-hand side has tools, and any tool with a small triangle in the bottom right-hand corner indicates that there are additional tools underneath.
Page navigation in the bottom left-hand corner, which allows the user to go backward or forward a page, or to the end of the document. The user can also click on specific page tabs to go to that specific page.
A status bar located at the bottom provides an indication of what is selected and gives information about the item. On the right-hand side of the status bar, the fill and outline are shown, allowing the user to see them when an object with a fill and outline is selected.
A color palette on the right-hand side that is set up based on the color mode of the document.
Dockers on the right-hand side provide additional functionality and tools. Dockers are accessible from the windows menu down to dockers, or by clicking on the icon.
CorelDRAW Customization: Workspaces and Keyboard Shortcuts
CorelDRAW has several customization options.
Workspace customization options include:
The user can export and import workspaces. Workspaces can be shared. Workspaces from CorelDRAW x7 and forward can be imported.
The user can customize the interface by turning features on and off.
Commands that are used often can be added to a custom toolbar. To add a command, hold the control and alt keys down while left-clicking and dragging the command onto the screen.
Keyboard shortcuts can be customized. Go to tools, options, and then customization.
To customize, select commands, then the menu where the command is located. After selecting the command, a shortcut key can be assigned.
The user can assign single keyboard shortcuts.
The Power Behind CorelDRAW Graphics Suite 2021 | Full Tutorial (90-min)
The Original Text
Welcome to this breakaway session entitled the power behind CorelDRAW my name is Roger Wambolt and I’m Senior Product Trainer at Corel. During this session, we’ll be discovering some of the powerful tools and features that are available in CorelDRAW 2021 so without further ado let’s get started. in CorelDRAW Graphic Suite 2021 it includes CorelDRAW which is vector illustration and page layout; CorelDRAW.app is an online graphic design interface via the web; Corel PHOTO-PAINT 2021 is for raster manipulation or editing bitmaps; we have Corel PowerTRACE, which is part of CorelDRAW itself and it, allows you to convert bitmaps to vector objects; Corel CAPTURE 2021 is a screen capture utility, and I should point out that it’s only available for Windows; and, then finally we have the Corel Font Manager with uh giving you the ability to do font exploration and it’s a management tool allows you to create collections and that sort of thing. Now let’s take a look at the interface from the top we have a standard drop down menu across the top where you find most of the commands below that is a standard toolbar or button bar and it includes some of the more common features such as new document open print import export and that sort of thing below that is the interactive property bar also called the context sensitive property bar as it changes depending on the tool that you select within the toolbox and it gives you more functionality to these tools speaking of the toolbox down the left-hand side are your tools any tool that has a little triangle in the bottom right hand corner that’s an indication that there’s additional tools underneath that looking down at the bottom left hand corner and let me just do an undo on that bottom left hand corner we have page navigation this allows me to go back a page i can go forward a page i can go to the end of the document or i can click on specific page tabs go to to go to that specific page below that is the status bar and the status bar will give me an indication as to what i have selected and give me information about that item on the right hand side of the status bar we show the fill and outline so if i had an object selected that has a fill and an outline i’ll be able to see that there looking at the right hand side we have our standard color palette this is a color palette that is set up based on the color mode of the document itself so this one for example if i do a mouse over one of the colors i can see that this is actually an rgb color palette to the left of that we have dockers now dockers give additional functionality there’s additional tools in the dockers dockers are accessible from the windows menu down to dockers and you can see them all listed here another way to access those is by clicking on this icon here and it will show me a list of all the dockers and i can just turn on and off the ones that i want all right let’s move on to my next page next we have the Welcome Book now the welcome book is located this tab right here if this by chance isn’t opened up you can go to your help menu down to welcome screen and in here we have the get started now get started allows you to start with a new document you can continue editing when you’ve previously edited or recently edited this is what i refer to as give it a try and so in here you can actually click on these icons they’ll launch an application they’ll launch a document and give you some steps on how to use some of the things within it below that we have open document so if it’s not a recently edited document you’ll be able to come down here and open that document you also have new from template next we have workspaces within the workspaces tab there’s a number of different workspaces we have the light workspace default touch workspace for those that are on the road and maybe using a tablet or something like that and then we have some specialty workspaces illustration page layout and Adobe Illustrator now the Adobe Illustrator workspace is designed to make it easier for those who use Adobe Illustrator and want to migrate over to CorelDRAW so we put the tools in a familiar spot for you make it easy to use we have the learning where you have different tutorials in here and access to different content we also have in here our discovery center and you can access that from learn.corel.com and finally the store and the store is where you’re going to be able to access purchases that you want to make for software we have applications there’s plugins maybe we want to purchase fonts and that sort of thing you’ll also notice that I have something called free and this is where you get the free content that comes within CorelDRAW so things such as the fonts uh various textures fills bitmap fills as well as the clipart to access any of this content it’s simply a matter of clicking on the pack that you want and simply click on download it’s as simple as that okay let’s go back to our next slide now let’s take a look at the new document dialog box so from the file menu i’m going to select new in the new document dialog box we have a spot for the name the name is what’s going to appear in your title bar at the top there are a number of presets i can dictate how many pages I want this new document to be i can also select either page view as a single page or multi-page and this is new for CorelDRAW 2021. here’s my primary color mode and this will dictate what color palette is appearing on the right-hand side and under dimensions there is a number of preset page sizes that I can have access to I also have the ability to create a custom page size and then my rendering resolution now just a little point about the rendering resolution what that is is the resolution at which lenses and transparencies get rendered out as and so if you’re doing a large format print let’s say you’re doing a banner that is maybe 48 inches long and you have a piece of text on that with a drop shadow that drop shadow is going to get rendered out at 300 dpi something like that I would probably recommend bringing that down to 96 dpi you’re not going to lose any quality and what it will do is it will speed up the rip time for you and decrease the file size when you’re saving this file out I’m going to hit cancel on this and we’ll move to the next slide now one of the other features that we’ve added in 2021 is the autofit I love this feature I’m going to deselect the everything on the page you’ll notice my interactive property bar shows my page information here this icon is referred to as autofit so what i’m going to do is I’ll click on the autofit icon and here I can set up a margin now i’m going to set up a margin of an eighth of an inch rather than trying to figure out what the decimal point is for that i’m just gonna go one divided by eight and then i’ll select autofit now it created the page it autofit the page it did not take this into consideration simply because this is on what we refer to as a master layer and i’ll talk a little bit more about that in a moment so it’s a great way to take an object or take a design and shrink the page or stretch the page to fit the actual content on screen now let’s take a look at the Pages docker the Pages docker gives you the ability to easily edit multi-page documents from the windows menu I’m going to go down to dockers and I’ll select pages now within the Pages docker I have the ability to do a single page view I can do a multi-page view and with the multi-page view I’ll just zoom out a bit and you can see that I have my multiple pages set up here for this particular video within the multi-page within the multi-page view I have the ability to dictate the layout whether I want it as tiled I want vertical horizontal or maybe I want to do a custom layout of the pages themselves I can also dictate how many columns and the spacing between columns so if I was to drop this down by one then this is going to refresh itself and it will give me seven columns across now another nice thing about it is that I can select any of the pages within the docker itself that then becomes the active page you’ll notice the active page the page number is in blue one other really nice feature about dealing with the Pages docker is if I had an object on the page and I want to move it to a different page then I simply need to click and drag and that object will now be on this next page so it makes it very easy to edit across pages I also have the ability to sort the pages or reorder them so in the docker I can select a page click and drag and move it to a different location and thereby reordering my pages now let’s take a look at file i o with file i o or file input output we talk about importing and exporting so i’m going to import an image i’ll click on my import icon alternatively i could have done a control I or file import and i’m going to bring in this image here one thing I want to point out here is bottom right hand corner on the import icon i have a drop down here i have the ability to import this i can import it as externally linked i can import as high res for output provided i’m using an opi server in this case i am not and that’s why it’s grayed out i also have the ability to resample and load or crop and load if i selected crop and load for example it’s going to allow me to crop this image and then I’ll simply click ok and it will bring this image in now here I can simply left click my mouse button which will drop it in place at full size i can hit enter it’ll center it on the page or spacebar for original position I can also click and drag and dictate what size I want this to come in at and so there’s my my image importing now one other new feature that we’ve added to CorelDRAW 2021 is the Multi-asset export to access the Multi-asset export from the Windows menu I’m going to go down to dockers and I’ll select export in the Export docker I can select an image and then click on this icon here which will add that to my export list here we can see it’s picked up the name based on the name that i’ve given this in the object manager and here I can see that I have the ability to change this from jpeg to gif to png or pdf I’m going to select png for this under the settings I have the ability to set the settings for the png and of course there’s different formats of png or different flavors of png in here under the transform I can set my resolution so if I wanted to use this on a web page something like that I might want to drop this down to 96 dpi and I can click ok now here I have the ability to duplicate this and what that will allow me to do is it will put another copy of the alamo here and I’m going to change this and I want this as a gif image I’ll leave the settings as default I also have the ability to add an asset with these settings so if I selected this image here and I clicked on I’m going to go with png add asset with the settings it’s going to add the greek runes to this with the same settings as the png for the alamo so if I had multiple objects selected I can select these objects I can come down here and I can add these objects to my export list as well and now it’s simply a matter of clicking on export all and what this will do is it will export these files out to a folder that I’ve already set up in here now that I have the images exported I can open up the folder where I’ve sent them to and we can see that I have my images in here so I have the jpeg the png and then these other png’s as well all right let me close this docker off and we’ll go on to the next page so new from template or templates as I mentioned very easy to create new documents based on a template it’s simply a matter of going to the file menu and selecting new from template and what this is going to do is it’s going to open up a template dialog box in here we can see that I have my templates I can also select all templates and with all templates selected we’ll be able to see the templates that are provided with the software and this allows me as I say to get a head start on creating a design so I can scroll through here I can select a specific template if I want to see these thumbnails larger then I can certainly do that just sliding this open a bit and then it’s simply a matter of clicking on the open and start to work with that template now I mentioned the uh Object docker. Object docker is a docker that parks on the right-hand side as most dockers do and in here I can see elements that are within the document here we can see I have a number of pages if I wanted to I can select this icon and that’s only going to show me the elements that are on this one particular page I can change pages up here as well and one thing you’ll notice if you’re a user of older versions of krill draw we enhance this quite a bit in CorelDRAW 2019 where we now have a visual representation of the objects that are on screen so for example if I select this flower you can actually see it in the Object docker also in here I have the ability to turn that visually off or I can lock it and do a number of other things within the Objects docker okay selecting and aligning objects so selecting of course is done with the pick tool i can single click on an element and that will select that i’ll do a ctrl z to undo that if i left click and drag it’s what we refer to as a marquee select so i’m going to marquee select this area and you can see that i can actually take this and pull this aside now if we have objects grouped together i don’t need to do a marquee select it’s simply a matter of single clicking and moving that element if we take a look at grouping for those that are relatively new to CorelDRAW and that term grouping if you visualize taking a bundle of pencils and putting an elastic band around it you still have your individual objects but they’re tied together with something so grouping basically allows you to tie objects together all right let’s take a look at another way of selecting elements i’ll select this ellipse and if i use the tab key it will cycle through objects in the order they are created so i’m going to select the cyan tab i’ll select my green tab yellow and i’m just hitting the tab key each one here’s magenta and then finally i’ll go with purple now aligning objects is very easy as well so with this object selected i’m going to hold my shift key down and i’ll start selecting these objects i’m going to select the red object last and now i’ve selected the red object i want to align these so i can align the top with t b for bottom l for left r for right c for center and e for even so very easy to align objects so if i had something like this over here i would marquee select these elements and then tap the letter l for left alignment and it would do that for me now two more things i want to show you about selecting elements first i’m going to take this cyan ellipse i’ll make it larger in fact i’m going to make it cover the entire image i’m holding the shift key down and that’s going to resize from the center out now i want you to watch in my Object docker over here if i hold the alt key down and i click right here it has selected the green element if i click again i have my yellow my red my and and then finally the purple element so selecting with the alt key down we refer to that as a dare key and it allows you to dig down one level at a time each time you click an advantage or a situation where you might use that is you’ve got a bitmap on screen with a lens over top of it maybe there’s some text on top of the bitmap and then the lens and you want to edit the text without having to move the lens you can simply use the alt key now another keyboard shortcut that helps with selecting is the control key so i’m going to take this element and do a shift f2 to zoom into it now with the control key held down i’m going to start clicking on some of these elements within here you’ll note that my sizing handles are round dots so i’ll click here and i’ll simply with the shift keyhole down as well i’ll select some of these elements and so very easy to select elements within a group using the control key one more thing you can use the control key for is in the color palette if i hold the ctrl key down and click on a color it’s going to add 10 percent of that color each time i click on it so each time i’m clicking it’s adding 10 percent more red to that element i can go and click on a bit of orange and change the color of that so 10 is added each time i click on a color within the color palette with the control key held down one more thing about the color palette is if i click and hold on it you can see that i have an array of colors that i can use and these are based on hsl or hue saturation and lightness let me just move out to my full page and let’s move on to the next page so copy versus duplicate i usually recommend that users do duplicate rather than copy when we do a copy of an element i want you to watch my cursor i’m going to do a ctrl c to copy and you’ll notice that my cursor turned to a little blue circle spinning circle it’s actually called a throbber but what was happening there it was taking the content from that image and copying it to the windows clipboard to do that it creates a temporary file watch my cursor once again when i do a ctrl v to paste that back in again i got that circle back it was reading from the temp file and it was dropping it into my document for me now the problem with that is that we end up building up a lot of temp files on the system there’s other processes that will build temp files as well such as printing and importing and exporting but temp files excessive temp files can really bog down the system if i was to draw an analogy it’s like hair and a drain it just plugs it right up now usually what i recommend is ctrl d and that would duplicate the element if i select this hold the ctrl key down to constrain it move that over i’ll do another ctrl d and you can see it’s duplicating and it’s remembering the distance that i used let me show you one other thing i’m going to marquee select these and delete them we’ll do this once again so i’ll do a ctrl d and you’ll notice on the interactive property bar this is an inch wide by one and a quarter high this is the position based on the zero zero coordinates of my rulers now if i want to change the zero zero coordinates of the rulers let’s say i do laser engraving and i want my zero zero to be top left simply clicking in the intersection up here drag this out i’ve now reset my rulers to zero zero being top left so i’m going to select this element and you can see I’ve duplicated that let me do a ctrl z I’ll duplicate that again and now in here I’m going to click plus one inch because that’s the width of it plus uh 3 16. 3 divided by 16 and hit enter so that has now created a copy of that 3 16 of an inch apart and if i keep hitting the ctrl d it will create an array for me i’ll marquee select these ctrl d and it’s 1.25 so in here I want to go minus 1.25 minus and I can mix and match units of measure so here i want to go one millimeter and I’ll hit enter so these are a millimeter apart and control d and it will remember that so if you want to do for example you’re doing a name plates and cravings some name plates and your name plates are three quarters of an inch by two inches or inch and a quarter by three and a half inches whatever they might be you create those rectangles duplicate them into an array cut that out to make your jig and then simply put that in the engraver create your document and you’re ready to go so it’s a great time saver all right let’s talk a little bit about shaping now shaping in CorelDRAW is done of course with the shape tool there’s also a number of different shaping commands so if I select this rectangle you’ll notice on my interactive property bar at the top there’s some some things i can do with this I can change the type of corner rounding on this so for example if I grab my shape tool now I can change this to a chamfer let’s go back to the rounded corner and now if I hold the shift key down and select the yellow object as well I have two objects selected now my interactive property bar is changed here I can do a combine and a combine will create a knockout where the objects overlap i’m going to do a control z to undo that I’ll do another control z I’ll select the yellow object first hold the shift key down select my blue element and then hit combine and you’ll notice that they’ve changed blue so shaping commands are based on the last object selected let me do a ctrl z for this and now with the shift key held down I’ll click weld and think of machine shop metal shop welding two pieces of metal together they become one and that’s basically what we’ve done here I’m going to do a ctrl z and the final one I want to show is simplify so selecting these elements i’ll click on simplify and that acts as a cookie cutter and it cuts down below so I can move this element out of the way and you can see that it has cut out of the red it’s also cut out a little yellow I’ll select my yellow i can move that aside and that’s actually cut out of the red let’s just go ahead and i’m going to move this back here now one more thing with respects to shaping and freehand drawing and that sort of thing dealing with curves i’m going to grab my freehand tool and if i do a single click and move my cursor someplace else it will allow me to create a straight line if I hold the ctrl key down it will constrain that on 15 degree increments of course i can change that in tools options but for now I just want to point out that if I left click now it will lock it in place you’ll note that my cursor is a downward pointing arrow if I left click now it’s actually going to join to that element i’ll click over here a second click and then I can click up here and that will end that off i’ve now created a solid shape but I can then give a fill i’m going to tap my space bar now the space bar here’s another little tool tip the space bar will actually toggle back and forth between your pick tool and the last tool selected so if i have the rectangle selected and i draw a rectangle i tap my spacebar it goes back to the pick tool that allows me to move elements around or select other elements okay I’m going to show you some other stuff with the freehand tool so i’ll click on my freehand tool I’ll left click drag down here i’m going to double click i’ll double click over here in this spot up here as well and then finally i want to move it do i get that pointed arrow and I’ll single click now if i grab my shape tool and I marquee select this on the interactive property bar I can convert these lines to curves and now with the shape tool i can come over here and zoom in a little bit and I can actually move these curves into position and this is a typically how you would recreate a logo or redraw a logo by by grabbing these elements and move them into position I’m just doing this very quickly to give you an idea now i’m going to tap my spacebar I’ll come back over here and I’ll grab my freehand tool again and again I’m just going to do this very quickly close that off grab my shape tool and marquee select this convert to a curve and then I will move these into position tap the space bar I’m going to do a control d to duplicate that and i’ll just move this down here it’s not accurate but you get an idea now if i marquee select this i’m going to give them all a color and if you remember combine creates a knockout where objects overlap i’ve now combined that and we now have created this shape again let’s do it on f4 to zoom out to my page and i’m going to move on to my next page i’m moving back and forth on pages and i’m using number one and number two on the keyboard i’ll explain why later on when we get to the end of this session and i’ll show you some other ways in which you can save a lot of time in design work okay i’m going to show the crop tool now so in my toolbox i have a couple of different tools here i’m going to grab the crop tool i’ll left click and drag and i will double click that’s going to crop this out but you’ve noticed that it’s gotten rid of the entire design this is actually a common call that we used to get on the support line the reason it did this is because i did not have anything selected so let me just do a control z to undo i’ll tap my space bar i’ll marquee select this element tap my space bar again gives me back my crop tool and now when i crop i can double click and it will crop out from what i have selected and this is typically the way you would want to do it now the next tool i want to show is the knife tool and with the knife tool i’m going to tap my space bar marquee select this get my knife tool back and you’ll notice on the knife tool setting on the property bar i have the ability to do a two-point line i can do a free line i can do bezier a number of things here i also have the ability to set an overlap or a gap now if i’m doing a vinyl for windows and i want to span a couple of window panes then maybe i want to do a gap to allow for the aluminum uprights in there if i’m doing embroidery and i want to create a split front then i’ll want to go with an overlap i’m going to set my overlap for this design at quarter inch and that’s simply a matter of left clicking and dragging hold the ctrl key down to keep that constrained when i let the mouse button go you can see it’s actually cropped it for me now if i marquee select this area here i’m going to move this straight down you can see that i’ve created a bit of it let me move that down a little bit more you see that i’ve actually created an overlynch a 1 8 overlap for this let me just move that back into place temporarily all right so the next thing i want to show is the virtual segment delete tool we used to have to take a circle if i wanted to cut a piece out of this circle i would have to convert the circle to curves i’d have to add nodes break the nodes apart break the entire thing apart and then delete that element with the virtual segment delete tool it made it much much easier i can draw a line across here i’m going to grab my virtual segment delete tool and then simply click on this line here and that will delete that and then of course i can select this line and delete it and so i’ve cut the top off now with the virtual segment delete tool i can go through this design and delete whatever lines i want um that to make my design also if i hold the alt key down i can left click and drag and whatever this marquee touches will be deleted when i release the mouse button all right i’m going to show you some of the interactive tools within CorelDRAW now i’m going to right click and i just want to make sure that i have lock toolbars deselected that then will allow me to click and hold and i can grab the gripper bar at the top and pull this toolbar right out so this gives me the ability to bring the tools out at hand and this is just to start to customize the interface so if i use these two little tools a lot i don’t want to have to go digging through that i can bring them out on screen the first one i want to show is a blend and i simply left click and drag and so i’m blending from one object to the next when we create something like a blend or a drop shadow even an extrude there’s something referred to as a control object i’m going to tap my space bar i’ll deselect and now if i select this magenta element you can see that i have in the status bar a control ellipse selected if i change the color of this control ellipse it will change the way the blend appears there’s so with the blend there’s two control objects the other one is at the back and i’m going to change that i also have the ability with the blend to change the number of steps it’s going to make it a lot smoother there’s a number of features up here where i can change the the rate at which it blends and that sort of thing next we have the contour tool so with the contour tool and the object selected i can set the number of contours to the outside or to the inside i can also dictate the width of that so if i’m creating an applique i may want two steps to the outside i can then take these elements and from the objects menu i can i can break that apart tap my space bar and i now have these separate elements that i can use i’ll need to ungroup that and so these are my three separate elements i can use if i’m using tackle twill or something like that i can simply send these to the engraver and cut them out or whatever method you use for cutting your twill all right next one is the envelope tool so with the piece of text selected i’ll click on the envelope tool i’m going to zoom into this a little bit you’ll notice that i have nodes here if i click and drag this node you can see it’s not a very smooth curve do a control z if i double click the node it’ll remove it if i double click anywhere on the line it will add a node for me and so i can move from there if i wanted to if you want a nice smooth curve delete that node and simply move my line straight up let me do a control z delete this note as well that sort of got in the way and i can move this straight up so i have a nice smooth curve here i’m going to show you another little tool tip is if i hold my rollerball on my mouse down it’s going to change the pan tool and i can pan around my document now i could use the letter h for pan the drawback with using that is i then have to go back over to my toolbar to select a different tool in order to get it away from the pan tool so the rollerball on your mouse is very easy to zoom around one other thing you can do is tap the letter n on your keyboard i refer to this as a nano preview and what that’s going to do is it’s going to show me my entire page and so i can move to a different area when i’m in the area that i want i’ll simply left click my mouse button i also have that capability down the bottom right hand corner clicking here would do the same thing for me i prefer the letter n it’s a lot easier so let’s take a look at extrude i’m going to select this element and then i’ll click on extrude and this now allows me to pull this back and i can change my vanishing point to wherever i want to zoom in a little bit and in the interactive property bar at the top there’s a number of different features so for example if i wanted to i could add color to this and within the color i can change whatever color i want maybe i want that to go from red to to green then i can certainly do that I’m going to do an f4 to zoom back out and the next is drop shadow now in 2020 we added a new drop shadow called the inside drop shadow and so we’ve changed the drop shadow here uh this used to be the regular drop shadow now if I select that I have to come up to the direct property bar for my regular drop shadow and I will click and drag and that allows me to create a drop shadow uh i can set this drop shadow any position i want to if i was to do it from the edge of the document or from the bot let’s say from the bottom creating a drop shadow allows me to change the angle of that the perspective and it now makes it look as though the light is coming from above and behind i’m going to undo that and
let’s just do your regular drop shadow with the drop shadow one thing you can do is i can come up here on the interactive property bar and i can change the color of that drop shadow i could also grab a color from the color palette and drag and drop into the square now the next drop shadow i want to show is the inside drop shadow and this is a new one we added in 2020 with this one i simply click and drag and that will create a shadow for me so this is an inside inside drop shadow and it’s now made it look as though this is a cut out depending on where this is will determine how that’s going to look i want just a little bit on there and so that’s a pretty cool effect and the final shadow is the block shadow now the black shadow is part of the effects toolbar so with this object selected i’m going to hold my roller ball down just pan up a little bit i’m going to select my block shadow tool i’ll click and drag and i’ll just move that off a little bit on the interactive property bar i can do a number of things such as changing the offset changing the angle of it i can change color i have the ability to simplify simplify is actually kind of interesting i can remove holes and whatnot i’m going to simplify that and now from the objects menu i’m going down to break block shadow apart i’ll tap my space bar to give me my pick tool and then i’ll just move this out of the way so we’ve created an interesting effect right here with our block shadow tool let’s move that back onto the page I’ll do an f4 to zoom to the entire page and let’s move on to my next page we talked a little bit about enveloping a very quick way to create a virtual sample simply matter clicking and dragging and there we have it actually this doesn’t really look like a very good virtual sample we can easily dress this up a bit I’m going to make this a little bit smaller I’ll position this I’m going to grab my envelope tool and now I’m going to double click this node to remove it and I want to bring this down and I’m going to try and match the curvature of the top of the mug and here I want to match the curvature of the bottom of the mug and so now that looks a little bit more realistic for a virtual sample I can use my cursor keys to nudge this up a little bit and now I can send this off to the customer and potentially get the order transparencies and lenses so they’re fairly similar with lenses there’s a number of different things you can do I’m going to grab this magnifying glass and I actually have a magnifying lens that I grouped into this lens itself so when I click and drag and I bring this over my image you can see it’s magnified in there I’m going to open up my lens docker from the windows menu down to dockers down to effects and lenses so you can see that I have no lens effect and that’s because I’ve selected a group of elements I want to select just the lens itself so if you remember control plus click allows me to select an object within a group I can now change the type of lens so if I want a color limit maybe I want a fisheye lens or something like a heat map lens so there’s a number of different lenses in here that you can play around with and create various effects tinted grayscale transparency wireframe bitmap effects and that sort of thing transparencies allow me to take an object and actually let’s go back to the previous page where I have a little more space I’m going to draw a rectangle I’ll give it a solid color fill and I’ll select my transparency tool now here I can left-click and drag and create a transparency so we faded out to this position if I move this up here I can set the fade on that and actually have it fade away to nothing if I was to put this over top of an image you can see that I’ve got it faded down this way let’s take a look at that other page in here we can also do this to bitmaps so I’m going to select this element I’ll hold the shift key down I’ll select this image here and if you remember the alignment keys it’s l for left b for bottom and now with the transparency tool selected i’ll left click and drag and i basically cause the image above to fade into the one in the back so i’ve created an interesting effect let’s do it one more time with this i’m going to do a shift f2 and that will zoom into this element i’ll tap my spacebar i’ll left click and drag on a bit of an angle here and so i’ve taken this front image and i’ve created transparency on this half of it i’m going to tap my space bar to return to pick tool i hold my alt key down I’ll click once more that has now selected the second bitmap down i’ll tap my spacebar and i’ll left click and drag with my transparency tool and just bring this up a little bit and so i’ve actually created another transparency in here move that down a little bit make a little bit more realistic so very easy i’ve taken three separate images and created a rather interesting effect with those if i was to pull this apart you can see what that would look like okay let’s undo these and I’ll move on to my next slide so perspective now just a little side note here in CorelDRAW 2021 we’ve added the capability to draw in perspective I will not be covering that here you’ve already seen that in the in the previous presentation but uh I do want to show you perspective with bitmaps that we’ve recently added to CorelDRAW I’m going to shift f2 to zoom into this and now by selecting this bitmap i’m going to position the upper left hand corner in this and this is relatively new the ability to add perspective to a bitmap so from the objects menu i’ll go down to perspective and then select add perspective now it’s simply a matter of moving the corners of this image onto this billboard itself and that will make it look as though the image is right on the billboard let’s move this in i’ll let it go and that way i can see where i want that to go so very quick and very easy i’ve given the illusion that this image is on the billboard i’m going to zoom back out here it is with text the same sort of thing i’ll move it on to this easel and from the objects menu down to perspective and then add perspective and it’s simply a matter as i say dragging these four corner nodes into the corner areas of the chalkboard or blackboard and there we go so we create a sandwich board that we can stand outside the restaurant maybe i’m doing a mock-up of a restaurant and i want to put something like that inside then i can certainly do that all right let’s talk a little bit about text now in CorelDRAW there’s two types of text we have artistic text and paragraph text they’re both created using the same tool so on the left-hand side in the toolbar I’ll simply click on my text tool and now if I click on my page I can type artistic text to create paragraph text with the text tool selected it’s a left click and drag and i create a paragraph text frame now in this frame if i was to right click for example i can insert placeholder text and that will give you a visual representation is what this is going to look like so if i wanted to create a mock-up of a newsletter or something like that then i can certainly do that just to to draw the differences between artistic text and paragraph text as an analogy if you take a look at a box of cereal the brand of cereal on the front or the the name of the serial in the front is going to be artistic text the contest rules or ingredients on the back is going to be paragraph text one common question we get is i want to be able to wrap my text around a circle or around an ellipse and i want to be able to read it properly so with the text selected right click and drag i’m going to let the mouse button go and i’ll select fit text to path that’s put the text on the path for me now bottom left hand corner or the of the piece of text itself i have a little red glyph it’s kind of hard to see here but it’s there and as i move my text you’ll see a red beam appear so the text is starting at the 12 o’clock position it’s centered at 12 o’clock and i have these red beams at 3 6 9 and 12 o’clock positions and it allows me for easy centering i’m going to select this piece of text now because this object is no longer an ellipse is now considered a compound object i cannot right click and drag so instead what i’ll do is i’ll go to my text menu and down to fit text to path and then i’ll point to where the path is once i position the text where i want it i’ll let my mouse button go and then i want to flip this around so on the interactive property bar i’m going to mirror horizontally mirror vertically and now if i want to i can just grab the glyph here and position that text in place you’ll also notice that there’s a little flag there that says it’s .375 inches that’s a great way to ensure that this piece of text is the same distance as that one all right one more thing on text is variable font support and that’s relatively new in CorelDRAW as well so with variable fonts you have the ability of changing certain parameters of that font with the font selected and let me just move my page over to this side with the font selected i’ll click on this icon it’s a drop down with all the different properties that i can change for this piece of text now this particular font has quite a large number of variables that i can modify most pieces of variable text that i’ve seen or most fonts that i’ve seen will typically have one two three or four options that you can play around with so for example i can change inline i can bring that up a bit and you can see we now have a little bit of a an outline type font maybe i want to change the weight of it as well so i can bring that up there’s a number of different uh options for this particular font that i can do as you can see very easy to to modify the text let me just bring this back centered on the page and if i type another piece of text and we’ll type a piece of text let’s call it breakaway I’ll select this with my pick tool selected select this piece of text right click and drag let the mouse button go and copy all properties so i’ve now included those properties or added these properties to this piece of text and it makes it a lot easier than me having to go back in here and figure out exactly what settings i had okay let me just bring up Corel Font Manager and in chrome Font Manager you’ll notice that i have libraries on the left hand side i have a number of filters here on my toolbar across the top i have the ability to create what we call a watched folder now a watched folder is a folder that’s located on your hard drive and any font that you put in there the Font Manager will pick up on and we can make use of that you no longer have to have the font installed in order to be able to use it in fact if you look on the right hand side fonts that have the green bar are fonts that are installed those that have the yellow bar they’re not installed we can also see that these are open type fonts this is a true type font and i can scroll through here and see all the fonts that i’ve got and actually if you look at the bottom left-hand corner you can see i have over 8 000 fonts on this system they’re not installed they’re not all installed into windows and therefore it’s not going to be slowing my system down further on the right hand side if i was to select a font over here i’m going to be able to see the glyphs that are within that font i can also filter those glyphs so i want to see what currency glyphs are in that particular font or mathematical symbols and that sort of thing now for me to install a font if i scroll down to a font that’s not installed I’ll select a font right click and it’s simply a matter of clicking on install if I have a font that’s already installed and I want to remove it then simply matter right-clicking and uninstalling with respect to the collections if I pull this down a bit you can see I have a number of different collections in here so here are my chalk fonts I have grunge fonts poster these are collections that I’ve created to create a collection it’s simply a matter of clicking on this icon and that will allow me to create a new collection and I can give that whatever name I want and then it’s simply a matter of going to my fonts I can right-click on a font and I can add to collection and then in here I’ll just dictate what collection I want to put that in and now if I was to go to that collection I can see that I have that font in there how does this work with curl draw let me just minimize this i’m back in CorelDRAW i’ll select this piece of text up here i’ll go to my fonts drop down and in here you can see i have filters actually turned on right now just click the funnel it’ll turn your filters on i’ll deselect this filter actually i can clear all filters that are currently selected and i can go through looking for specific filters maybe i want to go into my grunge folder that i’ve created i can click on this and that will select all the grunge fonts and it will allow me to pick from those instead of having to scroll through a great big massive list of fonts all right let’s move on now clipart is very easy to access so to access my clipart i’ll go into the connect Content docker i already have that open so i’ll click on that and in here you can see we have a add the clipart up here i have the ability to search so just type in horse and very quick it’s found a number of images that have horse as a keyword to use that of course simply click and drag and i can bring that in on the screen and then make use of that of that image if i have my own collection of clipart and i want to bring that in it’s easy enough to do i’ll select the drop down and at the very bottom i have add new in here i can click on create alias and then browse to a folder where i have that content now that content can be on the local drive or it can be on a network share so i can have access to that clipart and that can be shared out for other people that have licenses for CorelDRAW that also want access to the clipart let me just close off the Connect docker and i might as well close off these other ones as well okay let’s talk a little bit of PowerClip now PowerClip gives me the ability to take an object or group of objects and put that inside a container now this container can be a piece of text it can be an object or a group of objects I’m going to select this bitmap image I’ll right-click and drag and left the mouse button go and power clip inside it’s as easy as that a lot of people will go to the objects menu and do power clip there I find this quite a bit quicker now I want to center that properly you’ll notice I have a small menu up here I can hit the drop-down and I go center content if I want to edit this hold the ctrl key down and click on the container itself that will put me into the edit state and I can move this around I can resize it or do whatever I want to with it to finish editing control-click outside and that takes me out of the editing of the power clip image now in this scenario I have an image and I do sublimation I’ve got a customer that owns a restaurant and I want to pitch to him that we can take this image and make a mural on the back wall of the restaurant using ceramic tiles in CorelDRAW something like that is very easy to do takes me very little time and to do a mural on ceramic tiles I can probably earn a pretty penny on that to do it in CorelDRAW in my toolbox underneath the polygon tool I have my graph paper tool now this particular image is 4×6 so with the graph paper tool selected I want to change it to I want to have 12 by 8 and now if I left click and drag I’ll create a grid over top of this tap my space bar I’m now going to move this grid over here now if I take this image I can right-click and drag power clip inside and then I want to center my contents with the contents in here I’ll select the element I’m going to use ungroup and it’s now ungrouped the individual cells for that graph paper tool I’ll marquee select the top row I’ll move it straight up and I’ll take this element here and I’ll move that straight over now if I marquee select this I can do a shift e for evenly space and I can do it for the subsequent roles as well so if I was to move this up here align that with this object here marquee select and a shift e you get the idea so we break all this out I’ve then go ahead and print this on my sublimating paper sublimate the tiles and then I can take it to the customer site and install it we have a beautiful mural in the back of his restaurant wall all right power trace so power trace allows you to convert from a raster image to a vector image i’m going to start with this one here and if i go to the trace bitmap menu i can also access this from the bitmap menu as well but we have it on the interactive property bar so much quicker to access from here i’ll click on the drop down go to outline trace and then i’ll select clipart this opens up my powertrace dialog box i’m going to make that full screen now for those that are doing excuse me for those that are doing vinyl cutting or screen printing i want you to pay attention to this one item here this is group by color and this will become evident in a few seconds so i’m going to select group by color then i can go to my colors tab and in here i can reduce the number of colors so i’m going to hold the ctrl key down and click on this and i’ll merge these colors i also have the ability in here to edit the color so if i wanted something other than blue i can certainly do that so i’m just simply reducing these colors down we’re doing a screen screen print we don’t want to deal with too many colors in there seven colors is a bit much but i’ll leave it like that for now on the adjustments tab here i have the ability uh if it’s a low quality jpeg image that i can remove the jpeg artifacting i also have up sampling options available as well for illustration and photo realistic i’m simply going to click ok to this it’s going to return me back to CorelDRAW let me go ahead and select the background and are the bitmap image rather and i’ll delete that now if i select this element and i look in my Object docker you can see i have a group of six objects i’m going to ungroup this now i have ungroup and i have ungroup all i’ll simply ungroup it with it ungrouped you can see i have a group of seven objects by selecting that double clicking the outline fill or sorry the fill dialog down here in here i can select color palettes and I can go into my spot color so very quick and very easy we’ll be able to take this image and convert it to spot colors so I can get ready for making my screens once I’ve gone into the proper palette that I want to use it will automatically match the closest color to it I’ll simply click ok and now all of these items all these blue items are now the spot color blue of course I do have the ability to change that if I want to grab a specific Pantone color then I can do that as well now with this image I’ve often been asked how do I take a bitmap image and create a cut line around it so I want to do a print cut solution I need a cut line around this easy way to do that is within power trace I’m going to go to outline trace again I’ll select clip art and here what I’m going to do on the colors tab I’ll reduce my number of colors right down so I’m going to bring that down to about three or four colors on the settings tab I want to make sure that I have d delete original image not selected I’ll click ok to this now with this vector group selected I’m going to go to my objects menu down to shaping and then to boundary that’s now created a hairline outline around the perimeter if I hold my alt key down I do a single click I’ve actually selected the group of elements of course i could do this in the Object docker and it’s simply a matter of hitting delete I now have a cut line around the perimeter of that bitmap that I can go ahead and send that out and then do the cutting all right continuing with bitmaps this is just a couple of little watch outs or things not to do within CorelDRAW or ways to to overcome particular issues so for example we can crop a bitmap and of course you can use the shape tool to marquee select these two nodes hold the control key down and i can move that in and i can crop the the image that way the drawback that with that is i haven’t really changed the image at all all i’ve done is i’ve created what we call a soft mask now if i select my crop tool and marquee select i can double click and it will crop that for me if you do want to use this method here you certainly can for example maybe i wanted to round one of the corners then i can do that if you’re doing that i strongly recommend that after you do that go to the bitmap menu convert to bitmap set whatever resolution you want and then click ok what that’s going to do is it’s going to get rid of that soft mask and make it the bitmap the way it is resizing an image very similar as well this is actually a power clip so if a control click you can see that my image is actually rotated when we have a rotated bitmap in CorelDRAW and send that down to the printer it’s going to have to rotate those lines of of a pixel sort of thing as it’s ripping it and that’s going to increase the rip time at when you’re printing to overcome that bitmap menu convert to bitmap and then set your resolution in here that’s all there is to it one other very very common mistake is customers will import bitmap images click and drag to size them the way they want them put them on their screen maybe they’re doing a uh a catalog of supplemental sublimatable items that you create so you’ve got 25 bitmap images on a page that you’ve imported resize down and then you go and print it and you wonder why it’s taking so long to print when you resize an image down in this manner by using the shaping handles take a look at the resolution down below you’re not reducing the size of the bitmap itself you’re only reducing the visual footprint of it so if you need to reduce a bitmap down like that once you’ve done that go to bitmap convert to bitmap and then simply click ok that now has gotten rid of that extra weight on the bitmap and it will increase or sorry it will reduce your file size tremendously sampling up until CorelDRAW 2021 we provided ben vista photo zoom uh which was an application that allowed you to up sample bitmaps we’ve now brought the capabilities of up sampling into CorelDRAW 2021 and it’s done a beautiful job i’m going to select this bitmap here it’s 150 dpi and you can see it’s roughly 6×7 inches if i go to my bitmap menu and down to resample in here i have the ability to increase or decrease if i select that i want to increase the size and i’m going to do something crazy i’m going to go 800 percent automatically you’ll see i now have these options down here so i can do the up sampling illustration photorealistic or just leave it as is for time photo photo realistic is going to take a bit of processing time i’m just going to leave it as is just to show you that keeping in mind that photorealistic will give you much higher quality so simply click ok to this and you can see very quickly it’s upsampled that image now i had two copies of this image on this page so if i hold the alt key down and i click right about here it’s going to dig down it’s going to select that bitmap below i’m going to bring that to the front and now i’m going to do an f4 and that zooms out to my entire page this is my original image that was 150 dpi this is the resized image at 800 percent larger it’s now 56 by 34 at 150 dpi so really does a beautiful job of up sampling i’m going to select this and delete that and move on to the next page let’s take a look at a couple of the labs that we have within PHOTO-PAINT I’m going to select this image here I’ll right-click and I’ll select edit bitmap now this is going to launch PHOTO-PAINT for me um now I’ll maximize the screen and from the image menu I’ll go down to cutout lab this gives me the ability to remove the background so let’s maximize this screen as well first I’m going to grab my highlighter I’ll zoom in a little bit more and what I want to do is I want to draw a border around the element itself or the object that I want to cut out notice that I’m trying to keep half on half off I’m not being super critical or super careful rather that’s not a problem at all I can fix that up in a few moments let me just zoom out a little bit and I’m going to come straight across here and we’ll go up this side as well now I can change the brush size to make it finer or coarser that basically allows me to go a little bit faster I probably could have made this a little bit wider and gone a little bit quicker but that’s fine once I’ve got the area marked off that I want to keep I’m going to use the fill bucket and that will preserve the area that I want now bottom left-hand corner I’m going to click on preview this allows me to preview my image I can zoom in and it’s going to pan down a little bit you’ll notice some areas that I’ve taken out too much and other areas where I haven’t taken out enough this allows me to add back areas that I’ve taken out too much and it’s just a matter of brushing over this area and sometimes it’s a little difficult to see with this grid pattern in the background so what I can do is under background I have none I can select grayscale I can set matte black or I can set white matte and this allows me to better see what areas that I have to remove or what areas that I have to fill in now for speed or sorry for time-wise I’m not going to go around the entire image just want to show you basically how this is done so it’s just a matter of brushing out the areas that I don’t want and we’ll come down here and to brush in the areas that I do want and I’m going to leave it like that you get the idea I’ll simply click ok to this that’s going to return me into PHOTO-PAINT with the background removed I can click on finish editing or simply close out the application I’ll answer yes to this and it’s going to put me back into CorelDRAW with this image cut out from the background now let’s take a look at one more lab and that’s the image adjustment lab so I’ll select this image right click and select edit bitmap and let’s maximize PHOTO-PAINT and now from the adjust menu I’m going to Image Adjustment Lab and let’s maximize this now in here there’s a number of different changes that I can make to this image first off I can change the temperature so that’s brought made a little bit warmer brought the colors a little bit more natural I also have the ability to increase saturation can modify brightness contrast highlights shadows and midtones and basically bring up the image to get something that is acceptable also within the image adjustment lab bottom left-hand corner you have this camera icon by clicking on that it’s going to create a snapshot so I can go through I can make some additional changes maybe I want to bring up the contrast a little bit and let’s play with the shadows I’ll create another snapshot try bringing this down quite a bit and see what happens there that’s a little bit too dark and so we can play around with this I could have tried the auto adjust to see if that how that is this allows me the ability to set my white point and my black point and so once i’ve gone through and i’ve gotten an image that i like the the coloring to i’ll simply select it you’ll note the blue bar at the top and when i click ok that’s the image that i’m going to be bringing back into PHOTO-PAINT so let me just close this down again that’s going to return me to CorelDRAW with the image update um this is a little effect i like to show creating a diff distressed effect now this can be done with a raster image i find that rusted metal this is an old piece of weathered wood maybe a photograph of ripples on a a swimming pool stuff like that work quite well what i’m going to do is i’ll start off by resizing this image to completely cover my artwork now from the bitmap menu i’m going to go down to mode and i want to select grayscale next i’m going to go to my effects menu down to adjust and i want to bring up my tone curve now in the tone curve what i want to do is i want to reduce the amount of white in the image and intensify the blacks something like that and i’ll click okay to this all right now that we’ve got this what i’m going to do is i’m going to go to my bitmap menu down to mode once again and i’m going to select black and white now with black and white i want to make sure i’m using line art and here i can set the threshold to make it more or less noticeable i’ll leave it like that and click ok now one thing about a black and white image image is that it’s a one bit image that bit can either be on or off what i can do is i can change my fill to white and my outline to nothing and what that’s done is it’s basically giving me the white area so this allows me to create a distressed look all right the next i want to show is non-destructive effects so new to quell draw 2019 we’ve added the ability to create non-destructive effects these effects can be applied to both bitmaps as well as vector so i’m actually applying bitmap effects to a vector object so if i go to my effects menu i’m going to go down to art strokes and i’ll select impressionist let it process that I’ll click ok now if I go back up to the effects menu I want to go to creative and then to fabric we’ll apply the quilt effect and finally back up to the effects menu down to blur and I’m going to add a gaussian blur to this and I’ll accept the defaults that I have here and click ok now if I right-click on this you’ll see that I have object properties selected so that tells me I have the object Properties docker already opened up on the right-hand side I’m going to click on properties and in here when I select this element I now have an effects tab I’ll click on my effects tab and you can see that I’ve applied a gaussian blur fabric impressionist in here I have the ability to turn that vision on or off I also have the ability to edit it directly in here and I can add another effect if I wanted to i also have the ability to delete the effect or change the order of the effect so we’ve been able to add effects to this element without actually causing any distortion or any um degradation of the original element now one more thing about this that makes it very useful is if I right-click on this and I go down to object styles new style from bitmap effect and I’m just going to call this uh test and I’ll click ok I’ve got open object Style docker selected so when I click ok it will open up the object Styles docker with this style in it that I can then make use of so I have my style that I’ve created I can select this element click apply to selected and this will apply that same style to this I have a piece of text over here I can apply it to this object as well it’s simply a matter of selecting the text and simply click apply to select it now if I wanted to I can come back in here I can select this effect I don’t want that I simply hit the delete key and it will delete the effect from all of the objects that I have on screen all right let me close off the Styles docker and we’ll go on to our next page so art styles art styles are a lot of fun to play with if I go to my effects menu down to creative and in here I have art style now there’s a number of different art styles that we have available to us first one is smooth acrylic these effects are fairly intensive and there is a control within tools options that I can have it use GPU processing as well to improve the speed of that so this is the acrylic style I’m going to grab neon for example and I’ll make that medium and here we have that effect so it’s a lot of fun to play with this I’m going to hit cancel on this let me go on to the next slide now in here we have uh scripts and macros I’m just going to show you one macro and that is the color swatch so you have a you’re doing sublimation or screen printing you’ve approached a school phys ed class they want track suits made and they also want um sorry track suits printed on and they want their gym bags to have a logo on them as well so you want to be able to match the school colors so what colors are you going to use if we go to the windows menu down to color palettes and i’m going to click on palettes now in here i’m going to go to spot palette i’ll click on pantone and then i’m going to go into previous version and i want to select the first one which is the corel8 pantone palette this is the pantone palette that has the pantone white in it now this particular script will only work with color palettes that are currently open so if i was to open a couple of other color palettes and here’s the pastel color palette now i’m going to launch the script so if i go to my tools menu down to scripts and then run in here under macros in i want to select color chart creator and i’ll click run once again in this dialog box when i hit the drop down you’ll see i have a number of palettes in here these are the palettes that i’ve just opened up as well as my document palette across the bottom so i want to select this palette here i can add a date printer information i can also set the spacing i’m going to bring that spacing down to two i can put an outline around each color i don’t want to do that and i’ll simply click ok and as you can see it’s created the document for me I’ll go back to the beginning of the document and now I have the ability to go through this document let me just go to my windows menu down to dockers and I’m going to select pages in here I’m going to select multi-page and I’ll just zoom out and you can see that we have a number of pages in here with my color palette on that so very quick and very easy I can print out whichever sheet that I want to and then and then go from there all right let’s go back out to a single page I’m going to close off the Palettes docker I’ll close off my Pages docker and let’s just close off this file completely all right Pointillizer so this is a used to be called an extension that we shipped with CorelDRAW x8 and it’s a great way to create a pseudo halftone type pattern uh within document so with the file selected I’m going to go to my effects menu and down to Pointilizer and in here I’ll just leave the defaults as they are I’ll simply click apply very quickly it’s gone through and it’s created a half tone pattern using 16 colors let me do a ctrl z to undo that I’ll deselect color limit and I’ll click apply once again so it’s going to go through the file and it’s going to create that image with the multiple colors I’m going to delete this and I want to show you one more with this process so I’m going to select this clipart image under shape you can see I have circle I also have custom I’m going to select custom I’ll click on select and I’ll click on this it’s just a piece of text I created with the letter x and I’ll apply so I’ve taken this clipart image and I’ve now created a cross stitch pattern so if you wanted to sublimate something like that onto a cotton towel or something like that then you can certainly do that I’m just going to do an f4 to zoom back out to my page and let’s go on to the next okay I’m going to close off this docker and I also want to close out these color palettes so go to my windows menu down to color palettes and then to palettes now I could drag these off and close them out one at a time I can also come in here and I will simply deselect the pallets that are in here and that will effectively turn them all off okay I’ll close up the Palettes docker so from time to time you’ll want to create a custom color palette based on a document or a selection i’m going to select this element and then from the windows menu i’ll go down to color palettes and then create palette from selection so very quickly it’s brought the dialog box i’m just going to call this flower and i’ll click on save and what that’s going to do is it’s going to create a custom color palette for me and it’s docked over here and this is based on the colors that are in this particular file so if i bring those out you can see we have that all right let’s go to the next page and we’re actually at the end of this almost workspace customization i’ve saved the best for last this is uh in my opinion is my favorite tool within the entire application the ability to customize you’ve seen that i’ve been moving forward and backwards on the pages without really doing much of anything i’ve customized some keyboard shortcuts for that to customize a keyboard shortcut we go to the tools menu to options and then customization now in here I want to select commands and once I customized are in the layout menu and what I did is I changed the next and previous page so next page shortcut key I’m using the number two and previous page I use the number one my thought is this I’ve got my right hand in the mouse I’ve got my left hand on the keyboard if I want to do page up page down to go forward and backward I have to take my hand off the mouse and use my keyboard that takes time with my left hand on the keyboard I tap the one or tap the two it takes me forward and it takes me back other keyboard shortcuts I use are in the view menu and I go to wireframe and my keyboard shortcut for wireframe is the letter w and I assign to get out of wireframe I go to enhanced view and the one I use for that is the letter q an easy way to remember that is that I want to quit wireframe a nice thing about it is there’s side by side on the keyboard so I can very quickly toggle back and forth I’ll click a sign for this let me just double-check my wireframe to make sure I did click a sign on that I did that’s good next ones I’m going to do is under the objects menu and I’m going to go down to group and if I have a problem finding it here I have the ability search I can also go to the objects menu here down to group and then select group and so it’s automatically found that for me currently it’s ctrl g I’m going to delete that and I’m going to use the letter g from time to time I have arthritis in my hand and it acts up it’s difficult to do a finger stretch uh to control u or control g so just use a single keyboard shortcut and I can do that with my left hand tapping those keys so I’ve assigned that and then of course I want to do an ungroup and the keyboard shortcut I assigned for that is the letter u and I click assign so very easy to assign keyboard shortcuts I’m going to click ok to this now one more thing about customization is you’ll find that around the screen we have these icons here I’ve got another one over here and I have one for my dockers as well over here for example when I click on this I have the ability to turning on and off features you’ll notice that by default we don’t have the outline pen uh on the on the bar so I can actually click on this and it will add the outline pen for me if I want to create a custom keyboard shortcut it’s very easy to do some of the commands I use a lot is contour so I’ll click and hold I’m going to hold the control plus alt key down I’ll left-click contour and I’ll bring this out onto the screen I’ve now started to build my own toolbar back under the tools here I want the envelope tool click and drag and I’ll drop that right there next is from the text menu and I want fit text to path so control plus alt-left click and drag and I can drop that right on there and the final one I use a lot is convert to bitmap so again control plus alt-click and drag and I’m going to bring this right out here so I’ve now effectively created a toolbar that I can dock wherever I want on the system and it’s a great way to save time and really speed up productivity within the application once we’ve done that from the tools menu to options to workspace in here what I want to do is I want to export the workspace and that’s going to export with my keyboard shortcuts my layouts and everything else so if I’m in a design shop maybe there’s three designers we all want to use the same workspace for efficiency then I can export my workspace and share that you also if you have a previous version of CorelDRAW from CorelDRAW x7 and forward we’re able to bring in previous workspaces so if you’re upgrading from CorelDRAW 2020 to 2021 then of course you can save your workspace and bring it in and it’s simply a matter of clicking on import to import the previous workspace now the final thing I want to talk about I briefly mentioned this at the beginning is learn.corel.com this is our Discovery Center and it’s here where you can access all sorts of items things such as tutorials so there’s tutorials for graphics, for PaintShop Pro, VideoStudio that sort of thing you’ll also find a Q&A series this is a Q&A series for CorelDRAW as well as a PaintShop Pro so when we get customers sending us questions or common questions that come in through the support line we have videos on here that will take you through the Q&A of that you’ll find a link for free stuff we have regular contests in here that you can enter with your artwork support as well as community so it’s a great place to visit it’s easy URL to remember it’s learn.corel.com and that brings us to the end of this session I do want to thank you very much for your time and uh I hope you’ve enjoyed uh what I’ve presented I hope you’ve learned uh some tips that you can take away with and become a lot more productive and a lot more prosperous thank you very much and have a great day
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
This document serves as a comprehensive guide to using Corel Draw, offering step-by-step instructions and examples for various design tasks. It covers essential tools and techniques such as color manipulation, guideline usage, page management, and theme customization. The document also explores advanced features like creating shapes, filling gradients, welding objects, and applying effects like perspective and transparency. Ultimately, this guide aims to empower users to create logos and other designs by thoroughly explaining Corel Draw’s features and capabilities.
CorelDRAW Study Guide
Quiz
1. What is the primary color mode recommended for documents intended for print, and why?
CMYK is the recommended color mode for print because it is designed to produce accurate and vibrant colors on printed materials. It uses a subtractive color model that mixes cyan, magenta, yellow, and key (black) inks.
2. What considerations are important when choosing the width and height units for a new document?
When choosing width and height units, you should consider the intended use of the design, choosing units (mm, cm, inches, feet) that are commonly used for that purpose (e.g., feet for flex banners, millimeters for visiting cards). This helps ensure accurate dimensions and ease of communication with printers or manufacturers.
3. Explain the difference between “portrait” and “landscape” orientation.
Portrait orientation refers to a page layout where the height is greater than the width, typically used for documents like letters or resumes. Landscape orientation refers to a page layout where the width is greater than the height, often used for presentations or wide images.
4. What is the recommended resolution for most design work, and why?
The recommended resolution is 300 DPI (dots per inch) because it provides a good balance between image quality and file size, ensuring sharp and detailed designs suitable for both print and digital displays. Using a lower resolution may result in pixelated or blurry images.
5. What is a “Docker” in CorelDRAW, and what are its main functions?
A Docker in CorelDRAW is a panel that provides quick access to various tools and settings, such as properties, color palettes, and page options. Dockers streamline the workflow by keeping frequently used functions readily available.
6. Explain the function of the “title bar” in a Docker.
The title bar of a Docker is the strip at the top of the Docker that displays its name (e.g., Properties). It often contains buttons for collapsing, closing, or docking the panel, allowing users to manage the interface layout.
7. Describe two methods for duplicating an object in CorelDRAW.
One method is to copy (Ctrl+C) and paste (Ctrl+V) the object using the edit menu or standard toolbar. Another method is to click and drag the object while pressing the right mouse button, releasing the button to create a duplicate.
8. What is the purpose of the “handles” that appear around a selected object?
Handles are small squares or circles that appear around a selected object. They are used to resize, scale, rotate, or skew the object, providing precise control over its transformations.
9. What is the function of the “Ctrl+R” shortcut in CorelDRAW?
The Ctrl+R shortcut repeats the last action performed. This is useful for duplicating objects, applying transformations, or repeating formatting steps quickly and efficiently.
10. Why is it important to be aware of the CorelDRAW version when saving a file?
It’s important because saving in an older version ensures compatibility with users who may have older CorelDRAW versions. If a file is saved in a newer version, it might not be opened correctly (or at all) by users with older software.
Essay Questions
Discuss the importance of color modes (CMYK vs. RGB) in graphic design and how the choice of color mode affects the final output for different media (print vs. digital).
Explain the different methods of object duplication in CorelDRAW, highlighting the advantages and disadvantages of each method in various design scenarios.
Describe the purpose and usage of the shape tool. Explain how one can round the corners of a rectangle with the shape tool.
Explore how the Combine, Weld, and Trim tools contribute to creating complex shapes and designs. Provide practical examples of when each tool would be most effective.
Elaborate on the impact tool, the artistic media tool, and the dimension line tools. Describe how these tools can be used to enhance designs and provide necessary information.
Glossary of Key Terms
CMYK: A color model used primarily for printing, consisting of cyan, magenta, yellow, and key (black).
RGB: A color model used primarily for digital displays, consisting of red, green, and blue.
Resolution (DPI): Dots per inch; a measure of the detail in an image, with higher DPI indicating greater detail.
Portrait: A page orientation where the height is greater than the width.
Landscape: A page orientation where the width is greater than the height.
Docker: A panel within CorelDRAW that provides access to tools, settings, and options.
Title Bar: The top strip of a Docker that displays its name and control buttons.
Handles: Small squares or circles around a selected object used for resizing, rotating, or skewing.
Orientation: The direction in which the page is printed, either portrait or landscape.
Outline: The border or stroke around an object.
Fill: The color or pattern inside an object.
Ctrl+R (Repeat): A shortcut that repeats the last action performed.
Combine: A tool that merges multiple objects into a single object, removing overlapping lines.
Weld: A tool that joins two or more objects into a single object, creating a seamless outline.
Trim: A tool that removes the overlapping area of one object from another.
Intersect: A tool that creates a new object from the overlapping area of two or more objects.
Simplify: Removes areas that don’t contribute significantly to the shape, which reduces the number of nodes in complex shapes.
Front Minus Back: A shaping operation in which the front object removes the part of the back object where they overlap. The front object then disappears.
Back Minus Front: A shaping operation in which the back object removes the part of the front object where they overlap. The back object then disappears.
Create Boundary: A tool that creates an outline around a group of selected objects.
Convert to Curves: Converting an object into curves allows each letter or section to be altered individually.
Group: Binding objects together means they react as one.
Ungroup: A feature that separates a previously grouped set of objects into the separate, individual components.
Contour: Adds evenly spaced concentric lines to the inside or outside of a shape or text object.
Artistic Media: Used to add brush strokes to the design.
Blend Tool: Used to blend two objects.
Distort Tool: Applies push/pull distortions to a shape.
Envelope Tool: Distorts objects by dragging the nodes of an envelope around the object.
Transparency Tool: Adds varied levels of transparency to shapes and designs.
Corel Draw: Interface, Tools, and Logo Design Tutorial
This briefing document summarizes the key concepts and procedures detailed in the provided text, which appears to be a transcript of a tutorial on using Corel Draw.
Main Themes:
Introduction to Corel Draw Interface and Basic Operations: The document introduces the user to the Corel Draw interface, explaining color modes (CMYK for print, RGB for screen display), setting document dimensions and units (mm, inches, points, cm, feet), orientation (portrait/landscape), resolution (recommending 300 DPI), and how to create a new document.
“We will use the mode of CM WA do it for your printing industry.”
“The resolution is basically what our default would be It is 300 but you can buy it for less if you want you can also set it here but I I would recommend that you work on 300 only 300 is enough for you any design”
Docker Panels: Explanation of Docker panels: title bar, collapse/close buttons, docker tabs, adding/removing dockers.
“Look at the dockers, it is written here Properties: This strip that you are seeing We call this the title bar…”
“If you want, remove this docker from this list You can simply click on close here”
Basic Shape Manipulation and Color Filling: Filling objects with colors (left-click for fill, right-click for outline), removing outlines, using handles to resize and reshape objects, copying and pasting objects.
“…if I click left on it If I press click then whatever I feel it will move but if I stay there I press the right click of the mouse Look, my outline will be removed”
“We call them handles and these Maintain your shape with the help of handles”
Duplication and Repetition: Copying objects using copy/paste, right-click dragging, and the “Ctrl+R” command for repeating the last action.
“Press the Ctrl+R button on your keyboard what control r does is that whatever your It was the last action, I would repeat it again and again”
“Right-click it with your mouse or left click drag this from okay and if I You have to copy this shape here Drag it to the right side of your mouse Press the click and see as soon as you You will press right click and see it now You can see on the screen that here See, a plus symbol appears in the cursor it’s representing you that a copy of this is going to be made”
Saving Files: Saving Corel Draw files, understanding version compatibility, and saving to older versions.
“See the current version here what is showing 24 version okay if you If you click here, you will see it here You will get the other versions which came before 24.”
“If I can email you this file or pen it If I put it in the drive then that file will be in your system pay will not open because your corrol The draw is of a lower version and you have filed The higher version you want to open”
Logo Creation Examples: The tutorial provides step-by-step instructions for creating logos for Domino’s Pizza and Android, illustrating the use of various tools and techniques.
Object Alignment and Grouping: Aligning objects using keyboard shortcuts (C for center horizontal, E for center vertical) and the “Object > Align and Distribute” menu, grouping objects using “Ctrl+G” to treat them as a single unit.
“Here is the shortcut key for C center for and e is for your middle or you If you want, you can also go through the option Simply go to the object and here you will see See, you get the option of alignment”
“You are given the option of group what does any object mean it’s ok to give each other binders means you two but reacts like an object If you do then I will group it with The shortcut key for group is Ctrl+G”
Shape Tools and Corner Rounding: Using the shape tool to round corners of rectangles.
“Select your object which You need to round the corners and then After that you come here above the shape tool Look, the shape tool is given here.”
Working with Lines and Outlines: Using the line tool, creating straight lines with the shift key, adjusting line thickness, and accessing outline properties (F12) for color, width, style (dotted, etc.), and corner rounding.
“Press the f12 button on your keyboard or you can If you come down, look here You get the option of outline and Click here twice means double Click like I double click here I will do what I have, see the outline A complete dialogue in the name of pen The box will open”
“The shift button should be a straight line so if I don’t press the shift button it is coming If I press my line, I will send it anywhere A straight can move in the direction”
Freehand Tool and Curve Conversion: Using the freehand tool to create custom shapes, converting nodes to curves, and adjusting handles for smooth shapes.
“…we come here first. over the free hand tool and create us here There will be a shape, so we will make one here A simple shape with the help of which we can make we will design the logo…”
“We will convert all the notes in Convert to Curve and then we have I will have to give it a slight curve so how will that happen”
Combining, Welding, Trimming, Intersecting and Simplifying Objects Detailed breakdown of each command and the practical applications.
Impact Tool Using the impact tool to imply movement or drawing attention in a design.
Transparency Tool Using the transparency tool to create a more blended layered design.
Most Important Ideas/Facts:
CMYK vs. RGB: Understanding the appropriate color mode for printing vs. screen display is crucial for design output.
Ctrl+R: This keyboard shortcut is a powerful tool for quickly replicating actions.
Shape Tool: It is a fundamental tool for refining and manipulating shapes.
Version Compatibility: Saving files in older versions is necessary for sharing with users who have older software.
Grouping/Ungrouping: Efficient object organization and manipulation.
Ctrl+G Quick way to group selected objects.
Outline Properties Use the outline menu or F12 to edit properties such as the appearance of the outline (including the caps).
In summary, the document provides a comprehensive introduction to Corel Draw, covering essential interface elements, basic operations, and fundamental design techniques. It emphasizes practical application through logo creation examples and clear explanations of various tools and effects.
CorelDraw Practical Tips and Techniques
CorelDraw FAQ
1. What color mode should I use for printing versus screen display in CorelDraw?
For print projects, use CMYK color mode. CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Key/Black) is the standard for the printing industry. For designs intended only for screen display (e.g., websites, social media), use RGB color mode. RGB (Red, Green, Blue) is optimized for screens.
2. How do I set the size and units of my document in CorelDraw?
When creating a new document, specify the width and height. You can choose units like millimeters (mm), inches, points, centimeters, or feet, depending on the project. For example, use millimeters or centimeters for visiting cards, inches for smaller documents, and feet for larger formats like flex banners. To change the units once the document is open, go to layout settings. Changing the units will automatically convert the measurements.
3. What is the significance of resolution in CorelDraw, and what resolution should I use?
Resolution determines the level of detail in your design. The default resolution in CorelDraw is 300 DPI (dots per inch). It is recommended to work at this resolution for most designs, as it provides sufficient quality for printing. Lower resolutions can be used if file size is a concern, but it may affect the final output quality.
4. What are Dockers in CorelDraw, and how do I use them?
Dockers are panels that contain various tools and options. They are usually located on the right side of the CorelDraw interface. The “Properties” docker, for example, displays the title bar and has buttons for collaboration, closing, and expanding the docker. To open or close a docker, go to the “Windows” menu and select the desired docker. The active docker is highlighted in blue.
5. How do I duplicate objects easily in CorelDraw?
There are several ways to duplicate objects:
Copy-Paste: Use the Edit > Copy and Edit > Paste commands or the corresponding icons on the Standard Toolbar.
Right-Click Drag: Drag the object while holding down the left mouse button, then right-click before releasing the left button. This creates a copy at the new location.
“+” Key: select an object and press the + key on the numpad. A copy is made directly on top of the original. Drag the new copy to the desired position.
CTRL+D: selects an object and use the duplicate command to create an exact copy either through the edit menu or by pressing CTRL+D. Drag the new copy to the desired position.
6. How do I rotate an object around a specific point in CorelDraw?
Select the object.
Click on the object again to reveal the rotation handles.
Drag the center point (usually a crosshair) from the center of the object to the desired rotation point.
Rotate the object by dragging one of the rotation handles.
To create multiple rotated copies, rotate the object, right-click to duplicate, and then press Ctrl+R to repeat the rotation and duplication.
7. How can I fill and outline objects with color in CorelDraw?
To fill an object with color, left-click on a color in the color palette. To change the outline color, right-click on a color in the color palette. To remove the outline, right-click on the “no color” swatch (usually the first swatch in the palette with an X).
8. How do I save a CorelDraw file in an older version format?
Go to File > Save As. In the “Save as type” dropdown menu, select the desired older CorelDraw version. This is useful when sharing files with users who have older versions of the software. However, some features from the newer version might be lost when saving in an older format.
CorelDraw: Color Modes, Options, Filling, and Transparency
Color modes include CMYK for printing and RGB for screen display.
Color options in CorelDraw:
The right side of the interface displays colors that can be used to fill objects in a document.
More colors can be displayed by expanding the color options.
A color palette enables users to select a desired color.
The color that is currently selected will be displayed.
Color filling in objects:
To fill an object with color, simply click the desired color.
Left click to fill the shape and right click to fill the outline.
The outline can also be removed.
Fountain fill is a gradient with two or more colors.
To use a gradient, create nodes and apply different colors of choice.
A color can be transferred from one object to another.
Color samples can be picked from an object or image using the Color Eye Dropper tool. The Atril Eye Dropper copies properties of a shape such as the outline, thickness, and fill color.
Transparency can be applied to objects and images.
CorelDraw: Understanding the Status Bar
The source provides information on the document status in CorelDraw.
Here’s a summary:
The status bar displays the current status of a selected object. For example, if an ellipse is selected, the status bar will display “ellipse”.
The status bar keeps showing the status while the user is working.
CorelDraw Ruler and Guidelines
The source mentions the ruler and guidelines in CorelDraw. The ruler helps with measurement and bringing guidelines.
Key points regarding ruler guidelines:
The ruler is located below the document tab.
The ruler helps with measurements.
It assists in bringing guidelines.
To use guidelines, click and drag the mouse from the ruler.
Guidelines can be brought from both the horizontal and vertical sides.
The use of guidelines inside a design will be explained later.
CorelDraw: Document Creation, Page Options, and Modification
The sources discuss page options in CorelDraw, including how to create, view, and modify pages.
To create a new document, these steps can be taken:
Click the “New Document” button.
Use the shortcut key Ctrl+N.
Go to File > New.
When creating a new document, a popup window will appear with document options such as:
Presets, including pre-defined sizes such as legal, letter, and tabloid.
Custom document creation, where you can define the document’s settings.
Name.
Number of pages.
Page view.
Color mode.
Page dimensions (width and height).
Units such as mm, inches, points, or centimeters.
Orientation (portrait or landscape).
Resolution.
Page view options:
Single page view displays only one page at a time.
Multiple pages view displays multiple pages at once.
To navigate pages:
Click the page tabs at the bottom.
Use the navigation buttons to go to the first or last page.
To modify pages:
Right-click on a page tab to see options such as rename, insert, or duplicate.
Rename: To rename a page, click the “Rename” option and enter a new name.
Insert: To insert a page, choose “Insert page after” or “Insert page before”.
Duplicate: To duplicate a page, click the “Duplicate” option. You can choose to copy only the layer or the layer and its content.
CorelDraw Theme Customization Guide
The source explains how to customize the theme in CorelDraw.
To change the theme:
Go to Tools > Options.
In the customization options, find the “Theme” setting.
There are four themes available: Light, Light Medium, Dark, and Black.
Select the desired theme. The dark theme is similar to Adobe Illustrator.
Additionally, the size of the icons can be increased if desired. This can be adjusted in the customization options.
CorelDraw Full Course Tutorial (6 Hours) | Hindi
The Original Text
Hello friends all of you are welcome Your Graphic Designing Channel Simplified I am your instructor on TET, Ashish And brother, I am getting a lot of requests from you guys I asked Sir I need a single video in Corel Draw above where we can complete the course Brother, if you can follow then it is your request. The video has been released on Welcome to Coral draw master class guys if you are a If you are searching for the best Corel Draw course then You have come to the right video friends Do you want to become a graphic designer? Do you want to do something by designing or Start your own business in the printing industry If you want to do this then this crash of Corel Draw This course will be very helpful for you The crash course has been designed absolutely For beginners, if you have done this before today I have never opened Corel Draw before this The course is going to be best for you Coral In this course of the draw no one can tell us Previous knowledge is not required in this course We provide practically important tools and You will learn some techniques through video it is long so if you want to do graphic designing I am seriously interested and you I want to become something by learning graphic designing and want to make a good earning So you can see my complete course. if you are into graphic designing Illustrator Myself Before I begin I want to tell you a little about myself I would like to give a brief introduction of my name Ashish and I have been working together for the past 13 years Designing and Multimedia Development I am associated with many Indian and multinational Companies, Government departments and I have also worked for freelancing houses. Friends, I have completed this course a lot of hard work and effort went into making the I have given you a lot of time, that’s why I have full rights with you before the start of the video I want a like from you and those who If you haven’t subscribed to the channel, brother Subscribe to the channel for you I keep bringing videos, what are you will do in corel draw friends this digital Any business or any firm in the world Advertising and good marketing Can’t do without good advertisement A very nice add on to It is very important if you want to pursue a career Digital advertisements or graphics If you want to make a career in designing then use coral You can start your career by learning to draw. Friends, can I help you with some work? I want to show you how to use Corel Draw what can you do like you guys design visiting card design invitation card letter head doctor Prescription Pads Flyers Brochures Books Certificates Form Invoice Book Which of the following You can design all of these things. After seeing all this you might be thinking that friend coral draw is very difficult but This is not the case at all Corel Draw is very It’s easy and I’m going to explain it further in this course making it easy for you to understand hoon career after learn graphic design In this Simplified Tuts course, we’ll cover Corel Learning Draw Software with Corel Draw Logo inside bill book flyer and visiting Making lots of things like cards You will learn these are some top sectors where Lots of graphic designers There are requirements like magazines Newspapers Advertising Agencies Print and electronic media publishing houses Web Designing Industry Corporate Sector or brand For whom is this Management course because in this course I have If you have started from the basics then you can I am a student and doing graphic designing If you want you can check out my course. or if you’re a designer and you’ve started working on something today I have never even opened Corel Draw before then this course is perfect for you or if you have worked on Corel Draw but skilled graphic designer You need more clarity to become You can also follow my course What You Will Learn From This Master of Corel Draw In the course I covered everything from basic to advanced Topics are covered in this complete Very easy to understand course I have divided it into different chapters That topic has been discussed in every chapter I will tell you about the classes related to this in this video I will continue to provide access to the courses To make it easier I have divided all the classes and You can see the time stamp of the chapters in this video given in the description box of With the help of which you can read any part of this entire course Access any topic without any hassle We can do it and we have to move ahead with the times So it is very important to stay updated that is why I In this course, the latest version of Corel Dr. 24 I have used it and I will give you the same I am going to teach you so let’s go to Corel Draw Enter the colorful and creative world I welcome you Ashish Your own graphic designing channel Simplified Tuts [music] But if you want to buy Corel Draw then you You can buy it from their official website Simply you are here google.com so you can download it from here By doing this you can simply install it Whenever you download it, you will You should see it in this way here You will find the files where they are given setup.exe you simply click on this The gift is very simple, next next in it you will keep coming by writing latest, simply you You have to do it next and that is your whole The entire software will be installed because I already have this software in me If it is installed then whenever you open Coral Dr. When you install Corel Dr you will see its There are some or all four softwares in the package provides you the first one is Corel Draw The second is Corel Capture, followed by Corel Fonts manager and then you get coral photo paint in which our jo main The software is Corel Draw Photo Paint because we don’t use it Instead of this, we So friends, this will start happening whenever we draw coal If we open it for the first time then our An interface like this should open in front of you It does this and we understand all the things Here you go, look at them all one by one Corel Draw Welcome is coming with the above written message this is our screen title bar title bar Display our logo here on top of it Our contribution here has been that of software Below the name that is displaying you If you look here, look at us here now In total four menus are visible but now When we create our new file Then we also have another menu here So right now we have four menus here. The bars are visible below that if we If you come here, you will see the strip here It is visible, we call it Standard Toolbar Standard Toolbar Our common or basic options are like that creating a new document is like saving the file to your computer Open the file Save the file Cut to top of the file Applying the copy/paste command or We have commands like undo or read They are available here below our This is the strip you see nearby this is called property tool bar there is a very important strip okay what happens in this is that we who are currently in the current Related to the options being used You can see the options here or whatever tool we’re using Whatever options you have related to the tool You can see them here Below that, there is a tab here. it is visible where it is written Welcome screen Here we can select this tab if we want You can also close it from its left side if you look here you will see a The Toolbar panel is now visible. All of these The options here are deactivated this is because we have not yet released any new The document has not been opened yet As soon as we create a new file You will see all these options here. After getting activated you will get the payment here But if you look here you will find a new A button for the document is also visible By clicking on it we can create a new document you can open it and here is an open You will see a button here for the document. It is being read where we can click and get our Any document that we have previously saved It is kept, you can open it here Look, we see another button On which it is written New from Template With its help we get lots of coral drops If it provides some templates then also we can open it from here so simply If you want to click on this then click here See many templates made here which Corel Draw provides us If you do, you can also do it by clicking on this Check out the pre-made templates here Use it and make changes to it to make your own If you can design it then I will post it here Let me close it like this and if we here But if we come to the right side then here look you can see some things We call them dockers right now We will also read some dockers in the future but We also understand that these are dockers after all So what are dockers basically Whatever options we have inside Docker We use it related to us here Pay options are still visible here I don’t see any option on because right now we haven’t released any new I have not created the document, let’s start with it First, we will create a document here. You can do it to create Simply click here or you also use the shortcut key control n Or you can click here You can also create a new document Or you can go to the File menu and click here You can click on New to create a new document. You can create a new document by If yes, then there are many ways to create a new document To create this you can simply go here Click and you will see a pop up here This popup will open up and appear This is largely inspired by your latest from Adobe Illustrator there also your Pre defined templates here on the side comes and here are the rest of us When the document options appear Here we have some presets it can be seen it is written here legal letter table bold size so basically this Is there any readymade sizes here? I am providing you Croll Drop since so that you don’t have to create a new size May your work be done quickly and swiftly So if you want you can use some presets from here. Use it to quickly access your documents You can create it immediately or as per your wish You can also create your own custom one here You can create a document, see here We see two drop down menus at the top. It is available simply if you click here We need some readymade things here The sizes are shown here as we It is written here that it is the largest page size If you click here, you will There are big page sizes, you can find them here You will see it if you click here Small page size then the small ones The size of the pages can be seen here you will read it okay after that here next to it if If you come here it is written on all pages Sizes as per your requirement You can also choose your document if We click here to print then you We will see that look here what we The presets that are visible are the same There are presets that we use for printing. can be used for example a4 size okay c4 size letter size or if you need If you want to create something for the web then you can create something on the web Click here if you are on the web If you click here you will see that You will get all the options related to the web banner You will get it if you want for any website If you want to make any banner then you can also select that size here You can choose from this or you can choose from social media from here There is also a button for this, you can choose that as well so what would happen here is if you could making a design there is one here in f in custom custom What happens is that we choose a size of our own You can define it from here, okay? Look here the document is written Settings We can create our custom documents from here. so let’s see what are the things in it first Here it is given what is in the name That if you need a name for your document You have to pay in advance, however you can pay later also You can also give it your name when saving it. But if you want to give the name in advance then you can You can define your name here. The document is then given here Number of pages that you need in your Corel Draw How many pages are in the document There are requirements like if you make a book If you are then you should get 2, 4, 10, 50, 100 or more More pages may be required Okay, so here you can see your number of pages. you can increase or decrease it Afterwards, the page view is given here Option is the first here single page is the second There are multiple pages, single page and multiple pages What is the difference between a page and a page if you Multiple pages are maintained from here So I have created 10 pages from you. And you have selected single page view then what will coal draw do to you once upon a time I will display only one page to you But if you have selected multiple pages then what will the code do for you Displays pages to you at one place will give okay give here we have here There are two color modes given We have the first one in CM YK the second one hai rgb so those who watch my videos first those who have been watching since would know that We will use the mode of CM WA do it for your printing industry Inside means if you have any document You are creating any design yes and you want to go ahead and do that If it is ok to take it in printing then you can here from which you will choose the mode of CMY but If you are making a design that You just have to display the screen like above facebooksignup.in its width and You can choose the height of that document What should be the width and height and that should it be in MM or you can choose any other If you want to buy the unit then click here You can also choose the unit of your choice by doing this. whether you want to take it in inches or Should I take it in points or centimeters? You have to take it like if you make some flex If you are there by chance then we will kiss Flex I take it, we take it in feet so you can get it in feet or if you If you are making a visiting card To get the visiting card size either Many of us are experts in millimetres. or some people use it If you use centimeters also then you You can get it from here as per your choice If you change your unit here then you You will see that your units have changed here as well. will go and what did kolda do automatically This has been converted into centimeters You can choose the width and height of your choice from here. you can give the donation here Orientation what is the orientation of our page You should have a portrait here mode and there is a landscape mode so you which As per your wish, you can come here as per your work You can choose your orientation from here The resolution is given in the last The resolution is basically what our default would be It is 300 but you can buy it for less if you want you can also set it here but I I would recommend that you work on 300 only 300 is enough for you any design It’s okay to work if you want to Simply as soon as you press OK here whatever we have mentioned here dimension or whatever We have provided the mode for all those modes By following you can submit your document which is It will be created and come, see this We’ve got a page up here We have a single page created here it has come and now you will see that look this All the options are activated here as well If I come to the dockers you’ll be You will see that all these options are also available You have come here after getting activated ok Let’s first understand Docker a bit that what things are where in dockers exist and what are they called Look at the dockers, it is written here Properties: This strip that you are seeing We call this the title bar and here look here you can see a button There is a collab button, if you like it then click here If you do it then your docker will be here means there will be claps or that it will close And if you want to show it again then You click on this and it comes back here The money will expand and come here See, a close button is also provided. If you want, remove this docker from this list You can simply click on close here try it here we have lots of Dock tabs are provided but the ones that are currently active It is weighted, see it here in blue colour You can see that the Docker that we just created it’s open, okay, and for the rest There are dockers, you can also see them here above Or you can see these dockers and You can also bring us lots of Corel Draw Dockers provides that for Simply you have to go to your Windows and You can find Docker here Look, we have opened two dockers. Both are ticked here and the We haven’t opened the dockers yet If the check mark is not marked then simply you If you need another docker to work then You can simply download that docker by clicking here. you can also open it here after that if we clap this here So on its right side, in the last you will see See, you can get these colors here Options are here and with their help you can to any object in your document You will fill the color here, you will get only a few colors butt are visible but if you look down come here you can expand it yes and here you can see other colours also will be displayed as soon as you you will click outside then this will come back to rest g will hide it a if we scroll down If you come here then we will find some pages related to Options are available like Pay Plus here is the symbol of We insert a new page from here You can do it like this by clicking here Let’s say I first draw a shape here. so that you know okay so if I If I click here, you will see this before we had a page here Our page has been inserted and arrived The plus symbol has already been given to you and it is also given here later It means that the document which you has been selected if before that you If you want to bring the donation then click here After that you have to insert a new page. Then you will click on this plus button So look here we have some more buttons. are also given, now see we have the total There are two pages made, out of which we are working on number one page number one See how this page is working now Our tab is highlighted so look here Whatever work we do is coming with pay one written on it We will do that, our page will be number one if we want to go to pay so we are here on pay to pay Simply go to your page number 2 by clicking You can see here you will be moved to the page You have the option to do it here if you want You can move your page by clicking and After that there is a button given here also This is for your last page means if You have created 100 pages by chance and If you want to go to the last page then you If you click here you will be at the last You will reach the page like this you will see here Please also see the first page option which is not activated yet because We are already on the first page so you If you click here, your document will be displayed you will reach the first page of ok after that you will see a color here There is also an option available which is this strip Your help comes when we Use colors in your document Suppose I drew a circle here and If we click on the blue color here Look at this, you will see that here you have a blue The color is getting displayed, is it ok Whatever colors we have used, which we have it is used in the document We keep seeing colours displayed here will go look at the end of it, you would find it here the status bar right now since I’ve got a circle it’s called ellipse so this Look, our writing is showing that right now We have selected the ellipse So whatever work we do here He will keep showing us his status here After the document tab if you look below So here you get the ruler. basically what it does is it gives us a little It helps us in measurement At the same time, if we need guidelines then This also helps us in bringing the guidelines We also talk about the guidelines Read further, what are the guidelines how is it used but if you If you want to get the guidelines then simply come here Click and drag your mouse So look, your guideline is ready. This is how you can do horizontal and vertical You can bring guidelines from both sides and You can use it on your design I will explain you later what is its use inside the design that how do we use it using from yes alright if you go down to this page above number one or two so as soon as you click on the page If you come to number one then look here you will get a You can see the arrow like here If you click, you will see some options here It is coming open and it is the first one If you want to rename the page then click here You can give a name to your page by doing this Look, I have given the name try here. it is there and you have done ok then see your page The name of this will change here just like that If you want to insert a page here So here we have two options Insert page after and insert page before If we click on after then the page which we have selected and then one A new page will open if you pay before If you click then our before that page A page will open and say ok then The next option we have is Duplicate If we click on the duplicate page of the page If we do this then a popup will open here He will come after doing it and will tell us some things here he will ask as if he is asking that this page Brother where do you want to duplicate it I have to do it after means I have to do this later of the page or should it be done first before Later, see some more things from us here asking as if asking copy layer Only means you only need to copy the layer Or copy layer and their content I mean if you have done any work on this If you have made any design then Duplicate and bring to a new page Let’s say if I select here I copy the layer and their content and do hmm okay so look here we have page two It has been done and we have it on page two as well Look, guidelines are coming here We have a shape forming here. It is the same shape that we saw on page number one I made it, okay, after that you’re watching it you will see it here whenever you When you install a new CoreDrop, open it If you do, you will get one here The theme of white coral draw which I personally like I don’t like it because it’s quite in my eyes This white color theme is silent and since I love working as an illustrator So I like that black theme very much. So if you also want to change this theme If you want you can do that very easily Yes, you simply have to be on top of your tools And here you get the options option You can come here for customization by coming here above and if you look in it then here you will see You get the color option and it is given there itself Theme option is gone, you can click on theme so do it here basically you have to do it here Four themes are available here: Light and Light Medium will look something like this Then here you are given dark theme As soon as you click, you will see You will get the dark theme like this and Then there is also a black theme here which If it comes completely black then it is black I don’t like the theme but I like the dark theme I like these themes, they are some Adobe Illustrator if you make me feel something then you are here Click on it and choose dark theme I can do it okay if you want then whatever you want If they are seeing the icons here If you want to increase the size then you can do that too You can simply come in this size and We could increase it a little bit here so look we have a little bit of everything If they come in big size then this You can adjust it according to your needs if you want and the size you need to work for you According to that you can buy that size from here If you can do ok here then these things of yours There are options and their sizes have also become bigger. we will go alright so let’s do it now We will delete it from here and also this guideline let’s delete it okay so friends if We have to make any design using Corel Draw So first of all we need a shape ok so first i’m going to create a shape here and then on top of that I’ll give you something I will make it and show you and in related matters I will also tell you about the options I will continue to describe, so first of all we go here to the top of your toolbar and We can grab the Ellipse tool from here. I clicked on the ellipse tool here. I have given it to you and if you want to draw it then You can also use the control key Control key will help you in this: Your circle is a perfect circle The draw will take place now see what I do First, I don’t press the control key so if I draw any circle So look at this, draw a perfect circle from you. It won’t look perfect to you It may seem so but if you look here for this Check the dimensions and you will see If the dimensions are not perfect then this means It’s not a perfect circle, I would make it delete and now I draw the circle Using the control key, I press control key and then I click here If I draw a circle then look at this now that my perfect circle comes as a draw It is available, you can check the dimensions here be that we have both dimensions same to It’s the same, you can draw any circle. After that you can fill color in it. what can you do to fill the color You can simply go to this color palette of yours And fill any color of your choice here. If you can, I put a color fill here. it has been done now if you look closely here Look, an outline is coming out I don’t want this black outline what will we do for him from here on out It will come on Colors and see a new one here There is an option for fill so if I click left on it If I press click then whatever I feel it will move but if I stay there I press the right click of the mouse Look, my outline will be removed Whatever is yours with the left click of the mouse There will be a shape, you can fill it with color or fill it You can do this and with the right click of the mouse you You can fill any outline color in it Or if you can remove it, we will see it now I have drawn a circle here, slightly If we make it smaller then to make it smaller here’s what we need to do if you look here we have something Dots are coming out of black We call them handles and these Maintain your shape with the help of handles If you revisit this then look we have seen this If you have reduced the size from the receipt then you can use these Create any shape with the help of handles You can also recycle it, how will you rotate it I will tell you about that later, so right now I what did you do, you filled it with color I have made the shape, make it smaller a bit I have taken it now what should I do here I want to make a duplicate of this shape so Look there are two ways of doing this, one is very easy The way is that you can simply edit here go copy it okay or else look at you You can also get the copy option here. On the Standard Toolbar you can copy and paste the Click on paste here and see Your shape has been pasted here. Because it came pasted on top of that. so you don’t know if you you can drag this and keep it aside okay You will get two different shapes. I’ll do it back, undo it okay And there is another way to do this, which is to copy what should you do to duplicate it or not Right-click it with your mouse or left click drag this from okay and if I You have to copy this shape here Drag it to the right side of your mouse Press the click and see as soon as you You will press right click and see it now You can see on the screen that here See, a plus symbol appears in the cursor it’s representing you that a copy of this is going to be made and as soon as You will release your mouse and see this We have a bean and its object is duplicated it has arrived, i will delete it and I’m going to bring this back here with a small one if I want to copy it then I will return it From This regimen is similar to that of Reciform I will copy the right click of the mouse Press it and see, there is a shape here. I have got its color copied and it has come to me If I change then I will simply go and From here I will fill it with a light yellow color. I will do it, okay I have color fill here It has happened now since I have to If we have to make a sun then we have to do it here But it would require some raise So for that I will use it here from polygonal to i polygonal to a polygonal I will do it okay and in this what you have just mentioned here you can see the angles on the five I will reduce them to three, then see Here you get an option of sides yes you can reduce it to three ok i will make it a little thinner I am doing all this from here with the help of the shift key you can shift the If you don’t press it, it won’t happen from both sides Rather, assume that there will be a reset from only one side For example I undo this and Now if I reduce it from here So look, reduce it in this way okay so this is the way you do it Reduce to what you like and I’m going to place it here like this After placing it, now I have this I want it all around me If it wants a race then we will do it for that What will you do first of all the color of its race if it is there and we change it then I will tell you about it I have done the same color and whatever it is If there is an outline, I will remove it. I have removed the outline I have told you how the mouse is done by pressing the right click key, it’s ok This much has happened, now after that I want all four So for that you just click on this So look here its rotation handles are created I have done it and let me zoom it a little If I do it, look at its rotation here The handles have come ready if I just If I rotate this you will see that It is rotating from the center whereas I want it to be like this I don’t want it from this place it should rotate means this circle of ours If it is rotated from the center, then this center of it You are seeing the point, right? We have written it here Click and we’ll bring it here in its center and then we’ll put it like this So now if I rotate it normally I will rotate it and then I will drag it So look, this was its original shape See, it is rotating while we don’t want it to If we want a copy of this then copy it what will you do for this simply read it here Rotate it from and do what I told you that you can use your right click of the mouse press ok and then you Press the Ctrl+R button on your keyboard what control r does is that whatever your It was the last action, I would repeat it again and again so if I hit control r here So you will be able to see that this See, I’m going to press control R here again and again. I am pressing this, see this whole thing The whole design will come out like this Look at this, it completely looks like a sun here If a design has already appeared in front of you We need to fill gradient in it what is gradient where we have There are two colors, we could have filled them too But I will explain that to you later on too, okay So what did we learn here Here is how to perform the repeat action We learned that by right clicking the mouse we We learned how to copy colors We can add outline and We also learned how to do the fill Learned how to reset an object to an object we learned to rotate okay so that’s it We’ve done a lot of work here in creating this object. We have learned that, now let’s make one other people and there we are something else Let us learn the options but before that we will learn about the file to save the file What you have to do, see here you will get the save The button is visible, click here you can save the file by doing this or you The keyboard shortcut key is Control You can save it from there or you can Go to the file menu and look here it is written It has been saved and look it is written next to it what is the shortcut key for control s control s is there as soon as you click here If you do this then you will see that this whole popup will open will come from save the drawing with the name and Wherever you want to save it You come to that location and assume that I I’m on the desktop and we’ve clicked on this here The file has been saved as testing I have given the file name here. If the testing is okay then you can post it here can you give me the file name ok one thing I will make it clear for you here See the current version here what is showing 24 version okay if you If you click here, you will see it here You will get the other versions which came before 24. Here they are also showing that version When do we use it many times It happens that we have to save a file in a version that someone else also has For example I am giving 24 versions here. I am using it but you don’t have 24 do you use 17 18 or whatever mine is lowest version what will happen in that case If I can email you this file or pen it If I put it in the drive then that file will be in your system pay will not open because your corrol The draw is of a lower version and you have filed The higher version you want to open If it has happened then what happens in that case many times we use this what do we have to do we are simply the ones who love the person in front of us I want to give the lowest version we can choose that from here okay so You can do that from here You can give it here Click on save and your file will be saved It will simply be saved here, see this Our testing is being written here The file is saved, now let’s create a second logo for that we go to page number Above two we insert a new page from here let’s do it okay look here we have a The new page has been inserted and now we We will create another logo here, so that logo We are going to make Domino’s Pizza Have you seen the logo of Domino’s Pizza? If it happens then today we are going to create that. for that first of all we are here If you take the rectangle then what have I done here did you draw a rectangle perfectly Go back to drawing a rectangle If you press the control key, you will see a A perfect rectangle will be drawn okay look here i have a I have drawn a rectangle and I will copy the rectangle here. I just taught you how to copy how do we copy it and after that we can do this We will select both and in this we will fill we will make red color ok and whoever does it This is an outline, I would remove it from here so I removed its outline from here I have removed the outline for you You have told me how it feels right now what should i do about its corners That little bit of rectangle that I’m rounded off Now look, a new task has come up how do we do this now Select your object which You need to round the corners and then After that you come here above the shape tool Look, the shape tool is given here. As soon as you select this, here Now look at the small dots here. It is coming in black colour, you simply buy it Click and drag like this If you do it then look at this corner of yours Whatever number you get after coming round You have to round up. You can round up as much as you want okay so let me round up very lightly so I made a very light round here The value of the round is done, look at me It is showing here 0.09 ok so i will copy this value I take it because I feel the same about this too I want to apply, I selected it And now I went here and I did the same Paste the value here and enter Look at this, both of my rectangles are the same I have it here in rounded corners After that we have to go one more down here If you need a box then I have placed this box here I made another copy of and after that I We grew it up and we treated it exactly like this ok bring it along with domino’s pizza The color of the box above is in red and the boxes below are ours If it is in blue then we will color it back in blue if you do it then I have put it here in blue I have filled the color and then later What we need to do is draw a circle here. How to create circles using the Ellipse Tool And here we will draw a circle and We will fill its color here as white I will fill in the white color from here I don’t need an outline so I can create an outline I will remove it now, look at what I have This circle has come in the form of a little circle I want to make it a little bigger I will make it bigger and now this circle that I see It should be right in the center of this box So, now we are going to learn one more thing here. we are going to eventually turn any object into a Align with another object how to do it for whichever object you need First of all you have to align that object I have to choose what is in my case that I need to align this circle with this red In the center of the rectangle, first we will We will select the circle and then we drag this rectangle by holding down the shift key will select now see we have both the same objects have been selected and Now you can do whatever you want with your keyboard You can press the shortcut key, see Here is the shortcut key for C center for and e is for your middle or you If you want, you can also go through the option Simply go to the object and here you will see See, you get the option of alignment and Look here you will find it aligned If the options for MENT are correct then what happens with C Our align centers are horizontal and E what happens to align center vertical then I like it perfectly horizontal and central I have to align it in both of them so I here you can use shortcut keys c and e also I can use it so I pressed C and after that press e then see my Come to the exact center and form my circle After that I made a copy of this circle If I do, I have copied it here I have copied this, how did I do it now? I told you that you can use your mouse by pressing the left click of your you will move the object and along with it You will automatically press the right click of the mouse So your object becomes a copy of it it will be done and I am here to tell you about it I’ll copy them and then set them both I do this and group it like this See here what you need to do You are given the option of group what does any object mean it’s ok to give each other binders means you two but reacts like an object If you do then I will group it with The shortcut key for group is Ctrl+G So if you want you can also take help of Control ji You can take it, see, I have created a group here if you have done it then what is the use of grouping now Now see these moves of both of them together Now I have to do this also in the center So for that I will select both. On the keyboard I pressed c then e Look, I have come to the center now If you want to write about Domino’s Pizza then do it for that I’ll go over here to the text tool and As soon as I click here Look, the cursor is blinking here and Now I can write anything here. I wrote here Gave Dominoes Enter Pizza, you can change its font if you want You can do whatever you like according to your So let me change the font here. I got a new font here Poppins I would have bolded it here and I would make it a little bigger hmm okay i have enlarged it color me I had to make it white so I made it white yes but now if you pay a little attention to it then Look, there is too much space in the middle I want to reduce this space so for that What we’re going to do is go back to the Shape tool here. Click and then look here An option has come into being, what do we make of it the lines in between can be drawn So we can reduce the spacing here. I’ll click and drag it here. And now I’ll take as much of it as I need by bringing the line spacing to that much When I release it, check it out here Line spacing is here and now I’m going to use it we have to center it from back how to do c and e very good okay so I will press c like this and Press e and see it has come to the center Now I will select this whole thing and I I will group this okay this is the group is gone and then what do we do with it How much do you want to rotate? 45° I want to rotate it so what should we do for that You will simply click on it one more time If you do this, look, I have a rotation handle It is ready and now we will rotate it at 45° I will do it, okay, look at my logo nose pizza that’s ready so some This is how you can make the logo of Naz Pizza If you can then what have we included in this logo? Learned In this we learned that we can make a rectangle how to make corners of rectangle How to round any object how to bring the center into another and After that, whenever we use the text tool When you write something, how do you maintain line spacing? If we reduce it then it will be with the help of so many people I made a logo and taught you let us save it back now If I go to the desktop you can see one thing Notice here’s a picture of my file And a copy is coming whose name is my file name is backupoftesting testing and the name of this file is backup of testing so what does corol draw when Whenever we save any file, then it has a It also creates backup copies, it is very useful for us Sometimes our file is useful The original gets corrected at any time So we can work on our backup file from the region You can do it but if you want then you can backup it You can also do the setting, what do you need for that All you have to do is simply go to the Tools menu Come to options and you will see here You can click on this customization and then Afterwards you look here, come here you will see You get the options of Coral Draw and in it You get an option to save as you like If you click on save option then here Look, you are getting an option called auto backup in the name of okay look what’s here now there is a tick here and here It is written 20 minutes means our file what is happening is every 20 minutes there is a The backup is being saved. Where is the backup saved? You can decide what to do if you want Now look, the set here is the set Temporary location is ok and see here We have it set up so that our backup Whether it will be made or not, we have written it here We have kept it ticked where our backup will be made Folder as original file means wherever Our original file is being saved in the same format. Our backup file can be created anywhere But if you want to change the location Then you select it on browse Go to whichever location you want and you can go there you can go and choose your location ok If you want, you can backup from here You can increase or decrease the timing, if you need 5 You need backup every 5 minutes or you Do you want to avoid making backups again and again? hours backup is made ok so you can also do that here you can choose from it alright i would do this hmm okay so here we have a logo, a new I have tried making it and also how to backup it It will be done, we have learnt that too, now it is good Look here, we have some tools If we are coming prepared then what will we do? We will not learn these tools but we will We will keep working and along with the work we will You will keep learning the tools here, right? See if I were to select this How will we do it, simply click on this will do it and select it but if do I want this or not Selecting only the circle that is in it so what should we do for that because I also think this is a whole group, We have to ungroup it first I click here to ungroup I will do it okay so look at all this now It has been ungrouped, now here we simply If you click like this then you will see my object it has been selected and is it ok or if I’m going to draw a rectangle like this I will make a selection, then inside this selection All the objects that are coming Everything that we have now will be selected Look, the selection is being made, it has become a rectangle but if we want we can have a free hand You can also make a selection for that What you have to do is come to this pick tool and You see this corner here If you click here you can see it here it is written free hand pick you can see this Select it and after that, as much as you want You will make a selection, suppose you see, I have done this much If you have made it, just see it by selecting this or if I made it from here ok so look at both of them this way If you are selected and come here then you can come here if you want Also through my free hand pic from you can make a selection okay so here I am Let me choose the pick tool again and After that we make another new logo and Let’s learn some more options from him So I can insert a new page here. Let me take it, I pressed the page down button on my Look at an insert page from the keyboard Look here, an option has come, if you want So you can insert a new page from here also. Yes, here we have to simply tell that How many new pages do we need if we want one page So here you will write one, 2, 3, 4 are required. Then, input that number here. It is asking where the page you just viewed is placed In my case page is selected If it is number two then page is after number two or before page number two if If you do it after then it will be later, if you do it before then it will be first okay and whatever you want new page What will be its page size if you all If you want something then you can click OK here. Give this a look, we have page number three A new page has come up with insults, okay now what are we going to make here let’s draw it and after that we This needs to have the corners rounded which I did I’ve already told you how it goes You simply click on the shape tool and Round your corners from here Here you go after rounding the corner youtube’s this line that’s going straight to you isn’t it a straight line so now If we have to do that in Corel Draw How to do it? What do we need to do for that? First the shape needs to be curved now what is the curve Look, things happen, we can see the curve in any You can curve an object or text Its simple meaning is that the object that which has original properties finish it right now which means its original property that we have here click on shape doing its rounded corners if we curve it, then it will Simply behave like just one line will do it and not in the manner of an object If it behaves then what to do to curve it So you come to the object and here you will see See it is written convert to curve whose The shortcut key is control key, you can do the same like this You will click on it, see all of them here All the options have changed now if you go here But taking shape to round the corner If you want it, it won’t happen while something else is happening Now here we are going to teach you a new thing. Here is a look at what happens after curving What is happening is that I will zoom in here Look here, you may see some notes It is small and what you can see no these are notes what is the purpose of notes With the help of notes we can define any object Let’s give it some shape, okay, like I am doing right now here I’m going to give you a shape so I like this the line a little bit higher If you want to bring it in rounded shape then click on this line I’ll bring my mouse cursor over and click this I’ll take it a little higher and see what happens it is happening it is not happening round but this whole thing which is the both nodes of both they are shifting upwards now How do we solve this, I will explain it here I first undo and then click these I select both notes After selecting, look here If you look at some of the notes, you will Related options are available like any If you want to bring the note in a straight line so you’ll click here which is now I have mine here but what do I need I want to curve this line so I’m going to put I will click on Convert to Curve OK And now if I click on this line and if I move it a little bit then this Look, you make it in such a rounded shape it is coming isn’t it so you give it a little You can round me up like this note also from here you have to convert to curve and I just need to round it off a little bit here Similarly, I also need to read the two notes below. You have to select Convert to Curve a little bit I need to round this up and at the end I need to curve this as well a little bit I need to round this off okay now you You will see that this is its shape Look, the middle one has become slightly round and we have selected it completely and I filled it with red color and I have removed its outline. okay now i want it here Its symbol which youtube2 sides if you look here Look here it is written five sides I want to do this three times so I will do it here I should do three sides on this And now we have to rotate it, so rotate to do this what will we do it here We will click on it and rotate it from here. We can do it at any angle we want and After that we have to do it in the center Alina so I’ve told you all this That’s why I’m not telling you this again how to align both of them press c and e to align it to the center It has been done, fill it with white color Give it and remove its outline If you do it, you will see this in front of you youtube1 It has been done in a very simple way I hope you got everything in a very easy way It must feel good, someone might understand also question if you feel in between the video Pause there in the comment section below It is given there, ask your question I will answer that for you, okay one person we And let’s learn to make banana but before that let’s learn What did we learn from this logo? Here we have learned how to process any object How to curve any object after curving it how do we use it You can give shape, use polygon here learned How is polygons made and how is objects is rotated then last how The object is aligned to a comes together with another object On top of the new page I have created a new page here I have inserted it and let’s create it here Another logo which will be the logo of Messenger We will create that here with the help of the ellipse tool. So here first of all we have a lips tool will draw it something like this okay and After that, we have to fill color in it. If you have ever seen the Messenger logo There are two colors used, one is blue and you have one pink color which we call People say magenta color so we are here I will use the blue one here Shades used are light blue and dark If both blue and blue are used then we are the most First you will bring your object here We will select it and then we will come here You will go to this option which is given below With the help of Interact Fee Tool, we You can create the gradient simply here Click and by clicking here you will Look, here you can see some options yes you have to choose fountain fill here Option of fountain fee as per your choice Look, there is a default color fill here It will come in black and white but if you want can you change this what do we have to do We have to do pink and blue first We will choose a note here and we will Here you will click on pink and then After that we select the second color node. we will do it and we will click on blue Look, it has arrived in pink and blue Now its direction of colour is also If we need to change then you can use the note for that Select it and simply go to your destination You have to keep it there and then apply your color you can change the direction if you If you want to add a new color in the middle then For this, simply create a new note And beyond that you can fill in a new color what have you to do for that come on this line Click on the thin line above it Double click and you will see a new node It will be created here and in that You can fill it with any color of your choice, I I will fill it with blue color here. in the one above and the one below I want to do light blue color okay so I I go here and from here I choose the color I’ll do another light blue okay and now after that we’re here But we would have placed it in some way like this so we need a little bit of pink color in it If I want to increase it a bit then I will use pink Let me shift the color a little bit more On the down side, this is our brother circle and we have filled it in fountain fill but if you look here you will see a Even a small corner becomes a part of us How to make it, we make a pen With the help of a tool or a free hand tool Where to get free hand tool from Help come here go to the top of the toolbar and here See, you get a free hand tool. Select this and you will simply click on it What you have to do is just click once and you are done Look, he will draw a line here and come as soon as you click the second one okay The line will end there and if you want So we can create a new line from the same node so I clicked here again Here I made a new shape again. And I’m back where I started I brought it back there and gave it back in a Click and see the whole thing It has taken a shape and we can make it look like this You can move wherever you want We think it is the perfect place What we have to do is place it there Can so here I feel like this is perfect and now what do we have to do These two have to be connected together to connect what will you do with both these objects Select it and as soon as you select it You will see that some options will appear automatically here. We will go to the first option which is There is an option to weld about all these options I can explain you further but right now I am only here Teaching you how to use pe weld what happens to the weld is that any two or weld two or more objects together I become one with you Like I will click here you can see it Look, that object has moved away from here and they both together became there is a single object if you want to color If you want to change anything then you can change the color as per your choice You can set it back to whatever color you want Looks like it’s okay, you can put the color here. yes, I can also add some radish here I take it upwards so just a little bit of me looks more perfect right up top Slightly redder than pink and blue here and then a little bit lighter light blue which A very slight light blue is okay So, this much work is done, now I am here There is one more thing to do and in between there is something How do we get the design made? We will make it here for free With the help of hand tool you can simply free hand Choose the tool and make any shape you want in my case they can draw I am drawing a shape like this here hmm okay so a shape something like this It will become ours and look at this, this shape of ours will be formed If someone has come to you in this shape If any changes are to be made then they You can simply do this with your shape tool. Choose your shape tool and apply whatever you like You have to make changes to your shape tool By selecting these notes from the help, can you okay so where do I get the shape I am there that yes it is perfect I’ll leave it alone until I see this Here you can try to give yourself a perfect shape tries to So this is our Y shape now. I want to fill it with white color I have filled it and the outline is She is coming from black, she removes me from here You have to do this outline which you are seeing If I remove this then I will go here I will remove it, after removing it I want to align it in the center so We will select both then c and e ok Look here it’s aligned in the center it has been done and it has come okay so look at this our The Messenger logo appears nearby In a very easy way you can change the Messenger logo If you can make it then we have made it in this logo What have we learned from these people? how do we draw a circle We can apply gradient color in it. can that which we call fountain color and along with it we have learned that we How to Draw Any Picture With Any Free Hand Tool How do we create an object? You can merge them together or weld them If you can then I hope you can make this logo right now People should practice it near you You can do this very easily on the system You can move forward and create a new logo we learn to make and along with that we learn a new If you also learn options then for that I what will we do first so first of all we are here If we take a new page then we have clicked on new page I’ve inserted one here and now we Here you are going to make the A logo which you Do you use a mobile phone and how can you see its logo? We will make it here, we are going to learn it For that first we have to create it here on a circle so first of all we’re going to put a how to make a perfect circle With the help of control key I clicked here Look, it has come in a circle and in this whole I don’t want the circle, I want it If this only forms a half circle then whenever you If you make a circle then look here you will see something You get options related to the circle Here we will choose the pie option which given in the center as soon as you put the pie You will click and see the pie closed like this she will come after doing it and after that since I If you want it here then I will choose it here After choosing the Shape Tool and Shape Tool You select this note and light it If you move your sa upwards then you will see your This shape will change back Now look I have a perfect half The circle has been formed and after that We have to make a rectangle with the help of So we will take one shape here, rectangle tool and we will make a shape with it here, okay so We have created this here, shape and shape since a little bit is coming together I need a little space in between so I I’ll give it some space here. and then these bottom corners If I want to round off, then for that I Here I will choose the shape tool and I will I will select both the notes and I I can round this up as much as I need to I have to round it off, I will round it off that much I think it’s a little big So I’ll make this a little smaller These two have turned out to be absolutely perfect Select it and fill it with color Let’s take the light green color now after that we what do we have to do we have to make its hands that are made in the android logo We’ll go back to the Rectangle tool and With help we will make one here rectangle and we call it its corners That will make it round and we will make the same copy Let’s take it to its right side also here And we will give both of them back Green Look at the color, both of its hands have come ready now its turn to love it so we Let’s copy the object and paste it let’s place it here okay and its Let’s make another copy and slightly right it Now let’s place both of them in We select the object by pressing the Shift key how to do it with help first do one Click then hold down the shift button, then click on the second Click here to see both our selections It will happen and then what will we do after that We have to do it, we will do it in groups Ctrl+G is the shortcut key for this or Then if you don’t want to use the shortcut key If you want then you can see it here also You are getting the option of group, you can simply Click here to find your object The group will be done now why did I do the group There is a reason for that as I have never felt any pain in both of these Place these objects at the center of this rectangle If I have to bring it in then now since the groups have been formed now i will select this later I chose rectangle and then clicked on keyboard If we press the C button, you will see this in the center will be perfectly placed After that I have to make it here How will we make the eyes here ellipse tool and here we’ll draw ellipse to circle ok will do this Fill with white and this is where I feel it that I want to place it there I’ll place it and make a copy of it The group will select both of them again I will tell you how to do a group and center it If you take it then this much is done now its here I want to make an antenna now how to make an antenna We will make antenna, we will make line tool With the help of I will take it here for free I have provided the help of hand tool for free here. I chose the hand tool, click here did and click below to see it now She’s coming to me in a straight line why is she coming as hers i am I am going to answer you but before that you Let me know in the comment section below how is the straight line coming out yes you have guessed it right I pressed it on my keyboard The shift button should be a straight line so if I don’t press the shift button it is coming If I press my line, I will send it anywhere A straight can move in the direction If they don’t come in a line then I have said here Press Shift and it becomes a straight line Now I want this line to be thicker I want to do something a little bit about it I need to increase the width, how will I increase it You first select this line and Look here you will find its options When you go, you will see whatever thick line you want You want to do that, draw that thick line here you can ok i will take it here 4 The point which is enough seems too much to me if I make it three then this I have done three now I am here I am going to teach you something new every time you Do you draw a line like I did here If a line is drawn on it then in this line also there are a lot of properties ok that’s it We get all the properties How to open it above the Outline Tool panel to open it either First, select your line and Press the f12 button on your keyboard or you can If you come down, look here You get the option of outline and Click here twice means double Click like I double click here I will do what I have, see the outline A complete dialogue in the name of pen The box will open and you will see it here See there are many options given First of all here related to outline Color option is given, if you want then choose the color You can change it, simply come here and You can buy any colour you want from here you can decide ok after that There is an option to adjust the width of your line What should be the width? I took it here. It has happened, you have to take 3 points if you have 16 points you take 16 okay i will take it back I will do three and then give it here Your outline of the unit is given below: What is your unit for the width? Would you like to prefer points in my case if you want you can call it picas or millimetres or You can use any measurement in centimeters Whichever you find easier Look at the style given here what can i do that you can line you up Do you want dotted one, in which style do you want it you can also choose from here ok Later, see what is useful for us here. this option is corners here if you If you look, you will see what is exactly here The corners are not rounded when are you because what is in the A logo What happens is that these corners become rounded I want round corners So, this line cap, I use it I will make a round, see I have done it here I clicked on the middle and look at the round cap Look at the corners, they have become rounded I’ve gone I’ll do it ok now its color is green to me If I want it like others have it then I will give it to you I will select it and I will click right on green I will click and see it has turned green and I want to rotate it on this What will happen if I click again here? Look, the rotation handles are ready too And I can rotate this here. ok above 30° and after that simply What can you do? Make it a little smaller And you can put it where you want Place it as per your convenience, if it is okay then I placed this one here I made another copy and now I need it I have to rotate it but which way, the other way what do we call him, we call him Let’s say what happens in flip flip that you are in the same size as your shape and What is the angle at which you are It will do a flip, meaning it will go to the other side If I go then how do we do that See, whenever you select any object you do it, see you will find it here can i find the handles ok If I zoom in on this, what do you do? This handle is the middle handle because I need to flip it right side means I need to flip it to this side So I’ll select this handle. I will press the troll button on my keyboard and I’m going to move it like this, I’m going to drag it and See, I’m showing you a preview here. I will bring it here and release it I will give you this, see what happened
to my object it came back after doing a flip okay i’ll put it here I place them both from I select and group it and I I’m going to put this in the center of this circle let me place it okay so it should be like this Now what am I supposed to do those black outlines that I don’t know If I want to remove them then I will select all of them I will do all the objects and from here I I will remove the outline of this Look, we have got perfect shape it’s gone and the andrew logo’s okay so something like this You can easily create Android logo in this way We must have learned to make this logo I will tell you what I have learned Here we first learned how we Let’s create a circle, then we will call that circle How to draw a half circle using the shape tool from this we made a rectangle We rounded off all the corners that were there We drew another rectangle around it rounded the corners after that we made that Copy the rectangle and place it here When it came we grouped it and put it in the center then we placed the ellipse here Create two circles using the tool and center them And after that we used the line tool or we used free hand tool We have created a line here. We filled the color and then rotated it So we did this flip copy here. okay so i have given you quite a few options If you have got something to learn from a person then come Hope you are liking this thing that You are also getting to learn options in this way And you also get to learn how to make logos If you are getting then there is enough practical knowledge They move forward and learn the creation of a new people and at the same time its I also want to work on options for that I will create a new page here and Now we’re going to make one here. okay it comes how do we create those people we will do that we will learn it here okay so For that we come here first. over the free hand tool and create us here There will be a shape, so we will make one here A simple shape with the help of which we can make we will design the logo okay something like this This way I made a shape here and after that we will choose shape here tool and select all these shapes or We will select all these notes and here We will convert all the notes in Convert to Curve and then we have I will have to give it a slight curve so how will that happen We’ll curve it a little bit here let’s do it and after that we have to do it here also If we want a curve then here first we have to You will need to create a new note here. because I need to keep the line here straight If you want then we have a new one here for that After we have created the node, we have this We will select this node and We can easily give a curve or shape here. okay so whatever shape you want to give You can easily give it a shape here. Look, I’m giving it this shape right now, so what? it’s happening i’m choosing this handle So this other handle is also moving to us If I don’t want it then I can undo it let me select this note and Look here, you are given an option what is the name of the floral node what does it do that both your handles will now perform different functions I will do it if you work on this handle See, only this handle of yours will be used You have no performance on other handles something will happen okay so I have sent this note I want to delete it, I did it delete okay and now we can put this shape in our We adjust accordingly, whatever suits us we need shape and after that we will do this The node is ours, we have to return it too in shape okay something like this Very easily we can create a new shape here we can create and whatever our Nike if we have a logo then we can make it here Look at our shape in this way he has come to us as ours, we have to give him I will have to fill it with black color here I will fill it with black color, alright, this much Our shape is now formed, after that We also have to write here Nike so its So what we will do is simply edit our text We will come to the tool, select it and here We will click and after that we will write here Nike, can we make it a little bigger? Let’s take it and I’ll make it a little bold as well I will do it and after making it bold we need to do this a little italic this See it is italicized and I am calling it my I place it at the proper place where I want to keep it okay see this it’s something like this in the way that our Here you will create a new logo free hand With the help of the tool and whose logo will it be You must have seen the logo of Motorola company I must have seen all the phones of my mother I am going to make a logo here so for that what will we do first we will take here Ellipse tool and here we draw a circle After I draw the circle I will I will fill color in it, blue color I’ll pick up a light blue one here. ok if I want to change the color to blue So we can do that too, simply use this color Click here and see it in front of you You will get the option to edit the fill here. Go to the color viewer and select the color you want It is in blue, you can give that color as per your choice You can, okay then I can choose the color which I like It’s right, I’ll take it according to my convenience am giving Okay, so here’s ours, look, here’s a circle. Its outline has been prepared and is ready It is also coming in black, I will remove it Let me give you my outline has been removed And now we have to make a shape here. We create that shape with the help of the free hand tool So for that we’ll have to take it from here Free hand tool and help of free hand tool From here we can create any new shape if you can then I can do that by clicking here let me start making this okay i’ll do it right I am not telling you the perfect logo I am telling you again and again but I have an idea for you I am telling you how to create this logo If you can then look at this, I have posted one here A small one has made a shape here and I will make changes in this shape and add the rest of it If I want to make shapes then how will I make them I will do it lightly, you should pay attention Look, I have taken shape here After I picked up the tool and the shape tool, I I selected all these notes and I what did you do with this click on convert to curve I’ve done it, right? And after that I Let me reduce it a little bit, this area I have reduced it a little here I have taken it according to my own will and downwards Come here so I want a new node here If I want then I will double click here I’ll get a new node just like that If I want a new note here too, I can double click. I will get a new node now this one New nodes have come to us for these With the help of this we will create a shape here Simply we have to click it like this and Here we have to make a shape like this For the logo or click here and then I hope you can fix this thing Look like this, it is coming here also, I have seen it Select the flower note and click on it This is our handle, we put this handle here you can correct it with okay so look at this We have a shape formed here now these two nodes are I need to shift them up a little bit, so I I selected both of these nodes and I I’ve moved it a little bit upwards here has shifted something is above this position No rest if you see this circle in the middle I have given it in my If you want to do it then you can do it according to your requirement Wherever you feel is right then this is ours Look, I have formed a shape now You need to flip this shape and make a copy So we will select this by pressing the control key I’ll press it and then I’ll flip it and make a copy of it I will make it and after that I will take the shape Shift it a little bit to the left here I will do this, meaning I will overlap these I will select both of them and we Here we talked about weld option first We have discussed about the same weld option here We will click and see as soon as we reach here Clicked this and see both the shapes of both. Look at these beaches that have welded together The area is of which we can adjust Use your shape tool to shape it as far as you can You can adjust it to the size you want can you adjust it okay so I’m here I’ll try to adjust it If I bring it down a little bit, I what do i do i put a new note here I create something by double clicking and Let us convert this to line ok and now what do we do here Let’s also convert it to line, this is fine Look, I have both the notes. She has been created and now this We get it back into its proper shape According to that, wherever we feel it is right So look, this logo has come to us It has happened in between, now we will take it according to our own You can make it bigger or smaller as per your requirement I can adjust it so I can center it I take what it takes to get to the center I have already told you about C and E and you can read this Fill the outline with white color Remove it and see your logo Is Allright, go ahead and learn something And we will bring new interesting things for him. Let’s go to a new page, I’ve clicked here A new page has been inserted from back to front we are going to study in corel draw Shaping About Shaping Commands We will learn to combine in commands Or weld and trim it this way There are many more commands inside it If we talk about them then first of all How to activate it first If you understand then here I have made it there is a shape so for the shape I have chosen from here The Ellipse tool is selected and we have selected it here I drew a shape on it, okay, inside it we Suppose you fill any one color I have filled it with red color here. So look now we have the property toolbar No shaping commands appeared on the Whatever commands we have here are displayed That’s happening with our Ellipse tool Related our commands are shaping commands we meet when we have two or more more than one object is selected and alright so for that we have a of the object and make a copy of it, and Let’s change its color a bit, let’s say I have set its color here to blue. So now we have two objects have become of different colours, so now we If you select both, then see As soon as we select these then here Here you will see that we have property We have some new commands on top of the tool bar These commands are being displayed There are commands for shaping here, see the best The first command which we get is displayed here what remains is the command of the combine What does the combine do? It works on two or more than two objects into a single create it in the object on which we Can I make a common fill or a common outline We can atrail the combine into a rectangle Ellipses Polygonal spiral or graph even we people You can apply this on text as well Simply we need a single curved Let’s convert it into an object So let’s understand what it does after all Look here we have two selected objects and if I combine both of these If I combine it, I will click here. I’m on top of the combine whose shortcut I’m on So there is also control L, so here you You will be able to see what these two objects are Look at the groups that have formed among themselves, such as The forms are done I’m moving one so both are moving and if I go here I will change the color then see both of them together the colour of both of them will change again in what do we need to do to differentiate we have to do a break here Part hum jese here break a part ka Will you use command or control shortcut? We will use K to break the parts for that you will be able to see that look at this both The objects are back to us separately and now we are going to separate these two again We can change the colours if we do both of these overlaps the same objects then what do we get to see let’s go They can also see if we see these two overlaps back to back, meaning one by one we overlap this one on top of the other And then we connect both these objects and now if we combine If you do this then you will be able to see that look here You will find a blank area then combine What does combine do to two objects what does all this do together The path creates us here look we have one here in the middle We have a part of an intersect visible this is our blank part here there is no object there is no color Even if we change the color on this you will be able to see that the rest of the two There are objects whose color is changing There is no color change in the middle part It has been good with the combine, we have got a lot of You can also create shapes or designs Let me give you an example I will make a single design and show you the rest Then you guys practice and tell us what Whatever you make of me you will make it of me I’ll give you the link right now In the description of the video itself you will find Join me and share your designs with me okay so first of all what are we doing here Let’s do it here, we can take any An ellipse is okay and it’s written something like this We can create such a design here. make it a little smaller and now I have to do this to If you want to make multiple copies then see Multiple To make copies we either use the mouse and or you use the command What command do you use for this command? You can click here for the command you need to do Windows come in here come in here to dockers and dockers Inside you will find a command Where did this go in the name of transformation As you click on this you will see your See the complete Docker on the right side This transformation will come by opening We get a lot of commands in Docker yes but now what we have to use currently So we have to use the rotation command what i will do is i need to get this object to 20 I want to rotate it at an angle and I want that we have a total of 10 copies of this object If he comes close to you, then you will see that I am like I will click on apply here and you will see Some such copies came to us now what did i do is select all of these and here we chose any one color If you apply then you will be able to see that All objects here have a single color The one which is green has been applied and arrived now what we will do is select all of these what do we do, we do a magic what kind of magic is this what will we do with it If we combine them then see how we If you click on combine then you will be able to see Look, we have a new design It has been done and it has come, okay now look here Look, he hasn’t come with a fill in two I will tell you the reason why this happens has not come because we have number off here We have taken a few extra copies Instead of taking 10 here, we want eight here You should have taken copies, okay so what about that what would have happened here we have more objects one on top of the other He must have come here after becoming one and we Since it has been combined, hence here If the color has not been filled then return it Let’s undo it before doing this to correct it So let me undo this and now what do we do from here an object this Look, we removed it here, look here look at this an object is created and an object this one look here one the object was made we could do both of these Let’s delete it and then the whole select it and do it combine so now you see we have a very This wonderful design has come out If you want you can remove its outline yes simply you go to the outline and print it Remove the outline like this we are here Can create many different shapes With the help of the combine you can do anything you want You take a random shape, suppose I have put it here It has taken a square shape now After taking the square shape you can cut it into square shapes. How can you make any design through this Let’s say we go here and We haven’t taught you this yet, though. I will tell you further about the distal tool. I will teach you but I will simply leave you alone here. I am showing you by taking an example that I have given here I chose a Dettol tool and with the Dettol tool We have seen one such shape here. Okay, we have created it and now what do we do? So we made copies of it so we did the same here I chose 8 copies here and applied. So look, we have multiple copies here. She has come readymade, now we have selected the whole did a and we clicked on combine here so this has been combined and now we have We have filled any one color here. If you did it then see, you are seeing how much By creating a pattern with the best of the best This is the way you can make a difference You can create patterns by exploring you can do some experiment with this okay so next with the combine tool Let’s grow and understand after the combine The next tool we get is weld and what ever work is done then for that also since we need at least two object so we have two objects here has been created and both of these I’ve placed the objects here like this: I have done it and if you want I can change its color To explain it to you in different ways And after selecting the color of both of them Now look, we have an option here. what is the weld of weld what does the weld do combining two or more objects into one Converts it into a single object This is a very focused approach with a single outline The thing to give is with a single outline look if we click here So as soon as you click on the blood, this Look, these two objects merge together and in between no one can see you You don’t see the outline of other objects You are getting a single outline show if you are talking about the whole object then you can do this You can also create an object of the method With the help of Ho Weld option, you can You can also create a picture by combining shapes and text Suppose we can create an object We made a circle here, someone here I also took an alphabet and wrote it a little So we grew it up this way and we I placed it on top of it like this okay and what have we done to both of them here Once weld it, you can see both of these look the objects are merged together and If we fill color on it, it will look something like this This way we will get the color filled So you can do something like this, let’s talk now We are moving forward in the next step and understand the next option which is what our trim trim does See we selected both and here Look at this, you get the option of trim Look what Trim does that Overlap of both objects area is, suppose what is the overlap area Let’s say we have created this object in this way When you place an object then this is what you see in the middle Are you seeing the area, this is our overlap? is the area where both these objects are If they are overlapping then what is that This cuts out this overlap area Who gets the cut is also something to be understood Let’s say we have two objects here I have taken the first one here in this color And we bought the second one in green color The green one is on top and the pink one is on top the one who is going to be there is down below or what is it called Magenta is below, first we selected it we did the green one later I have selected my magenta one and Then we trimmed it so you can see this You’ll find that our green one has turned magenta If you have trimmed that one then here you will see You have to be very careful that the object you okay that object You have to select it later, now I will select it Let me undo it again and what I did just now We had chosen green earlier but now what shall we do first we shall choose magenta after that we will choose green and Now we’ll trim it and see what happens next. what did he do was trim the green one see this is given okay so the object We have to trim on which we apply it We have to do whatever our effect is Later you will have to select A to proceed further Let us further understand about the next command that which is within this is ours intersect now what was intersect doing that like which trim did what work that trim The work was to ensure that the overlap area of both he was cutting it but intersecting it what does that overlap area in the middle do There you will find a new object I create it and give it to you, look at these two has overlapped here we clicked above intersect and now you you will see that here you will see that you have a A new object has been found for both of them got an object in the middle okay Let’s go back and understand the next command about which we have here Simplify Now Simplify Something of Ours It works just like trim, if we look here If you click, you will see that our The object has been cut and has come Now you must have a question here that when Our job is to simplify the object the same thing for cutting or trimming Our trim command was also working What is the difference between the two, sir? In this it happened that when we were two or two Selecting multiple objects at once Let’s say we have taken this shape here. and we place this shape on top of it and We will create multiple copies of this here. let’s do it okay this is how we have done it here I created multiple copies, now look at me I am showing you both examples of this So I’m making two copies here now. I selected the whole thing and we Previously applied Trim command see Trim What will happen with the command, just see and Only this which is ours, which is the lowest, The last object was trimmed and came But now if we put all these aside okay and now if we choose this and Here we apply Simplify You can see the command, simplify it as soon as we If you do this, then see every object above Trim the object beneath it These look look at this you can see all of them All the eyes have come trimmed, so each one The object above has a different The object is trimmed. This is what we do people do it through simplify so okay If there is a difference between the two then from now on You should keep in mind that after all the trim and What is the difference in Simplifi going forward Let’s go back, I have made two shapes here. I have made both of them, I have filled them with one color I will take you through different ways to explain I have selected both and The next command we have here is front minus back front minus back what does it work the same way you Overlap both points first We choose this shape from the top The green ones choose the shape later Let’s click on the shape and here we go to front minus back so you will be able to see that here ours which is below or which we later what did the chosen one do? intersect what has been done to the object above us And at the same time, it got deleted itself as well. is ok with this whereas it is not happening in trim ok so what is in front minus back It happens that the object in our back He applies the object in front of us It trims it and ours is just like that The last command is back minus front What does the one above do to us? The object is the one that marks the object below It trims ours and it also gets deleted goes along well okay so something like this This is how we will use all these commands here Let’s give a command, we stay last here which is create boundary create What does the boundary do? No one can walk here. I will not make any changes on this, only here We are seeing an outline boundary We will get it by creating it like we are here If you click on it you will see that we An outline boundary is found here Okay, so these were all our commands. There are commands for shaping that we apply it to the objects and to differentiate different objects or shapes It is used a lot when we People use it to create their logos Where we create logos So we use it a lot there. So now let’s come to our same command use it in practical knowledge and We will show you something so that your Whatever doubts are there in between, they should also be cleared So first of all we make it here which We have a shoe company Ads, its here If we create a logo then that is created what we’re going to do first is we’re going to We will take a circle here and make a copy of it what shall we do now to make something like this I had explained to us that the middle place here This is the area we need, so we have it How will I get everyone, comment me quickly tell me how to get it ok then let me tell you further How to get this which I told you just now told if yes then the answer is that we will come here And here we will find the intersect If we click on this option then we will see this we have this one in the middle here which is our Look, that was the area, we have found a leaf is the area like the one we’ll be using in our AIDS logo and we look at this If you click once more, you will see our There will be rotation handles built in and this This is our point from where our entire what to do if the same object rotates This is our center point, we Let’s move it a little bit downwards We’ve moved it down a little bit, okay? and after moving down we get this The shape of the leaf which we are getting is of this Make a copy in the right corner and make the same shape We will make a copy on the left as well, something like this So look at this way we have two shapes we have come in shape and are a little far away So we pass them in some way like this They’ve come a little bit closer now We have perfect and now what are we We will do it on all three of these objects Let’s fill it with black color, see We have a leaf area here. He has come back after doing all this, what should we do with him from here we can weld if we want so we’ve welded it up here and After that we take it here rectangle tool and from here we create some of our rectangle shapes so we have this total We need to make three shapes so we drew one, two and three okay we have three rectangles here I have made the shapes according to my own choice and this You can place yourself wherever you like Yes, you can place it according to your convenience After doing this, these are the three shapes We also weld these together and Now what will we do is to weld these two We will select the objects here. And after selecting, we are here we will click on trim ok see like this As soon as you click on Trim, what will you do? You will find that if you remove this shape now, It is of no use to us, let’s do it are delete and look here we have this The logo has come as a trim object Ours is ready, simply you just enter the name below you have to write eddie das is ok and whatever you want its relevant font is ok font I’m not going to go into too much detail on the also do you like its font, did you like this take this and make it a little bigger okay so look at this we have our edge The logo is ready, you can simply do it this way You can create a logo like this only if you ever Definitely it will happen, you can create that too you can if you simply draw a shape here Create and fill any color of your own here Do whatever you think it is It’s the perfect colour [music] will have to be made bigger, for which we will have to The text needs to be converted To convert a curve to a curve The shortcut key is control-q or whatever you want So go to object here and here You get the option Convert to Curve as soon as you convert it to curve Look, all the notes are displayed here. It will be done and from here you can choose the shape tool. Click here to work on the notes and click below You can slightly play these two notes below Just shift it, that’s all you have to do After that both these objects Select it and here you can simply trim Click on Trim What will happen is you remove this and your [music] told about the next options which are Very simple option of group and ungroup And it is a very useful option Group and ungroup within your design what does two or more merges objects together So let’s say we have an object here here is the second object here The third object is not necessarily the same Meaning the object should have the same property as ours They may be of different properties also what I mean to say is that line it could also be a text it can also be a polygonal shape, Select the same shapes together and what can you do with it, you can group it what happens in the group is that it By not making all objects behave individually We come in the same category as here If you group it then you will be able to see that this We will be able to move all objects together Together we are small, together we are big or rotate it Even if we want to do it, we can do it together ok if we want to fill color on it then we can do that together too okay and If we were to take it apart again, For that we need to ungroup To ungroup please see here You get the Option Property Toolbar Click on ungroup or its shortcut key There is control over you, you can also control yourself through this You can ungroup if you want to go to the main so you go through the object menu and Here you get the option of group Inside the group you will find the ungroup Option from where you can ungroup it again You can, like, ungroup this. look what will happen all these objects back to individual objects and now you’re beyond these again Apply your own colors or shapes differently If you want to do that you can apply this Our ungroup option comes next grow and do something else on top of the objects things that we apply in our work Whenever we do it we also learn it You are working on one of your designs So there is one more command which is It is used a lot which is a copy The command to do means we need its multiple we have to make copies as till now we If you were making it then look at it with us There are two-three methods, the first method we have is this that you select this and whatever you The Property Toolbar is available here There is a copy command given on it, right? Select your object It will be copied to that and you will be able to take it back to where you want to go If you want to paste it also then simply click on it If you do it, it will be pasted, after that you You can keep it anywhere, this is one way There is a way to copy any object What is the second way that you can do this Select the object and you will see it here Do the same thing as per the menu through this too it is a long process you can do the same work You can copy and paste it or whatever you want So select it again using the mouse Keep it selected and drag it like this The right click of the mouse can be used as If you press it, a copy of it will be made and appear. This is the way and there is another way ok as you select it You will get the numeric key from your keyboard. There is a pad, you will find the plus button there As soon as you press the plus button So look, its copy has already been made and arrived You can remove it and keep it anywhere and in the last there is one more method okay that hardly anyone would know that you Select the object and use the mouse As you move, you will see here A preview showing what this object is If we leave it or if we click on it if we release it then where will it be placed If it comes then wherever you find a copy of it You should keep selecting it and your which is your space bar from the keyboard you Press it and you will see a copy being made It will come like this wherever you take it Let’s keep pressing it right there One copy will keep getting made, ok, see this also This is a very easy way to make multiple copies There are some ways to make it so you can have multiple You can make copies in the copy, one more way It also happens, we call it a duplicate So if you want, you can If you want to duplicate it you can do that as well what do i do first i am here There are too many objects, delete them and there’s only one single object I can see I’ll put it here and now what should I do? If you want to duplicate it then you can do it in edit okay so what we copied earlier Later we pasted both of these Commands are from our single command which is a duplicate whose shortcut key would be if you have control D then look at this you have it A bean object has arrived and its duplicate If yes then we can copy it in this way also. You can copy or duplicate the object We can also make multiple copies through Sometimes it also happens that the object We have to copy it on our Corel Draw It is not based on any other software Suppose it is on Paint, it is on MS Word it’s up there it’s above Excel it’s anywhere If it may matter then for example I am what do i do here i put excel here Let me open it and assume it’s inside Excel I have some data here, and I want this data to be given to me You have to copy it and take it with you to your Corel Draw Above, first we selected the data here From here we copied and copied After doing this, now when we come to Coral Draw and go back to the edit menu and here See, we now have three options activated. Pest and Pest Special is coming ok so then we will do the work of paste special When we take an object in such a way which may be from some other software Like now I copied the data from excel I have done it but I have to bring it here Okay, so here we’re going to use paste. For special, you can click on paste special. If you do this, you will see a window opening here she is coming after doing this and will ask you that what is this In which format do you want to paste it? If we want to paste then we will choose here Since I had to paste it into excel So we’ll choose Excel here and do that. okay so look we have this data It has come after being pasted and it is complete The data is editable if you want, just like this If you double click on it you will be able to access it again You will go single and you will have to make whatever changes Suppose I don’t want Gautam here. So we deleted Gautam here, okay and if we close it then you You will see that Gautam has moved away from here okay then here it is all yours The format is editable whenever you want it You can go back to the same software and make the changes can I bring you here again and again There is no need for you to edit it directly from here you can do it, okay so this is the paste The work of the special goes forward and Inside objects we put one more thing use what they have Copying properties to Properties what things come in may be its shape It could be its colour, it could be its outline these are properties of all objects then if we have to copy its properties If we want to do it then we can copy that too Here I have an ellipse tool I’ve drawn a shape here, and we’ve Another shape has also been created here. which is square shape now if we see this I have all the colors if you apply them on this what to do is to do all its properties which is its atrimed We have to apply, we have to select it so in our case I have a square shape is selected will go back to edit copy properties from here in command On clicking we will see a popup It will come openly and from here we will have to tell which properties do we copy suppose I have to do it outline pen copy I have to do it, I have to copy the fill, but I I don’t want to copy the color of the outline If we had to do it then we did not choose it back I pressed OK and see we now have an arrow This arrow is coming in the form of the object we are Click on it and copy the properties there It will come upon this shape of ours As soon as we clicked here, it Look at its color, see it here it has been copied and arrived okay so this In some way we are here to meet someone else The properties of the object are also copied You can do this, it is a very useful option Many times it happens that we put some pressure on someone I don’t have a gradient applied Do you know which colours we used on it? It was mixed at that time but I got the same color want another object in another shape I can use it there let’s delete this and move on Select your next command inside Corel Draw. about what our artistry is all about media so for artistic media we need What to do, very useful command if you look at it very carefully you will also be very You can create something new and make a video If you like it then like the video immediately Make sure to subscribe to the channel going forward Grow and understand artistic media about what exactly he does See where you can get artistic media first first let me tell you that Artistic Media gets you there Simply you need this rectangle tool You saw it, look at it, it is written here Artistic media has become a shortcut to If it comes to your keyboard then What is artistic media? One way it has a brush from where you can get lots of You can make shapes in this way Look, we have created a shape here and You can see many patterns here or what we call brush Stroke From there you can make any one of your own You can choose patterns or brush strokes that Whichever stroke you want to apply okay so look here there are lots of You have given different strokes By choosing any one stroke you can create that You can create the pattern here Here we have money in the form of a pattern. Now what would be its practical use first they understand this, we have understood this I asked what a brother is and what he looks like and where can one get its practical application now Let’s see what happens then For that we are here, suppose we have said here Any one has typed an alphabet Let’s make it a little bigger, something like this You could have made it a bit bolder as well look here we have typed some alphabets I had made her bold, if you want you can do it You can also change the font as per your choice. Here I have added another font for it I have taken it and it has had no effect on us It is okay to use artistic media See Artistic Media doing it always Work on what your outline is So first start working on the outline We need to get a little more creative here. what we do here is a simply here Let’s make an outline here and this We will make multiple copies of the outline here. Let’s create it, okay, so here we have I have created a very close copy and this If we repeat this then look we have If many copies are made then some In this way, we made a lot of copies. now we’re going to put all of these objects together Let’s select it and from here we click So look at the trim as soon as We will click on trim and you will see that what were all these lines This is what our alphabet was, A ok look at this i have trimmed it look here if you can see it Let us unfill it a little bit on this If you remove the color from the then you will be able to see Look at this, he has trimmed it here. I have given it, okay, if you want you can do it on top of it too You can use artistic media What I have to do is simply delete them all. Let me give you this shape here and Go to Artistic Media and you will simply use this brush at any place click on outline okay so this Look, now you can put whatever you want on it Whatever stroke you have, you have to apply it You can apply strokes and whatever design you have made I have made that design different See what you can create in the pattern If you want in this way then from here its smoothing, you can adjust that how much you need the smooth object that its the width of the lines which are coming You can increase or decrease the line width from here. If you can, look at something like this you can create a shape a style of a shape okay if you can make something like this then we will also make it Can use artistic media or sometimes it also happens that if you’ve ever seen the logo we’ve seen it okay You might have seen any Hindi logo, I will show you one Let me show you an example. I will show you one such example. I will import it and bring it here people yes ok hey look at these people now look here this Look at the logo here is something in English It has been written here in this manner many times This is also done here in Hindi instead of English It is written but in Hindi we have a a problem arises what problem arises First they see, first we solve the problem Let’s see the help of artistic media again If we look at its solution then here we have I have made a circle and made a circle later we took it here Before the Text Tool and After the Text Tool We used this text tool as soon as we If you take it above the outline, you will see here its shape will change okay and As soon as we click on its edge then look the cursor is blinking here After that we go here and select our font Let’s change the font here We have also taken a Hindi font here. yes, choose any hindi font here Let’s do it, suppose I took this, okay and we have to type anything here Suppose we wrote here Mercy Dayanand Yadav degree degree college suppose we have here I wrote the name of some college like this I have written some name here, okay sa i will make it bigger i have done it here I enlarged it to 72 points now you can You might be able to see the problem, look at the The letters are English, sorry, look at those in Hindi Look here pay2 is coming in breaks There is a gap in between here in English since I don’t know that much but You can see it clearly here in Hindi It is visible and it is a little bit visible If you are feeling bad then solve this problem The solution is our artistic media I am hiding in it, we are away from there You can solve the problem simply What you have to do is that you don’t type like this I have to move this a little to the side Let me do it and we’ll bring it back here Let’s type what we have already written If we rewrite this, we have here I wrote back the same thing that we had written here It was written Dayanand Yadav degree college okay i typed this here After typing this we have taken it what do we do, we make a curve from here so we went to object we converted here I made it to curve now what was this text tha this has been converted to a curve okay now what shall we do here will go to Artistic Media Tools and such Now if we go to the tool then look here we are getting a brush here this brush what will we do with this object We will click on this and see, we are like here If we click, we can now save it what we need to do is save it We say yes, click on save and here Let’s assume we give it a name We have given the text here and this It has been saved. Ok, so look at our Look at the design here Look, it has been saved and has come to us Look inside the list, it’s here right? Our custom, we call it custom We call it Artistic Media Brush Custom brush now we can do it simply You can delete it and do it from here as well. delete and now we have to go back okay And here this object is its If we want to make a copy then inside this first we will create a make a copy and this one above Our object was to take it from here Let’s convert it into arc we have why has this been done because what is ours Artistic brush was the one that applies That applies only to the strokes it happens okay so that’s why we have here The stroke is made in this manner and Now what we will do is convert this stroke You will do it in the same brush that we created. If it has been done then we are here for it You can choose Artistic Media Brush here But look, we had made this, we We will select here and simply this one which stroke is this we will click on it ok as soon as we click on this, then See if it is not applying then apply for it What do we do first? Someone else from here let’s take the money back, we can choose it now look it’s here now it’s okay okay so Now it is coming out very thin So let me adjust this a little bit The stroke it has to adjust We’ll extend it a little bit from here so that this Let us see a little bit clearly and this let’s make it a little bit smaller so that it can be Come and adjust yourself perfectly on this circle Go and come back completely fit Let’s go in this way, now you can see here There is no broken line at all Practical in a very good way If you are coming here after writing then this Your artistic skills have practical use Look at the media, I told you about the course I said in the beginning that whatever I I am teaching you the tools, I will give you a I will also show you the practical use If I don’t explain the tools then this is a practical use Our artistic media is ahead Let’s grow and understand inside Corel Draw whatever other shapes we have that we People talk about basic shapes and their uses what are they and how to use them So look, what do we call basic shapes? like our rectangles become ellipses All of ours have become stars, have become polygonal There are basic shapes such as these You can find the rectangle here: You will find your ellipse here. it is like this you can see some more here Shapes are obtained as if they were polygonal Our shapes have also become spiral so if you need to do some polygonal If it is there then you can see it in this way here One you can do polygonal sorry this is called this is our pentagon you draw a pentagon can you convert pentagon to polygon Simply you get the option of one side here You can get its points here or You can increase or decrease the sides So if you hit a six here then here Look, we have a polygon It is like this if you want to make a triangle You will have to reduce these sides You can take three here and see yours It has come here in a triangle like this You can make multiple shapes with this It is with the help of polygons, right? Then see Here we also have a star shape If you want, you can do one here in this way You can draw a star shape in a star also. Look, you will find many sites here. You decide what kind of star you want to become. You can simply become a star here This is the length of the star that you are seeing You can also increase or decrease the length How much or how little you need to do with your If you want to do the length, you can do that also from here yes you can differentiate the shape of the star yes to you If you want a complicated star See, he will come as a complicated person here complexion is common will run in all your outlines that if its do i need to make the outline thicker or smaller I want to change the design here There is a common option which gives you all the shapes I will get it okay so something like this If you want you can also create a basic shape here. Well, with the help of these basic shapes you can can make a logo then let’s learn that if We Or if you want to make me a star then make me a star I want this star, I want it simple If you want a star then we have made a simple one here Star drew and the one who has sides We reduced it here, we took it there are three sides okay and so much to do later you simple save this object as bring it to the center of the object so center There are two ways to get in, either you use the shortcut key or you What is the go by option shortcut key As soon as you press C from your keyboard C so see it has come to the center and if If you want to do it in the middle then you press give this, so look this has come in the middle and now you can make it a little bigger like this This way is fine, if you want you can curve it also You can do it simply as you wish if you do this then it will also become curved okay So now if you want then do it like this here But you can adjust it within your circle Where ever you want to place it is ok So look, I placed this here. and make the circle a little smaller you are equal to these people and now you You can fill any color in it, so this Look, here is your simple logo. very much how complexion and very How can we make it in a better way and also you will learn but simply I have told you very I have given you a basic idea that you can do any How can we combine two ‘sh’s to make a logo? If you can create it, then do it. Let’s delete it and move on to our next option towards which is our impact tool We get the impact tool for our Simply if you come into this star shape So here you see an impact tool okay now you get the option of impact First, they understand what the tool does See, many times you have seen your comics or have you seen a lot of illustrations if you are there then what have you done many times that you might have seen a shape, a background okay something that’s made up of For example, suppose someone is running, then a person is behind him The shape of running is made of something, if you like this If you want to bring some kind of effect then you Do you exactly bring impact tools? I will explain it to you through an example Let me assume we have an image here Let’s say we have imported a The image of the bicycle is ok, we have imported it here Now we have to show movement in this cycle that this bicycle is moving very fast towards us okay so that’s what we feel How will they come to bring that feeling For us, simply here to make an impact With the help of the tool, we have to create a shape here If you have to do it then you simply go and do this It is available here under the star option You can choose the option of Impact Tool as per your choice. If you choose the option of impact tool then click here But look at the property toolbar above. Get a complete property of this It goes from where you can get many options of it Can you bring changes to me first? See here you get what you want through impact tools that help you create a design What should the design be like to draw? should it be a parallel or a radical Radical means that it is round should come in form, should come in the goal circle parallel means that it should be in line form If it should come then we will take it here right now we take the radical from and after the radical Let us look at it from here in this way Let’s draw a shape here, look at this. we have one like this we have one It will take shape and we will do it a little I put it behind, I put it in the back of the image so now you can see that look here In this way, you will feel the movement that this bicycle is moving If you want, you can do it further above these lines and You can do a lot of work along these lines You can make it fat as little as you want do you want to make these lines thick or these lines You can also reduce the width of your steps You can increase the spacing between them You can also increase or decrease that as per the minimum requirement How much spacing should be kept and what is the maximum If you want to keep spacing then you can keep that spacing also From here you can decide in different ways like You can choose different values from here. So you will also see the effects here You will get to see different And lastly you will find it here the style of the line that your line is what should be her style If you can tell from here then see you There are many changes like this or you can get the tools from where you can you can make different things here you can with the help of this okay so this was Our radical option here is if the same If you want to create a movement then you You can make one, see here Let’s say we use another image We have another image here let’s say we have this image okay image of someone this is a boy who is running now we have to show it here that It is moving very fast here but he is running then we got a If we want to make you feel the movement then we should Use the Impact Tool here to get this done you can go to impact tool Choose the parallel option here. After that, from here in this manner you can draw a parallel line, okay you If you want you can make the line thick here too You can make it as thin as you can, as thick as you can you have to do it okay you can rotate it yes you can flip it if you like it If you want to rotate it then rotate it Here, I’ll rotate it by degrees. Look up, it has rotated and come here If you want that this is ours, lines ahead lines are coming these may not come you don’t need it okay so look for it We have two options here Look, the inner boundary is given here and Second, I have given you an outer boundary now So look at what it does First of all, you should do this which effect you have It is made, you choose it and you Here you can click on the inner boundary As soon as you click on the inner boundary Look at you here, one by one arrow is made This arrow is coming as soon as you click on this image If you click, you will see that this The whole shape was like this, look at this it has been cut and arrived here in the correct manner This is our inner boundary, this is our shape The way we create the inner boundary If you want to make outer boundary then what will you do simply click here You will do it on the outer boundary and on your shape If you click, what will it do? The whole shape is there, by taking it inside I will go away and try to do this I do it ok I used this tool as my tool First we selected it from here which which is our inner boundary, I earlier called it We removed it and then we put the outer here chose the boundary and after that We clicked on it on our shape. what did he do to the whole shape Look at this shape that we had look inside he has placed something like this if that’s ok then you can do something like this yes, if you look at the next lines If you don’t want this then you can remove that too What you have to do is simply first you apply this effect Make it a little smaller according to your needs As far as it is concerned it is fine and after that You a little bit I’ll put a little bit of this here and I’ll make it smaller like this, okay Now you can see something like this that look here now you only have to look here The lines that you can see in the front are here If you are not able to see the lines then click here Look, I am feeling a movement that this Boy these two are running very fast So with the help of these lines you will get here I am feeling some movement okay So if you want you can make something like this With the help of your impact tool, do something like this You can use the impact tool to give different types of effects if you can use it then we will do it Let’s delete it and move on to the next one inside the corroll draw on the option side which is Our dimension lines dimension lines are a It is a very important option when you Do you prepare any design of your own for the client and send that design to you I have to send it to the person in front of me Sizes are not mentioned there If there are no dimension mentions then there you can use dimension lines to tell the person in front or the dimension We often use the line mechanically in designs or architect design designs I also do this to define that area for how big that area is To give you an example, let’s say I am here Pe a mechanical just to explain it to you I’m a mechanic here, a design for tomorrow If I get it ready then assume that I have put it here I made a rectangle on it and this rectangle After making this I did this which our There are two corners, we have done them in this manner rotate I just want to rotate this and I’ll just show you a drawing I am giving you an example, it is ok and something like this And in this way I have made a shape here. is drawn And make this, suppose I have one here the drawing is done now this drawing is ready for us It has to be sent to the client in front and we We have to tell you that this is our part, okay What are the dimensions of all these in this part If it is there then how can we tell it in front of us because I don’t understand it in this picture what are the dimensions okay so For that we use dimension Where do we find dimension lines? goes just right to our text toolbar look below you will find it here Dimension lines Dimension lines We have There are many ways, such as parallel Lines Horizontal and Vertical Dimension Angular Dimension and Segment Dimension then We also understand all these that after all What does all this do? Parallel Dimension What does the horizontal dimension do? what works so first of all we here Let’s choose parallel dimension and now this whatever works for you which is from a note The distance from the note to the second note gives you the parallel dimension, suppose we have clicked here and after clicking I dragged it like this and here we have another node and from here to here what is it They say that you have to show your area So look at that, you can show that here how far is it from here to here 2.64 inches Now if you want you can print it in inches Take it if you want, you can take it in centimeters take it, it is up to you, if you If you want to change then simply what will you do Choose this option and click here You can go there and see its dimensions, These are points, you can separate them if you want So you can take it here in centimeters. So look here yours is in centimeters If you want you can measure it in millimeters So here it is in millimetres, if you want so in short if you need to convert millimeter to mm If you want to write then you can do that from here or here Choose PayMM and see it from here The distance is what It is 67.6 mm, okay you can get it somewhere like this But if you want to tell its dimension then in your shape object then you can tell that very easily with the help of this tool Simply you have to do one click in this way It happens and you can use it in whichever unit you have You can tell it in the unit you want to the person in front that its from here to here The distance is 4.68 Semi is okay so this is what happened to us here But after that, we have the parallel dimension The horizontal dimension does the same work as ours. Our work has been the same in the parallel dimension Also does horizontal and vertical dimensions Simply what you have to do is click after that you have to go from wherever you want to The area you need is here But you can show me, you can tell me, now in your mind A question might be coming to my mind that Sir, if this both are same so both of them are here Why are we given different things? So look at this There is a difference between the two, what is that difference It happens, I will show you, accept it By not having this shape of ours like this we have a shape of triangle so I will first make a triangle here. ok let’s say we have a shape like this and what is its length and what is its width I will separate that little bit now What are its three sides which are equal no it’s okay now if someone gives you such a shape where you can find it now if you want to get it from here It is ok to give the area till here that the area from here to here How much is it, that is yours, This has horizontal and vertical dimensions It won’t come out, okay I’ll take you out Let me show you once again here You clicked on Pay Note and then I clicked here okay so this is it what did you do about its height I took it out and gave it to you from here to here What is the height but if you take this If you know the length of your line If you want to take it out then you will use it for that okay so what is that for parallel dimension You will choose this note and you will get the second note. choose the note ok and after that you If you click here, you will see this now yours exact whatever yours see this you should look at the width of the line Here it is found 2.79 and whose height is She is getting you 2.67 ok so if you need any such angular If you have any shape or any line in any form is there any stroke of it if you know its size If you have to give then you will give it in parallel dimension through okay after that see our here Here comes the Angular Dimension Angular Dimension what does it do between your lines I will tell you the angle which is It gives you as soon as you choose here If you see the angle here, If you want to withdraw then you can simply click on this note Do OK after clicking on the note me and you can go as far as you need You click and then you will see Here you will get a preview of one such angle. You will find it wherever you click on this release I will do it there, you can see a complete version of it One you get the exact angle of it now let’s see what is happening here Look here, our text is very big if so, let’s make it a little smaller so that So that we can see it clearly, I will tell you a little Here in six point or even smaller I Let me do this in three points, okay? Look at this now look at us clearly here Its angle is visible that its The angle is that [music] Gives simultaneous dimensions for example I would explain it to you to make you understand hmm suppose for example I have put it here a created shape and after creating the shape We have created some more shapes here. Just to give you an example I’m telling you okay I made this shape I made this shape, I made this shape, okay and what did we do among all these I did it and we welded it here see this Now suppose for example we have something This shape has been formed and look at it here We have a lot of notes now. Here we need that from here to here what is the distance from here to here What is the distance from here to here that we need to know the distance between all the notes If we have to give it then how can we give it Can be given with the help of segment dimension And after making this choice, look here Look at your Probity Toolbar here. The first option you get is You will get automatic successful die mentioning What you need to do is activate it After activating it, you will get the data from where As far as the dimensions are concerned, all of them should be the same May they all come with you and select you have to take something in this manner and as soon as you You should see this, you can take it up in this manner If you release it, you will be able to see it You will see that the dimensions of all the notes are same You will meet everyone here, see you got the dimensions together okay So in some way you can be very helpful here You can take all the dimensions together alright after that if you see here I am not able to understand it somewhere If you are not able to read it then it will be for you Manually here is its font size You’ll have to change it a little bit so that you All the dimensions are clearly visible to you look like i am changing here Similarly, you will find its dimensions here. You have to change your font size so that you can see all the dimensions clearly It looks something like this is how you can do it you can do it very easily like i do I am here now you will be able to see that here But look, you can see the dimension If you are planning to make some more changes then If yes, you can do that also here See, you get a lot of options. If you want, go here to read the text you wrote You can write what happened above the line look this is yours look at the text above the line will it come in writing or you will come with that line you can write it in me you can write it below the line Or if you want, you can also write a box to him. yes you can simply click here and see one If you come after writing everything in the box then where You also like that we have it here If we are getting good readability then You can tell me your dimensions anyway So look here there are lots of options. In this way here you can use dimension tool you can use let’s go ahead and Now we are going to understand the effects about how we use the effects do you use it and where do you use it So let us learn further Regarding the effects tool, for that we What do people do first of all these things Let’s delete it and our page Let’s blank that out so that we can go here you can make some more things and you can make some more things If you can make it and show it then see what we have It affects us even on text can apply and whoever is ours You can apply it to any object as well Or if there is any of our images, apply it on that too we can but it
depends on what we have Which is the effect that we are going to apply? there is an effect because all of these effects which they do not apply to text Not all effects apply to our images Where do we get the effects? For effects you can simply come here above your tool and see here you will see You will get to see many effects Like shadow effect, contour effect Blend effect happened Distort effect happened If envelope is there, execute is there, block is there once We understand about all these effects and what is its practical use It will happen, let’s see that as well first So let’s look at the shadow effect The shadow effect which happens is on both of us it works our text also works and it works on our objects too objects we want vector objects or our image objects on both So let’s assume it works, first of all we’re here Let us write some text, suppose we I have written the time here and it is a little So we make it bigger after making it bigger A little bit of its font too if you want We can change it a little bit Let’s write it in small print like this So that we have time to read clearly it is written and now we have to draw a shadow over it Do you want to apply any effect? What is shadow effect? It is like a little shadow If we have to put it here then for that what will we do here simply shadows will come We will choose on effect and shadow effect like If we choose then see our here We have a whole one right here Its property tool bar will open and then it goes and we get it first Here is the list of presets, how do you like it You have to apply preset to your text If you can tell me about it then I will go from here I take the small glow like we are small If you take glow then see you will see a lot here You can see a slight glow here if you want to make it a little darker If yes, you can choose its color from here yes, suppose I chose black color here It has become a bit dark here If I took the blue colour then it became blue in colour okay after doing that if we want You can change its merging mode from here are merging mode what happens is that when we People can also cast a shadow over another object. If we place it there then our these Merging modes are useful for example So let’s say I made one here. We make a shape and fill some color over it. Let me give you this, I’ve paid here this color and we’ll bring it on top of it So now if we want, we can do the merging here There are modes, look, you can change them So different is the one below us, which It behaves according to the object how will we have merging mode here It will come and how will our effect be formed So here you can see different You can choose any merging modes You can find the merging mode here as per your design The merging mode suits you according to your needs you can get it here okay so this is our There are merging modes of merging modes look later here you have a There is also an option of transparency that this The effect of what you have applied How much transparency should there be? Example For example, let me assume that we take normal here. So I have a normal shape here. his normal shadow is returning now How much transparency should there be, we will Look, you can choose as low as you want from here If we do this then the effect will be the lighter it will appear to us and the more The more we increase it the more the effect will increase The transparency will keep getting darker Look here later, it comes to us Feathering Feathering means that this which This is our shadow, how far can it benefit us How far will its effect go? So look here p has a value of 20, if we look at it If you increase it to 24 or 58 then look at it Look far away, is its feather going or this even if we have decreased i will make it up Just consume it and see its effect it’s limited to very close range okay so this one, … You have to give it from here in its feathering you can give it to us after that here we have It gets a feathering direction that The feather that you have given me, you should also keep it inside Should I give it or give it in the middle or give it outside? it is you can choose it here if we If I chose outside here then this is what Our feather is on the outside of this object we will see it in here You can see it, okay, we will remove it give the object something like this you can see a feather here ok so this gives a really good feeling Whenever we make a heading, our for some book or some other design we can use it there We use shadow as a shadow on the text We do it above as well and above the image as well for the image let’s say I have a Let me import the image and assume We imported this image here. And if we want to apply shadow here also So it’s the same process here on the shadow Come and apply whatever shadow you want, small I want to apply it, I want to apply medium, I want to apply large You can choose it from here, you can see it There are many more effects given, okay You can choose it from here, suppose we have Here I have taken the flat bottom right Look, you are coming here as a shadow You can also adjust it if you want Yes, where do you place it according to you? I want to do it here, look very flat It is coming in form, if you want then you can do it increase the feather from here okay so very little This way it will also come in a blurry form You can also make its color dark if you want. yes, according to you, you only need this Transparency needs to be increased, see here Its color has become dark and you have come just like this You can also use shadow on the image yes okay after that let’s move on to our next let’s do this for the effect We delete allright and then our here The next tool is given as control tool Troll tool is a great tool inside our coral draw and with this we people Very effective and very can make creative whether it is our over the text and whether it is our Basically a counter tool on top of objects The work of is to create outlines and These outlines can also be on our text. or could be on any object Many times we use our own printing of it It is used wherever there is a purpose if yes then how do you use it Where do you use everything Let us understand inside this control tool let’s go learn this control tool and second thing if you like the video If you are getting to learn something new then watch the video Please like and share more videos like this Subscribe to the channel to get Do not forget at all, then you understand the control First of all we will tell you about the tool here what do we do first here create an object that Where does the problem lie and its solution First they should understand how our control tool is let’s say we have our own one here Object Here we chose Square And through that we have here in a way We drew a shape and then we did it here But let’s also draw a circle, something like this the way it is okay and or else we here We can also draw a pentagon, something like this in a circle we are here together Let’s take the exact circle and we have one here let’s take it Oval and like this we have taken this shape here also okay so now we have some here Three or four shapes have come, we have one shape Here we draw a P which is a square shape it’s a perfect square alright Let’s thicken the outline a little so that You can clearly see what I am doing I’m here now right so right now we have here But in total we have five shapes here. now what do we have to do is make it in this shape If you want to draw another shape inside then for that We have the command to simply copy paste If we want then we can do copy paste a shape and draw inside it using If we can do it then simply we will do it You can also use the mouse, so For this we simply pressed from our keyboard the shift button and we pushed it in a little bit We dragged it towards the side and placed it where we wanted the shape. There we right click our mouse. If you have done this then look at this we have a It has taken a shape inside and come here if If you pay attention then you will see this here the gap and here on the left side Gap means the distance at the top which is in between the two and which is on your left Look, there is a distance, it is equal like this You will get equal rights here also Now you will get equal on the sides and bottom too We do the same work here in this This rectangle shape that we have made If we do it in this, then here we have done the same like this just pressed the shift button on your keyboard and By making it smaller we have made a shape inside I have drawn it, alright, now pay attention here If you do this, look at the space above it’s a bit much and whatever you The space on the left is a little less Now there is a problem here, so this method If we are facing problems So then we use our control tools Just like this you can see it here in the circle You will also get to see the circle being smaller Look inside and you will see a perfect circle you’ll find another one but if you If you do the same thing in the Oval, you will be watched You will get the same problem, see here You will get more spacing and here you you will get less spacing alright so its The solution is that it is in the control tool, it is good I will show you a practical use of this. Many times we design visiting cards okay i am going to make a visiting card I’m not going to design you I am just giving one example, so visiting The size of the card that we have is here i take it in mm so for that what have we done here I have changed the unit, mm, it is ok and this We have given the size of the box as A 88 and 55 Suppose this is the size of our visiting card So this is the finish of our visiting card The size is as big as a visiting card The cutting which we have to do at the very end after the finishing is done in which It will come in our hand, this is the size, okay But what do we have to do now about it also we have to give a size where we used for finishing and one inside we also have to give the size where we If you use it for your safe margin then Now if we do the same work here for this If you look through it, you will see a perfect shape If we cannot find it then we will come to this place also use only control tool and We have a safe margin that we need to draw we can draw that too and if we need to If we want to draw something on top of this as well which will be our cutting margin, then that too We can see here on the outside like this You can draw it alright in this way We are also here for tools for this purpose Good use it we can do it over text as well and many more You can also design all new texts if yes then what do I do for him I c First, delete all these objects. and we put some text here But let us write it down, suppose we have written here took is simplified tuts alright so for that we If someone takes a bold font here then bold font we have here in the system here’s a font that we have okay so this we have a font in bold I made it a little bigger so that you It should be clearly visible that whatever work I do I’m going to show you the proper thing now this is what we need now we have a text What is the effect of control tool on this? You can simply give control in this way Select the tool and then select the control tool. After that simply go to your text And wherever you have to provide this tool, that means If you want to give inwards then you can give inwards can also give its effect towards or If you see its outline on the outside, If you want to create then how far outside do you have to go? How big an outline do you need to create? You can give a donation for that too here But look, we have given an effect but what just happened is that our text was That too was black in colour and this fact It has come, its feel is also in black, that’s why something is coming this way if you want Change its fee color here You can do it in some way according to your convenience Look here you can do whatever you want You want to give the color, you can do that color in this way You can give it here, okay, see this, right? great stuff If you get the same effect back inside it If you want to repeat then what will you do then see There is already an effect contour applied on it If you need to contour it again, If you want to apply the effect then first You will get this text and this is your container it is an effect, it needs to be separated so so what we’re going to do is here in the object You will go there and you will get an option here. there is a break of a part which I will tell you first I have also explained its shortcut key As soon as you control it, you can brake it. See now what will happen if you participate The text is separated and this shape of yours He came as a man and now he is different from you If you want then apply the same effect on it again You can use the effect again as well ok so what did i do to it We selected it and then we went back to it I applied its effect again I can change the color again in some way like this watch this and i want it again I can brake and after braking I see it here, we have a shape It must have come to you already made, I am If I put it down then what is it for We’ll do the shift button and our page down Look at this, we have two of ours here. The pass is here outline what is it now I’m going to put an effect here and do the same thing and now if we have contours If you want to affect its inside then We can also do something like this inside it and you can choose any color you like You can choose the color you want from here allright So let us look at it this way also You can use the effect of the control tool Are Many times, you might have seen that a It is written on the cheese at 10 off, something like this If there are offers then we can provide some information there also You can design it with the help of the same tool So suppose we have written the offer here and We have written here that it is off at 10. We have chosen a font here. Let’s say I use the same font I take it alright and we have adopted it according to our convenience. I have designed it the way we want I put it here like this okay In this way we took pay off here and we Now if it is designed this way We have to apply the same effect here as well We can use the control tool if we want You can select the whole thing if you want. group it and after grouping You choose the same control tool and you will No matter how big it is, it will give a control effect you can give it to me in some way like this Have you seen it? If you see a border on it, If you want to give it also then you make a box and You can also design the box as per your choice Take it and if you want then fill some color in it too can do yes, fill it in light color like this I will give you the outline, if you want to remove it, please remove it. You can also apply shadow over it if you want. Like this you can create multiple effects if you want Very nice creative using You can design it as per your requirement You may also like it, see it this way Now you can use it wherever you want You can keep it anywhere you want yes, if you want to change colours etc. you can change it can we do that suppose we have a counter here We are influenced by it If you want gradient then will you do it simply First break it apart, we have done it here I clicked on it and broke it apart ok and now if we want then we can see the inner shape also use your gradient on top of we can do what we call feel interact now we will read further But I will tell you about the interaction feel I am just showing it as an example you can do all this in it too okay In this way you can use multiple colors here. You can use it in text as well if you want. you can use outline okay so There are so many endless ways to express your feelings To design you simply need to do just one You will need practice and be careful in whatever you do I am telling you everything is very You will have to learn carefully and not to hurry well it’s not like you have everything You can learn it in a day, it is not possible When you practice something over and over again, You can definitely learn one thing and I will learn the rest So I am here to teach you and tell you So wherever you feel any confusion, you you can ask me you can message me yes which is ours you can design a text like whatsapp2 Could it be for some offer or something? So this was The effect of the contour tool is already here Moving forward and learning further If there is something new then we are back on the first page If I blank out the text then I can see all this I will select it from here and delete it. I will give it and see what happens next which tool is that our blend is very Blend is a great tool, we have a lot of things They make it especially popular among the people We mostly use blends What the blend tool basically does The blend that is made is one way to give you What Straight Lines Provides You It happens many times that we balance we make it over one of our paths or we Compounds also form blood and its we basically use it To create realistic shadows or To highlight objects, use this So this was about some technicalities but Do you understand its practical use? If it happens then assume that we have something here If you want to design then we have to make it here If we want a leaf then we need to make a logo of the leaf Many times you have seen people in schools etc. You must have seen this leaf logo so today we will talk about this If you are going to make the leaf logo then its For this, first of all we will need a leaf Leaf we create this circle With the help of this we have taken two circles here ok let’s select both of them and what do we do from here select and after selecting I simply go here and If you click on intersect it then what will we have here in the middle which is a see, it was a portion, it will be prepared and it’s kind of like a leaf okay like a There is something similar to the leaves here It has got a structure in place We rotate a little bit to our left on the side and make a copy of this Same on our right side, alright, look at this we have a very nice leaf The structure of this has come into existence, we People can fill any color if they want What do we do to fill the color Let’s give it a green color here, it looks nice So we have given green color here and We have given it green colour as well. If you want to give shadow bag, you can give that too ho with the help of interact tool okay then you If you want, you can also add some shadow etc. here. If you can then what should I do here I’ll give you the green button and down here but i give it dark green alright And in the same color here also above it Let me apply it now, look at this shortcut The trick is to choose a single object transfer color from one object to another If you want then its meaning is nothing There is a possibility that it may have a color as well there might be an outline of it as well The outline color can also be any Property If you need to convert one object to another You have to select the object using the shortcut this way just with the help of the mouse then you you can simply do this object Select OK and right click Along with this, you can move it by right clicking on it. Where you get the same properties Leave it there if you want it It will ask you if you want to move it Do you want to copy or fill the copy or copy If I want to outline then I want to fill it So I will copy fill here then Look, the same color is filled here as well It’s alright, so we’ve done this outline If we remove it, we will have a leaf It has been done, now what should we do about it we want to make a logo of leaf so we will do that Let’s see how they will make it for that First we have made a leaf here and a We have made more leaves here above and We have reduced its size a bit. something like this in the middle of this size now and We have multiple sizes in between this size If we want it, then how will we get it? We will bring it from blend to you Simply go and here you can see the number of blends You can choose how many numbers of off you want If we want a blend then what will we do first Place this smaller size shape like this here We will click and bring it here like this If we leave it then look what we have in the middle 20 shapes have been created by blending it If you want to do this then you can buy a number of these can you reduce the strength i reduced it like this I am increasing it, okay, if you want If you want to subtract, you can also subtract some of it in this manner Look, we have less shapes here. are you right now what do we do let’s do this a little bit to the side and here we take it A circle is shaped in such a way that We convert the circle here into an arc. So what do we have now that we look at The line will not come and we will draw this arc a little bit let’s make it smaller and do something up to this yes, till here it is ok and we will follow the same arc People copy on the right side, so here But it has also come to us in a shape now what we want to do is we want to This is the shape that we have made of the leaf The shape should fit over this arch If it comes after doing it then we will do it, what will you do Simply you first cut this object as a whole Select it and you will see something here You will get to see the options first what was the option here so you number off The objects of the blades you were increasing or decreasing if you go here you will see a You will get another option by the name of New Path As soon as you click on the new path, now It asks you what your new path is. so since I want it on top of it As soon as I click on this line, so if I do this look at this object above it It will be ready and come but see what is it now This is perfectly blended and not yet It has come on this shape so what can we do for it you can come here and here See, you get many more options. If you go there, you will see an option given here it’s blended along the full path as soon as If you click here, you can see the full path it will blend over it but here Look, there is still something missing, what is missing Look at this shape, it is coming upwards Whereas the direction we have is that If you want to change then simply do the above select the shape and you will According to this, its direction can be seen here change it from as soon as you change Look at all the other shapes that were there also the direction will change here then you what do you do can you make it smaller a little I have made it a bit smaller here as well Let’s rotate it a little bit Like this we would have placed it here There are some things that rotate us a little Will have to do it Some things can be made smaller like this perfectly I feel so big, the shape of my line According to that we made it a little bigger I have also made it a bit smaller, sorry and right now it’s true here too but right now Look at the object in the middle Proper is not coming so now for this we have to What do we have to do to select it again? We will do the same shape and come here We will go and see it is written rotate all When you click on the objects See, all our objects are like this You will rotate according to the shape of this leaf If you want you can make it smaller and something like this In that way, the rest of our leaves are Ours should also be perfectly small accordingly if you see this object in the middle If you want to increase this then here you can click on the number of There are leaves, you can grow them here something like this is ok right if you If you want you can make it here on the right side too could or if since we have set aside I have done all the hard work so if you want then you can do this You can select it and put it on the right side You can paste it in this way but What happened here, look at our leaves it was it has vomited okay so for that What do we have to do to get it back These leaves will have to be rotated a lot It is simple, if you want you can put it here you can rotate it in this way and the same is yours You can also save the last leaf from here Rotate this whole shape of yours. It will be made again in a proper manner okay if you need a lift up here and If you want to plant it then you can use the same leaf again copy and paste it here take it, see this will come separately you can buy it Ungroup and place a leaf here in the center Here you can manually do it as per your convenience paste it some way like this Something like this is okay bean leaf if you want If you can do it here as well then we have made it here We have put it here in this way too Okay, if you want to make the outline thicker, You can give a little bit of it to yourself You can increase it as per your requirement If you want the outline a little thicker then this look i’ll take a bigger chunk of this ok what have you seen now we have a very Great look, this leaf has come in the form of a logo that’s how we made it we made it With the help of blend tool you can do this The concept must be becoming clear that blend what can the tool do okay a small We can see this example if we want We’ll move it a little to the side here on the right side and here we have another You must have seen it many times One of the old photo reels If it had felt negative then if we had seen something like that If we want to create a negative then we can do that too So you can create it here simply Take a rectangle, in this way you can make a box Draw it and fill it with black color Do it and we have put a box on the bottom Same we copied here, something like this okay that way now what do we have to make We need more boxes in here. If you want then here we have made a We have drawn a box, we will color it white let’s fill it with okay and what is its I will remove the outline and I have a copy of this box here But by bringing it here on the right side, let me paste it ok and now we have to do these If you want to make a blend between the two then We will make it simply blend it We will choose the object and mix the last If you click on this object then it will See, we have a lot of middle ground Blades have arrived in the form of these, if you want You can increase the number of strength as per your requirement ok i will delete it The one below gives the same to the one above and I give the same to the one below I will copy it alright if we have to I also need to make boxes, so we will do it in the middle You can also make it simply here but draw a box like this, right And if you want the same box, you can have it here as well you can draw and between these two you can make ballads so we did this on the beach I have also prepared some blends here But its number of strength is very high reduce it a little bit Here are the numbers that we have, and that is our strength It was there and it has reduced, what do we do now If we break it apart completely then what did we do to control it As soon as you press it, see the brake coming apart has been and now look at yours here is a See your negative design is ready. I’ll give this to the one below I would increase it a little by selecting it I am something like this and I like this object a little I will make it a little smaller, look something like this ok if you find someone else here also If you want to make anything then you can make that too You can make it easily as I have seen here I have made a single structure of the reel, it is fine So you can create something new as well Similarly, with the help of blend tool you can create many beautiful designs. You can make anything you like So let’s move forward and do this let’s delete the one I created and see So what is our next tool? The next tool which we have given here and it has been given to us it has been given to us distort tool ok what is distort tool does disto basically a whatever our There are shapes in them to bring destruction yours works suppose we have here There is a circle and we have to find something in it If you want to bring distortions then we can use this tool With the help of this you can simply bring your tool Choose and distort wherever you want You have to bring some distorts in this way can you bring it, see this is very In the best way, isn’t it? Sometimes we Let’s use this, let’s say we have a We took a square shape, now suppose we are here if we want to make one, if we want to make a flower then we can use dettol You can make a flower simply with the help of tools You bring your mouse to the center and you Look at it this way, drag it outwards If you do this then see, this is a very See, it will turn into a beautiful flower You can fill it with any color you like If you want to fill color then you can do it in this way Basically distort any shape whether it is your circle or There should be a rectangle where you will try this So you will keep getting many new shapes And the shape you want, look something like this Here you can create new shapes in this way We will keep meeting and you can do different things on this Create new shapes using different shapes palette you can create it, your all right increases Moving on to the next tool, which is ours here Envelope tool is given again envelope also We have a very good tool and We will also include this in a text which is very Used to give all the effects what the envelope tool basically does is you also have shapes in which the notes then you can drag the notes to a Do you understand that you can create new shapes? So first of all let’s go through some examples Let’s say we write something here I have written my name here I have written it Ashish and we have written it here We have given you the font, suppose we have given you this font okay and on this we clicked here So look at the envelope tool above Some notes will be visible here one two three chapa here in the center six here seven and this one eight okay total We have eight notes here now. By choosing any of these notes we We can give it a new shape, suppose we Here we chose the center note and we If you drag it upwards, see this A new shape came to us like this Now we dragged the bottom one so this See, just like this we have placed the left one here I dragged the right one sorry and this is how we did it If you drag the left one here look we have a different one here here is one that we have inside the text You have given many such effective effects you can also give effect okay so let’s do it Let’s make something and see what looks good Let us learn what this tool of ours is and What can we do for him Let’s type something here first let’s say we typed here is in the capital Air fire water and earth alright we will change this font would have done it and let’s center it a little Let’s make it a bit bigger so that you can see it clearly Show me what I’m going to do And we will take a break for the whole thing here. Let’s take part in it by taking a break What if all these lines are different? will go and we will move them separately something like this can be fixed and then what do we all do brings all the text in the same order we can make them equal in some way and we would have done the same to the air as well something like this okay now we have to do it Do we feel a triangle on it? You have to give it the whole shape If it should come in a triangle look then its so what we’ll do is draw a triangle here If you draw it first, we will make it with the help of polygonal and by going here we’ve drawn a triangle okay No, look, I have drawn a triangle. some way like this from now what do we want that this which is ours The full text that we have written is Coming in a triangle shape If needed, we will use it here You can use the envelope tool as soon as you click on the tool here If you click, you will see it here in front of you Some options may open up for you here. We will go and look at those options here An option is given called Create Envelope From If you click here you will see An arrow is coming here and this You move the arrow over this triangle and Click and you will see a shape here It has come in a triangle-like butt now Not perfect in our opinion If it is there then see many here There are different mapping modes you can choose from here You can choose whichever mode you feel like You can choose the one that is perfect for you look here we have it Horizontal mode and look something like this We have an effect created here It’s done, see it now you can see it anywhere You can use it in your magazine Or if you have created something creative somewhere If you want to make something in this way then You can make it, let’s delete it again Let’s see a new effect inside this Suppose I typed something else here Here we have written the runs and again we I have changed its yp font a little bit we’ve enlarged it, it’s okay and now we’ve made here here’s a pentagon convert this to this let’s do polygonum here this is our polygonum want this whole thing I have written the text for run, it’s ok this should come in our polygonum so You will apply the same method again You will select the text and you will see the envelope and From here we will create a new form. and we will do this polygonal see this we have polygonal here But this mode that has come now is for us If it is not proper then you can do it according to your wish Whichever mode you find perfect for you You can choose it based on the text Look, we have something like this The pass has been made here, it’s ok if Here you will see different colors for each alphabet. You should do this work beforehand you’re going to give this shape use the envelope tool okay If you want, you can take a different color of r You can take the color of y differently, take the color of n differently you can do it you can still do it but That would not be the proper way even if we wanted to From here, go to the object and click on it first curve okay from here we do convert to curve so now what will happen is that this All the letters should be curved with each other We have done it and now we have to do it here the parts of the break so the parts of the break are like us if we do it then this is our r which is in the middle This is a circle, this too is our feeling and it comes look it will go now we have to do it again Let us select this again and here If I go and trim it, it’s about this length There is a process but if you want you can do this also yes but if you do this work first then See, you can fill different colors here. yes but if you do this work first then like you typed and after typing I will delete this first To explain, I have come back here Now typed run again and now what do we do? Let’s change its color first Let’s take it here, we have taken a different color of r We took Y’s and N’s colors We took different colors, so now whatever shape you want you will make it yours already because you You have colored it so now whatever shape you make that he will come dressed in some way I look I went back here to the envelope And I took the path back from here we chose our path You can also make a design like this If yes, you can create many such designs. can you say envelope tool has some meaning There is no limit, whatever your shape, you are like that can you make this here i will make a small I take the example and the honour in front of you So here we take a circle and we a circle down here and took it and back We have inter selected it here intersected it see we have it here It has formed a shape but now we have to make it If you want to make a fish shape here then First, we will draw a shape of a fish here. If we take it then what should we do for it Here I have made a middle shape and like this we would have drawn a shape here as well it’s alright it’s something like this so here we are If people want, they can put a little bit here and this Ask a little bit here as to how its made we give you the tail at the back which is ours Fish that it’s okay alright and we will do the same Let’s copy it downwards and do something like this Now we have written here Fish F I S H and again we went here and put our font We chose a little and made it bigger We enlarged the font of our fish Okay, and again we have used the lap tool here. We got it, we took our new path and we Here I told him my new path that Look at the kind of path we need Here it is again, united Nice object and we did it Now this is our outline in the center We can remove that and inside this we People can do a really nice color fill Here we make fish eye so here But we have made an eye for our fish and Look at this, it is a very nice logo you can call it a design or a ready made one If something like this has happened to us here You can do it allright with the help of envelope tool So these were some of the basics here. Options for applying effects to shapes With the help of which you can create many new objects You can make many creative things too You can design with Corel Draw in moving forward and learning again a very important tool named What do we do for transparency? let’s delete this object and Back to the transparency tool, we’re here do you create any image or any We can also take objects as transference what the tool basically does is it there is an object that touches him a little Suppose it brings it in a transparent look We’ve created an object here and We will fill the color here. Orange ok and we created another shape here something like this is ok and we will take it as a A little from the side, from here we by increasing its sides here Let’s give it a try and we’ve drawn some shapes like this here. done ok And we can rotate it and create copies. If we have to do that then we have done that too here Easier to do this with Control R here Pay attention to taxes ok ok i selected the whole thing and after selecting the whole Let’s do this in a group and we’ve done this But we still used the same colour which was orange I have filled it, I will remove the outline and let’s bring it to this object at the center and what we do now If you apply transparency above then We have created this new design we select this and here Look at the transparency tool option You are given the transparency tool And from here you can enable Uniform Transparency You can choose and now you will see that what you Look at the object, it’s a little It will be transparent and visible to you here I am giving it to you okay but here I will put you inside I am not feeling it, this is the reason because your external object its color and the object inside Its color is same so if you want then you can You can change the color a little bit, I have done it here But I put it in a little red radish I have taken the red color now Look here you will find a very nice The effect is basically visible You can also reduce the transparency as per your requirement You can do more for that here Come to Transparency and see here You get a slider and a slider By increasing or decreasing it you can change your You can decide the transparency that How transparent do you need the object to be? ok sometimes we use it To give a background to an image Let’s also say for example I did this Imported an image here We go and from here we can take any one Let’s take the image, look at our There is an image lying here, this image let’s take it here okay and now I want the whole image to be In the background it is slightly If it comes in a transparent manner then for that What we will do is select this image Uniforms will bring transparency You will choose transparency and you will get as much I also want to make it transparent, please accept that If you want to do it for 80 then I gave you 80, so this It has come in a transparent form, if you If you want to place this image inside it then You can go to the object and look here. The power clip is provided You can connect the power clip to the Choose and click here Look, this was your object of the image Look at that, being placed inside this object It has come like this, if you want, there are many ways You can design creatives Well, with the help of transparency tool you You can design this transparency tool I’ll show you how to do it with the help of Here we have typed tik tok and If we change its font then we have changed the font have taken it from here We took the font from here hey we choose this font from here Let’s make it bold, okay, make it bigger Let’s take it alright and look at its side There is a logo made here as well If we have to design that too then we will do that too If you want you can design it for us What we need to do is draw a circle on it We have to do this and we will draw the circle here After we do that, we’ll do a little bit here. Another circle on the inside, we will copy it here we will do it and after that we will take it here Let’s take a picture with the help of a free hand tool line and here we draw a line something Like this we place it on top of it okay and we put a line in here We have copied the same line on the other side as well We have copied this line here as well. And we copy one line from this the object here in the center is something like this this is the way it is, see here we have have copied it and after that now we have We want to make a shape here, so for that we We are going to use a new tool here. Using the Smart Fill Tool I will tell you further about Smart Fee I will tell you in great detail that Smart Fee What happens basically now I will tell you here But what is the explanation of transparency tool I’m doing it so I’m here to tell you right now I will tell you about the transparency tool only So that you do not get confused and here also I Explain to you about small tools I’m not doing it, okay, so basically I I’ll show you just one shape here. remained so we can draw it here like this Can and we deleted it like this deleted this too deleted this too We can select the whole thing and weld it here. Let us tell you about the weld This would be to group multiple objects and brings it into a single object okay and like this we have created some new shapes here We have drawn money here through Smart Fee. we have taken this also we select this weld it and after welding This shape of ours was, whatever it is now We haven’t brought it in a perfect state let’s design yours perfectly ok Let’s go here and do it convert to curve and slightly shorten it here We would have given this shape in curve form some ways are ok here’s an extra line coming up So we don’t need this line here, so we would have deleted it and we have this one here as well Gives a slight curve to some If it’s ok then look at yours here Look at the shape of your TikTok logo It has already arrived here Now what do you have to do here If you want to apply transparency then for that what we will do first of all we have Let’s fill it with black, okay and Now what we do is create a copy of it so we have a copy of it here Let’s create it here and we’ll People do it here okay we’ll draw the outline in blue color Let’s remove it and make a copy of it and do it down here and this we People do it okay in red color Here we remove the outline and redraw it We send you the objects which are in color are at the bottom in some way like this now we have to But I want to apply transparency on the blue one So we will select the blue one here. Click on the transparency tool If you go in uniform, then look at us It has arrived here in a transparent state It is a little small, from here you can make multiple if you want You can also take many modes, whichever you want You can choose the mode you like from here You can I assume from here Substack I am using the mod so something like this Watch Substratum do the work for you You can also do this using the Subtract mode. You can select this here as well Can you give me any color? Okay, so look at this. You’ve got a logo ready in the object and the same copy that you have And you did it by filling it with red color. You gave the red one to the bottom you placed it and on the top you Some transparency has been applied here This is how you can see TikTok’s Look at the people, they are all dressed up and ready So we can make this With the help of transparency tool it looks ok Hope you have understood what this is Logo how do we create videos If you are looking good I will say it again Please like the video and subscribe the channel Please subscribe so that you can see my videos can reach as many people as possible Let’s move forward and learn new things About the Tools Inside Your Corel Draw So what do we do for it We give you the delete next tool which we get here it is given it is given it is given here dropper tool eye dropper tool very It is an important tool whenever we works on more than one object And we need color sample so this is it Dropper tool which is used to take color samples helps us whether it is in whether it is from an object or from an image For example I will take an image here Let me go, I posted an image here. Let’s say I import it here is there any image of pizza here I have put It has been imported here ok And here we also create an object there are some in this way and in this also we are here fill the color on it and make a new one We have created an object here circle and now I want this image to be is there any color which I like very much It looks good and I want to pick that colour and I want to fill that color inside it So we cannot do this work manually. if we just look at the colour here If we want to put color here then We can’t put it in but our Our color dropper can help you You can find the tool here Color Eye Dropper Tool Click Here If you want then look at me like an eye drop Here we see a dropper like this here it falls and on top of this you can see that you can buy any If you place this above the image then Look at the different colours here I will keep showing you this pick and whatever You have to pick up the color, just tell me from here I want to pick up this green colour from here What we’ll do here is click OK So as soon as you click here See the colours we had here It will be selected and will come to you Look, it will look like a paint bucket, you will see this If you want the bucket then go to this object As soon as you click, you will see this Look at the color that was filled here It has come just like this if you have purchased any other color Suppose I would have picked it up from here as well From here, I chose this brown color from here I would have picked him up and he would have found me here If we had to do it, we could have done that very easily If you could feel it then this was an example for someone Picking color from an image If you Picking a color from another object Even if it is so, it is the same process, if we have to You have to pick the color from here and fill it in So we can click this eye dropper here If you do this then see it by picking the color here It has arrived and now as soon as we click here If you do this then you will see that this color is also filled here It has come in the eye dropper, see here Some options are also given such as Look, here an option is given, add to What is the basic function of Add to Pallet? Whatever happens is the display color here It adds it to your color palette If it’s not already added, consider it okay. we took the eye dropper tool from here and we Assume you pick any color from here We picked this color and that color is this And I want this color to be here What would you do if it comes added to the palette If you click on add to palette then Look, as soon as you click, see here But that color has been added and now we have If you want to use it on any object then We need to look for colors here again and again The color you have here is not the same You can reuse the same color again and again In this way here you can use the eye dropper tool you can use it see one here Option is given and select from What does this desktop do? It works just like you Click here and see what happens now It will happen that this is only inside your page no even outside your page suppose our I like the color of this strip that you gave me. Do you want to bring it here, is that okay, or here? See, I have been given a lot of colors in these If you want to pick any color then all that work can be done now You can do this if you select from Desktop option is selected Look here, our color is purple. Like click here to see what we have This color came after being picked and we saw it here If you click on it then you will see that color on us Even if I feel like it, I will come here in this way You can also use Select from Desktop You can do this, see some more options here are also given like the color you have Select how many by how many pixels It should be whatever our default is It happens one by one pixel if you want here 2/2 pixels or you can choose 5/5 pixels here You can also take the option of this, it basically does this what if you took 5/5 pixels okay so now if you look somewhere here on the image If you click on it, what will it do around you? out of which there will be 5 baf pixels He will get the color and take a complete average of it And you can pick that average color here okay let’s see what it does picks up an average color if you you increase more pixels here Allright, this would have worked within its range Here we have a color eye dropper like this Our color is an eye dropper, just like that our Atridox Look here inside, you will find this arrow It is visible as soon as you click on this arrow If you do it then look here you will find a And you will get the option of Atril Eye Dropper What Atril Eye Dropper does basically like what a color eye dropper does is that it picks up your color but the atrial eye What does the dropper do? It’s the shape you have It also copies the properties of its shape like what is the outline of the shape how thick is the outline What is the color of your face, what is the shape of your thighs? What is the shape of the object, everything is known here I can copy this and apply it is on top of any other object then look As soon as you are here Atridox Options come in properties that you Outline of what you want to copy you have to copy it, you have to copy it fill Do you want to copy or transfer the text? Then if you do any transformation on it If the rotation of the size is already done then Do you want to copy that or any effect? You can copy and paste it into another object If you want to take such things then You can copy and apply here For example I will delete all of these. I will give you from here and I have posted one here I have made a rectangle and I will cut it a little I will make it thin and also rotate it a bit let me give it a try and on top of it I’ve applied color here I have filled it in red and now I have put it here I’ve made a square and now I want to that this same size should be copied here come with the same color or the same If the rotation gets copied and comes, then for that we Choose Atril Eye Dropper from here And whatever property we want to copy, assume Here, let me see what it is A you have to just copy the fill and along with it I also want to copy its rotation So we clicked here and then Wherever we have to apply it or or From where ever we want to copy we copy it After that we will have to apply it wherever we want As soon as we click there we have to do it So look at both its rotation and color. It has come as a copy, if you want you can make one Its rotation, color, size, everything is in the bar itself you can copy it even suppose I have posted it here I said I want to copy the size ok whose size do i want to copy i have come what did he do when he clicked on the dropper I have copied all its properties and As soon as I apply for the one I want to apply When I clicked there, see what he did Look at its size, copy it I have taken it, see what its size was Its size was 102 and 102 like this if I Let me see here its size and its ratio It is there in the same ratio, see it here as well Its size has been copied and uploaded ok So something like this, if you want, use an eye dropper Along with this I also used Atril Eye Dropper You can use it to increase your corrol Let’s learn something more in the draw itself And about the new options, the next one The option we are going to read is ours Interact Fim This is one way how Interact Fee works using multiple colors of a You can fill in a single object Meaning you can create a gradient in the same object you can create a field like suppose I Draw a square shape here and If we fill it with a single color then This was our solid color but if we If you want to apply multiple colors here then We can use that for gradient or we call it interact feel Like we interacted here on ev fill If you click here you will find The option of fountain fill goes away as soon as you If you choose here then you will see here two here you get two nodes this is the first node and this is the second node okay means the colour of the key from one note to the second note How many variations would you get? Let’s say we chose the first note We would have chosen between red colour and second note If the color is blue then look between blue and red As many shades as you see here in the middle You can get all those shades here If you want, you can put any number of notes here you can also increase or decrease them here You can also create some new notes There should be a minimum of two notes If you want more notes, you can make them What you have to do is this that you will get a thin The path is visible on this path as you If you click, double click then you will see a The new note will be made and you can use it if you want. You can also give a new color to the new node. We have given it green color here, so this Look what we have here now Look, it is coming in three color variations okay so something like this here you You can make different color variations Take a look here using the Interact Fill tool You get a lot of options in this Basically inside the tool look here The first option is that of linear fountain fee I mean look at this in a linear form. Whatever you are seeing is your linear There is a fountain fee, if you want you can buy it here You can also charge for the Ellipse Fountain, so this You will get it in elliptical form like this It will come as yours or if you want it If you can take it in conical form here then Your effect will be created in this way or if you want you can put it here or something else You can make it in different form also Okay, so whatever feel you want here If you want any effect of it then you can get it here You can choose the color, see here The option is also given here that whichever You will choose the color of that node here You can get the color you want from here You can also change it after that here See its transparency option is given let’s say this is the node that we have taken this node is our yellow node color you it looks like here you want this to be It is a yellow colour and a little transparent If there should be that transparency, we are here can you increase it from so see this is what he did Was there transparency of the yellow node Look there, he has paid it at 56 Look here you will also get a rotation option This is called reverse fill What is the meaning of reverse fill? All the notes are reverse in themselves will go meaning whichever is your outermost color That will be the innermost color and the one which is the innermost The color that is inside is the color that is outside What do you have to do for that simply? If you want to click on this reverse then see this These are your notes, they are your reverse If you do it then you will do it in some way like this There are lots of color effects if you want. You can make them and work on them too yes you must have seen a logo What you need to do is simply make a rectangle You have to take the tool and here you will see a square How to draw a shape How to draw a square shape After that, you will see its corners If we want to round it off then what should we do for that Here we will choose the shape tool and After that, we will write as much as we want on our notes. We want to make rounded corners as much as we want we can round it up then we have to What is the point of creating a copy of this shape? it is inside so here we are one of its Create a copy of a shape on the inside and this is what its rounded corners They are like that, we adjust a little according to our needs let’s do something like this okay and one copy and same inside this something like this and this also here we have rounded it There are some corners, we will correct them a bit Maybe it’s our turn now, in this way The first thing to do is to fill color in it This is our object, inside this we We fill it with any color and this There is an object inside it, we can also Let me fill it with a random color, now I have done this I’m going to explain to you why I did that What you need to do is to insert this object inside I need to trim this outside object So I selected both of them along with and I clicked on Trim here so what did he do to this object Look, I delete it like this, so see Now I am here all trimmed What you have to do is fill color inside it I need to do the white and outline remove okay i will do the outline remove from here and now I am going to do this one which The object is outside, I will select it I do it and I want to fill color in it which we’ll use here interact Phil’s and we use the fountain fee from here Let’s do it and buy color on one note Are We are on yellow yellow colour and second note Here we take the purple color I have also taken a purple color from here and this Let us bring the yellow note to this angle And let’s take the purple color at this angle. Let’s go to Okay, in the middle we have a color node. If you need more raid then we have a new one here We created the note by double clicking and Here we take the color red So here we have also taken a red color. okay so look we have some here The color shade has come into being And I fill any color inside it. and then I’ll trim this After trimming the inside shape Delete and make this shape white fill and outline remove okay and one us We need a small circle here, so we have I drew it here and filled it with white. let me outline it, let me remove it, then this See in front of you With the help of this we move forward and learn something it’s new i hope you feel good interacting I would have understood whatever your question was If yes, then it is in the comment section of this video You can ask me or you can You can join our group which is it is ours egramswaraj.gov.in Your Graphic Inside the design whose name is smart Fee tools then grow and understand that So what does our Smart Fee tool do? For that we delete it and our We will blank the page from here. And where do you find the Smart Fill tool? First they understand that you are watching this interactive film If you come inside then look here You get the SmartFi tool What the Smart Fee tool basically does first They understand what is the smart fee tool does whatever you created the objects for Whatever closed areas they have okay over that close area that one creates an object for example I will show you this through a very simple example I’ll explain it to you so I’m here for that I draw a circle on it and from here Suppose we took a star and we we drew a star here Correct and we have filled some color in it Look, I took the green here. We bought the blue one, now what should I do? I I want that here this is what you Give me a different shape, you see me here If we want to fill the color then how will we do it? Because it is a single object And if I change its color, then this The color of the whole will change, so for that we You can use Smart Feel here As soon as you click on the object If you want to do it then look at this tool of yours It will be activated and now you can see it here As soon as you click on it, you will see that what did you do here you got a new object I have made it and given it to you, see, I have made it I can separate this, look here you have one The new object is created and now you can You can fill it with a different color, okay? so basically what it does is whatever you Close, look here, it means close area. Look here, any one is open, you can find it If you do not get the nad open then all such things as you have There are closed areas where there is a new object it can create is allright then This tool helps you understand how to design a logo so that you can understand it better okay so i will delete this and You may have seen the logo With the help of this tool, for that we are here Let’s take a circle and inside it another one Circle small I have copied it here in this manner and now we take this free hand Free hand when using the tool Using the tool I did this here drew a line something like this and this I clicked on the line here and it The center point was me of this circle I brought it to the center and now what did I do? I made another copy of this here okay and again i copied another one some here look we have it here Some shapes have formed and now I am here I go to Smart Fee and select a color I fill it here in one click I will pay here and with one click I will pay here I will do it okay so after doing this much However much we drew these lines I will delete them all, this is what we have done I drew a circle here, okay, so this I’ll just keep it here, I’ll delete it I will not do it okay we have made a circle and I had made it, look it is here, I am making it Let me delete it and now I will fill it with color If I can, we have taken it here Here we have taken the red color and yellow color And here we have taken the green color okay look this is yours here you can give something like this There is something like this we have given it just the way we wanted it So here you can do the same in yellow also We took the thing here, color and we Here in yellow also we have filled the color in the same way We have given the same process here in Green If you do it for green then it is in green too We filled the color here, something like this Methods If we want we can remove all the outlines from so i removed the outline of all diya and this is the inner circle of it We can fill some other color here inside. Let’s take it in this manner and inside this also If we want we can give a gradient here I went here, I went inside this too I did a gradient fill like this alright so look at this we have [music] and we make a copy of a circle Inside this, it is cut in this manner So after drawing the circle we will go here on top of the rectangle tool and here’s a We will draw a rectangle something like this Methods from and now after that it will be useful to us This line of ours, so through this line we are here But let’s draw some lines, suppose we have drawn a few lines here But a shape has been drawn, something like this, and another shape we’ll draw some way like this okay so this is what we’ve drawn the shape on here now after that we will use it Here is the Smart Fee tool that I am going to tell you about: I have told you earlier, so through that we are here But we will make some shapes here, okay look here we drew some shapes and now what are we going to do with all the other things we will delete these or these circles I will delete these lines or delete them We will do it and now we can fill color in it So I filled a red color here. I have filled it with yellow here here i have filled it with green color and here I have mentioned all these three I selected the objects and clicked Weld I have done it and after welding I am here But I have filled it here a blue color and I saw this whole thing I will select it and pay it here
outline remove so look here you have a You can create different logos yes alright so i hope you understand things What does this do after all Smart feed tools go a step further Let’s learn some new options of Corel Draw inside what do we do for him Let’s delete this first and then the next one Our option is the perspective tool What does the Perspective tool do and how does it work first let’s see that Where do we get perspective, after all? So for that you will go to the Object menu. look inside and here you will find it Look at the perspective option here There are three options given, one is add perspective is the second draw and the third is Edited look here now there are deactivated options Because right now we have not placed any object here I have not created it, that is why it is coming like this Let us understand what perspective does let’s see what perspective does a Creates an illusion of distance and depth For example, suppose I take an example here. I take it, we have taken an example here So if I import an image For that I went and I saved an image I have imported it, see this Look, this is an image where there is a board as you can see a sign The board is visible, pay here now what is there for me here please accept me as someone I want to put up a banner, okay I have made a design I have made a banner and that banner is posted here If we have to place it then how will we place it They will understand with the help of this tool what i do for that i am here Let’s say I import another image We have posted an image here, this is an image of children yes I have imported it ok and I found this image of children here If you want to place it then see what will happen right now If I place this, see It will not be placed perfectly for me okay that’s the feeling you should get from the depths You don’t feel that feeling of distance here You will get to see it but what will you do now? select this object object go to menu go to perspective and Here you can click on add perspective As soon as you click here you will You will see that here you will see four notes. You are reading and with the help of these notes you can read here But can you prepare a perspective and a feeling You can create an illusion so that you can feel the depth and you can balance the distance perfectly So this look look at this we have set it up here Here is the banner now see what it looks like that this image is exactly above this banner it has been placed okay so something like this If you want to apply some effects then You can use that perspective here If we want this option then we can click on the image You can also apply it to the object if you want You can apply it on top of that as well as some other Let us understand this through examples also so I’ll delete this and now we Let’s make Vij’s logo so here we have It is very simple, we have a total of four here. I have taken the boxes in this manner and in these I filled all the four boxes with one color. I have taken it and I will remove the outline And I will group it from here what will happen by grouping that all these The boxes will group together just fine and now I go to the Object menu here I went into perspective and I clicked add perspective and it’s ok and now what i did is it looks like this a little bit below and this one a little bit Okay above so look at this Vijay in front of you The logo is ready, it was a very simple logo And very easily you can use the Perspective tool with the help of this we can make people like this yes alright so i hope you understood That would be what a passivating tool does Let us look at one more small example to make things clearer for you Your concept is a little better You should clear your MA world which you Do you use MA World Excel Pa Point If you want to make a logo of MS World then You can also make it with the help of this tool Simply what you need to do is one you can go from here draw a square okay and inside it You fill it with any one color, I will accept it Look, I have filled it in here After applying blue color and blue color filling You need to get a copy of the square here And you have to place it here You can round the corners a little bit something like this and you have to fill it in The color is white and the outline is slight If you want to make it thick then outline it from here I’ll make it a little thicker from here I have taken 20 points and I am colouring it too Same, whatever color you have, I will take that color okay i’ll take it now this is the object I will place your white one below. If I give it to you then I will give it to you back inside me If you want to send it then put it back inside what is the shortcut key shift page down Like you will click here and see your The object should be placed back inside okay and now what do I do Sorry Object menu in Gaya Effects menu I went further and I went over perspective and We clicked on Add Perspective here. I did okay and after that I did this lowered the angle a little bit and I also placed the one a little bit up here did ok and I have posted it here need to thin it out some Okay like this and now I want to type on this W so I typed W on Y it I’ll enlarge it a little bit here. After bolding the W I’m okay and I have filled it here with white color. gave it in some way like this okay you should give it to me Perspective is to give a very light feel If you want then make it very light down here and slightly up here look at this okay don’t do much It is very light and here you will find some If I want to draw lines then I will draw some lines on this I will draw it, okay and you will also get it in The width of this line is a little I want to make it thicker and also add blue color here I will do it and I will tell you something about it here I will create copies, see, it’s okay Look at this, your MS World logo He too was ready and looked a little light I will enlarge it, look at this Look at the logo of your MS Word Look, something has come together like this With the help of the perspective tool, very It is an important tool and much more You can create new ones like this With the help of Prospective Tool, I hope you You must have liked this tool, it will increase your moving on to the next tool and understanding what that means See how our next tool works If you feel that I am taking things too seriously I am explaining quickly so this is my I will tell you all the options above the channel. I am making dedicated videos on all of them are also available, you simply have to go to our above the channel’s playlist and there you will You will see this Corel Draw playlist As soon as you click on it, you will see this There are many videos on Corel Draw here which I did for different topics made on top and separately and quite I have told you every single thing here in detail. the tool is discussed okay so any If you need a particular tool too much If you want to learn in depth then you can learn it These videos of mine also come through Learn more about your main topic Look at the next option, the next one which we People are builders and creators You must be seeing this bulge like this, this is us We also learn how to bring it ok so for that i am simply here I want to type so I typed it here Have done google’s new roman font and I use it I would make it a little bigger here After growing up I’ll be over everyone I want to fill different colors so I used G I have given it a different colour here. Here green colour has been given to the other I have also given yellow color to the O here. I have given this life to my life here I have given red color to the one which is L Purple color has been given here and this is I have given this the blue color again here. okay so look at this we have I removed all the characters from all the text I have given it different colors, now you If you want, you can change the colors you have given to them You could have given it through the break part also what happens in the break part that all these The characters themselves become different And you can fill them with different colors. okay and now if you want then you can apply plastic effect To apply the effect you will have to go to your inside the effects menu and you have to come here you will find texture within texture within texture Here you can get a thing called plastic As soon as you click on the option here Look here, I’ll give you something light You will be able to see the effect here You can increase the depth as per your requirement Whatever depth you want to give is fine or You can give as many smooths as you want If you can also donate here then see this In this way you can do it according to your convenience here The more depth you get, the more smoothness you get You can decide from here what you want to give okay look at this so alright so look at this We have a little look here giving effect to your bulge [music] Presets cannot be applied to the selected object now why does it say that because there is already a Plastic effect has been applied so it looks amazing If he is not letting me apply then what will we do for this we will go here over the effect and apply it here Will give flat effect flat n effect kya whatever our previous effect does locks it so that we can do the next can apply the effect now if I click here I’ll go into the shadow and I’ll be a shadow here If I want to apply then look I am very I can easily apply here I have taken black color from here Shadow I will reduce its feathers The transparency of this is also If I reduce it a little, then see this for you You have a very nice one, see here it is coming from behind as a shadow If you have to prepare something like this in logo so you can do that plastic If we move forward with the help of effects then this is how we were on top of some of our objects How do we work with objects Let’s apply the effect, now we will talk further that’s how we can do it on text What does artistic text do? what are paragraph texts We are above the artistic text What all things can be applied inside a paragraph text such as ours place holder done wap text done Bullet numbering We are talking about all these things Let’s discuss further in this video and understand what he does For that we delete it and Let’s move on to look at your text first First let’s understand how much text there is There are ways in which we work in this So we do it basically in Corel Draw These two methods work best on text The first is our artistic text and Second is both paragraph text what is the difference between right now we guys You will understand this in great detail, see both of them You have the option to work here only on pay There is a single tool available that can be used to You just have to use the tool to You will have to apply in a different way if You need to use artistic text So you can simply click anywhere on the page Give it and you will see that your cursor will appear. And whatever you type, it will be yours. artistic text right there if you If you want to create a paragraph then you can use your mouse to Press left click and you will see a Draw a box and see this. A paragraph will be formed and here Whatever you type will be a paragraph. it will behave like a text whenever we Make the headline of a magazine or a book When we make a heading for the cover, there we People use this artistic text and whatever other pages we have inside where we type the matter and everything we work on this paragraph Inside the text, first of all we Let us learn what is the use of artistic text What work can we do for it So first I delete this and then go to here But we have taken the text tool and here But let’s say we type something it is typed here title and now let’s do this a little bit I would have made it a little bolder too and now if we have some effects on it If you want to apply then we can do it People can easily apply fill color on it. meaning if we feel any color You have to do as much as I have told you to do before I was told that even if it was an interaction, It’s all about that, we are here You can apply from here, simply go On top of your interaction fee and any there should not be any color here that is the interact fee
Affiliate Disclosure: This blog may contain affiliate links, which means I may earn a small commission if you click on the link and make a purchase. This comes at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services that I believe will add value to my readers. Your support helps keep this blog running and allows me to continue providing you with quality content. Thank you for your support!
